100% found this document useful (2 votes)

7K views546 pages

Coll. - Success One HSC Physics 2017 (2017, Pascal Press)

Uploaded by

Sean

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (2 votes)

7K views546 pages

Coll. - Success One HSC Physics 2017 (2017, Pascal Press)

Uploaded by

Sean

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 546

Excel

SUCCESS ONE HSC PHYSICS * Get the Results You Want!

SUCCESS ONE HSC

® *

Get the Results You Want!

l To maximize your marks, you need to practise as many actual past HSC papers as

PHYSICS
you can. This way you gain valuable experience in answering HSC-level questions.

®
l This book features 2001–2003 and 2008–2016 past HSC questions.

*
This book includes:

PHYSICS
l 2001–2003 Past HSC Questions arranged by topic for the core section and
most popular options*
l 2008–2016 Past HSC Papers
l Detailed Answers to the core section and most popular options*. All answers
are written by experienced HSC markers. This ensures that all short-answer and
longer‑answer questions have the high-quality answers you need in order to
maximize your marks. Past HSC Questions & Answers
Plus: 2001–2003 by Topic
l A Topic Index (see inside front cover) for 2008–2016 past HSC papers
l A Mark Maximizer Guide
2008–2016 by Paper
l A Glossary of Key Verbs

* Medical Physics; Astrophysics; From Quanta to Quarks

NEW
ALSO AVAILABLE IN THE Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC SERIES:

& ANSWERS
PAST HSC QUESTIONS
Biology • Chemistry • Mathematics General 2 • Mathematics
Mathematics Extension 1 • Business Studies
2017
Edi tion
Ancient History Biology Business Studies Chemistry Economics Legal Studies

Mathematics Mathematics Modern History PDHPE Physics

General 2
iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

ISBN 978-1-74125-645-1
U S !
Pascal Press B O NA R K R
PO Box 250 Glebe NSW 2037 PASCAL PRESS • SCIENCE TEACHERS’ ASSOCIATION OF NSW M MIZE
A XI DE
SCIENCE TEACHERS’ (02) 8585 4044
M GUI
ASSOCIATION OF NSW www.pascalpress.com.au 9 781741 256451

9781741256451 HSC Physics CVR-2017.indd All Pages 15/12/2016 4:15 PM

TOPIC INDEX OF PAST HSC CORE QUESTIONS
2008–2016

PHYSICS SKILLS (9.1)

HSC Questions
2008 16*, 17(a)*, 27(a)*(b)*
2009 17*, 24
2011 21
2012 21*, 28*
2013 4*, 14*, 21(b), 22, 23(a)*, 27(a)*, 28*, 31*
2014 3*, 27(c), 30(b)
2015 1*, 3*, 4*, 6*, 14*, 21*, 23*, 28*
2016 3*, 4*, 7*, 8*, 12*, 16*, 20*, 22*, 23*, 25*, 27*

SPACE (9.2)
HSC Questions
2008 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 16*, 17(a)*, 17(b)(c), 18, 19
2009 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 16, 17*, 18
2010 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 12*, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 32
2011 1, 2, 8, 9, 15, 16, 23, 24
2012 2, 4, 9, 11, 12, 13, 18, 21*, 23, 27, 28*, 30*
2013 2, 4*, 6, 8, 9, 18, 19, 21(a), 23(a)*, 23(b), 25(b), 29(a), 30(a), 30(b)
2014 1, 3*, 6, 15, 19, 20, 22, 27(a), 27(b), 28*, 30(a)
2015 4*, 6*, 11, 14*, 16, 19, 20, 21*, 24*, 26, 29*, 30
2016 6, 10, 14, 17, 18, 19, 21, 25, 28, 29*, 30*

MOTORS AND GENERATORS (9.3)

HSC Questions
2008 6, 7, 8, 9, 21*, 22, 25, 26, 27(c)(d)
2009 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 20, 21, 23, 26
2010 8, 9, 10, 11, 15*, 20, 26, 28
2011 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 14, 18, 20, 25, 26, 27
2012 1, 7, 8, 10, 14, 16, 17, 19, 22, 26, 29
2013 1, 3, 7, 10, 13, 15, 17, 25(a), 27(a)*, 27(b), 29(b)
2014 2, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 23, 24, 25, 31
2015 1*, 7, 9, 12, 15, 18, 22, 25, 28*
2016 1, 2, 7*, 8*, 9, 16*, 20*, 22*, 26, 29*, 30*

FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION (9.4)

HSC Questions
2008 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, 21*, 23, 24
2009 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 19, 22, 25, 27
2010 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 30, 31
2011 3, 7, 13, 17, 19, 22, 28, 29, 30
2012 3, 5, 6, 15, 20, 24, 25, 30*
2013 5, 11, 12, 14*, 16, 20, 24, 26(a), 26(b), 28*, 31*
2014 4, 9, 11, 16, 17, 18, 21, 26, 28*, 29
2015 2, 3*, 5, 8, 10, 13, 17, 23*, 24*, 27, 29*
2016 3*, 4*, 5, 11, 12*, 13, 15, 23*, 24, 27*, 29*

*These questions cover material from more than one topic.

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017_IC.indd 2 22/12/2016 2:17 PM

SUCCESS ONE HSC
®

PHYSICS
Past HSC Questions & Answers
2001–2003 by Topic
2008–2016 by Paper

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 1 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 2 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

Foreword
Congratulations on choosing the Physics course for your HSC. In undertaking this course you
have the opportunity to gain valuable knowledge, understanding and skills, and to extend
yourself to meet new challenges.
Excel Success One HSC Physics is a valuable learning tool that has been developed to assist
students with their HSC preparation, and this edition has been kept up to date with the inclusion
of the 2016 HSC Examination paper with sample answers.
On behalf of the Science Teachers’ Association of NSW, we hope that your year will be
enjoyable and productive, and the results a just reward for your efforts.
STANSW thanks those members who continue to be involved in the production of this book.
Maree Woods
STANSW President
December 2016

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS iii

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 3 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

HSC QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

The Mark Maximizer Guide was prepared by Diane Alford.

HSC EXAMINATION PAPERS

The HSC Examination papers contained in this publication have been reproduced under
licence from the Board of Studies, Teaching and Educational Standards NSW (BOSTES NSW)
in whom copyright is vested.
BOSTES NSW takes no responsibility for errors in the reproduction of the HSC Examination
papers contained in this publication.
BOSTES NSW was the first publisher of the questions from the 2001–2003 HSC Examination
papers and the 2008–2016 HSC Examination papers in the years 2001–2003 and 2008–2016.
HSC Examination papers in Physics 2001–2003 and 2008–2016 © Board of Studies, Teaching
and Educational Standards NSW for and on behalf of the Crown in right of the state of
New South Wales 2001–2003 and 2008–2016.

SAMPLE ANSWERS
The sample answers to HSC questions contained in this publication are examples of answers
which the authors believe would score full marks. However, they are not endorsed by
BOSTES NSW.
The sample answers in the 2001–2012 HSC Examination papers were written by
Peter Roberson, George Pinniger and Stephen Fogwill.
The sample answers in the 2013–2016 HSC Examination papers were written by
George Pinniger and Stephen Fogwill.

SUBJECT CONSULTANT
Peter Roberson was subject consultant from 2001–2012.
George Pinniger was subject consultant from 2013–2016.

COMMENTS
The Science Teachers’ Association of NSW and Pascal Press welcome constructive comments
on the questions and answers for future editions of this book.

iv SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 4 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Contents
Foreword..........................................................iii HSC Examination Papers
(2008–2016)
Mark Maximizer Guide................................. vi
Chapter 7 2008 HSC Examination
Past HSC Questions (2001–2003) Paper Questions......................................... 108
by Topic
Sample Answers........................................ 134
Core Topics
Chapter 8 2009 HSC Examination
Chapter 1 Space................................................ 1 Paper Questions......................................... 151
Multiple-choice Questions.......................... 1 Sample Answers........................................ 179
Free-response Questions.............................. 7 Chapter 9 2010 HSC Examination
Worked Answers Paper Questions......................................... 195
Multiple-choice Questions.................. 14 Sample Answers........................................ 224
Free-response Questions...................... 16
Chapter 10 2011 HSC Examination
Chapter 2 Motors and Generators...... 21 Paper Questions......................................... 242
Multiple-choice Questions........................ 21 Sample Answers........................................ 267
Free-response Questions............................ 32 Chapter 11 2012 HSC Examination
Worked Answers Paper Questions......................................... 284
Multiple-choice Questions.................. 37 Sample Answers.........................................311
Free-response Questions...................... 39
Chapter 12 2013 HSC Examination
Chapter 3 From Ideas to Paper Questions......................................... 328
Implementation................................. 44 Sample Answers........................................ 358
Multiple-choice Questions........................ 44
Chapter 13 2014 HSC Examination
Free-response Questions............................ 53 Paper Questions......................................... 381
Worked Answers Sample Answers.........................................411
Multiple-choice Questions.................. 58
Free-response Questions...................... 60 Chapter 14 2015 HSC Examination
Paper Questions......................................... 433
Option Topics Sample Answers........................................ 464

Chapter 4 Medical Physics................. 67 Chapter 15 2016 HSC Examination

Past HSC Questions.................................... 67 Paper Questions......................................... 481
Worked Answers.......................................... 72 Sample Answers........................................ 507
Acknowledgements................................. 526
Chapter 5 Astrophysics...................... 77
Past HSC Questions............................. 77 Appendix Data Sheet............................ 527
Worked Answers.................................. 84 Formulae Sheet ................... 528
Chapter 6 From Quanta to Quarks...... 92 Periodic Table...................... 530
Past HSC Questions.................................... 92
Worked Answers.......................................... 97

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS v

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 5 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

Mark Maximizer Guide

This Mark Maximizer Guide will arm you with strategies and tips so that you can maximize
your marks by making every minute of your HSC Examination count, and it has some great
tips for your exam preparation too. Read it. Use it.

The structure of the HSC Examination paper

All Science exams consist of two sections. The following table summarises the structure,
which changed in 2010.

Section Part Compulsory/ Marks Question type Answers Recommended

Optional time
I A All questions Each question Objective-response Fill in the response About 35 min
are is worth one – select one oval completely on
compulsory. mark – a total alternative from A, the answer sheet.
of 20. B, C or D.

I B All questions 55 Short-answer questions Answer the About 1 hour

are with different mark questions in the 40 min
compulsory. values, each indicated spaces provided in
on the question: some the exam paper.
questions may be in
parts; some may require
a more integrated
approach.

II Attempt only 25 The question is divided Answer the About

one question. into parts, with each part questions
45 min
having the mark clearly
in a writing booklet.
indicated.
Inform- The paper contains general instructions on the front cover but in addition, Physics provides a Data Sheet,
ation Periodic Table and Formulae Sheets.

Time allocation
The examination begins with five minutes reading time. You will not be able to write in this
time. Rather than starting to read the objective-response questions at the beginning, you could:
• spend this time reading some of the short-answer questions in Part B and Section II,
or
• select some of the easy questions to attempt earlier in the exam after completing the
objective-response questions, to build your confidence for the more difficult questions later.

Time management
A planned approach to time management in the exam is important. There are several
strategies you could use:
• Prepare an exam timetable.
The table above shows the suggested times for each section as recommended by BOSTES
NSW. If you choose to proceed through the exam in an orderly sequence of sections or

vi SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 6 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

parts, you can work out an exam timetable before the exam. You will then know when you
should be changing sections and check that you are on schedule. Try to be a bit ahead of
schedule so that you have time to check answers, make corrections, or return to more
difficult questions.
• Calculate time allocated per mark.
If you do not choose to work through the exam in a fixed sequence, you may wish to
calculate time allocations for questions based on the 100 marks and 180 minutes in which
to record answers. Each mark should take 1 minute 48 seconds to earn. The following
table gives calculations of approximately how long you should spend on questions of a
particular mark value.

Question value Suggested time

(marks)
1 1 min 45 s
2 3 min 30 s
3 5 min 20 s
4 7 min 00 s
5 9 min 00 s
6 10 min 45 s
7 12 min 45 s
8 14 min 30 s
9 16 min 00 s
10 18 min 00 s

• Don’t panic!
Worrying about time too much will only add to your stress and waste time. There is no
need to time yourself for each question, and particularly not for the low-value questions.
However, if you panic or lose track of time, or waste too much time on a question of
relatively small mark value, you may be severely disadvantaged.

Analysing the questions

Questions in the HSC are designed to enable students to show their achievement of a range of
outcomes over a range of levels. They are not trying to trick you, and the question will state
clearly all that is required of you. If marks are to be awarded for giving an answer in the
correct units, then the question will clearly state that you need to give the answer in the
correct units.
• Highlight key terms.
Highlight or underline the key terms or things you have to do (the verbs) and the key ideas
or concepts that make up the question — a useful strategy.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS vii

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 7 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

• Learn the lingo.

The glossary of terms that are often used in questions will help you analyse what is
required of the question (see the Glossary of key words on page ix).

• Remember that questions are planned to vary in their level of difficulty.

Don’t panic or waste excessive time on a question that you find particularly difficult. The
following table may give you some ideas on how to find the easier questions that you can
attempt first. Then, when you have finished everything that you can do, you can move on
to spend time with the very difficult questions.

Question type Key words that indicate level of difficulty

Difficult or complex questions often assess, construct, critically analyse, critically
demanding high levels of skills to evaluate, evaluate, justify, propose, recommend
use the facts
Questions of medium level of account for, analyse, apply, assess, calculate,
difficulty requiring some thinking classify, compare, contrast, deduce, demonstrate,
and using the facts discuss, examine, explain, estimate, extract,
extrapolate, how …, interpret, investigate, predict
or recommend, sketch, why …
Simple or direct questions of low account, clarify, define, describe, identify, outline,
level of difficulty based on recall, recount or summarise, state, what …,
remembering and communicating which …
the facts

Also, there may be variation in difficulty within the topics you have studied. A relatively
easy remembering-type question may become a little more difficult if it is about a
particularly difficult idea.
• Look at question structure and mark value.
The structure of the question may also contribute to differences in levels of difficulty. The
mark value for the question may give you some clues. For example, if the question is only
two lines long but is worth six marks, that is a clue that it may require extra care to ensure
all aspects of the question have been covered.
Many students find the questions that are divided into subsections easier to attempt. They
feel that each small portion of the question can be ‘bitten off’ one at a time. Often the
answer to one subsection helps to provide some ideas to help with the other subsections.
The more difficult integrated questions may seem a bit more difficult to swallow, and when
you do, they may give you indigestion. Practising these questions using examples from this
book will really help you develop your skills and help avoid the need for antacid tablets!

viii SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 8 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

• Answer all parts.

A common error is that students often only answer one part of a two-part question. This is
very easy to do if the parts are not clearly numbered but are written as sentences following
each other. It is worth making a note on the paper of any multiple-part questions and make
sure you return to the question to finish all sections.

Glossary of key words

For each subject you should prepare summaries and a glossary of the key definitions. You
cannot answer questions if you are unfamiliar with the content of the subject. You also need to
be familiar with the language of exam questions. This involves understanding the verbs that
are the keywords that tell you what you have to do to earn the marks. Below is a table of the
key verbs that may be contained in questions and the definitions of those words.

Key word Definition

Account for State reasons for; report on
(Give an) account of Narrate a series of events or transactions
Analyse Identify components and the relationship among them; draw out
and relate implications
Apply Use, utilise, employ to a particular situation
Appreciate Make a judgment about the value of
Assess Make a judgment of value, quality, outcomes, results or size
Calculate Ascertain/determine from given facts, figures or information
Clarify Make clear or plain
Classify Arrange or include in classes/categories
Compare Show how things are similar or different
Construct Make; build; put together items or arguments
Contrast Show how things are different or opposite
Critically Add a degree or level of accuracy, depth, knowledge and
(analyse/evaluate) understanding, logic, questioning, reflection and quality to
Deduce Draw conclusions
Define State meaning and identify essential qualities
Demonstrate Show by example
Describe Provide characteristics and features
Discuss Identify issues and provide points for and/or against
Distinguish Recognise or note/indicate as being distinct or different from;
to note differences between
Evaluate Make a judgment based on criteria; determine the value of
Examine Inquire into
continued

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS ix

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 9 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

Key word Definition

Explain Relate cause and effect; make the relationships between things evident;
provide why and/or how
Extract Choose relevant and/or appropriate details
Interpret Draw meaning from
Extrapolate Infer from what is known
Identify Recognise and name
Investigate Plan, inquire into and draw conclusions about
Justify Support an argument or conclusion
Outline Sketch in general terms; indicate the main features of
Predict Suggest what may happen based on available information
Propose Put forward (for example a point of view, idea, argument, suggestion)
for consideration or action
Recall Present remembered ideas, facts or experiences
Recommend Provide reasons in favour
Recount Retell a series of events
Summarise Express concisely the relevant details
Synthesise Putting together various elements to make a whole

From Senior Science Support Document © Board of Studies, Teaching and Educational Standards NSW 1999

Answering the question

Objective-response questions
Many people find objective-response questions relatively easy. Recording the answer is
certainly easy, but they can be deceptive in their level of difficulty. Some make up for the time
saved recording the answer by requiring time to think about the answer. Some of the
distracters (i.e. the wrong answer options) may be based on common mistakes or
misconceptions and may lead you away from the correct answer. In one 2000 HSC Science
exam only 15% of students got one particular objective-response question correct, showing
how effective the distracters can be.
Careful reading and interpretation of questions is critical. Sometimes you may be left with
two similar answers and you have to dig into your deeper understanding to work out the
implications of the subtle difference. The more practice you get on objective-response
questions, the more skilful you will become. In this book we have provided explanations for
making the correct choices; you do not have to do this in the exam.

Short-answer questions
• Core modules
The short-answer questions from Part B relate to the three core HSC modules. After you
have analysed the question, link it to the specific module and the concepts of that module.
If the question is in parts, look at the parts and see if they give you clues about the other
sections of the question. If the question gives you the freedom to select the format of your

x SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 10 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

answer, choose a format that you feel most comfortable with. For example, you may prefer
to express some ideas in a table, flowchart or diagram, or in writing. This may be especially
important in those questions with a high mark value that require you to integrate ideas.
Use the mark value and space provided to give you a rough guide to the number of points
in the answer and the length of the answer. If it is worth six marks, you may need to
include at least six key points, or one point with a set of arguments, supportive statements,
reasons or counter-arguments.
• Options
Short-answer questions from Section II all relate to the specific option you have chosen.
For the integrated questions, it may be worth taking a minute to do a mental revision
about the major ideas of that option and checking which sections relate to the particular
question. Again, if you are given the opportunity, choose an answer format that best
expresses the key ideas. Answers should be as succinct as possible.
• Read through your answers.
It is important to read through your answers to short-answer questions to check that you
have clearly communicated your understanding. Check that any assumptions you have made
have been stated and that your thinking is clear. If you are running out of time it is important
to attempt questions in a very concise manner; even if you remain uncertain as to what the
question is about, think back to the option and try to make some links to key ideas.
• Attempt all questions.
It is essential you attempt all questions. You do not lose marks for guessing or recording
wrong answers. Remember, however, if you ramble on with a lengthy, confused or
contradictory answer you may make a satisfactory answer meaningless and therefore
worth no marks. Clear and concise answers are always preferable. If you are running out
of time, writing key points, tables or diagrams may help communicate an answer or earn
partial marks.
Avoid persevering with one question to make it perfect if it means you leave out several
others. The mark value of questions can serve as a guide for prioritising your attempts at
questions when running out of time. You will do yourself a great disservice if you do not
attempt questions worth six or more marks.
• Show your working.
In Physics, it is essential that you show the relevant working to questions that involve
calculations.

Common mistakes
Examiners provide reports after each HSC Exam that indicate areas of strengths and weaknesses
in student responses. From these common mistakes, it is clear that students generally can
benefit by:
• more precise and scientific use of terminology, especially that specified in the syllabus;
• more precision with graphs and labelling of diagrams;
• avoiding answers that are too long or detailed or that use ambiguous terms;

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS xi

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 11 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MARK MAXIMIZER GUIDE

• correct interpretation of questions, eg. listing instead of describing, or giving a description

not an explanation;
• answering in specific terms, not generalities;
• ensuring all parts of multi-part questions are attempted;
• being able to clearly describe procedures, apparatus, etc. for mandatory practical activities
as a first-hand experience.

Golden rules
Preparing for the exam
• Obviously the exam will reward those students who have a thorough knowledge of the
whole course. Do all assignments and assessment tasks to the best of your ability and use
them in your revision.
• Get as much practice at completing and getting feedback on exam-type questions as you
possibly can. This book is perfect for this!
• Make certain you complete, know and revise the mandatory practicals from the syllabus
so that you can describe the procedure or evaluate its methods.
• Revise a question about an open-ended investigation you have done and be prepared to
use it as an answer.
• Make sure you have learnt a few examples that show something about the history, nature
and practice, applications and uses, and the implications of science as it relates to your
specific subject.

In the exam
• Don’t give up! If you find it difficult, so will most other students. Attempt all questions
with concise, clear answers.
• Have a plan that ensures you manage time well. If the option is your particular strength,
you may start with it, but do not spend more than 45 minutes on it. Alternatively, start
with the objective-response questions because the correct answer must be there, and it can
help you get over your nerves.
• Know yourself and work to your strengths. If you want to experiment with different
strategies for tackling the exam, do that in the trial exam and reflect on how the plan
worked.
• At the end re-read the questions and the answers you have written. Check that you have
really communicated what you intended to write.
• Don’t panic! It can lead you to make some silly decisions. There will be some difficult
questions in the exam but there will also be some easy ones.
• Even if the option you have studied looks difficult, and another one appears to have some
‘easy’ questions, you are far better off answering the question from the option you have
studied in class than one you have not studied.
Finally, GOOD LUCK!

xii SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 12 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

SPACE • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 1
Core Topic
Space
Multiple-choice Questions

Past HSC Questions

1 A person has a mass of 70.0 kg. What is the weight of the person at the Earth’s surface?
(A) 70.0 kg
(B) 70.0 N
(C) 686 kg
(D) 686 N

2 The graph5 shows

Thethegraph
forces experienced
shows by an
the forces astronaut during
experienced a rocket launch
by an astronaut duringinto a
a rocket launch into a
stable orbit. stable orbit.
Forces on astronaut

S T U V W
Time

In which time interval was the acceleration of the rocket the greatest?
In which time interval was the acceleration of the rocket the greatest?
(A)
S–T (A) S –T

(B)
T–U (B) T –U

(D)
V–W (D) V –W

6 The signal from a microwave transmitter can be thought of as a beam of photons.
The photons from a particular transmitter have a wavelength of 3.5 × 10–2 m.
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 1

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 What is the

Excel approximate
Success energy of each photon?
One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 1

(A) 7.73 × 10–44 J 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
12 Which of the following statements best describes the reason why some materials become
CHAPTER 1 • SPACE
superconducting at very low temperatures?
7 An astronaut is standing on Mars. The astronaut throws an object of mass 0.30 kg
(A) The ions in the superconductor form a regular crystal lattice. There are long
vertically
3 An astronautupward at an initial
is standing speedastronaut
of 9.0 m s–1. Itan reaches ofamass
maximum
0.30 kg height of
channels through ontheMars.
latticeThe
along whichthrows
the objectcan
electrons pass without vertically
colliding
11 metres.
upward at an –1. It reaches a maximum height of 11 metres.
with theinitial speed of 9.0 m s
lattice.
(B) Vibrations
What of theofcrystal
is the magnitude lattice are of
the acceleration sothe
small that they do not interfere with the
object?
motion of the electrons.
(A) 1.4 m s–2
(C) Electrons in a superconductor have very low energy. Their energy is so low that
s–2 transfer energy to the crystal lattice in a collision.
theymcannot
(B) 3.7
(D) 9.0
(C) m s–2 ‘pair up’. These electron pairs pass through the crystal lattice of the
Electrons
superconductor without losing energy in collisions with the lattice.
(D) 9.8 m s–2

13 A rocket
rocket car
carmoves
moveson onaastraight
straight horizontaltrack.
track. Half of the initial mass of the rocket
8 4 A light rod has a coil of insulatedhorizontal
copper wire fixedHalf
at of
onetheendinitial
and mass of the
is pivoted atrocket car
the other
car is propellant.
is propellant. During the run, propellant is consumed at a constant rate and ejectedatata
end. The resultDuring the run, propellant
is a pendulum is consumed
which is free at a and
to swing back constant
forth.rate and ejected
A magnet is placed
a constantnozzle
constant nozzle velocity.
underneath this velocity.
pendulum. The arrangement is shown in the diagram.
Which of the following best describes the force propelling the rocket car, and the
magnitude of the accelerationPivot
of the rocket car while the propellant is being ejected?

Force Acceleration
Rod
(A) constant constant
(B) increasing constant
(C) constant increasing
Coil
(D) increasing increasing

15
5 A student releases
releases aa ball
ball from
fromeye
eyelevel.
level. Theball
Magnet
The ballbounces
bouncesseveral
severaltimes.
times.

Which velocity vs time graph best represents the ball’s motion?

The pendulum is pulled back and then allowed to swing. Which of the following would
cause
(A) the pendulum to come to rest most quickly?

(A) Replacing the magnet with a stronger one

Velocity
Velocity

Time
(B) Shortening the pendulum
(C) Replacing the rod with a heavier one
(D) Connecting the ends of the coil by a piece of copper wire

(B)
Velocity
Velocity

Time

–8–

–6–
(C)
2 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Velocity

Time
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 2 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
(B)

Velocity
Velocity
Time
Time

SPACE • QUESTIONS

Velocity
Velocity
Time
Time

(D)
(D)
Velocity
Velocity

Time
Time

1 The diagram shows the trajectory of a golf ball.

6
1 The
The diagram
diagram shows
shows the
the trajectory
trajectory of
of aa golf
golfball.
ball.

P Q
P Q

Which set of arrows shows the direction of the acceleration of the ball at points P and Q
Which set of arrows shows the direction of the acceleration of the ball at points P and Q
respectively?
respectively?
At P At Q –– 10
10 ––
(A) At P At Q
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
(C)
(D)
(D)

2 A spaceship is travelling at a very high speed. What effects would be noted by a

2 7 stationary
A spaceship
spaceship isistravelling
travelling
observer? at aatvery
a very
highhigh speed.
speed. What What
effectseffects
would would
be notedbebynoted
a by a
stationary observer?
(A) Time runs slower on the spaceship and it contracts in length.
(A) Time runs slower on the spaceship and it contracts in length.
(B) Time runs faster on the spaceship and it contracts in length.
(B) Time runs faster on the spaceship and it contracts in length.
(C) Time runs slower on the spaceship and it increases in length.
(C) Time runs slower on the spaceship and it increases in length.
(D) Time runs faster on the spaceship and it increases in length.
(D) Time runs faster on the spaceship and it increases in length.

3 The table shows the value of the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Earth and
3 The table
on the shows
surface of the value of the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Earth and
Mercury.
on the surface of Mercury.
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 3
Acceleration due to gravity
–2 to gravity
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSCAcceleration
Physics (m sdue)
(m s–2 )
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 3 Earth 9.8 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
Earth 9.8
(A) Time runs slower on the spaceship and it contracts in length.
(B) Time runs faster on the spaceship and it contracts in length.
(C) Time runs slower on the spaceship and it increases in length.
C H A P T(D)
E R 1 Time
• S P Aruns
CE faster on the spaceship and it increases in length.

43 The diagram
The table shows
table shows
shows four
valuepositions
thevalue of a car on due
a rollergravity
coasteron
ride. surface of Earth and
8 The the ofofthe
theacceleration
accelerationdue totogravity on thethe
surface of Earth and on
on the surface of Mercury.
the surface of Mercury.
Direction
of travel Acceleration due to Sgravity
(m s–2 )
Earth
P R9.8
Mercury 3.8

Q
A person has a weight of 550 N on the surface of Earth.

At which
What point
would be during this ride
the person’s would
weight onthe
theoccupant
surface ofexperience
Mercury? maximum ‘g force’?

(A) P 56.1 N
(B) Q213 N
(C) R550 N
(D) 1420
S N

–3–
5 9 The table contains information
information related
related to
to two
twoplanets
planetsorbiting
orbitingaadistant
distantstar.
star.

Planets Mass Orbital Radius of Length of Orbital

(kg) radius (m) planet (m) day (s) period (s)

Alif 1.21 × 1025 4.00 × 1011 8.0 × 106 9.5 × 104 8.75 × 107

Ba 1.50 × 1024 8.00 × 1011 4.0 × 106 4.7 × 104 ____

The orbital period of the planet Ba can be determined by using data selected from this
table.

What is the orbital period of the planet Ba?

(A) 3.10 × 107 s

(B) 5.51 × 107 s
(C) 1.39 × 108 s
(D) 2.47 × 108 s

–4–
4 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 4 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(A) 3.10 × 10 s
(B) 5.51 × 107 s
(C) 1.39 × 108 s
(D) 2.47 × 108 s SPACE • QUESTIONS

1
35
10 The weight of an astronaut on the Moon is --1- of her weight on Earth.
1 The weight of an astronaut on the Moon is 6– of her weight on Earth.
6
What is the acceleration due to gravity on the Moon?
What is the acceleration due to gravity on the Moon?
6
(A) ⎛ 6 ⎞ m s −−22
(A) ⎝ 9.8 ⎠ m s
 9.8 
9.8
(B) ⎛ 9.8 ⎞ m s −−22
(B) ⎝ 6 ⎠ ms
 6 
(C) 9.8 m s −−22
(C) 9.8 m s
(D) (9.8 × 6) m s −−22
(D) (9.8 × 6) m s

11
2 A
A satellite
satellite moves
moves in
in uniform
uniform circular
circularmotion
motionaround
aroundEarth.
Earth.
The following table shows the symbols used in the diagrams below.
These diagrams are NOT drawn to scale.
Key
F net force on satellite
v velocity of satellite

Which diagram shows the direction of F and v at the position indicated?

(A) Satellite (B) Satellite F

12 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

F v v

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI

Earth Earth

(C) Satellite (D) Satellite

F
v v
F

Earth Earth

–3– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 5

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 5 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

3
12 For a satellite moving in uniform circular motion around Earth, the centripetal force is
provided by the gravitational force.
force.

The mass of Earth is ME .

The mass of the satellite is MS .
The distance of the satellite from the centre of Earth is d.

Which of the following equations should be used to calculate the speed of this satellite?

GME
(A) v=
d

GME
(B) v=
d

GME
(C) v= 2
d

GME MS
(D) v=
d

4
13 travel around
Two planets, X and Y, travel around aa star
star in
inthe
thesame
samedirection,
direction,inincircular
circularorbits.
orbits.

Planet X completes one revolution about the star in time T. The radii of the orbits are in
the ratio 1 : 4.

Y
4r

r
X

How many revolutions does planet Y make about the star in the same time T?

(A) –18 revolution

(B) –12 revolution
(C) 2 revolutions
(D) 8 revolutions

–4–
6 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 6 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Physics Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 60 marks Student Number

SPACE • QUESTIONS
Attempt Questions 16–26
Allow about 1 hour and 45 minutes for this part

Answer the questionsQuestions

Free-response in the spaces provided.
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Past HSC Questions

Marks
Question
Question 116(4(4marks)
marks) Marks

Muons are very short-lived particles that are created when energetic protons collide
with each other. A beam of muons can be produced by very-high-energy particle
accelerators.

The high-speed muons produced for an experiment by the Fermilab accelerator are
measured to have a lifetime of 5.0 microseconds. When these muons are brought to
rest, their lifetime is measured to be 2.2 microseconds.

(a) Name the effect demonstrated by these observations of the lifetimes of the 1
(a) muons.the effect demonstrated by these observations of the lifetimes of the
Name 1
muons. (1 line)*
...............................................................................................................................
(b) Calculate the velocity of the muons as they leave the accelerator. (10 lines) 3
Marks
(b) Calculate
Question 17 (6 the marks)velocity of the muons as they leave the accelerator. 3
Question 2 (6 marks)
...............................................................................................................................
A rocket was launched vertically to probe the upper atmosphere. The vertical velocity
of the ...............................................................................................................................
rocket as a function of time is shown in the graph.

...............................................................................................................................
5.0
...............................................................................................................................
4.0
...............................................................................................................................
Velocity (km s–1)

...............................................................................................................................
3.0
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
2.0
...............................................................................................................................
1.0
...............................................................................................................................

0
0 40 80 120 160 200 240
434 – 13
Time after –
lift-off (s)

(a)
(a) Using either
either words
wordsororcalculations,
calculations,compare
comparethethe acceleration of the
acceleration rocket
of the at at
rocket 2
t = 2020 ss with
t  with its = 100
its acceleration at t  100 s.s. (4 lines)
...............................................................................................................................
(b) Account for the shape of the graph over the range of time shown. (8 lines) 4
*Shows ...............................................................................................................................
number of lines available in HSC answer booklet for this question.

...............................................................................................................................
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 7
...............................................................................................................................
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 7 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(b) Account for the shape of the graph over the range of time shown. 4
Physics Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number
CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

Marks
Question 318(6(6marks)
marks) Marks

A 30 kg object, A, was fired from a cannon in projectile motion. When the projectile
was at its maximum height of 25 m, its speed was 20 m s –1.

An identical object, B, was attached to a mechanical arm and moved at a constant

speed of 20 m s–1 in a vertical half-circle. The length of the arm was 25 m.
A B
20 m s –1 20 m s –1

25 m 25 m
Ground Ground
Pivot
Ignore air resistance.

(a) Calculate the force acting on object A at its maximum height. 1

(a) Calculate the force acting on object A at its maximum height. (3 lines) 1
...............................................................................................................................
(b) Calculate the time it would take object A to reach the ground from its position 2
...............................................................................................................................
of maximum height. (4 lines)
...............................................................................................................................
(c) Describe and compare the vertical forces acting on objects A and B at their 3
(b) maximum
Calculate the time (6
heights. it would
lines) take object A to reach the ground from its position 2
of maximum height.
...............................................................................................................................
Question 4 (4 marks)
...............................................................................................................................
How does Einstein’s Theory of Special Relativity explain the result of the 4
Marks
...............................................................................................................................
Michelson–Morley experiment? (10 lines)
Question 19 (4 marks)
...............................................................................................................................
In one of Einstein’s famous thought experiments, a passenger travels on a train that
(c) Describe Marks3
passes through
Question aand
5 (4 marks) compare
station at 60% theofvertical
the speed forces acting
of light. on objects
According to theA and B at their
passenger, the
Question 19 (4 marks)
lengthmaximum
of the train heights.
carriage is 22 m from front to rear.
In one...............................................................................................................................
of Einstein’s famous thought experiments, a passenger travels on a train that
(a) A light in the train carriage is switched on. Compare the velocity of the light 1
passes...............................................................................................................................
through a station at 60% of the speed of light. According to the passenger, the
beam as seen by the passenger on the train and a rail worker standing on the
length of the train carriage is 22 m from front to rear.
station platform.
...............................................................................................................................
(a) A light in the train carriage is switched on. Compare the velocity of the light
............................................................................................................................... 1
beam as seen by the passenger on the train and a rail worker standing on the
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
station platform.
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
435 (b) Calculate the length of the carriage as –observed 15 – by the rail worker on the station 3
...............................................................................................................................
platform.

...............................................................................................................................
(b) Calculate the length of the carriage as observed by the rail worker on the station 3
...............................................................................................................................
platform.
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

8
...............................................................................................................................
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

© Pascal Press...............................................................................................................................
ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

...............................................................................................................................
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 8 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
SPACE • QUESTIONS

Marks
Question 6 (3 marks) Marks
Question 20 (3 marks)

A student is investigating inertial and non-inertial frames of reference. The student

carries out a series of activities on a boat floating on a large, calm lake. The boat
remained level during these activities.

Each activity and the student’s observed results are recorded in the table.

Activity Observation
Dropped a ball from a set height Ball fell vertically with increasing
velocity
Rolled a ball from one side of the Ball rolled across the floor with a
boat to the other constant velocity
Rolled a ball from the back of the Ball rolled across the floor with a
boat towards the front of the boat constant velocity

Justify the student’s conclusion that: ‘The boat can be regarded as an inertial frame of
reference’.
Justify the student’s conclusion that: ‘The boat can be regarded as an inertial frame 3
of reference’. (6 lines)
.........................................................................................................................................
Marks
.........................................................................................................................................
Question 721(4(4marks)
marks)
.........................................................................................................................................
In his science fiction novel From the Earth to the Moon, Jules Verne describes how to
.........................................................................................................................................
launch a capsule from a cannon to land on the moon. To reach the moon, the capsule
must leave the cannon with a speed of 1.06 × 104 m s−1. The cannon has a length of
.........................................................................................................................................
215 m, over which the capsule can be assumed to accelerate constantly.
.........................................................................................................................................
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the acceleration required to achieve this speed using 2
this cannon.
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the acceleration required to achieve this speed using 2
this cannon. (3 lines)
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
(b) Referring to your answer in part (a), explain why Jules Verne’s method is 2
unsuitable for sending a living person to the moon. (4 lines)
...............................................................................................................................

(b) Referring to your answer in part (a), explain why Jules Verne’s method is 2
unsuitable for sending a living person to the moon.

...............................................................................................................................

– 19 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 9

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 9 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

Marks
Question 8*
Question 16 (6
(6 marks)
marks) Marks

A student performed a first-hand investigation to examine projectile motion.

A ball resting on a horizontal table was given an initial push at X, resulting in the ball
following the path XYZ as shown.

Motion X Y
sensor NOT TO
SCALE

Range

A data logger used the motion sensor to measure the horizontal distance to the ball.
When the ball was at position Y, a distance of 1.50 m from the motion sensor, it left
the edge of the table.

In the first trial, the range was 0.60 m. The graph below was obtained from the data
logger.

2.0

1.5
Distance (m)

1.0
Linear fit: y = mx + b
m (slope): 1.85
0.5 b (y-intercept): 0.512
Correlation: 1.00

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Time (s)

Question
Question 8 continues
16 continues on page 15
*This is also a Physics Skills (9.1) question.
– 14 –
10 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 10 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Marks
Question 16 (continued)
SPACE • QUESTIONS
(a) For this trial, determine the horizontal speed of the ball as it left the edge of 1
the table.
Question 8 (continued) Marks
...............................................................................................................................
(a) For this trial, determine the horizontal speed of the ball as it left the edge of the
............................................................................................................................... 1
table. (2 lines)

(b) The experiment was repeated with the ball leaving the table at different speeds. 3
Graph the relationship between the range and the horizontal speed at Y. Identify
on your graph the results from the first trial.

(c) The apparatus described in this first-hand investigation was used to carry out an 2
identical experiment on another planet where the acceleration due to gravity is
less than that on Earth.

The horizontal speed of the ball as it left the table on the planet was the same as
in part (a). Compare the range of the ball on the planet to that on Earth. Explain
The horizontal speed of the ball as it left the table on the planet was the same as
your answer.
in part (a). Compare the range of the ball on the planet to that on Earth. Explain
your answer. (4 lines)
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
End of Question 8
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 16

– 15 –

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 11

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 11 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

Question 9 (6 marks) Marks

A satellite of mass 150 kg is launched from Earth’s surface into a uniform circular
orbit of radius 7.5  106 m.

(a) Calculate the magnitude of the gravitational potential energy Ep of the satellite. 1
(2 lines)

(b) From this uniform circular orbit, the satellite can escape Earth’s gravitational 3
field when its kinetic energy is equal to the magnitude of the gravitational
potential energy.

Use this relationship to calculate the escape velocity of the satellite. (8 lines)

Question 10 (6 marks)

Michelson and Morley set up an experiment to measure the velocity of Earth

relative to the aether.

(a) Outline TWO features of the aether model for the transmission of light. (4 lines) 2
(b) Recount the Michelson and Morley experiment, which attempted to measure 4
the relative velocity of Earth through the aether, and describe the results they
anticipated. (10 lines)

Question 11* (8 marks)

Question 38 (8 marks)
Two students, Kim and Ali, performed an experiment to determine the acceleration
Twotostudents,
due Kim
gravity (g) and aAli,
using performed
simple an consisting
pendulum experimentoftoa small
determine
mass the acceleration
hanging from due to
agravity (g) using a simple pendulum consisting of a small mass hanging from a light string.
light string.

θ
L

Their procedure was as follows:

1. Adjust the length of the string (L) to measure 0.08 m.
2. Hold the mass to the side to give a small angular displacement, θ.
3. Release the mass and measure the time for one period (T).
4. Record the result in a table.
5. Repeat using a string length (L) of 0.09 m and continue until the string length is
0.19 m (going up in 0.01 m increments,
Question using the same initial angular
11 continues
displacement each time).
*This is also a Physics Skills (9.1) question.
L
6. Calculate g using the relationship T = 2π .
g
12 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
The results are shown in the table:
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

L (m) 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.17 0.18 0.19
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 12 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
Two students, Kim and Ali, performed an experiment to determine the acceleration due to
θ of a small mass hanging from a light string.
gravity (g) using a simple pendulum consisting
L
Their procedure was as follows:
θ
1. Adjust the length of the string (L) L to measure 0.08 m.
SPACE • QUESTIONS
Their2.procedure
Hold thewas as to
mass follows:
the side to give a small angular displacement, θ.
1. 3.
Adjust the length
Release of the
the mass andstring (L) tothemeasure
measure time for0.08
onem.
period (T).
Question
2.Their
Hold the 11
mass(continued)
to the side to give a small angular displacement, θ. Marks
4. procedure
Record the was as follows:
result in a table.
3.1. 5.
Release
Adjust the using
Repeat mass
lengthand
a of measure
the
string string
lengththe
(L)time
(L) for one
toofmeasure
0.09 period
0.08
m and m.(T). until the string length is
continue
4.2. Record
Hold0.19the
the result
mmass tointhe
(going auptable.
sidein to0.01
givema small
increments, using the same
angular displacement, θ. initial angular
displacement
5.3. Repeat using eachlength
a string time).(L) of 0.09 m and continue until the string length is
Release the mass and measure the time for oneLperiod (T).
0.19Calculate
6. m (goingg using up inthe0.01 T = 2π using
m increments,
relationship . the same initial angular
4. Record the result in a table. g
displacement each time).
5. Repeat using a string length (L) of 0.09 m Land continue until the string length is
6. The
Calculate
results using
g are the relationship
shown in the table: T = 2π .
0.19 m (going up in 0.01 m increments, g using the same initial angular
displacement each time).
The The results are0.08
shown0.09 in the table:0.11 0.12 L0.13 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.17 0.18 0.19
6. results
L are
(m)shown
Calculate g usinginthe the table:
0.10
relationship T = 2π .
g
T (s) 0.57 0.62 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.81 0.84 0.86 0.89
L (m) 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.17 0.18 0.19
The results are shown in the table:
T (s)used 0.57
Kim the data0.62in the0.65 table0.67 0.70 a0.73
to obtain mean0.76 value0.80
for g.0.81
Kim’s0.84
result0.86
was g0.89
= 9.3 m s−2.
Ali used the results to produce the following graph. Ali’s line of best fit was used to calculate g.
L (m) 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.17 0.18 0.19
Kim used the data in the table to obtain a mean value for g. Kim’s result was g = 9.3 m s−2.
T (s) 0.57 0.62 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.81 0.84 0.86 0.89
Ali used
Kim the
used 1.2to
results
the produce
data in thethe following
table graph.
to obtain a Ali’s
meanline of best
value for fit
g. was usedresult
Kim’s to calculate
was g.
–2
g  9.3 m s1.0. Ali used the results to produce the following graph. Ali’s line of best fit −2
Kim used
was used1.2the data in theg.table to obtain a mean value for g. Kim’s result was g = 9.3 m s .
to calculate
Ali used the results 0.8 to produce the following graph. Ali’s line of best fit was used to calculate g.
1.0
T 2(s2)

1.20.6
0.8
Ali’s line of best fit
1.00.4
T 2(s2)

0.6
0.80.2 Ali’s line of best fit
0.4
T 2(s2)

0.6
0.2 0 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20 0.24
Ali’s line of best fit
0.4 L (m)
0 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20 0.24
0.2
L (m)
0 0.04 0.08Question
0.12 38 continues
0.16 0.20 0.24
L (m)14 –
Question 38– continues
(a) Outline TWO changes that could be made to the experimental procedure that 2
– 14 –
would improve its accuracy. (4 lines)
Question 38 continues

(b) Compare Kim’s and Ali’s methods of –calculating g and identify the better
– 14 3
approach. (6 lines)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 13

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 13 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

Core Topic
Space
Worked Answers
Multiple-choice Questions
1 D 2 C 3 B 4 C 5 D

6 B 7 A 8 B 9 D 10 B

11 A 12 B 13 A

Explanations
1 Weight  Fg  mg  70  9.8  686 N.

2 Acceleration is proportional to force, ie. maximum acceleration with maximum force, ie.
interval U  V.

3 At maximum height, v  0 m s–1. Using v2  u2  2as, 0  92  [2  (–g)  11],

 gMars 3.7 m s–2 down.

4 Since propellant is consumed at a constant rate, the thrust is constant, applying a

constant force to the craft, but as fuel is consumed, the total mass of the craft reduces,
leading to increased acceleration.

5 The ball moves up and down, so will have negative and positive values for the velocity.
Except when it is in contact with the ground (bouncing), the acceleration is due to
gravity only, which is constant. This means that the slope of the velocity–time graph will
be uniform while the ball is not in contact with the ground.

6 Once launched, with negligible air friction, the only acceleration is due to gravity, which
acts vertically down and is constant.

7 Considering that the observer is at rest, and the spaceship is travelling at very high
speed, the observer would note time dilation and length contraction for the moving
spacecraft, relative to an observer on the spaceship.

8 Weight on Earth equals mge  550 N. Thus m  56.1 kg. Now weight on surface of
Mercury  mgm  56.1  3.8  213 N.

14 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 14 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 01 Page 29 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:32 AM
Chapter 01 Page 29 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:32 AM
SPACE • ANSWERS

SPACE • ANSWERS

33 Weight on Earth equals mge = 550 N. Thus m = 56.1 kg. Now weight S
SSP
on
PPA
AAC
surface
CCEEE ••• AAA N NS
N
of
SS W
W EEE R
W RR S
SS
Mercury
33 Weight on Earth = mg = 56.1 × 3.8 = 213 N.
m equals mg = 550 N. Thus m = 56.1 kg. Now weight on surface of
e
Mercury = mgm = 56.1 × 3.8 = 213 N.
33
34
33 Weight
9 Since both
Weight on
on Earth planetsequals
Earth are inmg
equals mg orbit ee = 550
550 N.
= around Thus
N. the
Thussame m=
m 56.1
=star,
56.1Kepler’s kg.
kg. Now weight
Nowthird
weight lawononcan surface
be applied,
surface of
of
Mercury
that is, =
= mg mg = 56.1 × 3.8 = 213 N.
34 Mercury
Since both m = 56.1
planets
m are in× orbit 3.8 =around 213 N. the same star, Kepler’s third law can be applied,
that is, T 2
TB
2 7 2
TB
2
34 A ( 8.75 × 10 ) 8
34 Since
Since both both -----32-planets
= -----32- are
planets are∴in in orbit
orbit around
-------------------------------
around
11 73 2
- =the same
same 2star, star, 11
Kepler’s
-3 ∴ TBA
the---------------------------------
Kepler’s third
= 2.47
third law
law × can
can 10bebes.applied,
applied,
that
that is, is, ----- Tr AA Tr BB ( 8.75
(4 × × 1010) ) ( 8.00 T×B10 ) 8
- = -----3- ∴------------------------------- - = ----------------------------------3 ∴ TBA = 2.47 × 10 s.
3 11 3 11
r A22 r B22 ( 4 × 10 )
77 22 ( 8.00 T× 2210 )
35 Weight =-----mg. T
T T
T ( 8.75 × 10 ) T s–2=, if
A- = Considering (-------------------------------
8.75m×does 10 )not change andB gE -= 9.8 m weight is
8 1--- on the
A B B
-----
-----33- = 33 9.8 ∴
-----B-
- ∴ --------------------------------
- = ---------------------------------
33 = ---------------------------------
∴
-33 ∴ TBA = 2.47
T BA 2.47 × × 10108 s. s.6
11
10 moon, then r
r
35 Weight = Amg. Considering A g M =r
r B ( ------- ). ( 4 × 10 11 )
6 ( 4 ×m10 does) not change ( 8.00
( 8.00 ×and × 10
11
11 ) –2
10 gE) = 9.8 m s , if weight is 1--6- on the
B
moon, then gM = ( ------6- ). 9.8
36 The gravitational force actsmcentripetally and the instantaneous velocity
ss–2 is tangential.
35 Weight =
35 Weight mg. Considering does not change and ggE = 9.8 m ,, if weight is --1- on the
1
= mg. Considering m does not change and E = 9.8 m –2
if weight is 6--- on the
6
36 Themoon, then
gravitational
moon, then gM = ( ------66- ).g M = ( 9.8- ). acts centripetally and the instantaneous velocity is tangential.
9.8
force
------
37 Since centripetal force is equal to gravitational force, then
11
37 The
36
36 The
Since
The gravitational
gravitational
centripetal
gravitational force
force
force
force acts
acts
is equal centripetally
centripetally and
to gravitational andthe
and the instantaneous
theforce,instantaneous
then velocity
velocityisis
velocity istangential.
tangential.
Macts centripetally instantaneous tangential.
2
M Sv M
S E
Fc = ------------2- = Fg = G --------------- -
37 Since dS v
Mcentripetal force Mis 2
dS M equal to gravitational force, then
37 Since centripetal
Fc = ------------
12 Since - = Fg force
centripetal force is
= G ---------------
is equal equalE
- totogravitational
gravitationalforce, force,then then
d 2 d
2
M
M vv 2M E M
M MMEE
2 S SM
S
Fcc v=
F
∴ = ------------
= G ---------
S
------------
dd Md
=
=- ,FF ∴gg == vG G = ---------------
G E- - .
22-------
---------------d -
2 E d
d ME
∴ v = G -------- , ∴ v = G -------- .
d d
22 M
M E M
M E
∴
∴ vv = =G G -------
--------- ,, ∴
E
∴ vv = = G G -------
-------E-- .. T
2
d
38 Since both dplanets orbit thed same star, then -----3-2 = k d
Tr
38 Since both planets orbit the same star, then -----3- = k
2 2 2 2
TX TY TX TY r 22
∴ ------ = ------ , ∴ ------ = ------ , ∴ T = 8T . T
T
38
13 Since
38 Since 22 bothT planets 32planetsT orbit 2
3orbitTthe the same star, then 3-- =
2
3 Y X ----- = kk
TrX both rY 1X 4Y same star, then ----- r 3
∴ ------ 2
= ------3
, ∴ ------
3
= ------
3
, ∴ T Y = 8T X . r
rX22 rY22 1 22 4 22
As T TXXX completes TY
T Y , ∴ T
TX orbit,
ONE X = T
TY Y will complete 1--8- of an orbit.
∴ ------
∴ ------ =
22 = ------
------33 , ∴ ------
------
33 = ------
Y , ∴ T = 8T .
------
33 , ∴ TY Y = 8TX X.
r
As rXX completes r
rY ONE1
1 orbit,4
4 Y will complete --8- of an orbit.
1
X Y

As
As X
X completes
completes ONE
ONE orbit,
orbit, Y
Y will
will complete
complete
1
--1-
---
8
of
of an
an orbit.
orbit.
8

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 29

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI E

Exxc
cee ll SS U
UC C EE S
CC SSS O
OO N
NN EEE H
HH S
SSC
CC ••• PP
P HH
H YY
Y SS
S III CC
C SS 29
15
29
© Pascal
Black Press
process 45.0° ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1
150.0 LPI Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 15 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Both satellites have advantages and disadvantages in communicating continuously with
the surface. The low-earth-orbit satellites can cover great areas of the surface in
relatively short periods of time but require other satellites to be incorporated into a
network to be able to provide continuous communication with a particular location on
the surface. The longer-lasting geostationary satellite remains continuously accessible
CHAPTER 1 • SPACE
but is much more subject to interference, is more expensive to put into orbit, and
requires far stronger signals to produce reliable communication with the surface.

Free-response Questions

28
1 (a)
(a) Themuons
The muonsare
areexhibiting
exhibiting‘time
‘timedilation’
dilation’because
becauseofoftheir
theirhigh
highvelocity
velocityrelative
relativetoto
the observer on Earth.
the observer on Earth.

(b) Using
(b) Usingthe
theinformation
informationsupplied
suppliedand
andthe
theequation,
equation,

2 –6 2 2
to t v 2.2 × 10 ⎞ v
t = -----------------
- ∴ ----o = 1 – ----2 ∴ ⎛ ----------------------- - = (0.44)2
- = 1 – ------------------
2 t c ⎝ 5.0 × 10 –6⎠ 9 × 10
16
v
1 – ----2
c

∴2v2 = [1 – 0.44 2 16
2 ] × 9 × 1016 ∴ v = 2.69 × 1088 m s–1–1.
v  [1 – 0.44 ]  9  10 v  2.69  10 m s .
8
The muons leave the accelerator with a speed of 2.69 × 10 s–1.
8 m–1
The muons leave the accelerator with a speed of 2.69  10 m s .

2 (a) The slope of the graph represents v/ t which is equivalent to the acceleration.
29 (a) The slope of the graph represents Δv/Δt which is equivalent to the acceleration.
It can be seen that at t  20 and t 100 s, the slope is positive, ie. up, indicating
It can be seen that at t = 20 and t = 100 s, the slope is positive, ie. up, indicating
that the accelerations are in the same direction, while the gradient at t  100 s is
that the accelerations are in the same direction, while the gradient at t = 100 s is
greater than at t  20 s, indicating that it was undergoing a greater upward
greater than at t = 20 s, indicating that it was undergoing a greater upward
acceleration at t  100 s.
acceleration at t = 100 s.
(b) The rocket underwent an acceleration upward which increased over the first
(b) The rocket underwent an acceleration upward which increased over the first 100
100 seconds, maintaining its acceleration up until t  120 s. The reasons for this
seconds, maintaining its acceleration up until t = 120 s. The reasons for this are:
are: the mass of the rocket was reducing as fuel was consumed and exhausted, and,
the mass of the rocket was reducing as fuel was consumed and exhausted, and, by
by approximately t  40 s, the rocket had reached an altitude of about 20 km and
approximately t = 40 s, the rocket had reached an altitude of about 20 km and
completely escaped the lower atmosphere, and air friction, having been slowly
completely escaped the lower atmosphere, and air friction, having been slowly
reducing, now became almost non-existent. The shape of the graph after
reducing, now became almost non-existent. The shape of the graph after
t  120 s indicates that the rocket fuel had been exhausted, with the negative slope
t = 120 s indicates that the rocket fuel had been exhausted, with the negative
indicating that the rocket had begun to accelerate down, more or less uniformly,
slope indicating that the rocket had begun to accelerate down, more or less
due to its gravitational attraction to Earth.
uniformly, due to its gravitational attraction to Earth.
3 (a) The only force acting on A at maximum height is the
weight-force  Fg  mg  30  9.8  294 N vertically down.
Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 39
(b) Using the equation, sy  uy t  ay t 2, as uy  0 m s–1, then 25  4.9t2,
ie. t  2.26 s. The time for A to return to the ground from the maximum
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI height  2.3 s.

(c)
Both A and B are experiencing a weight-force down, due to their mass, of 294 N.
The weight is the only force acting on A, while B, travelling in a circular path,
mv2
requires a downward centripetal force   480 N. This means that the arm
r
attached to B must be exerting a downward force on B of (480 – 294)  186 N
down.

16 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 16 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

The weight is the only force acting on A, while B, travelling in a circular path,
2
mv
requires a downward centripetal force = --------- = 480 N. This means that the arm
r
attached to B must be exerting a downward force on B of (480 – 294) = 186 N down.
SPACE • ANSWERS

31 The Michelson–Morley
4 The Michelson–Morleyexperimentexperiment
was an unsuccessful attempt to attempt
was an unsuccessful detect variations
to detect invariations in
the speed of light, in an effort to verify the existence of the ‘ether’, proposed as a
the speed of light, in an effort to verify the existence of the ‘ether’, proposed as a
medium to transmit light waves through free space. By comparing light beams,
medium to transmit light waves through free space. By comparing light beams,
projected along identical, perpendicular paths, the idea was that the motion of Earth
projected along identical, perpendicular paths, the idea was that the motion of Earth
through the ether would lead to a change in the light’s speed along one of the paths
compared to through the ether
the other, would
leading lead to in
to a change a change in the light’s
the interference speed
pattern alongbyone
created theoftwo
the paths
beams. Theircompared to thedespite
‘null’ result, other, leading to a change
many attempts, wasinexplained
the interference pattern created
when Einstein created by the
his Specialtwo beams.
Theory, Theirhe‘null’
where result,that
suggested despite many of
the speed attempts, was explained
light would be the same when Einstein
irrespectivecreated
of the his
frame of reference
Special Theory, of the observer.
where The that
he suggested ‘null’
theresult
speedofofthe
light would be the
Michelson–Morley experiment
same irrespective actually
of the framegives support of
of reference to the
Einstein’s
observer.idea.
The ‘null’ result of the
Michelson–Morley experiment actually gives support to Einstein’s idea.

32 (a) Both the passenger and rail worker would measure the speed of the light to be the
5 (a) Both the passenger and rail worker would measure the speed of the light to be the
same, as according to Einstein the speed of light is the same irrespective of the
same, as according to Einstein the speed of light is the same irrespective of the
frame of reference.
frame of reference.
(b) The rail
(b) worker is atworker
The rail rest while
is atthe
resttrain is travelling
while the train isattravelling
a significant
at afraction of the
significant fraction of
speed of light. This means that the rail worker will record a length contraction
the speed of light. This means that the rail worker will record a length contraction
according to
according to

2 2
v 0.6
l = lo 1 – ----2 ∴ l = 22 1 – --------
2
- = 22 × 0.8.
c 1

Thus the length

Thus of
thethe carriage,
length of theascarriage,
recordedasby the stationary
recorded rail worker,
by the stationary railwould
worker, would be
be 17.6 m. 17.6 m.

6 An inertial frame of reference is at rest, or travelling at a constant velocity, relative to

33 An inertial frame of reference is at rest, or travelling at a constant velocity, relative to
the observer, with Newton’s first law applying. The fact that the ball accelerated
Chapter 01 Page 41 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:32 AM
the observer, with Newton’s first law applying. The fact that the ball accelerated
vertically
vertically down down
due to due to
gravity, andgravity,
that it and thathorizontally
moved it moved horizontally in eitheratdirection
in either direction a at a
constantindicating
constant velocity, velocity, itindicating it was non-accelerated
was non-accelerated in the direction,
in the horizontal horizontalconfirms
direction, confirms
S P A C justifies
that
that the boat is the boat is frame
an inertial an inertial frame offor
of reference reference
the boyfor
in the
the boy
boat,inand
the justifies
boat, and hisE • A N ShisWERS

conclusion.conclusion.
–1
40 l34S U C (a)
E x c e 7 (a) Considering
C E S S Considering that
O N E H S C • that
P Sthe
H Y the capsulewould
I C Scapsule wouldstart rest,uu=00mms–1
startatatrest, s , ,and
and
4 –1 2 2
= 1.06
v 1.06 ×10
104m Nowvv2 =uu2+2as.
m ss–1. .Now 2as.Rearranging
Rearrangingthe
theequation:
equation:

v –u
2 2
( 1.06 × 10 ) – 0
4 2
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
a = ---------------- = ----------------------------------------- .
2s 2 × 215
–2
Therefore
Therefore the
the average
average acceleration
accelerationof
ofthe
thecapsule
capsulewould
wouldbebe2.61
2.61×105105 mmss–2. .
(b) The required acceleration corresponds to more than 26 600 g. Considering that
(b) humans
The required acceleration
experience medicalcorresponds
problems attoaccelerations
more than 26greater
600 g. than
Considering that
about 7 g, the
acceleration required for the capsule would see the passengers experience the the
humans experience medical problems at accelerations greater than about 7 g,
acceleration required for the capsule would see the passengers experience the
equivalent of more than 26 tonnes for each kilogram of their body mass. This
equivalent of more than 26 tonnes for each kilogram of their body mass. This
huge
huge force
force would
would obviously
obviously crush
crush them
them and
and makes
makes Jules
Jules Vernes’s idea impossible.
Verne’s idea
impossible.

distance –1
35 (a) Horizontal speed = ------------------- = slope of graphS U=C1.85
C E S SmO sN E . H S C • PHYSICS 17
time
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
(b) The graph of the relationship between the range and the horizontal speed.
(Identify
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 17 first trial.) 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

distance
8 (a) Horizontal speed  –1
time  slope of graph  1.85 m s .
(b) The graph of the relationship between the range and the horizontal speed. (Identify
first trial.)

1.2
x

1.0 x

x
0.8
Range (m)

Trial 1
x
(1.85, 06)
0.6 x

0.4

0.2

0
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Speed (m s –1 )

(c) The vertical displacement (sv) and horizontal velocity (uh) of the balls are
identical on Earth and the second planet, with the initial vertical velocity (uv) of
the ball zero. The time to fall vertically (t) is given by sv  1 gt 2, and since sv is
1 2
equal in both situations, then t2  . With the smaller acceleration due to gravity
g
on the second planet, the ball will take longer to fall to the ground than it did on
Earth. With identical initial horizontal velocities and sh  uht, then the ball will
travel further (have a greater range) on the second planet than the 0.6 m it
travelled on Earth.

18 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 18 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 01 Page 42 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:32 AM

CHAPTER 1 • SPACE SPACE • ANSWERS

GM 1 M 2
36 (a) Using the equation, Ep = – -------------------
9 (a) - and substituting,
r

–11 24
6.67 × 10 × 6.0 × 10 × 150
- = –8.0 × 109 joules.
Ep = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
6
7.5 × 10

The gravitational potential energy of the satellite = –8.0 GJ.

(b) Since Ep = –8.0 GJ, then the Ek required to achieve escape velocity = 8.0 GJ.
Now Ek = 1
---
2
M ve2 = 8.0 × 109, where M is the mass of the satellite and ve is
the required escape velocity.
9
2 × 8.0 × 10
i.e. ve = ------------------------------- = 10 328 m s–1,
150
∴ escape velocity for the satellite = 10.3 km s–1.

(c)
(c) Earth rotates
Earth rotates from
from west
west totoeast
eastwith
withthe
thesurface
surfacespeed
speeda amaximum
maximumatatthe theequator.
equator.
As long as the desired orbit is suitable, Earth’s natural rotational motion can be
As long as the desired orbit is suitable, Earth’s natural rotational motion can be
used to assist in reducing the energy required (fuel) to place the satellite into orbit.
used to assist in reducing the energy required (fuel) to place the satellite into orbit.
By directing the launch west to east, and launching from a location on the surface
By directing
close the launch
to the equator, thewest to east,
surface and launching
velocity is acquiredfrom a location
by the rocket andon the
the surface
effect is
close to the equator, the surface velocity is acquired by the rocket and the
maximised. If the desired orbit is inappropriate, or the launch is to occur at higher effect is
maximised.
latitudes, moreIf the desiredwill
expense orbit
beisincurred
inappropriate, or the
as a larger launch of
quantity is to occur
fuel, or aatlarger
higher
latitudes, more
rocket, will expense will
be required be incurred
to launch as apayload
the same larger quantity of fuel,into
(the satellite) or aalarger
stable
rocket, willa be
orbit with requiredaltitude
particular to launchandthe same payload (the satellite) into a stable orbit
speed.
with a particular altitude and speed.

37
10 (a) In
(a) In the
the aether
aether model
model for
forthe
thetransmission
transmissionofoflight,
light,the
theaether
aetherwas
wasviewed
viewedas:as:
‘An all
‘An all pervading
pervading medium
medium proposed
proposedtotoallow
allowlight
lightwaves
wavestotopropagate
propagatethrough
through
a vacuum.’
a vacuum.’
‘A
‘A rigid,
rigid, elastic
elastic medium
mediumwith
withno
nomass
massthat
thatallows
allowsthe
theplanets
planetstotomove
movethrough it it
through
resistance and
with negligible resistance and provides
providesaa“fixed”
“fixed”frame
frameofofreference.’
reference.’

(b) In
(b) In their
their experiment,
experiment, Michelson
Michelson and and Morley
Morleyused
usedaasensitive
sensitiveinterferometer
interferometerwithwitha a
half-silvered mirror to split a beam of light to produce two coherent beams
half-silvered mirror to split a beam of light to produce two coherent beams
travelling along identical perpendicular paths. The perpendicular beams
travelling
encountered along identical
mirrors perpendicular
so that paths. The perpendicular
they were recombined after travellingbeams
equal distances
encountered mirrors so that they were recombined after travelling
and produced an observable interference pattern. Any change in the speed equal distances
of the
and
lightproduced an observable
along either path wouldinterference pattern. in
result in a change Anythechange in the
observed speed of the
interference
pattern.
light Michelson
along andwould
either path Morley believed
result an aether
in a change existed
in the and interference
observed hoped to use the
pattern. Michelson and Morley believed an aether existed and hoped toinuse
apparatus to allow them to verify its existence by detecting a change thethe
velocity oftolight
apparatus allowcaused
them by the motion
to verify of Earthbyrelative
its existence to the
detecting aetherin
a change (the
theso-called
velocity
‘aether wind’). Despite the sensitivity of their apparatus, and carefully performing
of light caused by the motion of Earth relative to the aether (the so-called ‘aether
the experiment in many and varied locations, the desired observation of a
wind’).
variationDespite
in the the sensitivitypattern
interference of their apparatus,
was and carefully
not achieved performing the
(a null result).
experiment in many and varied locations, the desired observation of a variation in
the interference pattern was not achieved (a null result).

42 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 19

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 19 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 01 Page 43 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:32 AM

SPACE • ANSWERS

CHAPTER 1 • SPACE

38 (a) The lengths used are very short, with all times measured less than 1.0 seconds.
11 This means
(a) The lengthsthe human
used areerror in measuring
very short, withthe will be relatively
all times measured less thanlarge (about
1.0 seconds.
10% ifThis t = means
1.0 s). the
Thishuman
error error
can have its impact reduced by increasing the
in measuring the times will be relatively large (about length
of the10%pendulum tested,
if t  1.0 to use
s). This errorvalues starting
can have at 0.20 reduced
its impact m, and using incremental
by increasing the length
increases of 0.10 m up to a value of 1.00 m. The second change
of the pendulum tested, to use values starting at 0.20 m, and using incremental would be to
recordincreases
the time of for0.10
10 periods
m up to at each length,
a value of 1.00 and thensecond
m. The calculate a mean
change value
would be for
to record
2
the period, to determine the value of T to be used to produce
the time for 10 periods at each length, and then calculate a mean value for the the graph of results.
period, to determine the value of T 2 to be used to produce the graph of results.
(b) Both techniques use all the data collected but Ali’s method is better as it allows
more Both
(b) for individual
techniques points
use allthat,
thedue datatocollected
experimental errors,
but Ali’s may isbebetter
method discrepant, or
as it allows
less than ideal. Kim’s method incorporates all data as given and,
more for individual points that, due to experimental errors, may be discrepant, or despite using the
mean less
of allthanresults,
ideal.which
Kim’sismethod
somewhat similar toall
incorporates Ali’s
dataline of bestand,
as given fit, she is likely
despite using the
to havemean of all results, which is somewhat similar to Ali’s line of best fit, sheofis likely
a less reliable value than can be calculated from the well chosen line
best fittoinhaveAli’s graph.
a less Bothvalue
reliable techniques
than can arebesuitable, considering
calculated from the the
wellexperimental
chosen line of
method and systematic errors involved.
best fit in Ali’s graph. Both techniques are suitable, considering the experimental
method and systematic errors involved.
l
(c) The equation for a simple pendulum is T = 2π --- so the l
(c) The equation for a simple pendulum is T g2π so the
2 2 g
T T42 π 4π2
slope slope
of theofline theofline
best
of fit
best= fit
------= --------
. .
l gg g
From From the above
the above equation equation it follows
it follows that gthat 4π2 divided
= 4πg 2divided by theby the slope
slope of theofline
theofline of
best fitbest fit from
from Ali’s Ali’s
graph. graph.
SinceSince the of
the line linebest
of best fit passes
fit passes through
through the origin
the origin andand the
plottedpoint
the plotted pointforforl =l  0.16
0.16 mmliesliesononthe
theline
lineofofbest
bestfit,
fit,then
then
2 2
4π 4π
- = 9.63 m s–2.
g = -------------- = -------------------------------
slope ( 0.81 ) ⁄ 0.16
2

The experimental
The experimental
resultresult = 9.6
for g for s–2.m s–2.
g m9.6

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 43

20 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 20 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 2
Core Topic
Motors and Generators
Multiple-choice Questions

Past HSC Questions

1 Two
26 Two types
types of
of generator
generator are
are shown.
shown.

N N

S S

Resistance
Resistance

Generator 1 Generator 2

What type of current is produced by each generator when connected to an external

resistance?

(A) Both produce d.c.

(B) Both produce a.c.
(C) Generator 1 produces d.c. and Generator 2 produces a.c.
(D) Generator 1 produces a.c. and Generator 2 produces d.c.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 21

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 21 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

27
2 A light rod has a coil of insulated copper wire fixed at one end and is pivoted at the other
end. The result is a pendulum which is free to swing back and forth. A magnet is placed
underneath this pendulum. The arrangement is shown in the diagram.

Pivot

Rod

Coil

Magnet

The pendulum is pulled back and then allowed to swing. Which of the following would
cause the pendulum to come to rest most quickly?

(A) Replacing the magnet with a stronger one

(B) Shortening the pendulum
(C) Replacing the rod with a heavier one
(D) Connecting the ends of the coil by a piece of copper wire

22 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 22 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

28
3 An electric motor is connected to a power supply of constant voltage. The motor is
allowed to run at different speeds by adjusting a brake.

Which graph best shows how the current through the motor varies with speed?

(A) (B)
Current

Current
0 Speed 0 Speed

Current

0 Speed 0 Speed

29 A transformer has a primary coil with 60 turns and a secondary coil with 2300 turns.
4 A transformer has a primary coil with 60 turns and a secondary coil with 2300 turns.
If the primary voltage to the transformer is 110 V, what is the secondary voltage?
If the primary voltage to the transformer is 110 V, what what is the secondary voltage?
(A) 2.4 × 10–4 V
(A) 2.4  102–4 V
(B) 2.4 × 10 V
(B) 2.4  1032 V
(C) 1.3 × 10 V
(C) 1.3  1033 V
(D) 4.2 × 10 V
(D) 4.2  103 V

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 23

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 23 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

5
5 Two straight metal rods, P and Q, have the same length. They are each pivoted at one end
and rotated with the same angular velocity so that they sweep out horizontal circular
paths as shown in diagrams X and Y. A constant current I is flowing along each rod, as
shown.

In diagram X, a constant magnetic field is applied at right angles to the plane of the
circular path. In diagram Y, a uniform magnetic field of the same magnitude is applied
in the plane of the circular path.

I I
Q
P

Diagram X Diagram Y

Which of the following statements about the forces acting on rod P and rod Q is correct?

(A) The magnitude of the force on P is exactly the same as the magnitude of the force
on Q at all times.
(B) The magnitude of the force on P is constant and the magnitude of the force
on Q is zero.
(C) The magnitude of the force on P is constant and the magnitude of the force
on Q varies with time.
(D) The magnitude of the force on P varies with time and the magnitude of the force
on Q is constant.

6
6 What is the role of a transformer at an electrical power station?

(A) To reduce heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the voltage

(B) To reduce heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the current
(C) To increase heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the voltage
(D) To increase heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the current

7 A student performed an experiment to measure the force on a long current-carrying

conductor placed perpendicular to an external magnetic field.

The graph shows how the force on a 1.0 m length of the conductor varied as the current
through the conductor was changed.
24 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 Force

1 (N) Success One HSC Physics
Excel

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 24 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(A) To reduce heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the voltage
(B) To reduce heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the current
(C) To increase heating in the transmission lines by stepping up the voltage
(D) To increase heating in the transmission lines
M O T Oby
R S stepping
A N D G E Nup
E Rthe
A T Ocurrent
RS • QUESTIONS

7
7 A student performed an experiment to measure the force on a long current-carrying
conductor placed perpendicular to an external magnetic field.

The graph shows how the force on a 1.0 m length of the conductor varied as the current
through the conductor was changed.

Force (N)

0.7

Current (A)
3.0

What was the magnitude of the external magnetic field in this experiment?

(A) 0.230.23
(A) T T (B) 1.1 T (C) 2.1 T (D) 4.3 T
33 1.1 T coil of wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field B, so that the plane of the
A single-turn
(B)
coil is parallel to the field, as shown in the diagrams. The coil can move freely.
(C) 2.1 T
33
8 A single-turn coil of wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field B, so that the plane of the
An electric
(D)
coil is4.3
parallel to theI flows
T current around
field, as theincoil
shown the in the direction
diagrams. shown.
The coil can move freely.

In which
An electricdirection
current Idoes
flowsthe coil the
around begin
coiltoinmove as a consequence
the direction shown. of the interaction
between the external magnetic field and the current?
In which direction does the coil begin to move as a consequence of the interaction
(A)
between (B)
the external magnetic field and the current?

(A) (B)

B B
I I
B B
I I

B B
I I
B B
I I
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 25

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 25 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

34
9 In a student experiment, a bar magnet is dropped through a long plastic tube of length l
and diameter d. The time taken for it to hit the floor is recorded.

N N
S S

d d
l

Plastic Copper

The experiment is repeated using a copper tube of the same length and diameter.

Which of the following statements is correct?

(A) The magnet will take the same time to hit the floor in both cases.
(B) The magnet will come to rest in the middle of the copper tube.
(C) The magnet will take longer to fall through the copper tube.
(D) The magnet will take longer to fall through the plastic tube.

26 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

–7–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 26 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

35
10 The coil of an AC generator rotates at a constant rate in a magnetic field as shown.

B B B B B

P Q R S T

Which of the following diagrams represents the curve of induced emf against position?

(A)
Q
Induced R T Position
emf P
S

(B)
P T
Induced Q S Position
emf
R

(C)

Induced Q S T Position
emf P R

(D)
P R T
Induced Position
emf
Q S

–8– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 27

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 27 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(A) 3.6
(B) 6.0
(C) 10.0
C H A P T(D)
E R 2 16.7
• MOTORS AND GENERATORS

36
11 The diagram shows a DC generator connected to a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO).

CRO

What output voltage would be observed for this generator on the CRO?

(A) (B)
Voltage (V)

Voltage (V)

0 Time (s) 0 Time (s)

Voltage (V)

0 Time (s) 0 Time (s)

–5–

28 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 28 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

37
12 A non-magnetic metal disk is balanced on a support as shown in the diagram below. The
37 Adisk
non-magnetic metal diskAis magnet
is initially stationary. balanced
is on a support
moved as shown
in a circular in just
path the diagram
above thebelow. The
surface of
disk is initially
the disk, withoutstationary.
touchingAit.magnet is moved in a circular path just above the surface of
the disk, without touching it.
Path
S
Path
S

N
N
Disk
Disk

As a result of this movement the disk begins to rotate in the same direction as the magnet.
As a result of this movement the disk begins to rotate in the same direction as the magnet.
The observed effect demonstrates the principle most applicable to the operation of the
The observed effect demonstrates the principle most applicable to the operation of the
(A) DC motor.
(A) DC motor.
(B) galvanometer.
(B) galvanometer.
(C) generator.
(C) generator.
(D) induction motor.
(D) induction motor.

38 A neon sign requires a 6000 V supply for its operation. A transformer allows the neon
38
13 Asign
neon sign requires
to operate from aa 240
6000VVsupply.
supply for its operation. A transformer allows the neon
sign to operate from a 240 V supply.
What is the ratio of the number of secondary turns to the number of primary turns for the
What is the ratio of the number of secondary turns to the number of primary turns for the
transformer?
transformer?
(A) 1 : 40
(A) 1 : 40
(B) 1 : 25
(B) 1 : 25
(C) 25 : 1
(C) 25 : 1
(D) 40 : 1
(D) 40 : 1

–6– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 29

–6–
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 29 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

39
14 A current of 5.0 A flows in a wire that is placed in a magnetic field of 0.5 T. The wire is
0.7 m long and is at an angle of 60° to the field.

B = 0.5 T

0.7
I = 5.0 A

m
60°

What is the approximate magnitude of the force on the wire?

(A) 0N
(B) 0.9 N
(C) 1.5 N
(D) 1.8 N

30 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

–7–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 30 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

4015 A flexible wire loop is lying on a frictionless table made from an insulating material. The
wire can slide around horizontally on the table and change shape freely, but it cannot
move vertically. The loop is connected to a power supply, a switch and two terminals
fixed to the table as shown.

Wire loop

Switch

When the switch is closed, a current I flows around the loop.

Which of the following diagrams most closely represents the final shape of the loop after
the switch is closed?

(A) (B)

–8– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 31

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 31 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

Free-response Questions

Past HSC Questions

Question 1 (4 marks) Marks

The electrical supply network uses a.c. and a variety of transformers between the 4
generating stations and the final consumer.

Explain why transformers are used at various points in the network. (8 lines)*

Question 2 (3 marks)

A fan that ventilates an underground mine is run by a very large d.c. electric motor.
This motor is connected in series with a variable resistor to protect the windings in the
coil.

When the motor is starting up, the variable resistor is adjusted to have a large
resistance. The resistance is then lowered slowly as the motor increases to its
operating speed.

Explain why no resistance is required when the motor is running at high speed, but a
substantial resistance is needed when the motor is starting up. (6 lines) 3
Marks
Question 27 (7 marks)
Question 3 (7 marks)
Two parallel wires are separated by a distance of 0.75 m. Wire X is 3.0 m long and
carries a current of 2.0 A. Wire Y can be considered to be infinitely long and carries a
current of 5.0 A. Both currents flow in the same direction along the wires.

3.0 m
Wire X
2.0 A
0.75 m

Wire Y
5.0 A

(a) What is the direction of the force that exists between the two wires? (1 line) 1

(b) On the axes, sketch a graph that shows how the force between the two wires 2
Wire X was
would vary if the length ofQuestion increased.
3 continues
*Shows number of lines available in HSC answer booklet for this question.
Force

32 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 32 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Wire X
2.0 A
0.75 m

Wire Y MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

5.0 A

is the direction of the force that exists between the two wires? (1 line)
(a) What3 (continued)
Question Marks1

(b) On the axes, sketch a graph that shows how the force between the two wires 2
would vary if the length of Wire X was increased.

Force

Length of Wire X

(c) In your Physics course you have performed a first-hand investigation to

Chapter 02 Page 81 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:49 AM 4
demonstrate the motor effect. Explain how your results demonstrated that effect.

...............................................................................................................................
(8 lines) MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

...............................................................................................................................
Marks
...............................................................................................................................
Question 428(6(6marks)
Question marks)
...............................................................................................................................
Discuss
Discuss the
theeffects
effectsofofthethe development
development of electrical
of electrical generators
generators on society
on society and the and the 66
environment.
environment. (12 lines)
(12 lines)
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Question
Question 529(6(6marks)
marks)
...............................................................................................................................
Two types of generator are shown in the diagram.
...............................................................................................................................

B B

To To
external external
– 18 –
circuit circuit

Generator P Generator Q

(a) What is the function of the brush in a generator? (2 lines) 1

(b) Which of these generators is a DC generator? Justify your choice. (6 lines) 3

Question 30 (7 marks)

(a) State Lenz’s law. (1 line) 1

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 33
(b)
© Pascal Press ISBN When the645
978 1 74125 metal
1 rod is Success
Excel movedOneupwards through the magnetic field as shown in
HSC Physics
the diagram, an emf is induced between the two ends.
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 33 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

Marks
Question 630(7(7marks)
marks) Marks

(a) State Lenz’s law. (1 line) 1

(b) When the metal rod is moved upwards through the magnetic field as shown in
the diagram, an emf is induced between the two ends.

Direction of motion

S N End Y
S N
End X

(i) Which end of the rod is negative? (1 line) 1

(ii) Explain how the emf is produced in the rod. (6 lines) 3

Marks
Question 31 (3 marks)
Question 7 (3 marks)
Two straight copper wires are suspended so that their lower ends dip into a conducting 3
salt solution in a beaker as shown. The length of the straight section of each wire
above the conducting salt solution is 35 cm and they are placed 1.5 cm apart. The ends
of the wire do not touch the bottom of the beaker. The two wires are connected to a
DC power supply.

1.5 cm
NOT TO
35 cm SCALE

Conducting
salt solution

A current of 2 amperes flows from the battery. Calculate the magnitude and direction
of the initial force on each wire. (6 lines)
.........................................................................................................................................
– 22 –
.........................................................................................................................................
34 SUCCESS ONE HSC © • PBoard
HYSIC ofS Studies NSW 2002
.........................................................................................................................................
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

.........................................................................................................................................
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 34 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
MOTORS AND GENERATORS • QUESTIONS

Marks
Question 832(4(4marks)
Question marks) Marks
Two solenoids (coils) with hollow cores are suspended using string so that they are 4
hanging in the positions shown below. The solenoids are free to move in a pendulum
motion.

Support Support

Copper wire

A B A B

N S N S

Figure 1 – First investigation Figure 2 – Second investigation

In the first investigation shown in Figure 1, a strong bar magnet is moved towards the
solenoid until the north end of the magnet enters the solenoid and then the motion of
the magnet is stopped.

In the second investigation, shown in Figure 2, a thick copper wire is connected

between the two terminals, A and B, at the ends of the solenoid. The motion of the
magnet is repeated exactly in this second investigation.

Explain the effect of the motion of the magnet on the solenoid in the two investigations.
(8 lines)

Question 33 (5 marks)
Question 9 (5 marks)
(a) Explain the relationship between the current in the primary coil and the current 3
in the secondary coil of an ideal step-down transformer in relation to the
conservation of energy. (6 lines)

(b) Explain why a transformer will work in an AC circuit but not in a DC circuit. 2
(4 lines)

– 19 –

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 35

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 35 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

Question 10 (5 marks) Marks

Describe a first-hand investigation to demonstrate the effect on a generated electric 5

current when the strength of the magnet is varied.

In your description, include:

• a labelled sketch of the experimental set-up;
• how you varied the magnetic field strength;
• how other variables were controlled.

(Space for sketch) (10 lines)

36 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 36 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • ANSWERS

Chapter 02 Page 87 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:49 AM Core Topic

Motors and Generators MOTORS AND GENERATORS • ANSWERS

Worked Answers
25 Earth’s magnetic field runs from the south pole to the north pole of Earth. The field
Multiple-choice Questions wire interacts with Earth’s magnetic field to produce the
created by the current-carrying
force F, which
1 C 2 D will be a maximum
3 A when the current
4 D flows perpendicular
5 Cto the field,
producing magnetic loops that are in parallel with Earth’s field, above and below the
wire. When7 A
6 A the wire carries current
8 C parallel to Earth’s
9 C field, the magnetic
10 Bfield of Earth
is perpendicular to the magnetic field produced by the wire and thus there is no force
acting on the
11 B wire. Only the component
12 D 13 C of the 14 C current’s field in parallel
15 A with Earth’s
field can interact to create forces on the wire.
Explanations
26 Generator 1 has a split-ring commutator and will produce a fluctuating d.c. supply,
1 Generator 1 has a2split-ring
while Generator commutator
has slip-ring contactsand
andwill
willproduce
produceaa.c.
fluctuating d.c. supply, while
Generator 2 has slip-ring contacts and will produce a.c.

27 Connecting the ends allows the induced emf to create a current whose direction will
2 Connecting the ends allows the induced emf to create a current whose direction will
oppose the motion.
oppose the motion.

28 As the coils of the motor begin to rotate, a back-emf is generated, increasing as the
3 As theof
speed coils of theincreases,
rotation motor begin
andtoreducing
rotate, athe
back-emf
forwardiscurrent,
generated, increasing
until as thespeed
full rotational speed
of rotation increases, and
of the motor is achieved. reducing the forward current, until full rotational speed of the
motor is achieved.

n V 110 × 2300
29
4 equation: ----1- = -----1- , ∴ V2 = --------------------------- = 4216 V.
transformer equation:
Applying the transformer
n2 V 2 60

30
5 With
With friction
friction neglected,
neglected, Rod
Rod QQ experiences
experiences only
only aaforce
forcein
inaavertical
verticaldirection,
direction,and
andthus
thus
requires
requires no
no force
force to
to maintain
maintainitsitshorizontal
horizontalcircular
circularmotion,
motion,while
whilethe
thecurrent
currentininRod
RodP P
produces
produces aa magnetic
magnetic field
field out
outofofthe
thepage
pageononitsitsleading
leadingside,
side,and
andhence
hencerequires
requiresa a
constant
constant force
force to
to be
be applied
appliedtotokeep
keepititrotating.
rotating.

31
6 The
The transformer
transformer steps steps up
up voltage
voltage to to transmit
transmit electrical
electrical power
power over
overlong
longdistances.
distances.Since
Since
power 
power = VI,
VI, ifif aa high voltage is
high voltage is used,
used, then
then totoprovide
providethethesame
sameamount
amountofofelectrical
electrical
power, aa smaller
power, smaller current
current is
is required
required for for transmission
transmission through
through the
thewires.
wires.Since
Sincethe
thepower
power
lost in
lost in aa wire
wire isisRI RI22 and
and the
theresistance
resistanceofofthe thewire
wiredoes
doesnotnotchange
changemuch
muchunless
unlessit it
becomes very
becomes very hot,
hot, then
then with
withthethesmaller
smallercurrent,
current,bybyusing
usinga astep-up
step-uptransformer
transformerand andhigh
high voltage,
voltage, there there
is lessisheating
less heating
of the of the as
wires wires
the as the electrical
electrical power power is transmitted.
is transmitted.

32
7 Considering
Considering that that the
the wire
wire carries
carriescurrent
currentperpendicular
perpendiculartotothethemagnetic
magneticfield,
field,then
then
F  BIl. Now l  1.0 m and F divided by I is equal to the slope of the
F = BIl. Now l = 1.0 m and F divided by I is equal to the slope of the graph. Becausegraph. Because
FF 0.70.7
B= ---- , then B B= 
, then slope of of
slope graph
graph=------- = 0.23 T. T.
 0.23
IlIl 3 3

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 37

33 Because the current is flowing in opposite directions in the vertical section of the coil of
© Pascal Press ISBN wire, the motor
978 1 74125 645 1 effect
Excelwill occur,
Success resulting
One HSC Physics in a torque acting on the coil. Using the

Right grip rule (or Fleming’s left-hand motor rule), the coil will experience an
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 37 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
anticlockwise torque when viewed from above, causing it to begin to move as shown in
CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

8 Because the current is flowing in opposite directions in the vertical section of the coil of
wire,
Chapter 02 Page 88 the motor
Wednesday, effect
February 10, will
2010 9:49 AM occur, resulting in a torque acting on the coil. Using the Right
grip rule (or Fleming’s left-hand motor rule), the coil will experience an anticlockwise
torque when viewed from above, causing it to begin to move as shown in alternative C.
CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

9 The copper tube is a conductor, while the plastic tube is an insulator. As the magnet falls
through the tubes, the material of the tubes experiences a changing magnetic field.
34 The copper
Because tube is
charges area free
conductor,
to movewhile in thethe plastic
copper tubethe
tube, is moving
an insulator.
magnet, As creating
the magnet an
falls through the tubes, the material of the tubes experiences a
induced emf in the copper, will cause a current to flow. This current will flow, accordingchanging magnetic field.
Because
to Lenz’s law, in a direction such as to oppose the motion that created it. These eddyan
charges are free to move in the copper tube, the moving magnet, creating
induced
currents emf in theincopper,
produced the copperwill tube
causewill a current
slow theto progress
flow. This of current
the magnetwill through
flow, the
according to Lenz’s law, in a direction such as to oppose the motion
tube, while, because currents cannot be created in the insulator of the plastic tube, the that created it.
These
magneteddy doescurrents produced
not experience as in
muchthe opposition
copper tubeaswill slow the
it travels progress
through of the tube.
the plastic magnet
through the tube, while, because currents cannot be created in
This means that the magnet will take noticeably longer to fall through the copper tube. the insulator of the plastic
tube, the magnet does not experience as much opposition as it travels through the plastic
tube. This means that the magnet will take noticeably longer to fall through the copper
tube.
10 At P, the ends of the coil are cutting magnetic flux at a maximum rate, so the induced
emf will be at a maximum. At Q the emf will reduce to zero as the coil ends are
35 At P, the ends
travelling of the
parallel coilmagnetic
to the are cuttingfieldmagnetic
and not flux
cuttingat aflux.
maximum
At R therate,
emfsowilltheagain
inducedbe a
emf will bebut,
maximum at abecause
maximum. At Qofthe
the ends theemfcoilwill
are reduce to zero as
now travelling coil endsdirection
in the opposite are to
travelling parallel
that at P, the to the
emf will magnetic
also be in thefield and not
opposite cuttingAt
direction. flux. At R
S, the theof
ends emfthewill
coilagain
are be
aagain
maximum
moving but, because
parallel the magnetic
to the ends of the coiland
field arethe
now travelling
induced emfinwillthebeopposite
zero. Atdirection
T the
to thatofatthe
ends the are
P,coil emfagain
will also be in
cutting flux theatopposite
a maximum direction.
rate and Atmoving
S, the ends
in theofsame
the coil are
again moving
direction as theyparallel
were to whenthe atmagnetic
P. This meansfield andthatthe
theinduced
inducedemf emfwill
willbebezero. At T the
a maximum
ends of same
and the the coil as are
at P.again cutting
The only flux at atomaximum
alternative correctly rateshowandthemoving
changesinistheB. same
direction as they were when at P. This means that the induced emf will be a maximum
and the same as at P. The only alternative to correctly show the changes is B.
11 The revolving coil will produce AC which will be supplied by the split-ring commutator
as a revolving
36 The fluctuatingcoil DCwill
supply.
produceThisACwillwhich
resultwill
in the
beCRO
supplied showing
by thea split-ring
display like B.
commutator
as a fluctuating DC supply. This will result in the CRO showing a display like B.
12
37 The moving
The moving magnet
magnet isis inducing
inducing eddy
eddy currents
currents in
in the
themetal
metaldisk,
disk,with
withthe
themagnetic
magneticfield
field
produced by these induced eddy currents
currents interacting
interacting with
withthe
thefield
fieldofofthe
themoving
moving
magnet,
magnet, to create a force that is causing
causing the
the disk
disk to
to turn.
turn.This
Thisisisthe
thesame
sameprinciple
principleasasisis
employed
employed in an AC
AC induction
induction motor.
motor.

V 1 n1 240 n1 6000 n 2 25
38
13 Using the transformer equation, ------ = ----- , ∴ ------------ = ----- . Thus ------------ = ----- = ------ .
Using
V 2 n2 6000 n 2 240 n1 1

39 The force on the wire is given by B I l sin θ = 0.5 × 5.0 × 0.7 sin 60° = 1.5 N.
14 The force on the wire is given by B I  sin   0.5  5.0  0.7 sin 60°  1.5 N.
40 When the current is switched on, the field will add inside the loop, with the resultant
higher magnetic field creating a force of repulsion, causing the wire to spread equally to
15 Whena the
form current is switched on, the field will add inside the loop, with the resultant
circle.)
higher magnetic field creating a force of repulsion, causing the wire to spread equally to
form a circle.)

38 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 38 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • ANSWERS

Free-response Questions

1 The amount of energy lost from a transmission wire is proportional to the square of the
current that flows through the wire. Considering that power is the product of voltage
and current, by transmitting the electrical energy at very high voltage the associated
current to transfer the equivalent power will be much smaller than when using a lower
voltage. This smaller current will mean reduced energy losses in the transmission lines.
The very high voltage can then be stepped down, closer to where it is to be used, using
transformers, to provide safer, more convenient voltages for use by consumers. The use
of a.c. makes transforming one voltage into another very easy and relatively efficient.
The use of a.c. and transformers helps to maximise the efficiency of the system, while
still supplying the energy safely for consumers to use, with the various electrical
devices containing further transformers to provide the desired voltages for the operation
of the many and varied components in modern consumer devices.

2 When the motor is operating at full speed, the coils of the conductor are cutting
magnetic flux as they spin and this induces a back-emf, ie. an emf opposing the driving
emf. This back-emf reduces the driving emf, resulting in a smaller current flowing into
the motor coils than if they were at rest. When the motor coils are at rest, there is no
back-emf, and hence, if the start-up resistor were not included, the current flowing into
the stationary motor would be too large. Without the start-up resistor, this large current
may damage equipment, or cause overheating, but is not required once the motor is
operating at full speed.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 39

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 39 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

3 (a) Considering the current direction, the wires will be attracted to each other.

(b)

Force
3 Length of wire X

(c)
The motor effect involves a current-carrying wire that passes through a magnetic
field experiencing a force that, when appropriately arranged, can be used to create
movement. A rectangular loop of conductor was supported so that it was free to
move around a central axis. The plane of the loop was set up horizontal, with bar
magnets arranged as shown. When the loop was attached to a d.c. power supply
and switched on, it was observed that the current flowing into the loop resulted in
one end of the loop near the bar magnet moving up, while the other end moved
down. When the current direction was reversed, the forces (torque) acting on the
loop, and its motion, were also observed to reverse. This, combined with the
observation that a larger current produced larger forces, clearly demonstrates the
motor effect.
Bar magnet
Loop of conductor

Bar magnet

Points to attach
d.c. power supply

4 The electrical generator has been one of the most influential developments in changing
the lifestyles of modern humans. Unlike batteries and early sources of electrical energy,
provided there is energy to turn the generator turbine, the electrical energy can be
continuously supplied. With the advent of the a.c. generator, it became possible to
produce the electrical energy where convenient and then use transformers, to minimise
energy losses, as the power is transferred to consumers. This has made it possible to
build very large power generators to supply large amounts of electrical energy to
consumers and, as a consequence, has led to increased use and dependence of modern
humans on a supply of electrical energy, but has also provided all of the modern
conveniences made possible by having electrical energy continuously available.
The great benefits to humans from the electrical devices now provided by large
generators have had an associated detrimental effect on the environment and human
populations. The ever-increasing demand for electrical energy from an expanding human
population has seen the development of different mechanisms to provide the energy to
turn the generator turbines. Hydro plants require large dams, often causing significant
environmental concerns; coal-fired stations require mining of fuel and the associated
emission of various pollutants that contribute significantly to unwanted greenhouse gas
emissions, while the problems with the waste from nuclear power plants are still
intractable. These difficulties have led to a search for cleaner forms of electrical energy
and improvements in both solar and wind technology.

40 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 40 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MOTORS AND GENERATORS • ANSWERS

Overall it can be seen that despite having provided an enormous benefit to humans,
the electrical generator has also created areas of concern for both the environment
and human societies.

5 (a) The brush provides an electrical connection between the rotating coil of the
generator and the stationary external circuit, allowing the generated emf to be
supplied to the external circuit.

(b) As the coils rotate in the magnetic fields of generators P and Q they both produce
an AC supply. As the coil of generator Q rotates, the ends of the coil cutting flux
are each attached to one-half of a split-ring commutator. As the coil rotates, the
split-ring connections to the rotating coil swap the brush connection to the external
circuit. This means that generator Q is the DC generator as the split-ring
commutator rectifies the AC generated by the coil into a DC supply, to cause
current to flow in one direction in the external circuit.

(c) The AC generated to supply large amounts of electrical power can easily and
efficiently have the voltage transformed, while DC transformers are very inefficient.
Considering that electrical power is given by VI, then by using a transformer to
step up the AC voltage, the current required to transfer the electrical power is
reduced. Since the power loss in the transmission line is given by RI2, by having
a smaller current the energy loss in heating of transmission lines is significantly
reduced. The AC can then be stepped down for safe use by consumers.

6 (a) Lenz’s law applies to a conductor that experiences a changing magnetic field, and
is due to conservation of energy. It states: ‘The direction of the induced emf is
such as to create a current in a direction to oppose the motion that created it’.

(b) (i) Based on Lenz’s law and the Right-hand grip rule, end X will be negative
while the rod is moving through the magnetic field as shown.

(ii) As the conductor moves through the magnetic field, the charged components
of the atoms of the metal rod produce magnetic fields that interact with the
external magnetic field, to create forces in opposite directions on the
oppositely-charged components of the atoms. Since a conductor allows
charges (electrons) to move easily, the internal forces created by the motion
of the metal rod through the magnetic field separate charge to opposite ends,
to create an induced emf over the ends of the moving metal rod, as long as
the rod continues to cut magnetic flux.

(c) Whenever an AC current flows through a coil of wire, the coil produces changing
magnetic fields. If a second conductor is placed near the coil carrying AC, the
changing magnetic field produced by the coil will induce an emf, and a current can
be produced in the second conductor without it actually being attached to the
supply of electrical energy. As these currents flow, they will lose energy in the
second conductor, causing it to heat up. With an appropriate arrangement of the
AC input and the second conductor, the induced currents can be quite large and the
heating of the second metal object significant, eg. the induction cooktop.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 41

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 41 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

can be produced in the second conductor without it actually being attached to the
supply of electrical energy. As these currents flow, they will lose energy in the
second conductor, causing it to heat up. With an appropriate arrangement of the
AC input and the second conductor, the induced currents can be quite large and
the heating of the second metal object significant, eg. the induction cooktop.
CHAPTER 2 • MOTORS AND GENERATORS

–7
F k I1 I2 2 × 10 × 2 × 2 × 0.35
31
7 Applying
Applying Ampere’s law, ----- = ---------------- , which gives F = ------------------------------------------------------
Ampere’s law,
Δl d 0.015
–5
=1.87
1.87×1010–5N.N.Based
Basedon onthe
thedirection
directionthe
thecurrent
currentwill
will flow
flow in
in each
each copper wire, i.e.
copper wire, i.e.
antiparallel
antiparallel (opposite
(opposite directions),
directions), the magnetic field
the magnetic field created
created byby the
thewires
wireswill
willbebeofof
greater
greater strength between the wires and they will be repelled from each other. That is,
strength between the wires and they will be repelled from each other. That is, the
the
–5
–5
initial magnetic force on the copper wires = 1.87 × 10 N away from each other.
initial magnetic force on the copper wires  1.87  10 N away from each other.

8 In the first investigation the magnet moving towards the solenoid will induce an emf in
32 In thethesolenoid loops and charge
first investigation will move
the magnet as this
moving emf isthe
towards established. By Lenz’s
solenoid will induce law,
an emfthe in
charges
the that loops
solenoid move and to induce
chargethewill
emfmove
moveasinthis
a direction to try and oppose
emf is established. the motion
By Lenz’s law, the
charges that move to induce the emf move in a direction to try and oppose theinmotion
that caused them to move. Because the ends of the solenoid are not connected the first
investigation,
that caused them a current
to move. cannot flow,the
Because so there
ends is
of unlikely to beare
the solenoid anynot
observable
connected effect.
in the
first investigation, a current cannot flow, so there is unlikely to be any observable
In the second investigation, the thick copper wire completes the circuit and the induced
effect.
emf produced by the moving magnet will create a current in the solenoid. The direction
Chapter 02 Pageof102the induced current willAMcreate a magnetic field completes
to oppose the the change creating it. This
Wednesday, February 10, 2010 9:49
In the second investigation, the thick copper wire circuit and the induced
will mean that, as the induced emf causes a current to flow in
emf produced by the moving magnet will create a current in the solenoid. The direction the solenoid loops, the
ofmagnetic field current
the induced createdwill by the current
create in the solenoid
a magnetic field to will
opposebe repelled by the
the change moving
creating it. This
C H A P Tmagnet,
E R 2 • withM O Tthe
O R Smagnetic
A N D G E Nforce
E R A T causing
ORS the solenoid to swing away.
will mean that, as the induced emf causes a current to flow in the solenoid loops, the
magnetic field created by the current in the solenoid will be repelled by the moving
magnet, with the magnetic force causing the solenoid to swing away.
339 (a) (a) By
By definition,
definition, an an ideal
ideal transformer
transformer isisone onewhere
wherethere
thereare arenonoenergy
energylosses
lossesandandthethe
energy into the primary coil
energy into the primary coil is conserved, is conserved, and
and an
an equal
equal amount
amount of
ofenergy
energy is made
is made
Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 101
available
available from fromthe thesecondary
secondarycoil. coil.This
Thismeans meansthat thatthethepower
powerdelivered
deliveredtoto thethe
primary
primary coil coilof ofthethetransformer
transformer(V (Vp pIpI),p),isisequal
equaltotothethepower
powerthatthatcan
can bebesupplied
supplied
from the secondary coil (V I ), that is, V I  V I . In a step-down
from the secondary coil (Vss Iss), that is, Vpp Ipp = Vss Iss. In a step-down transformer the transformer
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI the secondary
secondary coilcoil hashas fewer
fewer loopsloopsthanthan thethe primary
primary coil,
coil, resulting
resulting ininthethevoltage
voltage
supplied
supplied from fromthe thesecondary
secondarybeing beingless lessthanthanthethevoltage
voltagetotothe theprimary
primarycoil.coil.
Considering that V is greater than V and in an ideal
Considering that Vpp is greater than Vs s and in an ideal step-down transformer, step-down transformer,
VVpp IIpp=V Vss IIss,, the
the current
current drawn
drawnfrom fromthe thesecondary
secondarycoil coilwill
willbebegreater
greaterthanthanthethe
current
current supplied
suppliedtotothe theprimary
primarycoil,coil,
V I
i.e. i.e. -----p- = ----s .
Vs Ip

(b) For a transformer to work, the current flowing into the primary coil must produce
(b) aFor a transformer
changing magnetic to field
work,inthe current
order flowing
to induce into in
an emf thetheprimary coil must
secondary produce
coil. As AC
a changing magnetic field in order to induce an emf in the secondary
is naturally continually changing size and direction, the changing magnetic fields coil. As AC
is naturally
produced cancontinually changing in
easily be employed size and direction,
a transformer the changing
to change magnetic
the voltage of thefields
produced can easily be employed in a transformer to change
supply. In a true DC, the current flows in the same direction and, as a result, the voltage ofunless
the
supply.
the In the
size of a true DC, changes,
current the current
theflows in the same
DC produces direction
a steady and, field
magnetic as a result,
that
unless the size of the current changes, the DC produces a steady
always acts in the same direction. This steady magnetic field means that, unless magnetic field
that always
changes acts intothe
are made same
alter the direction. This steady
current flowing, magnetic
it is not possiblefield meansa that,
to induce current
in the secondary coil of a transformer with DC supplied to the primary. to induce a
unless changes are made to alter the current flowing, it is not possible
current in the secondary coil of a transformer with DC supplied to the primary.

34 Labelled sketch of apparatus:

42 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC
Bar magnets Physics
released from Computer with readout
set height above solenoid of induced voltage over
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 42
ends of solenoid 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
N
Computer interface with
MOTORS AND GENERATORS • ANSWERS

10 Labelled sketch of apparatus:

Bar magnets released from Computer with readout

set height above solenoid of induced voltage over
ends of solenoid
N
Computer interface with
attached voltage sensor
h Voltage vs Time

Solenoid made
from a single
length of wire
Voltage sensor attached to NOT TO SCALE
ends of wire making solenoid

As shown in the diagram, a data logger with a voltage sensor was attached to the ends
of a solenoid made from a continuous length of wire. The computer was set to record the
size of the induced voltage as bar magnets with north pole facing vertically down were
released from a measured height and allowed to fall through the centre of the solenoid. By
falling from a fixed height, the speed of the magnets as they passed through the solenoid
was a controlled variable, as was the direction of the changing field due to the orientation
of the magnets’ poles. The experiment involved using three identical bar magnets. In the
first trial a single bar magnet was dropped by itself and the data recorded.

The second trial involved two bar magnets held together using a strong elastic
band. The like poles were facing to increase the total strength of the magnetic
field produced. The magnets were released from the same height and the results
recorded.

The final trial involved three bar magnets held together by strong elastic bands, N
such that all the like poles were forced together to produce an even stronger
magnetic field. The magnets were again released from the same height and the results
for the induced voltage were recorded. Considering the solenoid was the same in each
trial, the length of conductor and number of loops that experience the changing magnetic
field produced by the falling magnets was the same in each trial. With the other controls,
the only thing that was varied in the experiment was the strength of the magnetic field.
The effect of varying the magnetic field on the induced voltage, and thus the size of the
current that can be provided to a particular circuit, was clearly demonstrated, with the
induced voltage reaching a higher value in successive trials as the strength of the
changing magnetic field increased.
(Note: A sensitive galvanometer or CRO could be used to replace the data-logger.)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 43

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 43 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

CHAPTER 3
Core Topic
1
From Ideas to Implementation
A person has a mass of 70.0 kg. What is the weight of the person at the Earth’s surface?

(A) 70.0 kg
Multiple-choice
(B) 70.0 N Questions
(C) 686 kg
(D) 686 N Past HSC Questions

26
1 At a particular moment, a positively charged particle is moving with velocity v in a
magnetic field as shown.

v Magnetic field
out of page

At this moment, what is the direction of the force on the positively charged particle?

(A) To the right

(B) To the left
(C) Into the page
(D) Out of the page

44 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 44

–3– 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

27
2 The resistance of mercury at various temperatures is shown in the graph.

0.16

Resistance (Ω)

0.08

0.00
0 2 4 6 8
Temperature (K)

Between which two temperatures does mercury always act as a superconductor?

(A) 0 K and 4.2 K

(B) 4.2 K and 4.5 K
(C) 4.5 K and 8.0 K
(D) 0 K and 8.0 K

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 45

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 45 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

3
28 The graph shows the intensity–wavelength relationship of electromagnetic radiation
28 emitted from
The graph a black
shows thebody
forcescavity.
experienced by an astronaut during a rocket launch into a
stable orbit.
1.0
0.8
Forces on astronautIntensity

0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Wavelength (nm)

In 1900, Planck proposed a mathematical formula that predicted an intensity–wavelength

relationship consistent with the experimental data.
S T U V W
The success of this formula depended Time
on which of the following hypotheses?

(A) Thetime
In which intensity of light
interval is dependent
was the on of
acceleration thethe
wavelength.
rocket the greatest?
(B) Light is quantised, with the energy of light quanta depending on the frequency.
(A) S–T
(C) Light is a wave whose intensity is readily expressed using mathematical formulae.
(B) T–U
(D) Light is quantised, with the energy of the light quanta depending on the size of the
(C) cavity
U– V from which it is emitted.
(D) V–W

29
4 The signal from a microwave transmitter can be thought of as a beam of photons.
The photons from a particular transmitter have a wavelength of 3.5 × 10–2 m.

What is the approximate energy of each photon?

(A) 7.73 × 10–44 J

(B) 5.68 × 10–24 J
(C) 2.32 × 10–35 J
(D) 1.89 × 10–32 J

46 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

– 11 –
–5–
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 46 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

5
30 Which of the following statements best describes the reason why some materials become
superconducting at very low temperatures?

(A) The ions in the superconductor form a regular crystal lattice. There are long
channels through the lattice along which the electrons can pass without colliding
with the lattice.
(B) Vibrations of the crystal lattice are so small that they do not interfere with the
motion of the electrons.
(C) Electrons in a superconductor have very low energy. Their energy is so low that
they cannot transfer energy to the crystal lattice in a collision.
(D) Electrons ‘pair up’. These electron pairs pass through the crystal lattice of the
superconductor without losing energy in collisions with the lattice.

31
6 Which of the following describes an n-type semiconductor?
31 Which of the following describes an n-type semiconductor?
(A) A semiconductor doped to produce extra free electrons
(A)
(B) A semiconductor doped to produce extraelectrons
remove free free electrons
(B)
(C) A semiconductor doped to remove
producefree
extraelectrons
holes
(C)
(D) A
Ansemiconductor doped to produce extra holes
undoped semiconductor
(D) An undoped semiconductor
32 Which of the following graphs shows the behaviour of a superconducting material?
32
7 Which of the following graphs shows the behaviour of a superconducting material?
(A) (B)
(A) (B)

Resistance Resistance
(Ω) (Ω)
Resistance Resistance
(Ω) (Ω)
0 Temperature (K) 0 Temperature (K)
0 Temperature (K) 0 Temperature (K)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 47

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 47 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

33
8 The diagram shows the side view of a simple cathode ray tube.
33 The diagram shows the side view of a simple cathode ray tube.
R
+
R
+
Fluorescent
screen
Fluorescent
screen
–
R
–
R
What is the function of the components labelled R?
What is the function of the components labelled R?
(A) To produce cathode rays
(A)
(B) To produce cathode
stop cathode raysrays
striking the screen
(B)
(C) To stop cathode
deflect rays striking
the cathode the screen
rays vertically
(C) To
(D) To deflect
deflect the
the cathode
cathode rays
rays vertically
horizontally
(D) To deflect the cathode rays horizontally
34 During the early 1950s most transistors were manufactured using germanium.
34
9 During the early 1950s most transistors were manufactured using germanium.
Why was germanium used instead of silicon?
Why was germanium used instead of silicon?
(A) Silicon is more brittle than germanium.
(A)
(B) Silicon is more
Germanium brittle
could than germanium.
be more easily produced in a purified form.
(B)
(C) Germanium could be more
is a more easilyraw
abundant produced in a purified form.
material.
(C)
(D) Germanium
Silicon does is a more
not retainabundant raw material.
its semiconductor properties at high temperatures.
(D) Silicon does not retain its semiconductor properties at high temperatures.

48 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

– 10 –
– 10 –
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 48 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

35
10 A student carried out an experiment during which light of different frequencies was
shone onto a metal surface to produce photoelectrons.

The student measured the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons as the
frequency of light was altered.

The relationship between the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons and the
frequency of the light incident on the metal surface is given by:

Ek(max) = hf − ø

where
Ek(max) = maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons
f = frequency of light used
h = Planck’s constant
ø = a constant dependent on the metal used.

How could the student best analyse the data to determine a value for Planck’s constant?

(A) Plot Ek(max) against f and find the gradient of the line of best fit.
(B) Plot Ek(max) against ø and find the gradient of the line of best fit.
(C) Plot Ek(max) against f and find the intercept of the line of best fit.
(D) Plot Ek(max) against ø and find the intercept of the line of best fit.

36
11 Which of the following did the Braggs investigate using X-ray diffraction?

(A) Cathode rays

(B) Crystal structure
(C) Photoelectric effect
(D) Superconductivity

37 In a first-hand investigation that you performed, you used a discharge tube containing a
Maltese Cross. You would have observed an image similar to the one shown below.

– 11 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 49

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 49 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(A) Cathode rays
(B) Crystal structure
(C) Photoelectric effect
C H A P T(D)
E R 3 Superconductivity
• F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

37
12 In a first-hand investigation that you performed, you used a discharge tube containing a
Maltese Cross. You would have observed an image similar to the one shown below.

Which of the following statements is a valid conclusion from the observations made in
this Maltese Cross investigation?

(A) Cathode rays pass through glass.

(B) Cathode rays pass through metals.
(C) Cathode rays are charged particles.
(D) Cathode rays travel in straight lines.

38
13 An n-type semiconductor is produced when silicon crystal is doped with small quantities
of phosphorus.

How will this doping change the crystal’s electrical conductivity?

(A) The conductivity will decrease because there are fewer holes in the valence band.
(B) The conductivity will increase because there are more holes in the valence band.
(C) The conductivity will decrease because there are fewer electrons in the conduction
band.
(D) The conductivity will increase because there are more electrons in the conduction
band.
–9–
39 Heinrich Hertz used a set-up similar to the one shown below to investigate the production
and detection of electromagnetic radiation.

Transmitter Receiver

50 HighS Uvoltage
CCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

source of
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
radio waves
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 50 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
(B) The conductivity will increase because there are more holes in the valence band.
(C) The conductivity will decrease because there are fewer electrons in the conduction
band.
(D) The conductivity will increase because there are more electrons in the conduction
band. F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

39
14 Heinrich Hertz used a set-up similar to the one shown below to investigate the production
and detection of electromagnetic radiation.

Transmitter Receiver

High voltage
source of
radio waves

A glass sheet was placed between the transmitter and receiver.

Which of the following observations is consistent with the photoelectric effect that Hertz
produced?

(A) Radio waves were blocked when the glass sheet was in place.
(B) Ultraviolet waves were blocked when the glass sheet was in place.
(C) The maximum spark length was longer when the glass sheet was in place.
(D) The maximum spark length was shorter when the glass sheet was in place.

– 10 –

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 51

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 51 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

40
15 A positively-charged ion travelling at 250 m s−1 is fired between two parallel charged
plates, M and N. There is also a magnetic field present in the region between the two
plates. The direction of the magnetic field is into the page as shown. The ion is travelling
perpendicular to both the electric and the magnetic fields.

The electric field between the plates has a magnitude of 200 V m−1. The magnetic field
is adjusted so that the ion passes through undeflected.

What is the magnitude of the adjusted magnetic field, and the polarity of the M terminal
relative to the N terminal?

Magnitude of magnetic Polarity of M

field (teslas) relative to N
(A) 0.8 positive
(B) 0.8 negative
(C) 1.25 positive
(D) 1.25 negative

52 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

– 11 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 52 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

Free-response Questions

Past HSC Questions

Marks
Question 126(6(6marks)
marks) Marks

Sir William Bragg and his son Sir Lawrence Bragg shared the Nobel prize for physics
in 1915 for their work on X-ray diffraction and crystal structure analysis.

(a) Describe ONE way in which an understanding of crystal structure has impacted 2
on science. (3 lines)*

(b) Outline the methods of X-ray diffraction used by the Braggs to determine the 4
structure of crystals. (8 lines)

Marks
Question 2†
Question 27*(6(6marks)
marks)

A student carried out an experiment on the photoelectric effect. The frequency of the
incident radiation and the energy of the photoelectrons were both determined from
measurements taken during the experiment.

The results obtained are shown in the table:

Frequency of incident radiation Energy of photoelectrons

(× 1014 Hz) (× 10 –19 J)
6.9 1.22
8.2 1.70
9.1 3.70
9.9 3.05
10.6 3.38
11.8 3.91

(a) Graph these results on the grid, including the line of best fit. 4
Question 2 continues

*Shows number of lines available in HSC answer booklet for this question.
†This is also a Physics Skills (9.1) question.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 53

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 53 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

6.9 1.22
8.2 1.70
9.1 3.70
C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O9.9
I M P L E M E N TAT I O N 3.05
10.6 3.38
Question 2 (continued) 11.8 3.91 Marks

(a) Graph these results on the grid, including the line of best fit. 4

Question 27 continues
(b) How could the reliability of the experiment be improved? (4 lines) 2
– 22 –

Question 3 (8 marks)

In the context of semiconductors, explain the concept of electrons and holes. (16 lines) 8

54 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 54 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

Marks
Question 429(6(6marks)
marks) Marks

A pair of parallel metal plates, placed in a vacuum, are separated by a distance

of 5.00 × 10−3 m and have a potential difference of 1000 V applied to them.

(a) Calculate the magnitude of the electric field strength between the plates. 1
(2 lines)

(b) Calculate the magnitude of the electrostatic force acting on an electron between 1
the plates. (2 lines)

(c) A beam of electrons is fired with a velocity of 3.00 × 106 m s−1 between the 4
plates as shown. A magnetic field is applied between the plates, sufficient to
cancel the force on the electron beam due to the electric field.

Beam of electrons +
1000 V
−

Calculate the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field required between
the plates to stop the deflection of the electron beam. (6 lines)

Marks
Marks
Question
Question 530
Question 30(6(3 marks)
(3marks)
marks)
Some
Some materials
materials become
become superconductors
superconductors when
when cooled
cooled to
to extremely
extremely low
low temperatures.
temperatures. 33
Identify THREE properties of superconductors. (6 lines)
Identify THREE properties of superconductors. (6 lines)

Question 631
Question 31(4(4 marks)
(4marks)
marks)
There
There are
are two
two areas
areas in
in which
which energy
energy savings
savings can
can be
be made
made by
by the
the use
use of
of superconductors.
superconductors. 44
These are:
These are:
•• electricity
electricity generation
generation and
and transmission;
transmission;
•• transportation.
transportation.
Discuss
Discuss how
how energy
energy savings
savings can
can be
be achieved
achieved in
in each
each of
of these
these two areas. (8
two areas. (8 lines)
lines)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 55

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 55 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

Marks
Question 732(6(6marks)
marks) Marks

(a) The following image shows a magnet hovering above a superconducting disk. 3

Explain why the magnet is able to hover above the superconductor. (8 lines)

(b) Compare the model for the conduction of electricity in metals at room 3
temperature with the model for conduction of electricity in superconductors
below the critical temperature. (8 lines)

Question 8 (4 marks)

Outline Thompson’s experiment to measure the charge/mass ratio of an electron. 4

(10 lines)

Marks
Question 934(5(5marks)
marks)

A physics student was conducting an investigation on the photoelectric effect. The

student used an infrared laser with a wavelength of 1.55 × 10−6 m for this investigation.

(a) Calculate the energy of a photon from this laser. (4 lines) 2

(b) When the laser light was shone onto a photo-cell, no current was detected. The 3
student increased the intensity of the light but still detected no current.

Explain this observation. (6 lines)

Marks
35 (6 marks)
Question 10 marks)

Describe Einstein’s contributions to Special Relativity and to Quantum Theory and 6

how these contributions changed the direction of scientific thinking in the Twentieth
Century. (14 lines)

56 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 56 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • Q U E S T I O N S

Marks
Question 11
Question 36 (4
(4 marks)
marks)

In a particle accelerator called a synchrotron, magnetic fields are used to control the 4
motion of an electron so that it follows a circular path of fixed radius.

Describe the changes required in the magnetic field to accelerate an electron to near
the speed of light. Support your answer with appropriate mathematical relationships.
(10 lines)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 57

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 57 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 3 • FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION

20A P T EThe
CH R 3 frequency
• F R O M I Dof
E Athe
S Tlight
O I M determines
P L E M E N T A Tthe
I O Nenergy
of the photon, and as the photon
energy increases, the amount of kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons also
increases,
Core Topic
ie. EK = hf – φ, where φ is the work function (the energy required to remove the electron
from the atom).

21 From Ideas to Implementation

The UV photons will release electrons from the zinc. The electrons are far easier to
remove from the negatively charged plate, where they are already tending to be pushed
Worked Answers
off, while on the positive plate, the work required to remove another electron is
increased.

22Planck’s work on black-body radiation led him to the proposition that light emitted from
Multiple-choice
hot objects wasQuestions
quantised. Einstein took on this idea to propose that light existed as tiny
bundles of energy, termed photons, with the energy of the photon, quantised,
1 A 2 A
proportional 3 B
to the frequency of the light. 4 B 5 D

23 n-type semiconductors
6 A 7 C are doped 8 C with Group9 B
5 elements, leaving 10 A
electrons free within
the silicon lattice. These electrons are easily promoted into the conduction band to
11 B 12 D
transfer current. 13 D
This corresponds to diagrams14 D 15 A
II and III respectively.

24 The temperatures required for present superconductors are very low, the best (highest)
Explanations
at December 2001 is 138 K.

25 Applying
1 It is believed that electrons
the right-hand rule, are
the forced
magneticto pair
fieldand are able
produced bytothetravel through
moving the charge
positive lattice
with negligible resistance when a material becomes a superconductor.
is into the page on the right, and out of the page on the left. Thus fields add on the left
and cancel on the right, to produce a force to the right.
26 Applying the right-hand rule, the magnetic field produced by the moving positive
charge is into the page on the right, and out of the page on the left. Thus fields add on
the left as
2 Behaves anda superconductor
cancel on the right,
whentoresistance
produce areaches
force tozero,
the right.
ie. between 4.2 and 0 K.
27 Behaves as a superconductor when resistance reaches zero, ie. between 4.2 and 0 K.
3 The proposal by Planck was that the energy was quantised, with the energy carried by
28 light
Theproportional
proposal by to
Planck was that of
the frequency thethe
energy
light. was quantised, with the energy carried by
light proportional to the frequency of the light.

hc
29 λλ
4 =3.5 10–2–2m.
3.5×10 Usingc c=f fλλ,,and
m.Using andEE= hf, = ------ 
then EE
hf, then = 5.68
5.68 ×10
–24
10–24joules.
joules.
λ

30 Superconductors
5 Superconductorsare
arebelieved
believedtoto result
result when
when electrons
electrons pair
pair andand
areare able
able to travel
to travel
unimpeded through the crystal lattice.
unimpeded through the crystal lattice.

31 An n-type semiconductor is doped with a Group 5 element to provide extra electrons in

6 An then-type semiconductor
silicon lattice. is doped with a Group 5 element to provide extra electrons in
the silicon lattice.

32 When the temperature of a material that will behave as a superconductor is reduced, the
resistance
7 When of the material
the temperature reducesthat
of a material until a certain
will behavecritical temperature is reduced,
as a superconductor reached. the
Once
the temperature
resistance reducesreduces
of the material to the critical temperature,
until a certain critical the resistanceissuddenly
temperature reduces
reached. Once the to
zero and remains
temperature reduceszero
to theatcritical
temperatures belowthe
temperature, theresistance
critical temperature. This is
suddenly reduces to shown
zero andin
graph C.
remains zero at temperatures below the critical temperature. This is shown in graph C.

138 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

58 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 58 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 03 Page 139 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 10:21 AM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • A N S W E R S

FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION • ANSWERS

8 The components are two metal plates to create an electric field. With polarity as shown,
Chapter 03 Page 139 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 10:21 AM

33 the electric
The field are
components willtwo
actmetal
vertically
platesdown. The an
to create negative
electriccharge
field. on thepolarity
With cathodeasrays
shown,
(electrons)
the will result
electric field in vertically
will act them being deflected
down. verticallycharge
The negative up towards
on thethe top plate,
cathode raysdue to
FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION • ANSWERS
(electrons)
the electricwill result
field in them
created beingthe
between deflected
plates. vertically up towards the top plate, due to
the electric field created between the plates.

33
34 9 ItItThe components
isis far
far easier to
easier are two
to obtain
obtain metalsample
aa pure
pure platesof
sample to germanium
of create an electric
germanium thanititfield.
than With
isistotoobtain
obtain polarity
pure as shown,
puresilicon.
silicon.
the electric field will act vertically down. The negative charge on the cathode rays
(electrons) will result in them being deflected vertically up towards the top plate, E k +due φ to
35
10 Rearrange
Rearrange
the electric the
the equation
equation
field created for the
the photoelectric
forbetween the plates.effect, that is, is, E . k + φ = hf, or h = --------------- .
f
From this it can be seen that by graphing the results of the maximum kinetic energy of
34 the It is far
From thiseasier
it cantobeobtain
photoelectrons seen that
versus
a pure
the by
sample
graphing
frequency
of the
germaniumofthan
of theresults
light used, thethe it is to obtain
maximum
slope of kinetic
pure silicon.of
the lineenergy
will be
the photoelectrons
Planck’s constant and versus the frequency
the x-intercept of the
allows the light
work used, functionthe φslopeto beofdetermined.
the line will be
Thus,
E + φ
35 plotting
Planck’s
Rearrange the against
Econstant
k(max) and the
equation the
f, for gradient
x-intercept
the of the line
allows
photoelectric the of
work
effect, best fitis,will
function
that Ek allow

+ φto=be Planck’s
or h =constant
hf,determined. k
--------------- .
toThus,
be determined. f
plotting Ek(max) against f, the gradient of the line of best fit will allow Planck’s
From this it can be seen that by graphing the results of the maximum kinetic energy of
constant to be determined.
36 The the Braggs
photoelectrons
were a fatherversusand thesonfrequency of the lightcrystal
who investigated used, the slope using
structure of the X-ray
line will be
Planck’s
crystallography. constant and the x-intercept allows the work function φ to be determined. Thus,
11 The plottingBraggs wereagainst
Ek(max) a fatherf, andthe gradient
son who of the line ofcrystal
investigated best fitstructure
will allow Planck’s
using X-ray constant
37 The to be determined.
sharp
crystallography. shadow created indicates that, in the absence of electric or magnetic fields,
the cathode rays travel in straight lines.
36 The Braggs were a father and son who investigated crystal structure using X-ray
12 crystallography.
The
38 Phosphorus sharp shadow
has onecreated indicatesshell
more valence that,electron
in the absence
than silicon. of electricWhenorpure magnetic
siliconfields,
is the
cathode
doped withrays travel
small in straight
quantities of lines.
phosphorus, the conductivity will increase because of the
37 extra
The electrons
sharp shadow created
available in theindicates
lattice.that, in the absence of electric or magnetic fields,
the cathode rays travel in straight lines.
13 Phosphorus has one more valence shell electron than silicon. When pure silicon is doped
39 The glass sheet will prevent some of the ultraviolet reaching the receiver but will have
with
38 little small quantities
Phosphorus hastheone of phosphorus,
more valence the conductivity
shell electron will
thanspark increase
silicon. When becausesilicon
of the extra
impact on radio waves. This means that the length willpure
be shorter is
electrons
doped with available
small in the lattice.
(weaker) when the quantities
glass sheetofisphosphorus,
in place. the conductivity will increase because of the
extra electrons available in the lattice.
40
14 ForThethe ions
glass not will
sheet to beprevent
deflected, some theofmagnetic force reaching
the ultraviolet must be equal and opposite
the receiver but willtohave the
39 The glass sheet will prevent some of the ultraviolet Ethat 200 reaching the receiver but will have
little impact
electric on the radio
= waves. This means = --- = the- spark
-------- = length will bethe
shorter
little impact on the radio waves. This means that the spark length will be shorter of
force, i.e. Bqv qE. Therefore B 0.8 teslas. With direction
(weaker) when the glass sheet is in place. v 250
(weaker) when the glass sheet is in place.
the magnetic field as shown, the positively charged ions will experience a force UP the
page. This means that the electric field must create a force DOWN the page, i.e. the top
40 For
15 For theions ions nottotobebedeflected,
deflected, themagnetic magneticforce forcemust mustbebe equal and opposite to to
thethe
platethe M mustnot be positive relativethe to N. equal and opposite
E 200
electricforce,
electric force,i.e.i.e. Bqv = qE. Therefore B = --- = --------- = 0.8 teslas. With the direction of
v 250
the magnetic field as shown, the positively charged ions will experience a force UP the
With
page.the Thisdirection
means of thatthethemagnetic
electric field
field as
mustshown,
createthea positively
force DOWN charged ions will
the page, i.e. the top
Free-response
experience a Answers
force UP the
plate M must be positive relative to N. page. This means that the electric field must create a force
DOWN the page, i.e. the top plate M must be positive relative to N.
1 (a) Electromagnetic (radio).

(b) When the Answers

Free-response switch was closed a spark discharged between the terminals of the
emitting loop. Hertz noticed that the second sympathetic loop would also spark
between the terminals when it was oriented in the right direction, indicating that
1 (a) energy Electromagnetic (radio). by the radiation travelling from the emitter to the
had been transferred
second loop.
(b) When the switch was closed a spark discharged between the terminals of the
2 (a) Line emitting loop. Hertz
B represents noticed that thematerial.
a superconducting second sympathetic loop would also spark
between the terminals when it was oriented in S Uthe
C C Eright
S S O direction,
N E H S C • indicating
P H Y S I C S that
59
energy had been transferred by the Eradiation travelling from the
xcel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
emitter to the139
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1
second loop.Excel Success One HSC Physics
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 59 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
2 (a) Line B represents a superconducting material.
C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

Free-response Questions

1 (a) An understanding of crystal structure has provided significant advances in many

areas. Our knowledge of crystal structure has allowed an understanding of
conduction through metallic resistors to be developed, and led to production of
doped silicon crystals to provide the particular electrical properties that have
allowed the development of the microprocessor, so important in the modern
computer.

(b) The X-ray diffraction method involves directing a beam of X-rays at the subject
for study, and then examining the way the X-rays, reflected from the various layers
of atoms making up the target, interfere with each other to produce an interference
pattern. By analysing the distances between the maxima in the interference pattern
of X-rays, and then applying the appropriate mathematical relationships, the
Braggs were able to determine the distances between, and arrangement of, the
atoms in the subject.

2 (a) Graph of data from experimental results:

Kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons for different frequencies of incident light

3
EK of photoelectrons (× 10–19 J)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Frequency of incident radiation (× 1014 Hz)

(b) The reliability of the experiment could be improved by:

• repeating each trial several times and using the mean value of the results
collected;
• increasing the range of frequencies used, including those between the values
used and particularly a frequency of about 5 to 6  1014 Hz.

60 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 60 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • A N S W E R S

3 The concept of electrons and holes in semiconductors refers to the primary mechanism
by which charge (current) is transferred through the semiconductor. By doping pure
silicon with the appropriate quantity of impurity from Group 3 or 5 elements, the
different methods of conduction can be achieved.
If a Group 5 element is used as the dopant, the fifth electron is unable to bind into the
silicon crystal lattice and is easily mobilised to become a current. Thus silicon doped in
this way, eg. with arsenic, forms an n-type semiconductor and uses these easily mobilised
electrons as the primary charge carriers to transfer current through the semiconductor.
If a Group 3 element, eg. gallium, is used to dope pure silicon, the dopant has one less
electron than required to bind into the silicon lattice and thus leaves a region of positive
charge in the lattice, ie. a hole. An electron can fall into this hole and the hole will drift
through the lattice as a positive current. The holes acting as acceptors to electrons are the
primary October
charge carriers in the p-type semiconductors produced using a Group 3 element
Chapter Chapter
03 Page03
151Page 151 Tuesday,
Tuesday, October 26, 201026, 2010
2:07 PM2:07 PM
as a dopant.
Thus the concept of holes and electrons relates to the way current flows in the n- and
p-type semiconductors and is the result ofFthe
ROMnumber
F RI D ofTE OAelectrons
O EMA SI D SI MT PO L IEMMinvolved
PELNETMA ET NI OT from
A T I•O Nthe
N A N•Satoms
WAENRSSW E R S
forming the crystal structures when pure silicon is doped with particular impurities.

V V- 1000 1000
4 29
29 (a) (a)
(a) The The electric
The electric
electric field
fieldcan
field canbe can
be be calculated
calculated
calculated usingusing
using E = E---- == --- = ------------------
------------------ 2 5×V10m5 –1
-3 = –2-3 ×=10 V. m–1.
d d 5 × 10
–
5 × 10
5 –1
The electric
The electric field field
betweenbetween
the plates is 2.0is×2.0
the plates 1055×V10m–1–1 V. m (+ to . (+–) to –)
The electric field between the plates is 2.0  10 V m . ( to –)
(b) (b) The force
The force actingacting
on anonelectron
an electron is given
is given by Feby= F = qe E,
qee E,
(b) The force acting on an electron is
–19 given by F
5 e  q e E, –14
therefore F = (–1.6
= (–1.6 × 10 × 10 ) × (2 5× 103.2
–19 ) =×3.2 × –14
–14 10 N topositive
the positive plate.
thereforetherefore FF  (–1.6  10–19)) ×(2(2×1010)5)= 3.2 1010 NN to to thethe positiveplate.
plate.
–14
The The electron
The electron
electron would
would would experience
experience
experience aaforcea force
force ofof3.2 ×3.2
3.2of 10 × 10
–14
10–14 NN towards N towards
towards the the positive
thepositive
positive plate.plate.
plate.

(c) (c)
(c) For
For electrons
For electrons
electrons to
to continue
tocontinue
continue without
without
without deflection,
deflection,
deflection, FFmag magmust
Fmust
mag be must be equal
beequal
equal to .FThis
totoFelec
Felec
. elec
. This
5
E2.0 ×2.0 10 × 10 - 
5
that q E = B thus, EB 
= --- = --------------------- = 6.67 ×10 –2
10–2T.
This means that q E q v,
means that qeE = eeB qe v, thus,
 e thus, B
B = --- = v---------------------6- = 6.67 6 10–2
×6.67 T. T.
v 3.0 ×3.0 10 × 10
Felec acts up,
actsso F somustFmag act down the page.
the To achieve this thethis
magnetic field field
Felec F
acts
elec up, soup,Fmag
mag must
must act down
act down the page. page. To achieve
To achieve the magnetic
this the magnetic field
will need
will to actto
need vertically into the
act vertically page.
into the Thus
page. the required
Thus magnetic
the required field isfield is
magnetic
will need to act vertically into the page. Thus the required magnetic field is
6.67  10–2 –2
T vertically
× 10 into the
intopage.
6.67 6.67
× 10–2 T vertically
T vertically into the the page.
page.

5 30
Three properties of superconductors are: are:
30 ThreeThree properties
properties of superconductors
of superconductors are:
1. 1.They offer offer
negligible electrical resistance, allowing electric currents to travel
1. TheyThey negligible
offer negligible electrical
electrical resistance,
resistance, allowing
allowing electric
electric currents
currents to travel
to travel
through them
through with
them negligible
with energy
negligible loss.
energy loss.
through them with negligible energy loss.
2. 2.They produce currents withinwithin
themselves to prevent magnetic fieldsfields
from entering
2. TheyThey produce
produce currents
currents themselves
within themselves to prevent
to prevent magnetic
magnetic fields fromfrom entering
entering
them,them,
causing a magnet
causing to
a magnetbe repelled (Meissner effect).
them, causing a magnet to betorepelled
be repelled (Meissner
(Meissner effect).
effect).
3. 3.They become superconductors at a certain specific, low temperature, and will
3. TheyThey become
become superconductors
superconductors at a certain
at a certain specific,
specific, low temperature,
low temperature, and will
and will
remain as superconductors
remain as as
superconductorslongas as their
long as temperature
their remains
temperature below
remains this critical
below this critical
remain as superconductors as long as their temperature remains below this critical
temperature where
temperature they first became a superconductor as the temperature was
temperature wherewhere
they they first became
first became a superconductor
a superconductor as theastemperature
the temperature
was was
reduced.
reduced.
reduced.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 61

31 31 If problems
If problems involved
involved with with
their their
cost, cost, the energy
the energy required
required to produce
to produce them,them, andvery
and the the very
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1
low temperatures Excel Success
presentlyOne HSC Physics
involved, canbeallovercome,
be overcome, superconductors
low temperatures presently involved, can all superconductors offeroffer
enormous opportunities to reduce energy losses and improve
enormous 61opportunities to reduce energy losses and improve the efficiency of and
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd
the efficiency of and
22/12/2016 2:09 PM
performance
performance of devices
of devices usingusing electricity
electricity and magnetism.
and magnetism.
C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

6 If problems involved with their cost, the energy required to produce them, and the very
low temperatures presently involved, can all be overcome, superconductors offer
enormous opportunities to reduce energy losses and improve the efficiency of and
performance of devices using electricity and magnetism.

In electrical generation and transmission, the benefits in energy reductions using

superconductors might be:

• With no resistance and electrical power losses equal to RI2, the currents flowing
through the generator itself, and the transmission lines, could be very large, but
still lose negligible electrical energy. As such, there would be far greater efficiency
in the generation and transmission of electrical energy.

• Superconductors could also be used to store electrical energy, allowing the

generator to operate more efficiently and be more effective. With no energy lost by
currents in superconductors, they could be used to store energy when excess is
available, and then provide energy when the demand increases.

In transportation, superconductors are already playing a role in an attempt to waste less

energy and provide greater efficiency for transport systems.

• The Maglev train uses superconductors in its design to allow very powerful
magnetic fields to be produced. The currents required to produce these magnetic
fields would heat conventional conductors, but with the superconductor, the large
currents can be produced and maintained with negligible loss.

• The electrical energy supplied to the Maglev train allows the magnetic fields
created to both propel the train and levitate it above the track. This significantly
reduces friction, compared to a train in contact with the track and allows energy to
be more efficiently converted to the kinetic energy of the train.

The fact that superconductors are so expensive and require such low temperatures
retards their wider application, but the opportunities encourage continued research so
that maybe cheaper, higher temperature superconductors can be found, and more of their
benefits begin to be realised.

62 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 62 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • A N S W E R S

7 (a) This behaviour is known as the Meissner effect. As the temperature drops below
the critical temperature, a property of superconductors is that they prevent
magnetic fields from entering them. As a result, the hovering magnet is being
repelled by a magnetic field created by the currents flowing in the superconductor.
This upward magnetic force is equal to the weight force of the magnet, resulting in
it ‘hovering’, held above the superconducting disk. Because no energy is lost by
the current flowing in the superconductor, the magnet will continue to hover as
long as the superconducting disk remains below the critical temperature.

(b) Both metals and superconductors rely on a particular arrangement of the nuclei in
the crystal lattice to allow conduction of currents. The major difference is that in
metals, single electrons move independently in the current, with some of their
electrical energy lost as they are involved in interactions with the nuclei, whereas,
in a superconductor, the electrons move in ‘Cooper’ pairs with their interactions
with the nuclei actually allowing them to move through the crystal lattice with no
loss of electrical energy.

A metal is described as a ‘close-packed’ crystal lattice of metal nuclei immersed in

a ‘sea’ of electrons. The model for conduction in metals suggests that when an
electric field is applied over the metal, the valence electrons are relatively free to
drift through the lattice of metal nuclei, but lose electrical energy to heat when
they are involved in interactions with nuclei. The fact that the valence electron
orbits of adjacent nuclei basically overlap explains the generally low electrical
resistance of metals.

In a superconductor below the critical temperature, the electrons, according to the

BCS theory, come together to form ‘Cooper pairs’. The interactions of these
Cooper pairs with the nuclei allow the electrons to move through the
superconductor lattice with negligible resistance. Below the critical temperature,
the model for conduction suggests that a current of Cooper pairs will be able to
flow through the superconductor with negligible resistance and no loss of energy.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 63

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 63 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N

8 Thomson used a specially designed cathode ray tube that had been highly evacuated.
The tube, as shown in the sketch, had a pair of parallel metal plates that could be
attached to an external voltage to produce a uniform electric field between them. A set
of Helmholtz coils was also employed to create a magnetic field in the same region as
the electric field created by the metal plates. When neither field was being used, the
cathode rays (electrons) travelled in a straight line to produce a bright spot on the
fluorescent screen as shown. Both the magnetic and electric fields were arranged to
create a force perpendicular to the direction of the electron beam.

Sketch of apparatus
Metal plates Helmholtz coils
Cathode Fluorescent
screen

Anode
P.L. Roberson 2003

The basis for the experiment can be outlined as follows: With only the magnetic field
acting, a measurement of the resultant deflection from the straight-line path of electrons
to the fluorescent screen was made, allowing the radius of the beam in the magnetic
field to be determined. Without any change in the magnetic field, Thomson then
applied a variable voltage to the metal plates to produce an electric field. The voltage
was adjusted until the electric field produced a force on the electrons, equal and
opposite to the force created by the magnetic field. This resulted in no deflection of the
beam of electrons (as for no fields). Thomson then applied the following theory to
calculate a value for the charge to mass ratio of the electrons in the cathode rays: In the
first part, the magnetic force acted centripetally on the electrons, i.e.,
mv2 v q
Fc  FB,  B q v, or  .
r Br m
E
From the second part, FE  FB, qE  Bqv or v  B . Combining this with the first
E q
part gives 2  . The value of r could be determined from measurement of the
Br m
deflection of the beam made in the first part, and the values of E and B could be
determined from the measured current, voltage, and the dimensions of the components
used. This allowed Thomson to use his results and the final equation to calculate the
q
m ratio for electrons.

64 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 64 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • ANSWERS

Chapter 03 Page 154 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 10:21 AM

F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N TAT I O N • A N S W E R S
CHAPTER 3 • FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION

9 (a) The energy of a photon is given by E  h f, and c  f λ ,

34 (a) The energy of a photon is given by E = h f, and c = f λ ,
–34 8
hc 6.63 × 10 × 3 × 10
∴ E = ------ = ---------------------------------------------------- = 1.282 × 10–19 J.
λ 1.55 × 10
–6

The energy
The energy of
of aaphoton
photonfrom
fromthe laser= 1.28
thelaser 1.28 10–19 joules.
× 10 joules.

(b)
(b) In
In order
order to
to release
release ananelectron
electrontotoregister
registeraacurrent,
current,the
thefrequency
frequencyofofthe theindividual
individual
photon must be greater than the threshold frequency (required to
photon must be greater than the threshold frequency (required to have sufficient have sufficient
photon
photon energy)
energy) to to allow
allowthethephoton
photontotoprovide
provideenough
enoughenergy
energytotoovercome
overcomethe thework
work function
function (φ) binding
() binding the electron
the electron to aninatom
to an atom in the material
the material of the photocell.
of the photocell. There
There is one photoelectron produced per photon absorbed. Unless
is one photoelectron produced per photon absorbed. Unless the photon energy is the photon
energy
high is high
enough enough
it will makeit will make no how
no difference difference
intensehow
the intense the beamthe
beam becomes; becomes;
the photocell will still not release any electrons to register as a current.
photocell will still not release any electrons to register as a current. The student’s The
student’s observations
observations can be explained
can be explained by thefrequency
by the threshold threshold for
frequency for the
the material of the
material ofbeing
photocell the photocell
greater than being
thegreater
frequency than
ofthe
thefrequency of the photons
photons produced by the laser, i.e.
produced
the by the laser,
work function of thei.e. the work
material function
making of photocell
up the the material makingthan
is greater up the energy
photocell
of a photonisproduced
greater than the laser.
by the energy of a photon produced by the laser.

10 Einstein was responsible for the development of the Special theory of relativity, based
35 Einstein was responsible for the development of the Special theory of relativity, based on
on
thethe constancy
constancy of the
of the speed
speed of light,
of light, irrespective
irrespective of of
thethe frame
frame of of reference
reference in in which
which it
it is
is measured.
measured. TheThe Special
Special theory
theory related
related toto inertial(non-accelerated)
inertial (non-accelerated)frames framesofofreference
reference
and
and suggested
suggested strange
strange behaviours
behaviours resulting
resulting from
from very
very high
high speeds.
speeds. ThisThis included
included timetime
dilation, length contraction and mass mass dilation,
dilation, observed
observed for for objects
objects travelling
travelling atat speeds
speeds
approaching the speed of light. The Special theory also developed
approaching the speed of light. The Special theory also developed the relationship the relationship
2
between mass
between mass andand energy,
energy, withwith EE  = mc
mc2 aa direct
direct outcome.
outcome. Einstein
Einstein waswas the
the first
first to
to give
give
quantum theory a real basis for acceptance in his 1905 paper
quantum theory a real basis for acceptance in his 1905 paper on the photoelectricon the photoelectric effect.
He incorporated Planck’s idea of quantised energy and suggested light consisted of
effect. He incorporated Planck’s idea of quantised energy and suggested light consisted
photons with a quantum of energy given by E = hf. Einstein’s suggestions, and the
of photonshewith
equation a quantum
produced of energy
to explain given by E effect,
the photoelectric hf. Einstein’s suggestions,
were to prove and the
a stunning
equation
success inheexplaining
produced the to explain
observed theresults
photoelectric effect, were
in experiments on theto prove a stunning
photoelectric effect.
success in explaining the observed results in experiments on the photoelectric effect.
Einstein’s explanation had shown that the emission of a photoelectron was related to the
Einstein’s explanation had shown that the emission of a photoelectron was related to the
frequency of the photons rather than the intensity of the light (as predicted by classical
frequency of the photons rather than the intensity of the light (as predicted by classical
physics). This clearly supported Planck’s idea of quantised energy and created a change
physics). Thisthinking.
in scientific clearly supported
The Special Planck’s
theoryidea of quantised
proved valuableenergy and created
in providing a change
an explanation
in 2
forscientific
the sourcethinking. Thefrom
of energy Special theory proved
radioactive decay,valuable
with E in= mcproviding
showing an explanation
that mass and for
2
energy
the were
source of equivalent
energy fromand able to bedecay,
radioactive changedwithfrom
E  one
mc to the other.
showing thatThe
massidea
andthat
energy
matterequivalent
were could be created
and ablefromto beenergy
changed changed
from onescientific thinking
to the other. Theand ideawas
thatfundamental
matter couldin
be created from energy changed scientific thinking and was fundamental in providingof
providing an understanding of how the Big Bang theory can explain the formation an
the universe.
understanding of how the Big Bang theory can explain the formation of the universe.
The
The work
work ofof Einstein
Einstein and
and the
the development
development of of Quantum
Quantum and and Relativity
Relativity theories
theories began
began
the period
the period known
known asas Modern
Modern Physics
Physics and
and altered
altered the
the way
way scientists
scientists did
did their
their work,
work, and
and
the rules they applied toto make
make predictions.
predictions. As
As more
more andand more
more experimental
experimentalevidence
evidence
supported and
supported and verified
verified predictions
predictions arising
arising from
from the
the theories,
theories, they
they eventually
eventually grewgrew to
to be
be
the paradigms for modern physics and the basis for the majority of research
the paradigms for modern physics and the basis for the majority of research carried out carried out
during the 20th century.
during the 20th century.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 65

154 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 65 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 03 Page 155 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 10:21 AM

Chapter 03 Page 155 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 10:21 AM

FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION • ANSWERS

C H A P T E R 3 • F R O M I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N T A TF R
I OONM I D E A S T O I M P L E M E N T A T I O N • ANSWERS

36 The magnetic field in the synchrotron produces a centripetal force on the electrons to
ensureThe
11 they travel infield
magnetic a curving path of fixed radius. This gives rise to the relationship
36 The magnetic field inin the
the synchrotron
synchrotron produces
producesaacentripetal
centripetalforce
forceon onthe
theelectrons
electronstoto
ensure they
ensure they travel
travel inin aa curving
curving path
pathofoffixed
fixedradius.
radius.This
Thisgives
givesrise
risetotothetherelationship
relationship
mv 22 mv
= FB mv mv
FFcc B, ∴ ---------= BBqqv,v,ororBB= ------- .
rr 2 qr
qr
mv mv
Fc = FB, ∴ --------- = B q v, or B = ------- .
Considering that the
Considering that ther radius
radius of the electron pathqris path
of the electron fixedisaccording to the dimensions
fixed according of the of
to the dimensions
synchrotron, (rs), and the
the synchrotron, (r ),charge
and theoncharge
the electron
on the (q e) is constant
electron (qe) is and does and
constant not does
change,notit
can beConsidering
seen that the thes radius
thatstrength of of
thethe electronfield
magnetic path (B)
is fixed according
required to to the dimensions
maintain the circular of the
change, it can be seen that the strength of the magnetic field (B) required to maintain
path synchrotron,
in the synchrotron (rs), and the charge
is directly on the electron
proportional to the(q e) is constant
momentum of and does not change, it
the electrons,
the circular
can be seen path the
that in the synchrotron
strength of the is directlyfield
magnetic proportional
(B) to the
required to momentum
maintain theofcircular
the
that is, me v = ks B, where ks is constant, equal to the product of qe and rs .
electrons,
path in thethat is, me v iskdirectly
synchrotron s B, where ks is constant,
proportional to the equal to the product
momentum of the of qe and rs .
electrons,
As thethat = ks B, where
is, me v increase
electrons ks is energy
in kinetic constant,andequal to the product
are accelerated of qe and that
to velocities rs . are a
As the electrons increase in kinetic energy and are accelerated to velocities that are a
significant fraction of the speed of light, the mass of the electrons increases relative to the
significant
As thesynchrotron
electrons fraction of the in
increase speed of light,
kinetic energytheand
mass ofaccelerated
the electrons increases relative to
stationary track. This relativistic mass, mare e , is given by to velocities that are a
the stationary
significant fractionsynchrotron track.ofThis
of the speed relativistic
light, the mass of mass, me, is given
the electrons by
increases relative to the
stationarymsynchrotron
o track. This relativistic mass, m , is given by
me = ------------------ , where mo is the rest mass of an electron,e and v is the very high speed
2
v
----2m o - , where m is the rest mass of an electron, and v is the very high speed
me1=–----------------- o
c v
2
of the electrons 1 – ----
in
2 the synchrotron.
c
As both m and of the v are electrons in the
increasing, thesynchrotron.
magnitude of B, the magnetic field, must also increase.
As both m and v are increasing, the magnitude of B, the magnetic field, must also
increase.
As both m and v are increasing, the magnitude of B, the magnetic field, must also increase.
Additional explanation:
As the mass depends on the speed of the electrons, the equation, me v = ks B can
relativisticexplanation:
Additional
be modified to use the known rest mass of the electron, and allow the strength of the
As the
required relativistic
magnetic field,mass depends
needed on the speed
to maintain the electrons of the electrons, the equation,
in their circular me v =the
path around ks B can
be modified to use the known rest mass of the
synchrotron, to be related to the speed the electrons are travelling, i.e., electron, and allow the strength of the
required magnetic field, needed to maintain the electrons in their circular path around the
mo m v
sincesynchrotron, to
me = ------------------ be
andrelated
me v =tokthe
s B, speed theoelectrons
then ------------------ = ks B,are travelling, i.e.,
2 2
v v ov
----2m o - and m v = k B, then
since me1=–----------------- ----m
1 –-----------------
2 - = ks B,
e s
c v
2 c v
2
where mo is the known 1 – ----rest
2 mass of the electron, v1is–the ----2 very high speed of the electrons
travelling in the synchrotron, c and ks is a constant for the c particular synchrotron.
where mo is the known rest mass of the electron, v is the very high speed of the electrons
travelling in the synchrotron, and ks is a constant for the particular synchrotron.

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 155

66 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 155
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 66 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
MEDICAL PHYSICS • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 4
Option Topic
Medical Physics
Past HSC Questions
Marks
Question
Question 128(25
—marks)
Medical Physics (25 marks) Marks

(a) (i) Identify the purpose of a coherent bundle of optical fibres in an 1

endoscope.

(ii) An optical fibre consists of a central core surrounded by cladding. 2

Describe the role of the core and cladding.

(b) The table shows information relating to the transmission of sound through some
types of body tissue.

Tissue Acoustic impedance Density Velocity of sound

(× 106 kg m–2 s–1) (kg m–3) (m s–1)
Muscle 1.70 1040 1630
Fat 1.38 945 1460
Bone 7.80 2560 3050

(i) Identify ONE property of ultrasound. 1

(ii) Justify why, in an ultrasound scan, a boundary between muscle and bone 3
would show up more clearly than would a boundary between muscle
and fat.

(c) You have conducted a first-hand investigation to demonstrate the Doppler effect. 4
Describe your investigation and conclusions.

(d) ‘CAT scans provide more information than X-rays, so they should be used 6
whenever possible.’ Discuss this statement.

(e) Explain why MRI can be used to detect cancerous tissues. 8

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 67

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 67 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 4 • MEDICAL PHYSICS

Question 2 (25 marks) Marks

Marks
Question 29 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

(a) (i) Briefly describe how an endoscope works. 2

(ii) Explain how a computed axial tomography (CAT) scan is produced. 4

(b) Technetium 99m is an artificial isotope which is frequently used to obtain a scan
of the human body.

(i) Using the graph, determine the half life of technetium 99m. 1

100

75
% of technetium 99m
remaining in sample

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
Time (hours)

(ii) A patient is given an injection containing 6.0 × 10−18 kg of 2

technetium 99m. The scan is taken four hours after the injection.

How much technetium 99m remains undecayed when the scan is taken?
(Give your answer in kilograms.)

(iii) Propose reasons why scans are best taken between two and five hours 3
after injection of this radioisotope.

Question 29 continues on page 31

Question 2 continues

– 30 –
68 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 68 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MEDICAL PHYSICS • QUESTIONS

Question 2 (continued) Marks

Marks
Question 29 (continued)

(c) The diagrams shown are an MRI of the human upper arm, an X-ray of a human
hand and a CAT scan of the human pelvis (hip bone) as seen in cross-section
from above.

MRI of human X-ray of human CAT scan of human pelvis (hipbone)

upper arm hand
Procedure time: Procedure time: Procedure time:
30–60 minutes 5 minutes 40 minutes

(i) Identify TWO advantages of MRI scans over CAT scans. 2

(ii) A patient is brought into a hospital out-patients ward complaining of a 2

severe headache. He explains that he hit his head while playing football.
The doctor thinks that the patient may be suffering from a fractured
skull.

Explain why the doctor would order an X-ray to confirm the diagnosis
of a fractured skull.

(iii) The patient, now diagnosed with a fractured skull, complains of other 2
symptoms that may indicate that he is suffering from brain damage.

Suggest ONE additional scan which may be required to confirm this

diagnosis. Justify your choice.

(d) Assess the impact of medical applications based on ultrasound and the magnetic 7
field of particles within the body on modern society.

End of Question 29
End of Question 2

– 31 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 69

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 69 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 4 • MEDICAL PHYSICS

Question 3 (25 marks) MarksMarks

Question 29 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

(a) (i) Identify the property of the hydrogen nucleus that makes it useful in 1
magnetic resonance imaging.

(ii) Describe how X-rays are produced when electrons strike the anode in an 2
X-ray tube.

(b) Outline the production of gamma rays and their use in the diagnostic procedure 3
of positron emission tomography (PET).

Bone-scan image X-ray image

(i) Compare how radiation is used to produce a bone scan image and an 3
X-ray image.

(ii) Describe how a bone scan is able to provide information that an X-ray 2
cannot provide.

Question 29 continues on page 35

Question 3 continues

– 34 –
70 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 70 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MEDICAL PHYSICS • QUESTIONS

Question 3 (continued) MarksMarks

Question 29 (continued)

(d) The table below shows the speed of sound in, and density of, several different
tissues.

Tissue Speed of sound in tissue (m s−1) Density (kg m−3)

Fat 1450 952
Blood 1570 1025
Kidney 1560 1038
Liver 1550 1065
Muscle 1580 1076

(i) Calculate the acoustic impedance of kidney tissue. 1

(ii) Ultrasound travelling through kidney tissue in the body encounters a 2

different type of tissue. Identify the type of tissue that will result in the
greatest proportion of the incident pulse being reflected at the boundary
between the kidney and the other tissue. Justify your choice.

(iii) Describe the properties of ultrasound that led to its use in the 3
measurement of bone density.

(e) An understanding of the properties of electrons, and our ability to control their 8
behaviour, have played key roles in the development of CAT scans and positron
emission tomography imaging technologies.

Justify this statement with reference to the production and display of images
used for medical diagnosis.

End of Question 29
End of Question 3

– 35 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 71

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 71 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 4 • MEDICAL PHYSICS

Option Topic
Medical Physics
Worked Answers

Question 1

(a) (i) A coherent bundle of optical fibres in an endoscope transfers light from inside the
body to the outside and an image of the inside of the body is produced.

(ii) The core has a greater refractive index than the cladding that surrounds the core.
Hence light is trapped within the optical fibre because the rays of light are totally
internally reflected each time they reach the boundary of the core and cladding.

(b) (i) Ultrasound has a frequency well above the hearing range of humans.

(ii) Ultrasound reflects at a boundary between media where there is a difference in

acoustic impedance. The greater the difference in acoustic impedance the greater
is the reflection. Muscle and bone have the greatest difference in acoustic
impedance and hence the largest amount of reflection, leading to the strongest
signal returning to the transducer. Therefore the boundary between muscle and
bone shows up more clearly than the boundary between muscle and fat.

(c) A stationary observer stood still on the side of the road while a person in a car drove past
holding the horn down to create a sound. The driver and observer recorded any change
in pitch of the horn sound as the car drove down the street. The experiment was repeated
with the car travelling at different velocities.
Results: The pitch of the sound was unchanged for the driver for all velocities. For the
observer, the pitch of the sound increased as the car approached and decreased as the car
moved away. The change in pitch was greater at greater velocities.
As greater pitch means higher frequency, it was concluded that the sound produced by a
moving object appears to have a higher frequency when the object approaches an
observer, and a lower frequency when the object moves away from the observer. This is
the Doppler effect.

(d) While CAT scans do provide more information than X-rays, they should not necessarily
always be used. X-rays gauge the attenuation of the rays through the body by forming an
image on a photographic plate. They condense a 3D region into a 2D image. CAT scans
use basic X-ray technology, but by rotating the machine around the body, can isolate
‘slices’ of the body, allowing a 3D image to be built up. Thus CAT scans are much more
versatile as they synthesise much more information, and have much better differentiation
between tissues than X-rays.
By the use of computers, structures can be ‘removed’ from the CAT scan image to focus
on particular areas, whereas X-rays depict structures one on top of the other, reducing
their clarity.

72 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 72 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MEDICAL PHYSICS • ANSWERS

CAT scans are much better for examining soft tissues than X-rays. However they are
also more expensive, less accessible, more time consuming and bombard the patient
with more harmful ionising radiation than X-ray machines. X-rays are quite adequate in
diagnosing simple fractures and should be used for these structures. CAT scans should
be used in situations where they are adequate but X-rays are not.
(e) MRI uses a strong magnetic field to cause nuclei in the body with net spin (in particular,
hydrogen nuclei) to precess around the direction of the magnetic field, with a frequency
called the Larmor frequency. Radio-frequency electromagnetic radiation at the Larmor
frequency is then directed at the body. This radiation is absorbed by the precessing
nuclei, causing them to change their axis of rotation. When the transmission of the
radiation is stopped, the nuclei gradually return to their original alignment in a process
called relaxation. In the process the nuclei emit radio waves which are detected and
converted into signals analysed by a computer. The signal intensity relates to the amount
of hydrogen in the tissue. The signals are used to build a high definition image of the
scanned region.
Different tissues take different amounts of time to ‘relax’ and restore their axis of
rotation to their original position. This results in different types of tissue sending out
different signals. Cancerous tissues which have a higher concentration of hydrogen in
the form of water can be distinguished from normal tissue.

Question 2

(a) (i) Endoscopes are made of optic fibres which transmit light by total internal
reflection. Light is sent into the body through an incoherent bundle of optic fibres
and transferred back from the part of the body being viewed through a coherent
bundle of optic fibres, so that an image of the body part may be viewed.

(ii) X-rays are used to produce a CAT scan. The patient lies on a table that moves
slowly through a doughnut-shaped structure from which X-rays can be fired and
detected. X-rays are fired at many angles around the body to image a slice through
the body. The X-rays are detected and sent to a computer where sophisticated
software is used to analyse the data. Two-dimensional images of slices through the
body, showing soft tissue, are formed. A number of two-dimensional images can
be built up to form a three-dimensional image.

(b) (i) From the graph the half-life of technetium 99m is 6 hours.

(ii) From the graph, the amount of technetium 99m remaining is approximately 65%.

65% of 6.0  10–18 kg  3.90  10–18 kg.

(iii) Scans must be taken before the end of the first half-life of the radioisotope so that
there is still sufficient radiation to detect. Hence 5 hours is an acceptable upper
limit to the time. If the scan is done too quickly the radioisotope will not have had
time to be assimilated by the organ to be scanned. At least 2 hours are needed for
the assimilation, depending on the organ to be scanned and the nature of the
radiopharmaceutical used.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 73

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 73 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 4 • MEDICAL PHYSICS

(c) (i) MRI scans do not use harmful ionising radiation (X-rays) whereas CAT scans do.
MRI scans produce a clearer image than CAT scans.

(ii) A doctor would order an X-ray to confirm the diagnosis because the procedure is
quick and this would mean that the doctor would be able to take the next step in
treating the patient without undue delay.

(iii) A PET scan could be ordered as this shows the functioning of the brain as well as
structure. Areas of the brain where the activity was abnormal could be detected
and brain damage diagnosed.

(d) Medical applications based on ultrasound and the magnetic field of particles within the
body have had a huge and largely positive impact on modern society.

Using ultrasound, images of a developing foetus may be produced. The images can be
used to check whether the foetus is developing normally and, in the latter stages of
pregnancy, whether the foetus and the umbilical cord are in the best position for a
trouble-free birth. If abnormalities in the foetus are detected, an ethical issue arises, as a
decision has to be made as to whether to abort the foetus. If problems in the position of
the foetus are discovered before birth, appropriate action can be taken by the doctor,
ensuring a safe delivery of the baby and the health of both the baby and the mother.

Ultrasound can also be used to detect or confirm other medical problems such as
detached retinas in the eye, hernias, blood flow problems caused by narrow arteries, or
valve malfunction. Then medical intervention can lead to cures and improve the overall
health of the patients.

Ultrasound can be used for therapeutic purposes such as breaking up gallstones and
warming muscles to help with the treatment of sports injuries.

These applications, coupled with the fact that ultrasound equipment is relatively cheap and
portable, have led to an improvement in the health of modern society because conditions
can be diagnosed and then treated readily for most people, even in regional areas.

MRI uses the magnetic fields of particles within the body. Using this imaging technique,
problems with joints, cartilage and tendons can be diagnosed and tumours can be seen.
Although patients with some implants such as pacemakers cannot be given an MRI, it is
otherwise believed to be harmless as it does not require the injection of a radioisotope or
the use of harmful ionising radiation. This means that the technique has the potential to
be widely used as a diagnostic tool for the benefit of society. MRI has in fact improved
the chance of recovery and a healthy life for those who have used it. However the MRI
machine is very expensive to buy and to use. This means that its widespread use will
result in funds from the health budget being unavailable in other areas. It also means that
MRI machines are limited in their availability so that some parts of society do not have
access. This is a negative social and ethical impact.

As has been shown, the impact of ultrasound and MRI has been huge when considering
the cost of the equipment, the ethical issues arising from their use, and the improved
health of society following the use of both techniques.

74 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 74 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

MEDICAL PHYSICS • ANSWERS

Question 3

(a) (i)
The hydrogen nucleus has only one nucleon, a proton, and therefore has a net spin.
It is this spin that makes it useful in MRI because it allows the nucleus to behave
as a tiny magnet.
(ii) X-rays are produced in two ways. The electrons that strike the anode have a great
deal of kinetic energy. A small proportion of these high energy electrons dislodge
electrons from the lowest energy levels of atoms in the anode. As other electrons
in these atoms cascade into the lower level, specific wavelengths of X-rays are
emitted. These are called characteristic or line spectrum X-rays.
Some other electrons pass close to the nucleus of the atoms in the anode and are
rapidly decelerated. As they decelerate, a continuous spectrum of X-rays is
emitted. This is called Bremsstrahlung radiation.

(b) A radiopharmaceutical tagged with a positron-emitting isotope is administered to the

patient. As the isotope decays, positrons interact with electrons in the tissue that has
absorbed the isotope. Each positron and electron annihilation produces two gamma
photons that travel in opposite directions away from the point of annihilation. A ring of
gamma cameras detects these gamma photons. A computer analyses the attenuation of
the gamma energy and uses this to plot the positions of the annihilations, thus forming a
functional image of the target organ that can be used for diagnosis.

(c) (i) In producing a bone scan image, a gamma-emitting radiopharmaceutical that will
be absorbed by the bone tissue is administered to the patient. Some time is allowed
for this chemical to be absorbed by the bone and then the patient is scanned using
a gamma camera. The gamma radiation coming from the bone shows where the
chemical has accumulated.
In an X-ray, however, the X-radiation is produced outside the body and directed
through the area of the body to be investigated. Different rates of X-ray absorption
by the various body tissues cause a shadow image to be formed. Because bone is a
good absorber of X-rays, thick bones appear whitest on the image.
(ii) In a bone scan, a radiopharmaceutical is administered that is specifically absorbed
by bone tissue. The metabolic rate for cancerous tissue is greater than that of
normal tissue. Hence sites of greatest accumulation of the radiopharmaceutical
(the dark spots on the image) show possible cancers. Thus a bone scan provides
function images of the bone. X-rays, however, only show the structure of the
bones and hence cannot be used to identify variation in metabolism necessary to
identify cancerous tissue.

(d) (i) Acoustic impedance, Zkidney  v  1038  1560  1.62  106 kg m–2 s–1.
(ii) The greatest proportion of ultrasound is reflected at the boundary between kidney
and fat. This is because, from the tabulated values, the acoustic impedance
difference between kidney and fat is a maximum.
(iii) Sound travels at different speeds in bones of different density and the amount of
absorption of the sound is different for bones of different density. These properties
are used in bone density measurements when ultrasound is passed through the heel
bone and detected on the other side. The speed of the ultrasound through the heel,
and the amount of absorption, are compared with standards for healthy bone density.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 75

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 75 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 4 • MEDICAL PHYSICS

(e) The properties of electrons and our ability to control them have played a significant
role in the production and display of CAT and PET scan images. X-rays are needed for
CAT scans and electrons are needed for the production of X-rays. Negatively charged
electrons are emitted from a heated cathode in an evacuated tube and then accelerated
to high speed by an electric field. The high-speed electrons hit a target material where
their kinetic energy is converted to X-radiation.
In PET scans, positrons, produced from the decay of an administered radiopharma-
ceutical, undergo pair annihilation with electrons they encounter in the body. This pair
annihilation converts mass to energy. Two gamma rays of equal energy travelling in
opposite directions are produced for each pair annihilation. The gamma rays are used to
produce the image of the organs under investigation.
In both CAT and PET scans the image is viewed on a computer screen. The computer
monitor relies for its operation on the deflection of electrons by electric and magnetic
fields in a cathode ray tube and the emission of light when the stream of electrons hits
a phosphorescent screen.
In all the imaging technologies, electronic circuits control the operation of devices.
The understanding and development of electronic circuits has depended on our ability
to control the flow of electrons.
In MRI, electron behaviour in superconductors is used to produce very strong magnetic
fields, needed in the operation of MRI machines. The facts that accelerating electrons
will produce electromagnetic waves, and that electromagnetic waves will cause
electrons to accelerate in an aerial, are used in the production and reception of radio
waves — an essential part of the MRI process.

76 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 76 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 5
Option Topic
Astrophysics
Past HSC Questions
Marks
Question 6 — Astrophysics (25 marks)
Question 1 (25 marks) Marks
(a) (i) Define the term binary stars. 1
(a) (i) Define the term binary stars. 1
(ii) Describe the characteristics of its spectrum that identify a spectroscopic 2
binary. the characteristics of its spectrum that identify a spectroscopic
(ii) Describe 2
binary.

(b) The table shows information about three stars in the Milky Way galaxy.

Name Spectral Distance from Apparent

class Sun (parsecs) magnitude
Betelgeuse M2 184 +0.41
Achernar B5 20 +0.47
Deneb A2 429 +1.24

(i) Identify which of the stars has the greatest surface temperature. 1

(ii) If Deneb and Betelgeuse were viewed from the same distance, which 3
would appear brighter? Justify your answer.

Question 6 continues

Question 1 continues

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 77

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 77 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

Marks
Question
Question 16 (continued)
(continued) Marks

(c) A student carried out an experiment to examine the spectra of various light 4
sources through spectroscopes as shown in the diagram. The student observed
three different spectra.

Full range
of colours

X
Incandescent Spectroscope
lamp

Two yellow lines

on a dark
background

Y
Sodium vapour Spectroscope
lamp

Range of colours
with two
black lines

Z
Incandescent Sodium Spectroscope
lamp vapour

Account for the differences in the three observed spectra.

(d) A new generation of Earth-based optical telescopes is advancing optical 6

astronomy. Describe the advances in design that have been incorporated in large
telescopes over recent years.

(e) Explain how the data presented in Hertzsprung–Russell diagrams may be used 8
to understand the evolution of stars.

End of Question 6
End of Question 1
– 29 –
78 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 78 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • QUESTIONS

Marks
Question
Question 230(25
—marks)
Astrophysics (25 marks) Marks

(a) (i) The star Algol is an eclipsing binary as viewed from Earth. 2

Describe the observations made by astronomers to identify a star as an

eclipsing binary.

(ii) Binary stars are important in determining stellar masses. 4

Explain how the total mass of a binary star system can be calculated.

(b) The table gives information about various nearby stars.

Star Distance Apparent Colour

(parsecs) visual magnitude Index
Proxima Centauri 1.29 11.01 1.90
Barnard’s Star 1.82 9.54 1.74
Lalande 21185 2.55 7.49 1.51
Ross 154 2.97 10.37 1.75

(i) Which star from the table is the most blue in colour? 1

(ii) Calculate how much brighter Ross 154 is than Proxima Centauri when 2
viewed from Earth.

(iii) Sketch a labelled diagram indicating the information required to use the 3
trigonometric parallax method to determine the distance to Barnard’s
Star.

Question 30 continues on page 33

Question 2 continues

– 32 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 79

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 79 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

Question 2 (continued) Marks

Marks
Question 30 (continued)

105 R Q
104
Solar luminosities

103

ma
in
102

se
qu
nc

e
10 e

1 S P

100 000 30 000 10 000 3000

Surface Temperature (K)

(i) Select the position P, Q, R or S on the H-R diagram in which white 2

dwarfs would be found. Justify your choice.
(ii) A white dwarf is considered to be in a stable condition. Explain why a 2
white dwarf does not continue to shrink in size.

(iii) Describe ONE nuclear reaction taking place in a star located on the main 2
sequence.

(d) Discuss how the development of adaptive optics and at least one other 7
development have improved resolution and sensitivity of ground based
astronomy.

End of Question 30

End of Question 2

– 33 –
80 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 80 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • QUESTIONS

Marks
Question 3 (25 marks) Marks
Question 30 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

(a) (i) Define the term resolution of a telescope. 1

(ii) Describe ONE method by which the resolution of a ground-based system 2

can be improved.

(b) An H-R diagram for the globular cluster M3 is shown below. 3

14 Lyrae Gap
Apparent magnitude

10 000 7 500 5 000

Temperature (K)

The stars in the Lyrae gap have an absolute magnitude of 0.6. Use this
information and their position on the H-R diagram to determine the distance of
M3 from Earth.

Question 30 continues on page 37

Question 3 continues

– 36 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 81

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 81 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

Question 3 (continued) Marks

Marks
Question 30 (continued)

Hδ Hγ Hβ

3C 273

Comparison
spectrum
on Earth

Hδ Hγ Hβ
400 nm 500 nm 600 nm

(i) From this comparison, identify the feature of the quasar spectrum that is 1
representative of the spectra produced by quasars.

(ii) The spectra above are both examples of absorption spectra.

(1) Account for the production of a star’s absorption spectrum. 2

(2) Describe how a spectrum from a star can provide information on the 2
surface temperature of that star. Give a specific example to illustrate
your answer.

Question 30 continues on page 38

Question 3 continues

– 37 –
82 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 82 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • QUESTIONS

Question 3 (continued) Marks

Marks
Question 30 (continued)

(d) The H-R diagram for a cluster is shown below.

1 000 000 −10

10 000 −5
Cluster
Luminosity (Sun = 1)

Apparent magnitude
100 0
Star X
Main s
eque
1 nce +5

Star Z
0.01 +10

0.0001 +15

0. 000 001 +20

O B A F G K M
Spectral class

(i) Why is the cluster considered young? 1

(ii) Stars X and Z are both part of the same cluster but have different main
sequence nuclear reactions and different evolutionary pathways.

(1) Contrast the fusion reactions in star X and star Z. 2

(2) Predict TWO possible evolutionary pathways for star X. 3

(e) Evaluate the impact of studying the visible spectrum of light on our understanding 8
of celestial objects.

End of Question 30
End of Question 3

– 38 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 83

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 83 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

Option Topic
Astrophysics
Worked Answers
Question 1
The answers that follow have been prepared from an educational perspective, not only to
allow students to gain an insight into the sort of answers that might achieve full marks, but
also to allow a review of the material that the questions cover. As a result some of the
answers to high mark questions are more detailed than might be required. The answers also
attempt to cover all of the considerations that may apply to the most demanding questions,
based on the proposed system of marking of the HSC examinations, where high mark
questions are expected to achieve appropriate band separations and allow the very best
students to show their c omprehensive knowledge and effective communication skills.

(a) (i) Binary stars are two stars that form a bound orbital system. They are mutually
attracted by gravity, and orbit each other in elliptical orbits around a common
centre of mass.
(ii) A spectroscopic binary system is so identified as due to the periodic Doppler
shifting of spectral lines. If the component stars are of comparable brightness the
spectral lines appear combined during the part of the orbital period when the stars
move tangentially to an observer on Earth. As the stars move alternately towards
and away from us, their lines are respectively blue and red-shifted, resulting in a
splitting of the lines.

(b) (i) Achernar has a spectral class of B5, which means that it has a higher surface
temperature than stars of A or M spectral classes.
(ii) To determine which of Deneb and Betelgeuse is intrinsically brighter it is
d
necessary to calculate their absolute magnitudes using M  m – 5 log 10 .

184
For Betelgeuse: M   0.41 – 5 log  10   –5.91.

429
For Deneb: M  1.24 – 5 log  10   – 6.92.

Therefore Deneb would be brightest if viewed from the same distance as

Betelgeuse because its absolute magnitude is lower (more negative). The lower the
value, the brighter is the star as viewed from a fixed distance of 10 parsecs.

84 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 84 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • ANSWERS

(c) Spectrum X from the incandescent lamp is a continuum spectrum. The heated filament
produces a full range of electron level transitions, emitting photons at all visible
frequencies, thereby producing a continuous spectrum of colours, just like an ideal
blackbody radiator.
Spectrum Y is an emission spectrum formed by the excitations of the electrons in the
sodium gas in the vapour lamp. When the electrons de-excite they jump down specific
energy levels, emitting photons of only certain frequencies. These two frequencies
correspond to the bright yellow lines on the dark background.
Spectrum Z is an absorption spectrum resulting from a combination of X and Y. It is
analogous to most normal stellar spectra where a cooler gas surrounds a hot core that
acts as a blackbody radiator. In this case the lamp emits photons of all visible
frequencies. As they pass through the cool sodium vapour, those that have the specific
frequency corresponding to electron transitions for sodium are likely to be absorbed.
Although subsequently re-emitted by the sodium, the random direction of this emission
means that the net intensity of these frequencies will be lower than other frequencies on
the screen. The spectrum, therefore, will show a colour continuum with the dark sodium
absorption lines imposed on it.

(d) Large optical telescopes have incorporated many important advances in design over
recent years. These advances have led to improved resolution, sensitivity, waveband
range and efficiency of operation of telescopes that have been built on a handful of
high-altitude, optimal viewing locations such as Mauna Kea and mountains in Chile.
The development of large, thin mirrors has allowed optical telescopes with 8–10 m
primary mirrors to be built. The lighter weight of these large mirrors means that the
foundations and support structures can be lighter and easier to drive. They are also housed
so as to remain at close to outside air temperature to reduce thermal distortions. Improved
mirror coatings allow some telescopes to be used in near UV and IR wavebands as well as
optical ones. The size of the large primary should theoretically improve the resolution of
the telescope but in practice this is always limited by atmospheric ‘seeing’. The problem
with large thin mirrors is that they sag and flex under their own weight as the telescope is
pointed. To correct this, modern mirrors are supported by a number of computer-controlled
actuators that continually monitor and adjust the mirror. This ‘active optics’ system ensures
that the mirror surface stays in the correct shape.
The resolution is improved by the use of ‘adaptive optics’ which corrects the effects of
atmospheric disturbance. Using a bright guide star or an artificially produced laser star,
the disturbances and cells in the atmosphere are detected by a wavefront sensor between
the primary and secondary mirrors. These are then corrected by a rapidly deformable
secondary mirror, or by additional optical elements in the light path.
Some groups of telescopes such as the VLT are also starting to be linked as optical
interferometers which will have even greater resolution.
The sensitivity of modern telescopes has been improved in two main ways. The larger
the primary mirror, the greater is the light-gathering capability of the telescope.
Secondly, modern instruments such as cooled charge-coupled devices (CCDs) are far
more sensitive than photographic detectors. CCDs allow data to be read out directly into
computers in digital formats, allowing rapid analysis and ease of storage.
Computers are also used to control and accurately steer telescopes, as well as controlling
the optical systems. Modern ‘domes’ are designed to minimise temperature differences
with the ambient air temperature and ‘dome seeing’.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 85

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 85 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

(e) The Hertzsprung–Russell (HR) diagram is a key tool in the study of stellar evolution. It
plots effective surface temperature (hot  cool, ie. about 40 000 K to 2500 K), spectral
class (OBAFGKM) or colour index (B–V) of a star on the horizontal axis and absolute
magnitude (M) or luminosity (often as a ratio to solar luminosity) on the vertical axis.
When the data from a large number of stars are plotted on such a diagram it is apparent
that stars tend to fall into certain groups and are not randomly distributed.
–10

H Supergiants
ig
h
m
–5 as 104
ss
ta Instability
rs
Absolute magnitude (M )

strip

Luminosity relative
iants
0 Red G 102
Mai
n Se

to Sun
que
nce
T Tauri st
5 ars 1

Wh Sun
ite
Dw
10 arf Low 10–2
s mass
stars

15
O B A F G K M Spectral class
40 000 20 000 10 000 6000 5000 2500 Surface temp. (K)

The bulk of stars are found along a diagonal line known as the Main Sequence (MS).
Other important groups are the Red Giants, Supergiants, Asymptotic Giant Branch stars,
stars in the Instability Strip, White Dwarf stars and small numbers of others such as T
Tauri-type stars.
The position of each star on an HR diagram is essentially a snapshot of one stage in the
long life of that star. Astronomers do not generally observe an individual star ‘moving’
on the HR diagram but by studying and modelling large groups of similar stars they have
been able to develop models of stellar evolution. The T Tauri stars are pre-Main
Sequence stars ejecting surrounding gas as they heat up and contract, moving to the left
and down slightly as they move onto the MS.
The majority of stars are cool, dim red Main Sequence stars. Stars on the Main Sequence
all share one key characteristic: they all fuse hydrogen in their cores to form helium.
In lower mass stars, found at bottom right on the HR diagram, the proton–proton chain
predominates, while in stars more massive than the Sun (and core temperature > 1.6  107 K)
the CNO cycle dominates. Higher mass stars (top left of the diagram) are more luminous
but have a much shorter Main Sequence lifetime as they consume their fuel at
prodigious rates.
The HR diagram shows that stars of similar temperature may vary greatly in luminosity.
Red Main Sequence stars have low mass, luminosity and long Main Sequence lifetimes.
Red Giants have the same surface temperature (~2500 K) but have higher luminosity
and therefore must have a much greater surface area and radius, but may have masses
similar to the Sun or higher. They are stars that have evolved off the MS and now fuse
helium in the core. Their Giant phase lifetime may be only 10% or less of their MS
lifetime. Supergiants may have the same temperature but are extremely luminous and
large (radius out to Mars or Jupiter’s orbit if they replaced our Sun). They are high mass,
short-living stars. These three types of red star are typically differentiated by careful
analysis of their spectra.

86 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 86 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • ANSWERS

Red Giants eventually exhaust their fuel and often pass through a period of instability
prior to ejecting their outer envelopes, before contracting to a very hot, dense, exposed
core of degenerate electron matter, a White Dwarf star. Although very hot (~10 000 K),
they are very faint stars, which means that they must be very small (comparable to the
size of Earth). The more extreme products of stellar evolution, neutron stars and black
holes, are not found on the HR diagram.
One of the most effective tools for studying stellar evolution comes from plotting stars
of an open or globular cluster onto an HR diagram. As these stars all formed from the
same initial nebula, they share common initial chemical composition and age. They are
also the same relative distance from Earth and we can use their apparent magnitudes to
give a direct relationship to their intrinsic luminosities, allowing us to compare
differences between stars directly. By determining the MS turn-off point for a cluster, its
age can be determined. This evidence underpins the idea that high-mass stars have much
shorter lifetimes and are intrinsically more luminous.

Question 2
(a) (i) In order to identify a star as an eclipsing binary, astronomers must measure its
apparent magnitude photometrically, repeatedly over a period of time. The
photometric data are usually obtained by photoelectric means, using a charge-
coupled device (CCD) or photometer connected to a telescope. It can also be
measured using photographic images, or even visually for bright stars. By plotting
Chapter 05 Page 215 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 10:32 AM

magnitude against time, a light curve is produced. An eclipsing binary light curve
shows a periodic primary eclipse (caused when the hotter star passes behind the
cooler star) and a shallower secondary eclipse. ASTROPHYSICS • ANSWERS

(ii) In order to calculate the total mass of the binary system, two key factors need to be
measured
is measured or by
determined. The firstthe
directly observing is the mean
orbit overperiod T of the
many years forbinary
visual system.
binaries,This
from
is measured
light curves byfor directly
eclipsingobserving
binaries, the orbit over many
by successive spectrayears for visual binaries,
for spectroscopic binaries,
from light curves
or long-term for eclipsing
astrometric measurementsbinaries, for
by successive
astrometricspectra
binaries.forObservations
spectroscopicover
binaries,
time alsoor long-term
allow astrometric
the apparent relative measurements for astrometric
orbit of the system binaries.
to be plotted. From this the
Observations over time also allow the apparent relative orbit
true semi-major axis r of the system is determined. Once this is known, the of the system to be
total
plotted. From can
system mass this be
thefound
true semi-major
by applyingaxis r of thethird
Kepler’s system
law:is determined. Once
this is known, the total system mass can be found by applying Kepler’s third law:
2 3
4π r
Mtotal = (mstar1 + mstar2) = -------------
2
. If T is in Earth years and r in AU, then Mtotal will
T
be in
be in solar
solarmasses.
masses.

(b) (i) Lalande 21185 is the star most blue in colour (it has the lowest value for Colour
Index).

(ii) The brightness ratio between Ross 154 and Proxima Centauri is calculated using:
Brightness Ross154
-------------------------------------------- = 100(mProx – mRoss)/5
Brightness ProxCen

B Ross
- = 100(11.01 – 10.37)/5
So -----------
B Prox

B Ross SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 87

- = 1000.128 = 1.80, that is, Ross 154 is 1.80× brighter than Proxima Centauri
∴ -----------
B Prox1
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 Excel Success One HSC Physics
when viewed from Earth.
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 87 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
2 3
4π r
Mtotal = (mstar1 + mstar2) = -------------
2
. If T is in Earth years and r in AU, then Mtotal will
T
be in solar masses.
CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

(b) (i) Lalande 21185 is the star most blue in colour (it has the lowest value for Colour
(b) (i) Index).
Lalande 21185 is the star most blue in colour (it has the lowest value for Colour
Index).
(ii) The brightness ratio between
(ii) between Ross
Ross 154
154andandProxima
ProximaCentauri
Centauriisiscalculated
calculatedusing:
using:
Brightness Ross154
-------------------------------------------- = 100(mProx – mRoss)/5
Brightness ProxCen

B Ross
- = 100(11.01 – 10.37)/5
So -----------
B Prox

B Ross
- = 1000.128 = 1.80, that is, Ross 154 is 1.80× brighter than Proxima Centauri
∴ -----------
B Prox
when viewed from Earth.

(iii) In order to determine the distance to Barnard’s Star, its parallax angle p must be
(iii) In order toThis
measured. determine thecareful
requires distance to Barnard’s
astrometric Star, its parallax
measurement angle pofmust be
of the position
measured. Thisrelative
Barnard’s Star requirestocareful astrometric
background measurement
stars over a 6-month of the position
period. of
The resultant
Barnard’s Star relative to background stars over a 6-month period. The
baseline is 2 astronomical units while the measured angular shift is 2p. Knowing resultant
baseline is and
this length 2 astronomical
p, the distanceunits while
d can be the measured
calculated angular
using shift is 2p. Knowing
the equation:
this length and p, the distance d can be calculated using the equation:
1
d  1 where p is in seconds of arc and d is in parsecs.
d = --p- where p is in seconds of arc and d is in parsecs.
p
Parallax Measurement for Barnard’s Star
Parallax Measurement for Barnard’s Star
Earth 6 months later Background
Earth 6 months later Background
stars
stars

1 AU
1 AU Apparent
Barnard’s Apparent
shift
Barnard’s
star shift against
against
d p star
Sun d pp background
background
Sun p stars
stars

1 AU Parallax
1 AU Parallax
angle
angle

Earth
Earth (Not to scale)
(Not to scale)

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 215

(c) (i) White dwarfs would be found at position S on the H–R diagram. This position
corresponds to stars that are very hot and white (10 000–20 000 K) but are lower
in luminosity than the Sun, (typically one hundredth to one thousandth of that of
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
the Sun, although this is not clear in the diagram in the examination).

(ii) A white dwarf is stable because the forces on it are in equilibrium. Such stars no
longer have radiation pressure from fusion to withstand the inward acting gravity.
However, the effect of gravity is balanced by electron degeneracy pressure.
Electrons are confined closely to nuclei in low-energy states owing to a quantum
mechanical effect, the Pauli exclusion principle.

88 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 88 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(iii) Main-sequence stars similar to or lower in mass than the Sun produce most of their
energy
(iii) through core fusion
Main-sequence ofsimilar
stars hydrogento orinto helium
lower by athan
in mass process known
the Sun as the
produce most of their
proton–proton (PP) chain. In this
energy through core fusion chain, a minute amount of mass is converted
of hydrogen into helium by a process known as the into
energy. Temperatures
proton–protonof(PP)
about 1010K
chain. Inprovide
this chain,protons (ie. Hamount
a minute nuclei)ofwith
mass sufficient
is converted into
energy toenergy.
fuse together to form deuterons, 10also releasing positrons and neutrinos.
Temperatures of about 10 K provide protons (ie. H nuclei) with sufficient
These deuterons fuse
energy to with
fuse other protons
together to form to form helium-3
deuterons, nuclei, releasing
also releasing positronsgamma
and neutrinos.
photons in the process. Two of these then fuse together to form a helium-4
These deuterons fuse with other protons to form helium-3 nuclei, releasing gammanucleus
and two protons.
photonsThe netprocess.
in the effect isTwo
that of
four protons
these then fuse
fuse to form a to
together helium-4
form a nucleus,
helium-4 nucleus
two positrons, two neutrinos and two gamma photons.
and two protons. The net effect is that four protons fuse to form a helium-4
nucleus, two positrons, two neutrinos and two gamma photons.

(d) Ground-based
(d) Ground-basedoptical astronomy has madehas
optical astronomy significant improvements
made significant in both resolution
improvements in both resolution
and sensitivity
and sensitivity over the last decade through the development of adaptiveand
over the last decade through the development of adaptive optics optics and other
other techniques
techniques such as active
such as active optics,
optics,interferometry
interferometry andand
thethe useuse
ofof charge-coupled
charge-coupled devices
devices (CCDs).
(CCDs).Sensitivity
Sensitivityisis the the amount
amount of light or photons that that aa telescope
telescopecan cancollect. The
collect. The light-gathering
light-gathering powerpowerof aof a telescope
telescope is proportional
is proportional to thetosquare
the squareof theofdiameter,
the ie. an
diameter,8 m ie. an 8 m telescope
mirror mirror telescope
gathers gathers
four timesfourastimes
muchaslight
much as light
a 4 masone. a 4 For
m one.this For
reason, the
this reason, the bigger
bigger the primary
the primary mirror mirror of a telescope,
of a telescope, the more thelight
moreit light
gathers,it gathers, so the is the
so the fainter
fainter is object
the object astronomers
astronomers can detect
can detect and observe.
and observe. The resolution
The resolution obtainable
obtainable fromfrom a single-
a single-mirror
mirror telescope
telescope is a function of the the diameter
diameter DDof ofthe
theprimary
primarymirror.
mirror.For Fora agiven
given wavelength
wavelength λ the resolution
λ the resolution or orangular
angular separation
separation ofoftwotwosources
sourcesofoflight,light,θ, ,isisaa function
λ
function
θ = ---- .. Therefore one way to to increase
increase thetheresolving
resolvingpowerpowerofofaatelescope
telescopeisistotouse a
D
use a larger primary.
larger primary. Prior to the
Prior to thelatelate
1980s a problem
1980s a problem with thisthis
with approach
approach was wasthat large
that large
mirrors required very thick
mirrors required Pyrex-type
very materials.
thick Pyrex-type The mass
materials. Theof mass
such ofmirrors requiredrequired
such mirrors
very heavy verymounts
heavyfor support.
mounts As mirror-making
for support. technologies
As mirror-making improved,
technologies astronomers
improved, astronomers
became able became to plan
ableand buildand
to plan 8–10buildm 8–10
class m mirrors. These mirrors
class mirrors. were much
These mirrors werethinner
much thinner
(for example, 20 cm for20the
(for example, cm8.1formtheGemini mirrors),mirrors),
8.1 m Gemini hence lighter
hence thanlighterthethanprevious
the previous
generation 4 m mirrors.
generation However,
4 m mirrors. one problem
However, with these
one problem withnew thesemirrors was thatwas
new mirrors theythat they
flexed underflexed their
underowntheir
weight,
ownwhich
weight,wouldwhichnormally distort any
would normally image.
distort anyTo correct
image. To for
correct for
these distortions, active optics
these distortions, activeis optics
required. In this, the
is required. shape
In this, theofshape
the primary mirror is
of the primary mirror is
continually continually
monitoredmonitoredby observing by observing
a reference a reference
star within star
thewithin
field, the
andfield, and corrected
corrected every every
minute orminute
so by aorseriesso byof a series of computer-controlled
computer-controlled electromechanical
electromechanical actuatorsactuators
on the base on the base
of theThus
of the mirror. mirror. Thus sagging
sagging due to or
due to gravity gravity
thermalor thermal
effects caneffects can be compensated.
be compensated.
Atmospheric turbulence and distortion normally degrade the achievable resolution well
Atmospheric below that theoretically
turbulence obtainable
and distortion for a degrade
normally large telescope. Even the
the achievable best siteswell
resolution in the world
below that average only about
theoretically 1 arc second
obtainable resolution.
for a large Adaptive
telescope. Even optics
the bestsystems
sites inoperate
the world at high
average onlyfrequencies,
about 1 typically
arc second about 1000 Hz.
resolution. This is too
Adaptive fastsystems
optics for altering
operatea primary,
at highso adaptive
frequencies,optics systems
typically are designed
about 1000 Hz.toThis act via thefast
is too secondary mirror
for altering and additional
a primary, optical
so adaptive
elements placed in the light path. There are several different methods that can be used to
216 E x c e l Smonitor
U C C E S S andO N Ecorrect
H S C •the P Hincoming
YSICS wavefront of light, but many use a tip-tilt mirror and a
thin, deformable one. Vital to all is the need for powerful, fast computer processing and
modelling of the incoming waveforms. Systems either rely on a bright reference star
within the field of view (which is surprisingly hard to find given the narrow field of
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
view in many large telescopes) or they produce an artificial reference star using a laser.
At present, adaptive optics is still a new technology and many systems are still in the
developmental phase. Apart from the reference star problem, most systems also trade off
sensitivity for resolution as each additional optical element scatters some light and emits
a small amount of heat, degrading infrared performance.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 89

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 89 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

CHAPTER 5 • ASTROPHYSICS

Question 3

(a) (i) The resolution of a telescope is the ability to distinguish between two close objects
as separate images.
(ii) The resolution of ground-based telescopes is improved by using adaptive optics.
In this system light is detected by a wavefront sensor. This determines, at the rate of
1000 times per second, the distortion of the incoming waves. A computer is used to
change a deformable mirror so that the distortions in the wavefronts are removed.

(b) From the graph, m  15 and M  0.6.

d d
Using the equation, M  m – 5 log  10 ,  0.6  15 – 5 log  10 .

14.4 d
Then  5   log  10 ,  d  7586 pc.

(c) (i) It is red-shifted, indicating that it is moving away from Earth.

(ii) 1. Hotter gases in the core of the star emit a continuous spectrum. As this
radiation moves through the cooler outer atmosphere, the elements
composing the atmosphere absorb energy of particular frequencies, resulting
in characteristic dark lines in the spectrum of the star.
2. Different lines indicate the presence of elements or compounds of a star’s
surface. Because they can only exist as atoms up to certain temperatures, the
presence or absence of particular lines is a direct indication of the surface
temperature of the star.
For example: O stars 28 000–50 000 K — ionised helium lines
For example: M stars 2500–3500 K — molecular lines.

(d) (i) There are still B stars present, indicating a young cluster because B stars are short
lived.
(ii) 1. Fusion reactions in X — the CNO cycle dominates. In Z the proton–proton
chain dominates. This is because X is a larger hotter star than Z.
2. X will become a supernova after going through a red giant stage. The result of
this supernova will depend on the mass of the core remnant (shown below):

Supergiant

Supernova

Core mass Core mass

1.4 to 3.5 > 3.5
solar masses solar masses

Neutron star Black hole

90 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 90 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

ASTROPHYSICS • ANSWERS

(e) Information from visible light has provided a great deal in increasing our understanding
of the universe. Initially all information that allowed the identification of patterns of
movement of celestial objects came from visual observations. With the development of
the ability to create and analyse the spectra of light received from specific celestial
objects, a number of pieces of information were able to be deduced to enable a better
description of bodies and changes occurring in the universe. These include the use of
spectra to determine the surface temperature of stars; this led to a classification of stars
and to a greater understanding of the life cycles, taking into account the presence of
elements and molecules in their structure; and the use of spectra to determine red and
blue shift in spectra from objects to determine whether they are moving away from or
towards us. This also allowed the speed of the motion to be determined.

The red shift of celestial objects has provided evidence of the expansion of the universe;
spectra from specific stars can be used to determine their speed of rotation and this
increases our understanding of the processes involved in stellar lives; spectra from solar
system members which have atmospheres have enabled us to determine the composition
of those atmospheres, giving us a greater understanding of the structure of the solar
system. This information has also provided detail to allow scientists to use the
information to model the formation of the solar system.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 91

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 91 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

CHAPTER 6
Option Topic
From Quanta to Quarks
Past HSC Questions
Marks
Question 130(25
Question —marks)
From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks) Marks

(a) (i) Define nucleon. 1

(ii) Contrast ONE property of nucleons. 2

(b) The table shows the quantum numbers of the four lowest states of the hydrogen
atom, together with the energies of those states.

Quantum number, n Energy (joule)

1 (Ground state) 0
2 1.63 × 10 –18
3 1.94 × 10 –18
4 2.04 × 10 –18

(i) What is the energy of the photon emitted when an electron in the n = 4 1
level makes a transition to the n = 3 level?

(ii) Use the data to draw the energy level diagram for hydrogen, and indicate 3
on this diagram where the energy levels lie for quantum numbers greater
than 4.

(c) Describe how you carried out a first-hand investigation to determine the 4
penetrating power of alpha, beta and gamma radiation on a range of materials.

(d) The Manhattan Project is the codename given to the development of atomic 6
(nuclear fission) bombs during World War II.

Discuss the significance of this project for society.

(e) Analyse how Chadwick’s and Fermi’s work resulted in a greater understanding 8
of the atom.

92 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 92 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • Q U E S T I O N S

Marks
Question 2 (25 marks) Marks
Question 31 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

(a) (i) Describe Davisson and Germer’s experiment that confirmed the 2
de Broglie hypothesis of wave-particle duality.

(ii) Explain the stability of the electron orbits in the Bohr atom, using 4
de Broglie’s hypothesis.

(b) The diagram shows the kinetic energy distribution of the electrons emitted in the
β-decay of 210 210
83 Bi into 84 Po. The energy released during β-decay depends on the
mass defect in the transmutation, as it does in nuclear fission.

9
Nucleus Mass
8 or particle (amu)
Relative number of electrons

7
210Bi 209.938 57
6
5 210Po 209.936 78
4
e 0.000 55
3
2
End-point Ek(max)
1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3
Kinetic energy of electrons, Ek (MeV)

(i) Identify the scientist who suggested that the existence of the neutrino 1
relates to the need to account for the energy distribution of electrons
emitted in β-decay.
210
(ii) Use the data to calculate the mass defect in the β-decay of 83 Bi. 2
(Assume that the neutrino is a massless particle.)

(iii) Account for the energy distribution of electrons emitted in this β-decay. 3

Question
Question 2 continues
31 continues on page 35

– 34 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 93

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 93 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

Marks
Question
Question 231(continued)
(continued) Marks

(c) The diagram represents the four spectral lines in the visible region of the
hydrogen spectrum known as the Balmer Series.

NOT TO
Hδ Hγ Hβ Hα SCALE

Wavelength (nm)
410 434 486 656

(i) Explain how the Balmer Series provides strong experimental evidence in 3
support of Bohr’s model of the hydrogen atom.

(ii) Calculate the wavelength of the next line in the Balmer Series. 3

(d) Discuss how neutron scattering and ONE other process have been used to 7
increase our understanding of the structure of matter.

End of Question 31
End of Question 2

– 35 –
94 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 94 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • Q U E S T I O N S

Marks
Question 331(25
Question —marks)
From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks) Marks

(a) (i) Identify the structure of the Rutherford model of the atom. 1

(ii) Describe how Bohr refined Rutherford’s model of the hydrogen atom. 2

(b) The table below shows the different types of quarks and their charge. 3

Quark Charge
Up + –23 e
Down − –13 e
Strange − –13 e
Charm + –23 e
Bottom − –13 e
Top + –23 e

The standard model of matter says that protons and neutrons are composed of
up and down quarks. There are three quarks in each particle.

Compare protons and neutrons in terms of their quark composition.

238 1 239
(1) 92
U + 0 n → 92
U

238 234 4
(2) 92
U → 90
Th + 2
He

235 1 141 92
(3) 92
U + 0 n → 56
Ba + 36
Kr + 3 10 n

(i) Identify which reaction is naturally occurring, and justify your answer. 2

(ii) Identify ONE transmutation reaction above that has a practical 3

application, and describe the application.

Question 31 continues on page 40

Question 3 continues

– 39 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 95

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 95 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

Marks
Question
Question 331(continued)
(continued) Marks

(d) The two graphs below show the gravitational and electrostatic forces acting
between two protons in the nucleus of an atom.

Gravitational force
Nucleon distance d (× 10−15 m)
0 1 2 3 4
0
−1
−2
F (× 10−34 N)

−3
−4
−5
−6
−7
−8

Electrostatic force
1000
800
600
F (N)

400
200
0
0 1 2 3 4
−15
Nucleon distance d (× 10 m)

(i) If the distance between protons in a nucleus is 1.0 × 10−15 m, determine 2

both the gravitational and the electrostatic force at this distance.

(ii) Explain why these two forces cannot explain the stability of the nucleus, 2
and why there is a need for the strong nuclear force.

(iii) Describe TWO properties of the strong nuclear force. 2

(e) Describe the requirements for a nuclear fission explosion, and describe how 8
these are controlled in a nuclear reactor.

End of Question 31

– 40 –
96 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 96 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • ANSWERS

Option Topic
From Quanta to Quarks
Worked Answers

Question 1

The answers that follow have been prepared from an educational perspective, not only to
allow students to gain an insight into the sort of answers that might achieve full marks but
also to allow a review of the material that the questions cover. As a result some of the
answers to high mark questions are more detailed than might be required. The answers also
attempt to cover all of the considerations that may apply to the most demanding questions,
based on the proposed system of marking of the HSC examinations, where high mark
questions are expected to achieve appropriate band separations and allow the very best
students to show their c omprehensive knowledge and effective communication skills.

(a) i(i) A nucleon is a particle found in the nucleus of atoms. Nucleons include the protons
and neutrons which bind together in a nucleus by residual strong interactions.
(ii) The nucleons, protons and neutrons, have different electrical properties due to
their quark composition. Protons have a positive elementary charge, being
composed of two UP and one DOWN quark, while the neutrons have no electric
charge, being composed of one UP and two DOWN quarks.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 97

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 97 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

(a) i(i) A nucleon is a particle found in the nucleus of atoms. Nucleons include the
protons and neutrons which bind together in a nucleus by residual strong
interactions.
C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S
(ii)
The nucleons, protons and neutrons, have different electrical properties due to
their quark composition. Protons have a positive elementary charge, being
composed of two UP and one DOWN quark, while the neutrons have no electric
(b) i(i) Electron transition
charge, being from n of
composed 4 toUP
 one n and
3: Energy of photon
two DOWN  Ef – EI  E3 – E4.
quarks.
Using values from the table:

(b) i(i) Energy of transition
Electron emitted photon
from n=(1.94
4 to–n2.04)  10–18ofphoton
= 3: Energy 0.10 = 10 –18
Ef – EJ.I = E3 – E4.
Using values from the table:
The emitted photon would have an energy of 1.0–18 10–19 J.
Energy of emitted photon = (1.94 – 2.04) × 10 = 0.10 × 10–18 J.
(ii) Diagram of hydrogen
The emitted electron
photon would energy
have levels of 1.0 × 10–19 J.
an energy
(ii) Diagram of hydrogen electron energy levels
2.5

2.5
n=6
n=5
n=4 n=6
2.0 n=3 n=5
n=4
2.0 n=3
Electron energy (× 10–18 J)

n=2
Electron energy (× 10–18 J)

1.5
n=2
1.5

1.0

0.5

0 10, 2010 10:46 AM

Chapter 06 Page 239 Wednesday, February n = 1 (ground state)

0 n = 1 (ground state)

1 1 1 hc E ⎛ T1-A –T ----
1⎞
Since --- = RH ⎛ -----2 – -----2⎞ and E = ------ , thenF R-----
O-M=QR
UHA N---- O - Q .U A R K S • ANSWERS
λ ⎝ n n ⎠ λ hc ⎝ n n⎠
2 2
f i f i

238 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 1

Considering nf always equals 1, and ni = n, then En = RH ⎛ 1 – ----2-⎞ × hc,
⎝ n⎠
–18 ⎛ 1
Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPIie. En = 2.18 × 10 1 – ----2-⎞ .
⎝ n⎠
Using this equation the energy for higher levels, ie. n = 5 and 6, can be
calculated, ie. for n = 5, E5 = 2.09 × 10–18 J, and for n = 6, E6 = 2.12 × 10–18 J.

(c) An experiment to examine the penetrating power of α-, β-, and γ-radiation through
different materials could be:
• Suitable radioisotopes were selected to act as sources of α-, β- and γ-radiation.
• These sources were wrapped in a protective coating with only a single hole to allow
emission of radiation. The sources were kept in a thick, lead-coated container while
not in use, and handled safely when removed.
• A Geiger counter, sensitive to α-, β- and γ-radiation, was then set up in the room and
98 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
allowed to record any background radiation for a measured interval of several
minutes.
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

• The Geiger counter sensor was then placed a distance 10 mm from the selected
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 98 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

source of α-radiation.
F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • ANSWERS

(c) An experiment to examine the penetrating power of -, -, and -radiation through
different materials could be:
•
Suitable radioisotopes were selected to act as sources of -, -, and -radiation.
•
These sources were wrapped in a protective coating with only a single hole to allow
emission of radiation. The sources were kept in a thick, lead-coated container while
not in use, and handled safely when removed.
A Geiger counter, sensitive to -, -, and -radiation, was then set up in the room and
•
allowed to record any background radiation for a measured interval of several minutes.
•
The Geiger counter sensor was then placed a distance 10 mm from the selected source
of -radiation.

Radioactive source Geiger counter probe

•
The Geiger counter was triggered and a count recorded for a 5.0 second interval. This
was repeated several times and the results recorded.
A single sheet of paper was then placed between the Geiger counter probe and the
•
radioactive source and the count recorded for 5.0 second intervals. This was repeated
several times and the results recorded.
This was then repeated using 2, followed by 3, sheets of paper placed in the gap. The
•
results were recorded.
The paper sheets were then removed and the process was repeated using sheets of
•
aluminium foil.
•
All results were recorded, then the aluminium sheets were removed and the process
again repeated using thin sheets of lead foil.
This was then repeated using a radioactive source producing -radiation, and then
•
again for a specially prepared -source. All counts were for 5.0 second intervals.
The results were tabulated and then, using mean values for each trial, graphs of ‘the
•
number of particles recorded over 5 seconds’ vs ‘the number of sheets for each of the
different materials’ were produced.
•
The graphs were then analysed and conclusions drawn.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 99

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 99 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

(d) The Manhattan Project has had an enormous impact on society, with the immediate
impact of creating nuclear weapons, and their subsequent use, convincing the Japanese
to finally surrender and end World War II. The project had also funded Enrico Fermi to
develop the first nuclear power reactor, perfecting a controlled fission reaction.

The development of nuclear weapons may have led to the end of the war but it also
created great stresses, political, economic and environmental. The ‘Cold War’ that
followed led to the US and Soviets building up huge arsenals of nuclear weapons and to
the development of even more powerful, modern fusion weapons. This threat of nuclear
war between the superpowers caused great concern for many and shaped the political
atmosphere and social change. The testing of these weapons, and their development by
other nations, has also created tensions and much controversy and political intrigue,
eg. the sinking of the Rainbow Warrior.

The development of nuclear power stations has had benefits in producing electrical
energy very efficiently but the wastes are still seen as an area of concern. These power
stations, and the waste they produce, have become the targets for protest by some parts
of the community.

Overall the Manhattan Project was a massive collaboration of many talented scientists
and engineers and did unlock the energy from nuclear reactions, but the success did
initially cause concern, even from many of the scientists involved in the Project, and
continues to provide the source of great uncertainty for many, while ever the potential
for the use of nuclear weapons exists.

(e) Both Chadwick and Fermi provided very important details on the structure of atoms,
particularly in relation to the nucleus, and the particles and forces involved when
nucleons come together to form the nuclei of the different elements. Having previously
made contributions in studies of radioactivity, in 1932 Chadwick performed an extremely
important experiment where he confirmed the existence of the neutron. This experiment
involved bombarding beryllium with energetic -particles to produce neutrons, and then
causing the neutrons to be involved in collisions with protons contained in a block of
paraffin wax, with these protons then able to be detected and their energy measured.
With his experimental technique incorporating a knowledge of nuclear reactions, and
applying the conservation laws as they were known at that time, Chadwick was able to
produce extremely convincing evidence, not only of the neutron, but also for the idea of
protons and neutrons making up the nucleus of atoms, with mass–energy being involved
in the binding of the particles into a nucleus. He also contributed research on nuclear
reactions as part of the Manhattan Project.

Fermi did much important work on the structure of different atoms, exploring
radioactive decay, producing new elements by bombarding different elements with
neutrons, and finally understanding the nature of nuclei sufficiently to allow him to
produce the first nuclear power reactor. Fermi was responsible for developing an
explanation for discrepancies in the mass–energy of nuclei decaying by -decay by
incorporating Pauli’s idea of a tiny neutral particle, which Fermi called the ‘neutrino’.
This theory, developed in 1933, was very convincing, explaining observed results, and
was readily accepted even though the neutrino was not actually detected until the 1950s.

100 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 100 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • ANSWERS

Fermi concentrated on using neutrons to bombard different nuclei to produce new

isotopes and develop a greater understanding of the way particles combined to form
nuclei and the relationship between the stability of nuclei and the number of particles
they contained. Calculations by Otto Hahn and Lise Meitner led Fermi to direct his
attention to trying to cause fission in uranium 235. With funding from the Manhattan
Project he was finally able to build a graphite moderated reactor to produce the first
controlled nuclear fission reaction. His work led to a much more complete understanding
of the way protons and neutrons combine within nuclei and the way that the stability or
instability of the different nuclei results. This knowledge allowed him sufficient
understanding to build the first nuclear power reactor and produce a moderated,
controlled nuclear fission reaction. His reactor also allowed him to produce the
quantities of the heavy isotope that was used in the first nuclear weapons as part of his
contribution to the Manhattan project.

The work of Chadwick and Fermi can be seen as providing what seemed at the time to be
the final details on the structure of atoms, and the way the particles come together to form
the nuclei of the different elements. It also provided an understanding of nuclear reactions
and allowed humans a much greater insight into the way that the various particles come
together to form atoms, and some of the possibilities that this knowledge allows.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 101

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 101 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

Question 2

(a) (i) In 1923 Davisson and Germer conducted an experiment in which they directed a
beam of electrons with known speed at a nickel crystal. They used a sensitive
detector to determine the way the electrons had reflected as they encountered the
surface of the nickel. The results revealed an interference pattern, similar to those
produced in X-ray scattering, clearly indicating the wave behaviour of the
electrons. From known values and measurements of the interference patterns
produced, they also showed that the wavelength of the electrons in the beam
h
agreed with the predicted value from the de Broglie hypothesis, that is, λe  .
mv
(ii) The de Broglie hypothesis suggested that matter particles would have an associated
h
wavelength according to the equation, λ  . This immediately created interest as
mv
the wavelengths predicted from the known speeds of electrons in their orbits
produced a result of the same order of magnitude as the known size of an atom. The
Bohr model of the atom, arrived at through intuition, had described the electrons in
stationary states with quantised angular momentum. This model had already proved
useful in describing the electron in a hydrogen atom but had given no explanation as
to why the electrons behaved as they did. When the de Broglie hypothesis was
considered, it was decided that an electron would have to exist as a standing wave in
order to achieve stability. With the radius of an electron orbit known, the following
relationship was suggested: nλ 2πr, where n is an integer, that is, 1, 2, 3, etc.,
resulting
Chapter 06 Page 242 Wednesday, Februaryin
10,a2010
standing
10:46 AM wave, and 2πr is the circumference of the electron orbit.

When the de Broglie hypothesis was then related to the wavelength, the result
C H A P T E R 6 • F R OhM Q U A N T A T O Q U A R K S
was    2πr. It became immediately obvious that this could be rearranged to
mv
nh
produce mvr  , which was the equation Bohr had arrived at intuitively, and was
already known to 2πaccurately predict the stable electron orbits for hydrogen. The
de already known
Broglie to accurately
hypothesis predictthe
had produced thesame
stable electron
result, orbits
but this timeforthe
hydrogen. The
stability of the
de Broglie
orbit hypothesis
could be explainedhad by produced thethe
the fact that same result,
electron buta wave
had this time the stability
property of
and stable
orbits could
the orbit be be
could achieved
explainedby setting up athat
by the fact standing wave. had a wave property and
the electron
stable orbits could be achieved by setting up a standing wave.

(b) (i) ItIt was

(b) (i) wasWolfgang
WolfgangPauli
Pauliwho,
who,inin1933,
1933,first
firstsuggested
suggestedthetheexistence
existenceofofanother particle
another
(the neutrino)
particle emitted,emitted,
(the neutrino) along with thewith
along betathe
particle, during during
beta particle, beta decay.
beta decay.
210
(ii) Bi 209.938 57 u
210
Po + 0e 209.937 33 u
+ν
Δm = 0.001 24 u

Mass defect = 0.001 24 u = 2.059 46 × 10–30 kg.

(iii) The mass defect is equivalent to an energy of 1.1571 MeV. If there was no other
emission the beta particle should have a kinetic energy to represent this mass defect,
that is, 1.1571 MeV. As the graph shows, the large majority of electrons have less
than this energy and the energy distribution suggests that there must be another
particle being emitted along with the electron to account for the extra energy. The
102 difference
S U C C E S S inO Nenergy
E H S C between
• P H Y S Ithat
C S of the electron and the 1.1571 MeV can be

explained by the emission

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1
of an associated antineutrino with each electron. The
Excel Success One HSC Physics
energy carried away by the antineutrinos, which are very difficult to detect,
accounts for
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 102 the distribution of the energy of the electrons that can be detected. 22/12/2016 2:09 PM
F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • ANSWERS

(iii) The mass defect is equivalent to an energy of 1.1571 MeV. If there was no other
emission the beta particle should have a kinetic energy to represent this mass
defect, that is, 1.1571 MeV. As the graph shows, the large majority of electrons
have less than this energy and the energy distribution suggests that there must be
another particle being emitted along with the electron to account for the extra
energy. The difference in energy between that of the electron and the 1.1571 MeV
can be explained by the emission of an associated antineutrino with each electron.
The energy carried away by the antineutrinos, which are very difficult to detect,
accounts for the distribution of the energy of the electrons that can be detected.

(c) (i) The Balmer series was originally named because Balmer had been able to
formulate an empirical equation to predict the visible wavelengths emitted from
hydrogen. This equation contained a constant, the number 2, and another integer.
This led to the suggestion that there were non-visible wavelengths; they were
soon found experimentally. Rydberg provided a modified form of Balmer’s
empirical equation that allowed the wavelength of all the hydrogen spectral series
to be determined. When Bohr produced his postulates and began to apply them to
hydrogen, he was able to create an equation to determine the wavelength of light
that would be emitted when an electron in his proposed atom underwent a
transition from one energy level (stationary state) to another. The equation he
produced was identical in form to the one already produced by Rydberg, except
that Rydberg’s constant could now be explained as being the energy of the
hydrogen electron in the ground state (lowest energy level), divided by Planck’s
constant times the speed of light. The Balmer series had already established the
integer relationship in the production of the emission spectra from hydrogen.
When Bohr did his analysis of hydrogen, the experimental detail already known
on the spectra of hydrogen provided immediate support for his idea of stationary
states and quantised energy levels, with the emission of the light producing the
well-known
Chapter 06 Page 243 Wednesday, February Balmer series, explained as the transition of the electron from a
10, 2010 10:46 AM

higher level, into the second of the possible stationary states existing for the
hydrogen electron.
FROM QUANTA TO QUARKS • ANSWERS
(ii) All lines in the Balmer series are produced when the hydrogen electron undergoes
a transition from a higher energy level, into the second possible energy level
(n(n f  2). H represents a transition from ni  3 to nf  2, hence H from ni  4,
f = 2). Hα represents a transition from ni = 3 to nf = 2, hence Hβ from ni = 4,
HγHfrom
 fromni n=i  5,δH
5, H  from
from ni =ni6.Thus
6. Thus the next
the next line line
will will
formform where
where ni Using
ni = 7.  7. Using
the
equation:
the equation:
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
--- = R H ⎛ ----2- – -----2⎞ = 1.097 × 107 ⎛ -----2 – ----2-⎞ = 1.097 × 107 ⎛ --- – ------⎞ .
λ ⎝ nf ni ⎠ ⎝ 2 7 ⎠ ⎝ 4 49⎠
Therefore λ for the next line in the Balmer series is 3.97  10–7 m  397 nm.
Therefore λ for the next line in the Balmer series is 3.97 × 10–7 m = 397 nm.

molecules and have proved valuable in determining the structure of various organic
C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

(d) The neutron has several advantages as a probe. Being neutral, neutrons are not
affected by electric fields and, unlike X-rays, are able to deeply penetrate matter,
through electron clouds, to then scatter and form interference patterns that can reveal
important structural detail. Neutron scattering is particularly useful in identifying
protons and small nuclei, which is very difficult with other techniques. Neutrons
have a very short de Broglie wavelength making them able to resolve very small
objects, and reveal detail regarding the location and structure of nuclei. The
interference patterns can be used to determine the arrangement of atoms in
molecules and have proved valuable in determining the structure of various organic
molecules and the structures of viruses. The magnetic moment of the neutron makes
it particularly useful for studying magnetic materials, for example superconductors.
The energies of the neutrons, scattered from various materials, can be measured
using very sensitive detectors. This information can provide very important detail on
the chemical composition and structural characteristics of complex molecules. One
disadvantage of neutron scattering is that a nuclear reactor is normally required to
produce the neutrons, and this presents associated waste and social issues.
Another process that has increased our understanding of the structure of matter is the
experiments conducted in particle accelerators. Although large modern accelerators
are extremely expensive to construct and maintain, they have the ability to accelerate
particles to incredibly high speeds and provide a vital tool for research into the
nature of matter. The various collisions of very high energy particles, travelling at
relativistic speeds, have allowed scientists to discover a huge array of sub-atomic
particles. Although initially confusing, the results have led to the formulation of the
‘Standard model’ for atoms. The evidence collected through experiments with
particle accelerators has provided vital information to support the ‘Standard model’
and allowed a far greater understanding of the nature of interactions between the
various quarks, leptons and gluons. The largest accelerators, such as CERN, also
offer cosmologists an insight into some of the detail of the conditions present shortly
after the Big Bang, and the opportunity to study the behaviour and interactions of the
various matter and anti-matter particles.

104 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 104 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • ANSWERS

Question 3

(a) (i) The Rutherford model of the atom was based on the results obtained from
-particle scattering from gold foil and proposed a very dense central core that
Rutherford termed a nucleus, only about 1 ten-thousandth of the atomic diameter,
but containing nearly all the atom’s mass and a positive electric charge. He suggested
that the very tiny negatively charged electrons orbited the nucleus like planets to
create the size of the observed atoms.

(ii)
A problem with Rutherford’s idea was that, according to classical electromagnetism,
the electrons are in an accelerated motion (centripetal) and they should radiate
electromagnetic waves and thus lose energy. Bohr refined Rutherford’s model by
suggesting that the electrons did not orbit just anywhere, but, contrary to the
expectations of classical physics, there existed certain allowable (quantised)
energy levels where the electrons could orbit and remain stable. Bohr referred to
these allowable energy levels as stationary states. Bohr considered that the angular
momentum of the electron in an allowable stationary state was quantised
nh
according to the relationship, mvr  . Bohr further suggested that the emission
2π
and absorption spectra for the elements could be explained by the electrons
undergoing a discontinuous transition from one allowable stationary state to
another. With his refinements Bohr was able to offer some explanation of the
periodic nature of chemical properties and was very successful in describing the
spectra of hydrogen.

(b) A proton is composed of two UP quarks and one DOWN quark,

2 1
that is, (2x  )  (– )  +1 charge on proton;
3 3
while a neutron is composed of one UP quark and two DOWN quarks,
2 1
that is, ( )  (2x – )  0 charge on neutron.
3 3

Additional explanation:

Because the rest mass of the DOWN quark is greater than that of an UP quark, the resultant
mass of a neutron is slightly larger than that of a proton and, under normal conditions, a
neutron will only remain stable while it remains combined with protons in a nucleus,
decaying quite quickly when isolated from a nucleus to form a proton, -particle and
antineutrino. Protons are basically stable and have never been known to decay.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 105

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 105 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

C H A P T E R 6 • F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S

(c) (i) Reaction (2) is naturally occurring. It shows the natural radioactive decay of
uranium-238 to form the lighter products thorium-234 and an alpha particle.
The uranium nucleus is unstable and too large for the nuclear forces to maintain
forever. This instability will naturally lead to the radioactive decay of the uranium
with the energy released as it occurs provided from a loss of mass, that is, E  mc2.

(ii) Reaction (3) has a practical application where energy from nuclear fission is to be
used to produce energy. This reaction shows the fission of a uranium-235 nucleus
initiated by absorption of a neutron, with the resulting fission producing more
neutrons, which can then be used to produce a chain reaction and the fission of
further uranium nuclei. This can be applied in a nuclear weapon where a critical
mass of the uranium can be set appropriately so that the chain reaction that results
is uncontrolled, and each neutron liberated by a fission produces fission of another
uranium nucleus. In this way massive amounts of energy can be released very
rapidly with extremely disastrous and unwanted consequences.

The reaction can also be employed in a controlled fashion for peaceful purposes to
provide heat for generating electricity and for small-scale nuclear reactors for
scientific research and production of radioisotopes. In a controlled reaction the
fissile material is distributed in fuel rods in a core arrangement which includes
control rods to absorb neutrons and control the number available to create fission.
The control rods, along with a moderator to slow the speed of the neutrons, allow
the number of fission reactions to be carefully controlled so that it can run at quite
a low temperature, with little heat produced, or, on a larger scale, be warm enough
to exchange the heat produced from the fission reactions in the core to create
steam for use in electricity generation.

(d) (i) The values can be read from the graphs.

For the gravitational force at 10–15 m separation, from the graph,

Fg  –2.3  10–34 N, that is, 2.3  10–34 N attraction.

For the electrostatic force at 10–15 m separation, from the graph, Fe  230 N
repulsion.

(ii) If the distance between the protons within a nucleus is 10–15 m, it can be seen that
the repulsive coulombic force is of the order of 1036 times larger than the attractive
force that gravity creates between the protons. Considering that the protons in a
nucleus are generally bound to form a stable nucleus, there must be an extremely
powerful force to overcome the huge coulombic repulsion and hold the protons
bound within the stable nucleus. It was the known stability of the nuclei of
common elements, and the huge size of the coulombic repulsion between protons
at distances within the nucleus, that led to the need to propose the existence of
another very strong force to bind the particles and keep the nucleus stable. This
very strong attractive force became known as the ‘nuclear strong force’.

106 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 106 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

F R O M Q U A N TA T O Q U A R K S • ANSWERS

(iii) The nuclear strong force

• is much more powerful than electromagnetic forces;
• can only act over a very short range: when particles come within about 3 fm;
• can only act between particles found within a nucleus (nucleons), with
electrons unaffected.

(e) To create a nuclear fission explosion a critical mass of suitable fissile material (fuel) is
required, e.g. uranium-235 or plutonium-239. The critical mass is distributed in such a
way that, on initiation, uncontrolled fission of the fuel will occur. To explode the
weapon, a chemical explosion is used to combine the fuel elements to bring the critical
mass together in an implosion, with fission initiated by neutrons absorbed by fissile
(fuel) nuclei. The neutrons produced from these fissions then go on to create further
fissions with the number of neutrons produced from further fission growing
exponentially. This causes the majority of the fissile nuclei to undergo fission in a very
short time, releasing huge amounts of heat and radiation as the fuel nuclei all undergo
fission. The mass deficit (m) resulting in the lighter mass of the products formed by the
fission is responsible for the energy released during the explosion, that is, E  mc2.

A nuclear reactor uses the same fission reaction to produce energy as in an explosion
but, rather than allowing all the neutrons produced in the fissions to create further
fissions, some are absorbed, and the critical mass is less concentrated, contained in
widely spaced fuel rods. The reaction site also includes a moderator and control rods that
are not found in a fission weapon. The moderator is a material, e.g. heavy water, to slow
the speed of the neutrons produced in the fission reactions as they are involved in
collisions, while the control rods are materials, e.g. cadmium, capable of absorbing some
of the neutrons produced, to limit the number available for further fission reactions. It is
the ability of the moderator to regulate neutron speeds, and the ability of the control rods
to absorb neutrons, that restricts the number of neutrons available and allows the fission
to be regulated, such that the rate of the fission in the core is controlled. This allows heat
to be produced in a controlled manner. A nuclear reactor also includes a coolant to
remove the heat energy produced by the fissions occurring in the reactor core and
prevent the fuel from melting. By lowering the control rods in the reactor core, more
neutrons are absorbed and the amount of fissions occurring can be decreased, or by
raising them, the number of fission reactions can be increased. In this way the fission
reaction is controlled to produce the desired energy output from the reactor core and
allow the heat generated to be transferred as required.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 107

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 107 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chap
CHAPTER 11 • 2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 7 • 2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11

2008 HSC Examination Paper CHAPTER 7

2008
H I G H E R S C H O O L C E R T I F I C AT E
E X A M I N AT I O N

Physics

Total marks – 100

General Instructions Section I

• Reading time – 5 minutes 75 marks
• Working time – 3 hours This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
• Write using black or blue pen
• Draw diagrams using pencil Part A – 15 marks
• Board-approved calculators may • Attempt Questions 1–15
be used • Allow about 30 minutes for this part
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and
Part B – 60 marks
Periodic Table are provided at
the back of this paper • Attempt Questions 16–27
• Write your Centre Number and • Allow about 1 hour and 45 minutes for this part
Student Number where required
Section II
25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 28–32
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

444 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

108 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 108 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 445 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Part A – 15 marks
Attempt Questions 1–15
Allow about 30 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–15.

1 An object on Earth has a weight of 490 N and experiences an acceleration due to gravity
of 9.8 m s–2. On Mars, this object would experience an acceleration due to gravity of
3.7 m s–2.

On Mars, what would be the weight of this object?

(A) 490 N

490
(B) N
9.8

490
(C) × 3.7 N
9.8

490
(D) × 9.8 N
3.7

2 Which of these statements best describes the forces acting on a satellite in orbit around
Earth?

(A) Although gravity has no effect, there is still an outward force.

(B) The satellite is kept up by an outward force that balances the force due to gravity.
(C) Gravity is the only force acting on the satellite and this results in an inward
acceleration.
(D) The effect of gravity is negligible, the satellite is kept in orbit by its momentum and
the net force on it is zero.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 109
445
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 109 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 446 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CHAPTER 7 • 2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11 • 2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

3 An aeroplane is flying horizontally over level ground. It has an altitude of 490 m and a
velocity of 100 m s–1. As the aeroplane passes directly above a cross marked on the
ground, an object is released from the aeroplane.

How far away from the cross will this object land?

(A) 490 m
(B) 1000 m
(C) 10 000 m
(D) 49 000 m

4 An investigation was performed to determine the acceleration due to gravity. A ball was
dropped from various heights and the time it took to reach the ground from each height was
measured. The results were graphed with the independent variable on the horizontal axis.

Which graph best represents the relationship between the variables?

(A) (B)
Time

Time

Height Height

Height

Time Time

5 A spaceship is travelling away from Earth at 1.8 × 108 m s–1. The time interval between
consecutive ticks of a clock on board the spaceship is 0.50 s. Each time the clock ticks,
a radio pulse is transmitted back to Earth.

What is the time interval between consecutive radio pulses as measured on Earth?

(A) 0.40 s
(B) 0.50 s
(C) 0.63 s
(D) 0.78 s

110
446 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 110 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 447 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

6 Three identical wires W1, W2 and W3 are positioned as shown. Each carries a current of
the same magnitude in the direction indicated.

W1 W2 W3

d d

What is the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on W2?

Magnitude Direction
(A) Zero None
(B) Non zero To the left
(C) Non zero To the right
(D) Non zero Out of the page

7 Which of the following is necessary for the operation of an AC induction motor?

(A) A fixed magnetic field in the rotor

(B) A direct current supply to the rotor
(C) A changing magnetic field in the rotor
(D) Split rings conducting current to the rotor

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 111
447
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 111 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 448 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CHAPTER 7 • 2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11 • 2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

8 A plastic cylinder with a metal strip, M, on its surface is rotated at constant speed about
its axis, in a uniform magnetic field. During each rotation the strip, M, passes locations
W, X, Y and Z shown below.

W
M
N X S

Z
Y

When is the potential difference across M greatest?

(A) As M passes W.
(B) As M passes X.
(C) As M passes Y.
(D) As M passes Z.

9 Which statement best explains how induction cooktops heat food?

(A) Eddy currents generated in the water in the food produce heat.
(B) Eddy currents generated in the base of the saucepan produce heat.
(C) Resistance in the glass of the cooktop produces heat.
(D) Resistance in the element beneath the glass cooktop produces heat.

10 The cathode ray tube and transistor circuits in a conventional television rely on
transformers.

What transformation of the 240 V AC input voltage do these components require?

Cathode ray tube Transistor circuits

(A) Step-up Step-down
(B) Step-down Step-up
(C) Step-up Step-up
(D) Step-down Step-down

112
448 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 112 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 449 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

11 An electron, e, moving with a velocity of 8.0 × 106 m s–1 enters a uniform magnetic
field, B, of strength 2.1 × 10–2 T as shown.

40°
e
B

The electron experiences a force which causes it to move along a circular path.

What is the radius of the path followed by the electron?

(A) 1.1 × 10–3 m

(B) 1.4 × 10–3 m
(C) 1.7 × 10–3 m
(D) 2.2 × 10–3 m

12 The debate as to whether cathode rays are charged particles or electromagnetic waves
continued for many years.

Which observation of cathode rays resolved this debate?

(A) Cathode rays can turn a paddle wheel.

(B) An electric field can deflect cathode rays.
(C) Cathode rays can penetrate thin metal foil.
(D) Fluorescent screens glow when struck by cathode rays.

13 What is the energy of a photon of wavelength 580 nm?

(A) 3.43 × 10–19 J

(B) 3.43 × 10–28 J
(C) 3.85 × 10–31 J
(D) 3.85 × 10–40 J

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 113
449
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 113 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 450 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CHAPTER 7 • 2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11 • 2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

14 When a magnet is released above a superconductor that has been cooled below its critical
temperature, the magnet hovers above the superconductor. This is called the Meissner
effect.

What is the best explanation for this?

(A) The net force is zero due to electrostatic repulsion.

(B) The magnetic field freezes at very low temperature.
(C) The net force is zero due to repulsion between the Cooper pairs.
(D) The superconductor excludes magnetic fields at very low temperatures.

15 A block of silicon doped with boron is connected as shown in the diagram below.

10 V

What is the main way in which conduction occurs in the doped silicon block?

(A) Valence band electrons move to the right.

(B) Valence band electrons move to the left.
(C) Conduction band electrons move to the right.
(D) Conduction band electrons move to the left.

114
450 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 114 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 451 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 60 marks Student Number

Attempt Questions 16–27
Allow about 1 hour and 45 minutes for this part

Answer the questions in the spaces provided.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Marks
Question 16 (3 marks)

Using a diagram and text, describe how an investigation can be performed to 3

demonstrate the production and reception of radio waves.

.........................................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 115
451
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 115 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 452 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Marks
Question 17 (5 marks)

The graph below represents the gravitational potential energy (Ep ) of a mass as it is
raised above Earth’s surface.

Height above Earth’s surface (m)

0 RE 2RE 3RE
0
Ep (× 108 J)

–1.0
RE = 1 Earth radius

–2.0

(a) From the graph, what is the gravitational potential energy of the mass when it is 1
one Earth radius above Earth’s surface?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Use an equation to explain why the graph is a curve and not a straight line. 1
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(c) Explain what happens to a rocket’s chemical energy, kinetic energy and 3
gravitational potential energy when it is being launched from the surface of
Earth.

...............................................................................................................................

116
452 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 116 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 453 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Student Number

Marks
Question 18 (4 marks)

The diagram shows a coil in a magnetic field. The coil can rotate freely.

N P S

X Y

The coil is connected to a power supply and, at the instant shown, terminal X is
positive.

(a) In which direction will side PQ initially move? 1

...............................................................................................................................

(b) When the coil starts rotating, the potential difference experienced by the 3
electrons in the wire is less than that supplied by the power supply.

Describe the origin of this effect.

...............................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 117
453
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 117 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 454 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Marks
Question 19 (8 marks)

(a) Explain the changes in momentum when a satellite fires its propulsion system. 3
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(b) A satellite is propelled from Orbit 1 to Orbit 2 as shown in the diagram.

Earth

Orbit 1

Orbit 2

Orbit 2 has a radius of 27 000 km. What is the satellite’s speed in this orbit? 3

...............................................................................................................................

(c) The radius of Orbit 2 is four times that of Orbit 1. What is the ratio of the new 2
orbital period to the original period?

...............................................................................................................................

118
454 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 118 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 455 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Student Number

Marks
Question 20 (4 marks)

Compare how electric current is conducted through samples of germanium at room 4

temperature, mercury at room temperature and mercury at 3 K (Tc for mercury
is 4.2 K).

.........................................................................................................................................

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 119

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 455
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 119 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 456 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CHAPTER 7 • 2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11 • 2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

Marks
Question 21 (6 marks)

‘The work of scientists is influenced by external factors.’ 6

Do you agree? Justify your answer with reference to the work of a scientist in the
development of

• space exploration

• large-scale electricity distribution systems.

.........................................................................................................................................

120
456 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 120 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 457 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Student Number

Marks
Question 22 (3 marks)

Explain why the development of transformers was necessary to enable the large-scale 3
distribution of electrical power.

.........................................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 121
457
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 121 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 458 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Marks
Question 23 (7 marks)

Two parallel metal plates in a magnetic field are separated by a distance d, as shown.
An electron enters the space between the plates.

e v
d
B

(a) On the diagram indicate with an arrow the direction of the force on the electron 1
due to the magnetic field.

(b) The strength of the magnetic field is B = 0.001 T and the electron’s velocity 2
is v = 2 × 106 m s–1. Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic force on the
electron.

...............................................................................................................................

(c) If d = 10 mm, calculate the voltage required for the electron to continue on a 2
straight path parallel to the plates.

...............................................................................................................................

(d) How was this experimental set-up used by Thomson to determine the 2
charge/mass ratio of an electron?

...............................................................................................................................

122
458 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 122 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 459 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Student Number

Marks
Question 24 (6 marks)

How did Einstein’s theory of special relativity and his explanation of the photoelectric 6
effect lead to the reconceptualisation of the model of light?

.........................................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 123
459
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 123 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 460 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CHAPTER 7 • 2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11 • 2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

Marks
Question 25 (5 marks)

The diagrams show two different types of generator spinning at the same number of
revolutions per minute. The difference between the two generators is in the way they
are connected to the external circuits.

N S N S

Generator X Generator Y
Figs. 29.7a, p. 1114 and 29.9a, p. 1115 from UNIVERSITY PHYSICS WITH MODERN PHYSICS, 11th ed. by Hugh D. Young and
Roger A. Freedman. Copyright © 2004 by Pearson Education, Inc. Reprinted by permission.

(a) On the axes below, sketch a voltage-time graph for each generator. 2

Generator X Generator Y
Voltage

Voltage

Time Time

(b) Explain how the difference in connection to the external circuit accounts for the 3
different output voltages.

...............................................................................................................................

124
460 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 124 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 461 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

2008 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Student Number

Marks
Question 26 (3 marks)

An induction coil is a type of transformer that allows a small voltage to be stepped up

to a higher voltage. An induction coil consists of a primary coil wound around an iron
core and a secondary coil. The secondary coil can be moved sideways so that different
lengths of the iron core are within the secondary coil.

The photographs show an induction coil with the secondary coil in two different
arrangements with the power supply turned off. At sufficiently high voltages a spark
can be produced between the secondary coil electrodes.

electrodes Arrangement A Arrangement B electrodes

secondary coil primary coil secondary coil

(a) Which arrangement would produce a spark when the power supply is turned on? 1
Justify your choice.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Explain how different voltages are induced when the secondary coil is moved to 2
different positions.

...............................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 125
461
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 125 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 462 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 27 (6 marks)

A student was given a sample of wire X and a sample of wire Y. The wires looked identical.
However, one was pure chromium and the other was nichrome, an alloy containing chromium
and nickel.

To differentiate between the two wires, the student set up the circuit below and obtained the
results shown in the table.

2Ω

1 m sample
of wire

Potential Current (A)

difference (V) Wire X Wire Y
0 0 0
1.5 0.57 0.20
3.0 1.14 0.39
4.5 1.71 0.59
6.0 2.28 0.79
7.5 2.50 0.99

Question 27 continues

126
462 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 126 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 463 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Marks
Question 27 (continued)

(a) The data for wire X has been plotted on the graph below. Plot the data, including 2
a trend line, for wire Y on the same graph.

Wire X
3
Current (A)

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Potential difference (V)

(b) Calculate the resistance of wire Y. 1

...............................................................................................................................

(d) When the data for wire X was plotted, one data point was considered inconsistent 1
and was disregarded when drawing the trend line for calculating its resistance.

Suggest a physical reason why this data point is inconsistent with the trend line.

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 27

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 127
463
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 127 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 464 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

2008 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 28–32
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer the question in a writing booklet. Extra writing booklets are available.
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 28 Geophysics (Not included in this reproduction)

Question 29 Medical Physics

Question 30 Astrophysics

Question 31 From Quanta to Quarks

Question 32 The Age of Silicon (Not included in this reproduction)

128
464 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 128 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 465 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Marks
Question 29 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

(a) (i) Account for the production and detection of ultrasound waves by the 3
transducer of an ultrasound machine.

(ii) Explain what happens to ultrasound waves as they travel through body 3
tissues and return to the transducer.

(b) (i) Outline TWO uses of endoscopy. 2

(ii) Using diagrams, distinguish between the coherent and incoherent 3

bundles of optical fibres and their roles in endoscopy.

(iii) Outline ONE advantage of endoscopy over alternative surgical 1

procedures.

(ii) Describe how X-rays are produced. 2

(iii) Describe the properties of a radiopharmaceutical substance that make it 2

suitable for producing a bone scan.

(d) Explain how different medical imaging techniques use tomography to improve 6
our diagnostic abilities.

End of Question 29

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 129
465
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 129 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 466 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Marks
Question 30 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

(a) The analysis of electromagnetic radiation is widely used by astronomers.

(i) Contrast emission and absorption spectra in terms of how they are 3
produced.

(ii) Describe the physical characteristics of stars and their motion that can be 3
revealed by spectroscopy.

(b) The table shows some photometric measurements of certain stars.

Star Apparent Absolute Colour

magnitude magnitude index
Bellatrix +1.64 − 2.72 − 0.22
Sirius A −1.47 +1.42 + 0.01
Regulus A +1.35 − 0.52 − 0.11
Betelgeuse + 0.58 − 5.14 +1.85

(i) How much brighter is Sirius A than Bellatrix when viewed from Earth? 2

(ii) Calculate the distance from Earth to Regulus A. 2

(iii) Explain why cooler stars have a more positive colour index than hotter 3
stars.

Question 30 continues

130
466 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 130 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 467 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Marks
Question 30 (continued)

(ii) Compare the nuclear reactions occurring in stars located at positions X 2

and Y on the HR diagram below.

Temperature (K)
25 000 10 000 6000 3000
−10

−5 10 4
Absolute magnitude

0 Y X 10 2

Luminosity
+5 1

+10 10 −2

+15 10 −4
O B A F G K M
Spectral class

(iii) Draw a flowchart summarising the possible pathways a red giant could 2
follow as it evolves.

(d) Explain how observations of binary and variable stars can be used to infer 6
physical properties of these stars.

End of Question 30

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 131
467
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 131 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 468 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Marks
Question 31 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

(a) (i) Outline how you would conduct a first-hand investigation to observe the 2
visible components of the hydrogen emission spectrum.

(ii) How would the results from this investigation support Bohr’s model of 2
the atom?

(iii) Outline ONE feature of atomic emission spectra that cannot be explained 2
by Bohr’s model.

(b) Nuclear transmutations caused by natural radioactivity can be represented in

diagrams such as the one shown. Each symbol represents a radioactive element
and each arrow represents a transmutation.

143 U235
Number of neutrons in the nucleus (N)

141 Th231
Pa231
139
Ac227
137 Th227
Fr223
135 Ra223
At219
133 Rn219
Bi215
131 Po215
At215
129 Pb211
Bi211
127 Po211
Tl207
125 Pb207

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
Number of protons in the nucleus (Z)

(i) How many protons and how many neutrons are there in the nucleus of a 1
Thorium-227 atom?

(ii) Write the equation for the α -decay of Francium-223. 2

Question 31 continues

132
468 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 132 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - Exam.fm7 Page 469 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:41 PM

22 00 0088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Marks
Question 31 (continued)

(c) (i) An atom of Carbon-12 has 6 protons and 6 neutrons in its nucleus. The 3
mass of a Carbon-12 atom is 12.000 atomic mass unit. Show that the
mass defect of one Carbon-12 atom is 0.097 atomic mass unit.

(ii) How much energy is this mass defect equivalent to? 1

(d) (i) Use a diagram to outline one way in which physicists obtain particles 2
with the appropriate energy to investigate the structure of matter.

(ii) Describe the key features and components of the standard model of 4
matter.

(e) Use the work of TWO physicists to explain how the combination of ideas led to 6
new directions in scientific thinking about atomic structure.

End of Question 31
End of Question 31

End of paper
© Board of Studies NSW 2008
© Board of Studies NSW 2008

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 133
469
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 133 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 470 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

2008 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A

490
1 C Weight on Earth = Fg = m × gE , therefore m = --------- .
9.8
490
Weight on Mars = Fg = m × gM = --------- × 3.7 N.
9.8

2 C A satellite is being held in orbit by the centripetal force created by its gravitational
attraction to Earth, i.e. the only force is inward due to gravity.

3 B Velocity of plane = 100 m s–1 horizontally, therefore initial velocity at

release = 100 m s–1 horizontal. Now g = 9.8 m s–2 vertically down and height
1
(sv ) = 490 m. Since sv = --- g t 2, then 490 = 0.5 × 9.8 × t 2 , therefore t = 10 s. It
2
moves horizontally 100 m for each second it falls, therefore, neglecting friction,
the object travels 100 × 10 = 1000 m from the cross.

1
4 A Since sv = --- g t 2, then g is proportional to ‘s over t 2’, therefore the graph will be
2
parabolic in shape. Since the height, s, was decided upon by the experimenters,
height is the independent variable and the time to fall to the ground is the
dependent variable. Graph A shows the expected data.

5 C Time will be dilated for a stationary observer on Earth.

t0
- , to = 0.50 s, and v = 1.8 × 108 m s–1.
Applying tv = -----------------
2
v
1 – ----2
c

6 A The currents are the same in ALL wires and the wires are IDENTICAL and W2 is
the SAME distance from W1 and W3. Applying right-hand grip to analyze the
fields, BOTH wires W1 and W3 will create a force of repulsion on W2. These
forces are equal in size but act in opposite directions. This means the resultant
force on W2 is zero and it will not move.

7 C An AC induction motor supplies AC to the stator (stationary coils) and the

changing magnetic field produced by the AC induces a current in the rotor
(squirrel cage). The interaction of the magnetic field produced by the AC in the
stator, with the magnetic field created by the induced current in the rotor, results
in a torque on the rotor and it begins to move.

134
470 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 134 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 471 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

8 B According to Faraday’s law, the induced emf is proportional to the rate of change
of magnetic flux, i.e. the induced emf will be largest when the metal strip moves
across the field, cutting flux at a maximum rate. This would correspond to when
the strip is at point X.

9 B An induction cook-top heats by producing changing magnetic fields which induce

currents in metal saucepans. The induced eddy currents lose their energy as heat
in the saucepan.

10 A Cathode ray tubes need very high voltages to operate, so a step-up transformer is
needed, while transistor circuits operate with a small voltage requiring a step-
down transformer.

11 D The path of the electron is perpendicular to the magnetic field, therefore FB = B q v.

2
mv
The magnetic force acts towards the centre of the circle (centripetal) ∴ FB = --------- .
r
2 – 31 6
mv mv 9.109 × 10 × 8 × 10
Thus, B q v = --------- , or r = ------- = -------------------------------------------------------------
-.
r Bq 2.1 × 10 –2 × 1.602 × 10 –19
The radius of the path = 2.2 × 10–3 m.

12 B This was the only test at the time considered to definitively show a particle
property. Their observed deflection in an electric field confirmed that cathode rays
were negatively charged particles.

13 A Using the equation for photon energy, i.e. E = h f, and wave equation, c = f λ , thus
– 34 8
hc ( 6.626 × 10 × 3 × 10 )
E = ------ = ------------------------------------------------------------ = 3.43 × 10–19 J.
λ 580 × 10
– 9

14 D A property of all superconductors is that they try to prevent any change in the
internal magnetic field. When a small magnet is released, it induces eddy currents
in the superconductor which act to cancel the internal field and result in the
magnet becoming magnetically pinned by the external field created by the
currents in the superconductor, leaving the magnet levitating.

15 B Doping with boron (Gp3) produces a p-type semiconductor. In a p-type

semiconductor it is positive holes that predominate as charge carriers within the
lattice. The holes will move to the right (attached to the negative terminal)
resulting in valence electrons moving to the left (attached to the positive
terminal).

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 135
471
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 135 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 472 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE X
E XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Section I, Part B

Question 16

An induction coil was attached to a DC power supply and set up on a table. The induction coil
was adjusted to give a strong spark between the electrodes. (A safe distance of around 3 to 5 m
was maintained from the induction coil when it was operating and it was only turned on for
observations.) The induction coil would produce radio waves when operating due to the rapidly
discharging spark. An AM radio was turned on and the tuning dial adjusted to a low frequency
region, but in between radio stations. This was to act as a receiver to detect the radio waves
produced from the induction coil. (A quiet static sound was observed when the induction coil
was OFF.) The induction coil was turned on and observations were made by listening to the
radio. This was repeated with the radio in different positions in the room (3, 5, and 8 m away
from the induction coil), and using the tuner to check the result at three different reception
frequencies.

(It was observed that the volume of the static sound from the radio increased significantly
whenever the induction coil was turned on and was most pronounced at the lowest frequency,

Question 17
(a) y-intercept at RE = GPE at RE = –0.9 × 108 J.

Gm E m s 1
(b) Since EGP = – -----------------
- , then, EGP ∝ – --- . To produce a straight line would require EGP ∝ r.
r r
The inverse relationship between E and r leads to the curved graph.

(c) At launch, the ignition of the fuel begins conversion of the chemical potential energy in
the fuel into kinetic energy of the exhaust gases. The impulse from the exhaust delivers
energy to the rocket and work is done. As this occurs, the rocket begins to move upward
gaining both gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy. The chemical potential
energy in the fuel continues to reduce as more fuel is consumed, being converted to
produce both an increase in the kinetic energy of the rocket as it increases speed, and an
increase in the gravitational potential energy of the rocket as it rises higher.

136
472 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 136 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 473 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA ATTI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

Question 18
(a) The end PQ will move down, i.e. the coil will move anticlockwise.

(b) As the coil of the conductor begins to move, it experiences a changing magnetic field
and thus an emf is induced in the coil. According to Lenz’s law, this emf will be in such
a direction as to oppose the change that created it, i.e. a back-emf is induced in the coil
reducing the size of effective emf of the power supply. This has the effect of a smaller
potential difference being experienced by the electrons in the coil.

Question 19
(a) When the satellite rocket fires, the impulse to the exhausted gas creates an equal and
opposite impulse to the satellite, i.e. Δpex = –Δps. With conservation of momentum, this
means that mex Δvex = –ms Δvs, i.e. the change in momentum of the exhaust in one
direction is equal and opposite to the change in momentum of the satellite. In this way
the satellite rocket can be fired for the right time, directly away from the desired
direction of change, and deliver the right impulse to the satellite to produce the desired
change in velocity.

2
Gm 1 m E m 1 v Gm
(b) Since Fg = Fc , then, -----------------
- = ----------- . Rearranging gives v = -----------E .
r
2 r r
– 11 24
6.67 × 10 × 6.0 × 10
Using the data, v = - = 3849.9 m s–1.
----------------------------------------------------------
7
2.7 × 10
Speed of satellite = 3.85 km s–1.

2 2
T1 T2
(c) -3 = -------
The relationship between periods given by Kepler’s 3rd law, i.e. ------- -.
3
r1 r2
2 2 2 3
T1 T2 T 1 × 64r 1
Now r2 = 4r1 , -------
- = --------------
3
- , ∴ ---------------------------
3 3
= T22.
r1 ( 4r 1 ) r1
∴ 64T12 = T22, ∴ 8T1 = T2 , i.e. the period of the second orbit is 8× longer than the first.

Question 20
The germanium is a semiconductor and, with only a small input of energy, the current will be
conducted as electron/hole pairs, which will drift slowly in opposite directions through the
germanium lattice as valence electrons move into the conduction band, or, to fill a hole
created in the valence band, i.e. there is some resistance to their motion.

The mercury at room temperature represents a metallic conductor with valence electrons that
are free to move into the conduction band to flow as a current, i.e. there is only a relatively
very small resistance. The mercury at 3K is below the critical temperature and will behave as a
superconductor. Current will easily flow as ‘Cooper pairs’ of electrons that are able to move
through the superconductor with no resistance.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 137
473
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 137 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 474 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 21
I would agree with this statement and it is very true that external factors can influence the
work of scientists. Werner vonBraun was always interested in rocketry and as a young child
dreamed of space exploration using rockets. When World War II began he came under social
and political pressures when, as a leading German scientist, he was enlisted to help develop
weapons for Germany. This led to him being a principal in the development of the infamous
V-2 rockets that devastated many sites in England. At the end of the war he organized it so he
was captured by soldiers from the USA rather than Russia.

Having travelled to America, vonBraun again had external factors affect his science as the
‘Race for space’ between the Soviet Union and the USA developed. With the US considering
that there was enormous political and military advantage to be gained, vonBraun was provided
with enormous resources and able to lead a team of scientists who eventually developed the
Saturn-V rockets that carried the Apollo missions to the Moon.

It can be seen that external factors had a significant effect on the work done by vonBraun,
both in the direction it was taking, and also in providing the circumstances for him to have
access to the facilities he needed to continue his childhood dream to research the flight of
rockets.

Question 22
Transformers were vital to large scale distribution of electrical energy as the step-up
transformer could be employed to raise the transmission voltage to very high values to transfer
power over long distances and deliver the efficiency to make the energy transfer viable.
Considering power transmitted, PT = V I, with a very high voltage (V ), the current (I ) is very
small. With the power lost in transmission lines given by PL = R I 2, where R is the resistance
of the transmission lines, by transmitting at very high voltage and small currents, the energy
losses in the transmission lines are significantly reduced. The voltage can then be stepped down
by a step-down transformer to safe values for domestic use.

Question 23
(a)

Arrow pointing down page as shown

(b) Magnetic force, FB = B q v sin θ, where θ = 90°.

∴ FB = 0.001 × (1.602 × 10–19) × 2 × 106 = 3.204 × 10–16 N down page.

138
474 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 138 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 475 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

(c) For an electron to continue with no deflection, FB = FE = 3.204 × 10–16 N up the page.
V V d
Now FE = q E , and, E = ---- , ∴ FE = q ---- , or V = FE --- .
d d q
– 16
3.204 × 10 × 0.010
∴ V = ---------------------------------------------------
– 19
- = 20.0 V.
1.602 × 10

(d) Thomson used the balanced fields to determine the velocity of the cathode rays, i.e.
E
since FB = FE, then B q v = q E, giving, v = --- . Without any other changes, one of the
B
fields was turned off and Thomson made measurements on the path of the cathode rays.
Using these measurements, and known values in his experimental set-up, Thomson was
q
able to combine all the information collected and calculate the ---- ratio of cathode rays.
m

Question 24
In 1905 Einstein published his first major works and in the process produced a new view of the
nature of light. With his paper on the Special theory of relativity, Einstein suggested that light’s
velocity, c, was the ‘terminal’ velocity with nothing being able to travel faster than c. Einstein
went further by proposing an entirely new concept when he said that c would remain constant,
irrespective of the frame of reference where measured, meaning that mass, length, and time
would now become variable. Einstein also incorporated c into his mass-energy equivalence
equation, i.e. E = m c2.

In a second paper Einstein proposed an explanation for the photo-electric effect and put forward
the idea that light energy came in little bundles, photons, that behaved like tiny particles with
the energy of the photon given using Planck’s quantum idea, i.e. E = h f. His explanation
suggested that the kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectron would be equal to the ‘photon
energy’ minus the ‘energy required to remove the electron’ from an atom, i.e. Ek = h f – φ. This
suggested a particle property for light. As experimental evidence for Einstein’s ideas was found,
it led to a reconceptualization of light and it was now seen as being a wave-particle duality,
travelling as electromagnetic waves but with the energy existing in the tiny, quantized bundles
called ‘photons’. This incorporation of Planck’s quantum idea provided the impetus for others
to look more closely at quantum ideas which led to the development of ‘Quantum theory’.

Question 25
(a)

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 139
475
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 139 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 476 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

(b) The coil of wire rotating in the magnetic field, as seen in both generators, naturally
produces AC as the ends of the coil move up, then down, through the region of
magnetic field. This means that generator Y, with two slip-rings and brushes, will
provide AC to the external circuit. In Generator X, the brushes in contact with the split-
ring commutator provide fluctuating DC to the external circuit. The split in the ring
means that at each half revolution of the coil, the brushes swap the side of the rotating
coil they are in contact with and, as a result, the current supplied to the external circuit
remains in the same direction, i.e. DC.

Question 26
(a) The arrangement A is most likely to spark when turned on. This is because the primary
coil is completely within the secondary coil and, as such, the secondary coil will be
subjected to a maximum change in magnetic flux when the current is supplied to the
dφ
primary, i.e. V = – n ------ .
dt

(b) As the secondary coil is moved further along the primary coil, the amount of magnetic
flux changing in the secondary coil reduces, with the flux reduced to a minimum as
shown in arrangement B. As shown by the equation in (a), the induced emf is directly
proportional to the rate of change of magnetic flux. Considering φ = B A, the flux
change is a maximum when the secondary coil completely surrounds the primary coil
that is producing the changing magnetic field.

Question 27
(a)

140
476 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 140 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 477 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

voltage
(b) Resistance = ----------------- . Resistance is equal to the inverse of the slope of the graph
current
6
= ---------- = 7.6 Ω.
0.79

V
(c) Alloys tend to have a greater resistance than the pure metals. Based on the results of ----
I
for the two wires, i.e. the inverse of the slope for each line, the graph suggests that wire
X is the pure metal wire as it has the lower resistance.

(d) The current at this point is lower than expected but larger than in the previous trials.
Because the heat energy produced in the wire is EH = R I 2 Δt, it is most likely during the
last trial, when the current was largest, that the wire got hotter, causing its resistance to
increase.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 141
477
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 141 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 478 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE X
E XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Section II — Options

Question 29 — Medical Physics

(a) ii(i) The transducer has piezoelectric crystals, usually made from lead titanate,
zirconate pzt which respond both to an applied voltage and to pressure.

When a potential difference (PD) is applied to the surface of the crystals, the
crystals change shape. This happens because molecular dipoles in the crystal
lattice align in the electric field produced by the PD. When the PD oscillates in the
MHz range, the crystal surfaces vibrate, producing ultrasound.

Reflected ultrasound returning to the transducer puts pressure on the pzt crystals,
squeezing and relaxing them. This causes alignment and relaxation of the
molecular dipoles in the crystals and this produces an oscillating field and hence
variations in PD across the crystal surfaces which can be detected and used by
computer software to produce an image.

i(ii) As ultrasound waves travel in through the body they encounter boundaries
between the different tissues. At these boundaries some of the ultrasound is
reflected back to the transducer and some is transmitted further into the body. The
amount of ultrasound reflected and transmitted is related to the difference in
acoustic impedance between the two different tissues at each boundary. If there is
a large difference in acoustic impedance, most of the ultrasound will be reflected
and only a small amount will be transmitted. If the difference is small however,
most will be transmitted and only a little reflected.

(b) ii(i) 1. Colonoscopy – the endoscope is inserted through the anus to inspect the colon.
It is often used to take samples of tissue and remove small polyps.
2. Key-hole surgery – a minimally invasive way of doing operations to repair
joints such as the knee and shoulder.

i(ii) Coherent bundles – all the fibres are aligned so that they are in the same relative
position at both ends of the bundle. An eye-piece or camera at the end of these
bundles is used by the doctor when viewing what is at the distal end of the
endoscope (eg a polyp in the colon).

Incoherent bundles are much cheaper to produce because they do not have the
optical fibres aligned in the same relative positions at each end. A light source
directed into these bundles delivers light at the distal end of the endoscope so that
internal structures can be seen (using the coherent bundles).

142
478 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 142 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 479 Tuesday, October 26, 2010 2:29 PM

22000088 HHS SC C E EX XA AMMI NI NA AT TI OI ON N P P

A AP PE ER R •• AANNSSWWEERRSS

(iii) Endoscopy is minimally invasive using only small holes for operation or using
natural openings in the body to view inside and therefore recovery time after a
procedure is much less than it would be if conventional surgical techniques were
used to open up the body.

(c) ii(i) X-rays are passed through the body from outside to make a quick shadow image
that shows the structure of the bones. This is particularly useful when identifying
possible fractures and other structural abnormalities of the skeleton. Bone scans
however use an internal source of gamma rays from a specially tailored radio-
pharmaceutical to produce a functional image of the bones. This is particularly
useful when identifying stress fractures and sites of more rapid bone growth
associated with bone cancer.

i(ii) X-rays are produced in a special cathode ray tube. Electrons are accelerated by a
large potential difference (25kV – 250kV) to high speeds from a heated cathode
so that they strike a rapidly rotating tungsten anode at great velocities. As the
electrons are slowed by the tungsten atoms in the anode, braking radiation
produces a broad spectrum of X-rays used in medical diagnosis. In addition to
these X-rays, characteristic X-rays are produced when electrons in the lowest
electron shell of the tungsten atoms of the anode are dislodged and electrons from
higher levels within the atom drop down to take the place of the dislodged
electrons.

(iii) The radio-pharmaceutical will:

• be readily and quickly absorbed by bone cells/tissue,
• produce gamma radiation (which is highly penetrating) so that an image can be
produced with a gamma camera.
The gamma-emitting radioisotope that is part of the radio-pharmaceutical will
have a short half-life so that the person is not radioactive for very long and any
tissue damage from the gamma rays will be kept to a minimum.

(d) Tomography involves producing images of planes or ‘slices’ of the body. It is used in a
variety of imaging techniques including CAT, PET and MRI. The technique allows
digital processing of the data from various slices and can be used to digitally remove
bone, flesh or organs or to produce three-D images of particular organs, etc, and this
enables doctors to have a better view of a target problem.

CAT scans use X-rays taken from many different angles to produce a 256 grey scale
image of a thin slice of the body. The patient is usually placed on a movable bed that
can be systematically moved through a gantry that contains the rotating structure
containing an X-ray tube and a series of detectors that are opposite. When struck by X-
rays the detectors produce electrical signals that are sent to the computer for processing
into an image. Each image is based on the X-ray absorbing properties of small sections
of the body within the slice. Each small section or voxel is assigned a density number
which is used to produce a two-dimensional image on a computer. Multiple images
taken from multiple slices of the body can allow three-dimensional images of particular
parts of the body to be produced. CAT scans have greatly improved doctors’ abilities to

E x c e l S US CU CC EC SE SS SO NOEN EH SHCS C• •P H
PHY SY ISCI S
CS 143
479
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 143 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 480 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

diagnose almost any structural abnormalities of the body including tiny brain tumours
and brain damage caused by even very small strokes.

PET scans use gamma rays to produce functional images of various parts of the body. A
radio-pharmaceutical that contains a short half-life positron-emitting isotope, and that
will target a specific organ such as the brain (eg. F19DG) is put into the patient by
injection or inhalation. As these isotopes decay, the positrons annihilate with electrons
and produce two gamma photons that travel in opposite directions. The patient is placed
inside the PET gantry which contains photo-multiplier tubes that detect these gamma
ray pairs and use their trajectory to produce an image that shows the position of radio-
pharmaceutical uptake. These functional images have allowed doctors to identify a wide
range of functional abnormalities, especially of the brain including the early onset of
Alzheimer’s disease.

MRI uses radio waves produced by variations in the precession of protons in the
hydrogen atoms of water molecules in the body. After the nuclei absorb radio
frequencies while subjected to a very strong magnetic field they release the energy
again and this is detected by a series of aerials and processed by a powerful computer to
produce images. The two- and three-dimensional images produced can provide
structural and sometimes functional information. MRI is particularly useful in the
diagnosis of soft tissue problems such as muscle damage, and the identification of even
very small tumours.

In general, medical imaging techniques such as CAT, PET and MRI that use
tomography often lead to much earlier diagnosis and have made diagnosis of medical
problems much more accurate. They have removed much of the guesswork that
occurred prior to the development of these computer-based imaging techniques.

144
480 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 144 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 481 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

Question 30 — Astrophysics
(a) (i) Emission spectra are produced by quasars or emission nebulae, but only ever by
very rare stars. Their appearance is a sequence of bright coloured lines
superimposed on a dimmer background, which may be black (nebulae) or
continuous (quasars).
When atoms are excited by energy, such as light or intense heat, their electrons
gain sufficient energy to jump from their ground state to higher energy levels.
When they drop back to their original level, in one step or several smaller ones, a
photon is released in each case. The frequency/colour of the photon depends upon
the energy lost by the electron as it drops.
Absorption spectra are released by stars and galaxies (also by dark nebulae).
They are observed as narrow dark lines superimposed upon a continuous
spectrum.
As atoms are excited by light from a blackbody (or other incandescent source),
their electrons absorb specific photons of light corresponding with the energy
quanta that the electrons require to jump to higher energy levels. When they drop
down they do release that energy again, as explained above, but it is emitted in
random directions, so there is a reduced number of those specific photons
compared with other photons.

(ii) Several characteristics of stars may be revealed by spectroscopy, such as their

colour, surface temperature, spectral class, luminosity, and density. Their
temperature may be determined by matching their blackbody radiation curve
against those of other blackbodies, the surface temperatures of which are known
[Wien’s law]. Their spectral class is found by comparing their spectrogram against
those of stars whose spectral class is known.
Spectroscopy can also reveal the motion of certain stars. The Doppler effect
indicates that a star is receding from Earth if its spectral lines are shifted towards
the red, while a blue-shift of its spectral lines indicates that the star is moving
towards us, at least partially. The Doppler effect also causes broadening of the
spectral lines of a star if it is rotating fairly rapidly across our line of sight.
Spectroscopy can also reveal the motion of the stars of a binary.

mB – mS 1.64 – – 1.47
IS --------------------
5 IS ------------------------------
5
(b) ii(i) ----- = 100 ∴ ----- = 100 = 1000.622 = 17.5.
IB IB

Hence Sirius appears to be 17.5 times brighter than Bellatrix (as viewed from
Earth).

d d
i(ii) M = m – 5 log ⎛ ------⎞ , ∴ –0.52 = 1.35 – 5 log ⎛ ------⎞ ,
⎝ 10⎠ ⎝ 10⎠

d – 0.52 – 1.35 d
∴ log ⎛ ------⎞ = ------------------------------- = 0.374, ∴ ------ = 100.374 = 2.366.
⎝ 10⎠ –5 10

∴ d = 23.66 parsecs from Earth.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 145
481
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 145 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 482 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

(iii) The colour index of a star is given by the formula C.I. = B – V where B is actually
mB — the visual magnitude of a star when it is viewed through a special blue, or
photographic filter; and V is actually mV — the visual magnitude of a star when it
is viewed through a special yellow-green, or visual filter.
Hot stars, coloured blue or blue-white, emit a far greater proportion of blue than
yellow light. When viewed through a blue filter they look almost as bright as
usual, whereas, when viewed through a visual filter they appear far dimmer.
Dimmer stars have higher magnitudes, so the colour index of a hot star will be
small or negative.
Cooler stars, coloured orange or red, however, appear much dimmer when viewed
through a blue filter than when observed through a yellow filter, as they release a
far greater proportion of yellow light than blue, so the colour index of cool stars is
more positive.

(c) (i) Before fusion starts in a newly-formed star, the main physical process occurring in
the accretion disc is gravitational collapse: the rapidly-increasing mass of the
central core attracts more and more mass inwards. As this involves the loss of
gravitational potential energy, every kilogram of matter that falls inward increases
the temperature of the core, as well as the pressure acting on it.

(ii) A star located in position X will be a Red Giant. In its central core, helium is fusing
to form carbon by what is known as the ‘triple-alpha’ reaction. In addition,
hydrogen is fusing to form helium in a shell surrounding the central core.
A star located in position Y will be a B-class Main Sequence star. Such stars
possess only one core, within which hydrogen is fusing to become helium. In
more massive stars like Bs, the fusion process is most likely to be by the C–N–O
cycle.

(iii)
Red Giant

Supergiant
Planetary
Nebula

Supernova
White
Dwarf Neutron Star Black Hole

(d) Observations of binaries and variable stars have been very helpful to astronomers,
allowing them to infer various physical properties of the stars involved.
Binaries
A binary is two (or more) stars that orbit around their common centre of mass.
• The two stars comprising a Visual Binary can be observed, and if their orbital
period and the semi-major axis (average distance of separation) of the stars can be

146
482 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 146 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 483 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

measured, then the mass of the binary can be determined, using the formula
3
4πr
m1 + m2 = ----------2- , and from this the masses of the individual stars can usually be
GT
determined as well.
• The light-curve of an Eclipsing Binary allows comparison of the brightness of the
two stars, and often may also allow their relative sizes to be inferred.
• The periodic variation of the spectral lines of a Spectroscopic Binary allow the
spectral class of the individual stars to be estimated, as well as their period, and
the Doppler shifts of their spectral lines permit the rotational velocity of each star
to be found.
• If the orbital period and radius of an Astrometric Binary can be accurately
estimated, the mass of the invisible central star can be determined.
Variable stars
There are several types of variable star; the light-curve of a variable is not constant.
Cepheid Variables are stars whose light-curve varies periodically. The period of any
Cepheid is proportional to its mean Absolute Magnitude, allowing this to be determined
accurately. This is then compared with its mean Apparent Magnitude, allowing the
distance of the Cepheid away from Earth to be measured. The spectrum of a Cepheid
indicates that its colour spectral class/surface temperature changes periodically.
Observation of the spectral lines of a Cepheid allows a varying Doppler effect to be
seen, showing astronomers that Cepheids do actually expand and contract.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 147
483
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 147 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 484 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE X
E XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 31 — From Quanta to Quarks

(a) (i) A hydrogen-filled discharge lamp and power supply was set up behind a cardboard
screen with a small opening to allow the light to emerge. The H lamp was switched
on and, with the room dark, the light emerging from the H lamp was examined with
a calibrated spectroscope. The position of each line in the observed ‘visible bright
line spectrum’ was recorded, using the visible scale of the spectroscope to note the
wavelength for each coloured line. The results were then compared with references.

(ii) The Bohr model of the hydrogen atom incorporated the idea of ‘stationary states’
and quantized values for the angular momentum of the electron in the different
allowed orbits. He used his model to suggest that photons, where E = h f, would be
emitted from excited atoms when an electron underwent a transition from a higher
energy level to a lower energy level. The calculations he performed allowed him to
accurately predict the observed spectrum produced by hydrogen during the
experiment. This means that the experiment in (i) would have collected results to
support Bohr’s model for an atom.

(iii) A feature of the hydrogen spectrum that could not be explained by the Bohr model
would be:
• an inability to explain the relative intensity of the different spectral lines
observed,
• the existence of hyperfine spectral lines, found when improved equipment
showed that the bright lines (as in (i)) can be resolved into a number of finer
lines.

(b) (i) Thorium contains 90 protons and (227 – 90) = 137 neutrons.
223 219 4 2
(ii) Alpha-decay francium, 87Fr → 85At + 2He .

(c) (i) Mass when unbound of individual components in carbon-12 atom, i.e.:
Mass of 6 protons = 6 × 1.673 × 10–27 = 1.0038 × 10–26 kg.
Mass of 6 neutrons = 6 × 1.675 × 10–27 = 1.0050 × 10–26 kg.
Mass of 6 electrons = 6 × 9.109 × 10–31 kg = 5.4654 × 10–30 kg.
Total mass = 2.0093 × 10–26 kg. Converting to amu,
– 26
2.0093 × 10
- = 12.0972 amu.
----------------------------------
– 27
1.661 × 10
The mass of C-12 is 12.000 amu, showing that a total mass defect of 0.097 amu
occurs when the particles become bound together in the atom.

(ii) 0.097 amu = 1.61117 × 10–28 kg.

Now E = m c2 = 1.6112 × 10–28 × 9 × 1016 = 1.45 × 10–11 J.

148
484 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 148 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 485 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

22000088 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA ATTI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

(d) (i) The diagram below represents the basic features of a particle accelerator like that
found at CERN. In this accelerator, protons and anti-protons are produced, then
released from the source rooms. The particles enter an evacuated chamber which
forms a large circle. Inside the tube, magnetic fields control the charged particles
as they travel in a circular path in opposite directions. The magnetic fields produced
in the circular tube control the beams of charged particles so that they do not collide
and they receive a boost from the accelerator tube to increase their speed. After
travelling around the circular path at near the speed of light, the particles are made
to collide head-on in the target room. The target room is full of an array of different
sensors. By colliding particles with more and more energy, scientists are able to
gain more detail on the structure and composition of matter.

Source

Target room Accelerator

tube

Source

Not to scale

(ii) The key features and components of the Standard model can be summarized as
follows:

Fermions (obey Fermi Statistics) Bosons (obey Bose-Einstein statistics)

Matter constituents Force carriers (Uncharged)
Gluon – creates nuclear strong force
Electric Electric
Quarks Leptons which only acts on quarks to bind them
charge charge
together.
Up 2
/3 Electron –1 W and Z bosons – create nuclear weak
Down –1/3 e-neutrino 0 force involved in β-decay.

Charm 2
/3 Muon –1 Photon – creates electromagnetic forces
Strange – /3
1 μ-neutrino 0 between particles with electric charge.

Top 2
/3 Tau –1 Graviton – creates gravitational force
Bottom – /3
1 τ-neutrino 0 of attraction between masses (???)

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 149
485
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 149 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 11 - 2008 Answers Page 486 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:23 PM

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 17 1 • • 2 02 00 80 8H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

The Hadrons — Quarks combine by the strong force to form TWO types of
hadron. (Common examples shown below.)

Baryons Mesons

Proton (u u d quarks) π-meson (pion) (u and anti-d quarks)

Neutron (u d d quarks)

For each particle type there is a corresponding identical anti-matter particle

with the opposite electric charge e.g. positron for electron, anti-quark for each
quark, anti-proton for proton. Leptons DO NOT experience strong interactions.
Normal matter contains only the up and down quarks, with the electron the
common lepton.

According to the Standard model, the quarks are bound by the very short range,
strong force with its interaction combining up and down quarks to form the positive
protons and neutral neutrons. The residual strong force acts to bind the protons and
neutrons together to form the nucleus of an atom. The weaker electromagnetic force
acts to bind the negatively charged electrons to the positively charged protons in the
nucleus. The residual electromagnetic force acts to bind atoms together into larger
structures, e.g. salts and molecules. The weakest force, gravity, acts on the mass in
particles to attract them together.

(e) The start of the twentieth century saw Einstein (1905) produce his theory of Special
relativity and also a solution to the ‘photoelectric effect’, involving Planck’s idea of
quantized energy, and describing bundles of light energy with E = h f, i.e. photons. This
was followed later (1913) with Bohr expanding on Rutherford’s nuclear model of the
atom and introducing Planck’s idea of quantized energy. Bohr proposed that the
electrons were able to exist in certain ‘stationary states’, postulating that the angular
nh
momentum of the electrons was quantized, i.e. mvr = ------ , where n was an integer. His
2π
model proved very successful in explaining hydrogen but did not work as well for larger
atoms and some considered the fusion of classical and quantum ideas to be a problem.

In 1923 Louis deBroglie used a combination of ideas, i.e. E = mc2 from Einstein’s
special relativity, and E = hf, from Planck’s idea of quantized energy and by relating the
equations, i.e. mc2 = h f, was able to propose the existence of ‘matter-waves’ with a
h
particle wavelength given by λ = --- . When the deBroglie idea of matter-waves was
p
applied to the electron in a hydrogen atom, the calculations produced the same results as
the Bohr model had predicted and confirmed. This provided a lot of impetus and others
began to apply all the known details to develop an entirely new view of atomic
structure. The work of Heisenberg and Schrodinger incorporated the deBroglie
hypothesis and this led to quantum mechanics and an entirely new description of the
structure of atoms.

150
486 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 150 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
2009 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2009 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 12

2009 HSC Examination Paper

CHAPTER 8

2009
H I G H E R S C H O O L C E R T I F I C AT E
E X A M I N AT I O N

Physics

Total marks – 100

General Instructions Section I

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 487

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 151

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 151 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 488 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CHAPTER 8 • 2009 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 12 • 2009 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 15 marks
Attempt Questions 1–15
Allow about 30 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–15.

1 A fast-moving space probe passes close to a planet.

During its journey, how does the gravitational field of the planet affect the speed and
direction of the probe?

Speed Direction
(A) Remains constant Remains constant
(B) Remains constant Changes
(C) Changes Changes
(D) Changes Remains constant

2 A satellite is moving in a circular orbit of radius 7.0 × 106 m around Earth.

If the speed of the satellite is 8.1 × 103 m s–1, what is its centripetal acceleration?

(A) 9.4 m s–2

(B) 9.8 m s–2
(C) 5.6 × 1025 m s–2
(D) 3.9 × 1032 m s–2

3 A satellite is moved from a geostationary orbit to a higher orbit.

Which statement about the orbit change is correct?

(A) During the move the gravitational potential energy decreases.

(B) The change in gravitational potential energy is independent of the mass of the
satellite.
(C) The work done is the difference between the gravitational potential energy of the
higher orbit and that of the geostationary orbit.
(D) The work done is the energy required to move the satellite, which is in the
gravitational field, from a very large distance away, to the higher orbit.

152 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

488 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 152 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 489 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

2009 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2009 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

4 A device launches two identical balls (x and y) simultaneously in a horizontal direction

from the same height. The results are shown.

Launch device
NOT
TO
SCALE

x y

Which statement correctly describes what happens?

(A) x hits the ground before y as it is closer to the launch site.

(B) y hits the ground before x as it has a higher launch velocity.
(C) x and y hit the ground simultaneously with the same velocity.
(D) x and y hit the ground simultaneously with different velocities.

5 During a lunar eclipse, Earth moves between the Sun and the Moon.

NOT
TO
SCALE

Sun Earth Moon

What happens to the force exerted by the Sun on the Moon?

(A) It increases.
(B) It decreases.
(C) It remains unchanged.
(D) It depends on the closeness of Earth to the Moon.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 153

Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 489
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 153 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 490 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE R
R 1
8 2 • •2 02 00 90 9H SH CS CE XE AX M
AMI NI AN TA ITOI N
O NP AP PA EP RE R

6 Which of the following would increase the output of a simple DC generator?

(A) Increasing the rotation speed of the rotor

(B) Reducing the number of windings in the coil
(C) Using slip rings instead of a split ring commutator
(D) Wrapping the windings around a laminated, aluminium core

7 A type of car speedometer consists of a rotating bar magnet which produces eddy
currents in a copper disc. A model of this is shown.

N S Bar magnet SIDE

VIEW
Copper disc

Axle

As the magnet begins to rotate, in which direction does the disc move?

(A) Toward the magnet

(B) Away from the magnet
(C) Rotates in the same direction as the magnet
(D) Rotates in the opposite direction to the magnet

8 What is an essential requirement for the operation of a step-down transformer?

(A) A laminated iron core

(B) A non-conducting core
(C) A magnetic interaction between the primary and secondary coils
(D) An electrical connection between the primary and secondary coils

154
490 E x c e l S SUUC CC CE ES SS S OONNE E HHSSCC • • P PH HY Y
S SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 154 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 491 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

9 A thin solid conductor with sides PQRS is moving at constant velocity v, at right angles
to a uniform magnetic field B, directed into the page as shown.

Q
P R
S

Which side of the conductor has the greatest concentration of electrons?

(A) P
(B) Q
(C) R
(D) S

10 Which option best identifies why germanium was replaced by silicon in the
semiconductor industry?

Germanium Silicon
Remains a useful semiconductor
(A) Less abundant
at higher temperatures
Remains a useful semiconductor
(B) Less abundant
at higher temperatures
Remains a useful semiconductor
(C) More abundant
at higher temperatures
Remains a useful semiconductor
(D) More abundant
at higher temperatures

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 155
491
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 155 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 492 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

11 The diagram shows a DC motor with a constant current flowing to the rotor.

N A S

Which pair of graphs best describes the behaviour of the force F on wire AB, and the
torque τ on the rotor as functions of time t?

(A) F τ

0 0 t
t

(B) F τ

0 0
t t

0 t 0 t

(D) F τ

0 0 t
t

156
492 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 156 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 493 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

12 Which of the following diagrams best represents the energy bands in p–type and n–type
semiconductors?

p–type n–type

(A) Conduction band Valence band

Valence band Conduction band

(B) Conduction band Valence band

Valence band Conduction band

(C) Conduction band Conduction band

donor
level acceptor
level
Valence band Valence band

(D) Conduction band Conduction band

donor
acceptor level
level
Valence band Valence band

13 Why does superconductivity occur in certain materials at low temperatures?

(A) At low temperatures there are no lattice vibrations.

(B) Some pairs of electrons experience net attraction at low temperatures.
(C) The materials are alloys and alloys lose all resistance at low temperatures.
(D) At low temperatures the materials become magnetic and this reduces the scattering
of electron pairs.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 157
493
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 157 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 494 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

14 Blue light is found to cause photoelectric emission from a sodium surface but not from a
platinum surface.

Which of the following best accounts for this difference?

(A) Platinum does not absorb photons.

(B) Platinum has more electrons than sodium.
(C) More energy is needed to remove an electron from a platinum surface.
(D) The intensity of the blue light is not high enough to remove electrons from the
platinum surface.

15 The diagram shows two parallel plates with opposite charges. P, Q and R represent
distances from the positive plate.

+
P
Q
R
−

Which of the following graphs describes the electric field strength, E, between the plates?

(A) E (B) E

Distance Distance
P Q R P Q R

158
494 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 158 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 495 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 60 marks Student Number

Attempt Questions 16–27
Allow about 1 hour and 45 minutes for this part

Answer the questions in the spaces provided.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 16 (3 marks)

NASA recently landed a space probe on an asteroid found between the orbits of Earth
and Mars. The 500 kg space probe had a weight of 2.5 N when it landed on the
asteroid.

(a) What would be the weight of this space probe on the surface of Earth? 1

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Before landing on the asteroid, the space probe was placed in an orbit with 2
radius 50 km. The orbital period was 5.9 × 104 s.

What was the mass of the asteroid?

...............................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 159
495
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 159 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 496 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 17 (5 marks)

(a) Using labelled diagrams, show how a first-hand investigation could be performed 2
to distinguish between an inertial and a non-inertial frame of reference.

(b) Explain how inertial and non-inertial frames of reference relate to the principle 3
of relativity.

...............................................................................................................................

160
496 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 160 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 497 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 18 (4 marks)

The nearest galaxy to ours is the Large Magellanic Cloud, with its centre located
1.70 × 105 light years from Earth. Assume you are in a spacecraft travelling at a speed
of 0.99999 c toward the Large Magellanic Cloud.

(a) In your frame of reference, what is the distance between Earth and the Large 2
Magellanic Cloud?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) In your frame of reference, how long will it take you to travel from Earth to the 2
Large Magellanic Cloud?

...............................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 161
497
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 161 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 498 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 19 (6 marks)

An electron is emitted from a mineral sample, and travels through aperture A into a
spectrometer at an angle of 60° with a speed of 6.0 × 106 m s–1 .

−100 V
NOT
10 cm TO
e–
SCALE
0V
A D
aperture detector
60°

sample

(a) Calculate the magnitude and direction of the force experienced by the electron 3
inside the spectrometer.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) The electron experiences constant acceleration and eventually strikes the 3
detector, D.

What is the time taken for the electron to travel from A to D?

...............................................................................................................................

162
498 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 162 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 499 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 20 (4 marks)

Draw a table to summarise the energy transformations and transfers for three household 4
appliances. Each appliance must have a different type of useful energy output. Include
the name of the appliance, its use and the transformation/transfer of energy involved.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 163
499
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 163 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 500 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 21 (6 marks)

A rectangular wire loop is connected to a DC power supply. Side X of the loop is

placed next to a magnet. The loop is free to rotate about a pivot.

30 cm 30 cm NOT
N orth TO
Y m
X 20 c SCALE

− + pivot

When the power is switched on, a current of 20 A is supplied to the loop. To prevent
rotation, a mass of 40 g can be attached to either side X or side Y of the loop.

(a) On which side of the loop should the mass be attached to prevent rotation? 1

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Calculate the torque provided by the 40 g mass. 2

...............................................................................................................................

(c) Calculate the magnetic field strength around side X. 3

...............................................................................................................................

164
500 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 164 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 501 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 22 (4 marks)

How did the invention of the transistor transform the way communication occurs in 4
Australia? In your answer, refer to the technology that the transistor replaced.

.........................................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 165
501
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 165 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 502 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 23 (6 marks)
Two identical wires, W1 and W2, each 2.5 m in length, are positioned as shown. They
carry identical currents in the direction indicated.

W1 W2

NOT
TO
SCALE

5 cm

(a) Identify the direction of the force which W2 experiences as a result of the current 1
in W1.
...............................................................................................................................

(b) Calculate the current in each wire, given that the two wires experience a force 2
of 6.9 × 10–4 N.
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

(c) A third wire, W3 , carrying a smaller current, is now placed as shown. 3

W1 W2 W3

NOT
TO
SCALE

5 cm 8 cm

Explain qualitatively the forces on W2 as a result of the currents in W1 and W3.

...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

166
502 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 166 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 503 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Question 24 (4 marks)

An experiment was conducted to investigate the flexibility* and strength** of

different types of rubber bands, all with the same initial length. A mass was attached
to each band and the extension was measured. Masses were gradually increased, and
the extensions measured until each band broke. The photograph was taken during the
experiment. The results are summarised in the graph.

0.7
Band E
0.6
Band F
0.5

Extension (m)
0.4
0.3
0.2 Band G
Band H
0.1
0
0 1 2 3
Mass (kg)

* Flexibility: The more flexible the rubber band, the greater its extension for a given mass.
** Strength: The stronger the rubber band, the more mass it is able to hold before breaking.

(a) Which rubber band is the most flexible? Justify your answer with reference to 2
the graph.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Identify the strongest rubber band and state the mass range in which the 2
extension appears to be directly proportional to the attached mass.

...............................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 167
503
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 167 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 504 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 25 (5 marks)

In the Large Hadron Collider (LHC), the particle beams are steered using magnetic
fields, as shown.

Superconducting
electromagnet

Particle path

(a) Two particles with the same mass and speed are travelling through the LHC in 2
opposite directions.

What can be deduced about the charge on the particles?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) During a test run, a proton travels with a speed of 1.0 × 107 m s–1 around the 3
LHC. The radius of curvature of its path is 4.2 m.

Calculate the magnetic field strength.

...............................................................................................................................

168
504 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 168 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 505 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

2009 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2009 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (6 marks)

In the distribution of electricity, the overall energy losses between the power plant and 6
users can easily be between 8% and 15%, which suggests that there is still some room
to improve efficiency.

Analyse this statement. In your analysis, you must refer to existing sources of energy
loss, and a possible new technology to minimise such loss.

.........................................................................................................................................

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 169
505
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 169 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 506 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 27 (7 marks)

In an experiment to investigate the photoelectric effect, light is shone onto a silver

surface and the resulting maximum electron kinetic energy is measured and recorded.

Light wavelength (nm) Electron kinetic energy (eV)

250 0.25
215 1.08
187 1.90
167 2.73
150 3.56

(a) Determine the frequency of the highest energy photons used in the experiment. 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) What effect would changing the intensity of the light have on the measured 1
electron kinetic energy?

...............................................................................................................................

Question 27 continues

170
506 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 170 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 507 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Question 27 (continued)

(c) With reference to the photoelectric effect, and the semiconductors shown in the 4
diagram, explain the operation of a solar cell.

Light

n–type silicon
Load
p–type silicon

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 27

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 171
507
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 171 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 508 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 2:33 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

2009 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 28–32
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer the question in a writing booklet. Extra writing booklets are available.
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 28 Geophysics (Not included in this reproduction)

Question 29 Medical Physics

Question 30 Astrophysics

Question 31 From Quanta to Quarks

Question 32 The Age of Silicon (Not included in this reproduction)

172
508 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 172 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 509 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Question 29 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

(a) (i) In X-ray images, the small intestine is not normally visible. 2

Explain how the use of a contrast medium, for example a barium meal,
allows the small intestine to be seen.

(ii) Using text and a labelled diagram, explain how X-rays are produced for 4
medical imaging.

(b) (i) Given the velocity of sound in blood is 1.53 × 103 m s–1, and blood has a 1
density of 1.05 × 103 kg m–3, calculate the acoustic impedance of blood.

(ii) Ultrasound can pass from blood into a variety of materials. What happens 1
to the incident pulse when it passes into materials of increasing acoustic
impedance?

(iii) Explain how a piezoelectric crystal can be used as a producer and 4

receiver of ultrasound waves.

Question 29 continues

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 173
509
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 173 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 510 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 29 (continued)

(c) (i) “Have a CAT scan – live longer!” 4

Can the claim made in this statement be justified? In your answer refer
to the properties and uses of CAT scans.

(ii) In this PET image a chemical tracer has been used to measure glucose 3
metabolism in a patient.

Reproduced with permission of Division of Nuclear Medicine, University of Arkansas for

Medical Sciences, Little Rock, Arksansas.

Explain how this image has been produced, including the physics
involved.

(d) Describe the sequence of events and associated processes of physics by which 6
an image is produced using magnetic resonance imaging.

End of Question 29

174
510 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 174 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 511 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Question 30 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

(a) (i) Distinguish between the terms resolution and sensitivity as used in 2
astrophysics.

(ii) Interferometry and active optics are techniques that can be used to 4
improve the resolution and/or sensitivity of ground based telescopes.

Explain why only one of these techniques is useful in improving the

resolution and sensitivity of radio telescopes.

(b) (i) Describe the modelling process used in a computer simulation which 2
draws a light curve for an eclipsing binary star system.

(ii) Two stars in a visual binary system have an orbital period of 2.1 × 108 s 2
and are determined to be 7.2 × 108 km apart.

Calculate the combined mass of the stars.

(iii) The spectra below show absorption lines for a variable pair of 3
spectroscopic binary stars at two different times, Time 1 and Time 2.
Each spectrum contains the absorption lines from both stars.

Time 1

Violet Red
1 2 34 5 6 7 8

Time 2

Violet Red

Explain why there are differences in the spectra.

Question 30 continues

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 175
511
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 175 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 512 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 30 (continued)

Will the star be more blue or more red in colour?

(ii) How can the colour index (B–V) of a star be measured in an observatory? 2

(d) Describe the advantages of using photoelectric technologies over photographic 3

methods in photometry.

(e) A possible evolutionary path of a star is shown on the Hertsprung-Russell (H-R) 6

diagram.

−10

−5 10 4
Absolute magnitude

0 10 2
Luminosity
+5 1

+10 10 −2

+15 10 −4
O B A F G K M
Spectral type

Describe the sequence of events and the associated physical processes a star
undergoes in moving from to to .

End of Question 30

176
512 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 176 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 513 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM

22 00 0099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• QQ UU EE SS TT IIOONNSS

Question 31 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

(a) Marsden and Geiger conducted an experiment in which they fired alpha particles
at a thin gold foil. Most of the particles passed straight through.

(i) Describe how Rutherford’s model of the atom explained these results. 2

(ii) Describe TWO problems associated with Rutherford’s model and how 4
these were explained by Bohr’s model of the hydrogen atom.

(b) (i) Describe de Broglie’s proposal that a particle can exhibit both wave and 2
particle properties.

(ii) Explain how Davidson and Germer were able to confirm de Broglie’s 3
proposal.

(iii) Calculate the velocity of an electron that has a wavelength of 2

3.33 × 10–10 m.

Question 31 continues

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 177
513
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 177 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Chapter 12 - Exam.fm7 Page 514 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:47 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 31 (continued)

(c) (i) Define mass defect. 1

(ii) The energy required to separate all the nucleons within a nucleus is the 2
binding energy. The average binding energy per nucleon is a measure of
the stability of a nucleus.

The graph shows how average binding energy per nucleon varies with
mass number.

16 × 10−13
Average
binding energy
per nucleon 8 × 10−13
(J)

0 100 200
Mass number
Use the graph to compare the stability of a nucleus of mass number 200
with a nucleus of mass number 50.

(d) In 1920, Rutherford suggested the existence of an undiscovered nuclear particle. 3

Explain how Chadwick confirmed Rutherford’s prediction using conservation
laws.

(e) Theories and experiments not only help increase our understanding but also 6
generate new questions.

Use the standard model of matter to support this statement.

End of Question 31
End of Question 31

End of paper

End of Paper
© Board of Studies NSW 2009
© Board of Studies NSW 2009

178
514 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 178 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 515 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

2009 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A

1 C Approaching the planet increases the gravitational force towards the planet. This
causes an acceleration of the craft resulting in a change in direction and a change
in speed.
2 3 2
v ( 8.1 × 10 )
2 A - = 9.4 m s–2.
ac = ---- = ----------------------------
r 7.0 × 10
6

3 C By definition moving vertically away from Earth the Work done = Potential
Energy gained.
4 D The horizontal velocity of y > the horizontal velocity of x and both fall the same
vertical distance. This means the time to fall is equal and the vertical velocities at
impact are equal. Horizontal velocity does not change, therefore, v at impact of y
is greater than x.
5 C Fg is proportional to the mass of the Sun and Moon and inversely proportional to
distance of separation squared. These do not change, therefore Fg between the Sun
and Moon does not change.
6 A Only alternative that will INCREASE the output of the generator.
7 C The disc will try to rotate to prevent eddy currents, i.e. it tries to keep the magnet
at rest by rotating in the same direction.
8 C Essential for any transformer is a magnetic interaction between the primary and
secondary coil.
9 A Due to motion in a magnetic field, electrons try to move in a direction to create a
force to oppose the motion (Lenz’s law). To produce the required field to try to
stop the motion, electrons move to end P of the conductor.
10 B Silicon is far more abundant than germanium and remains a semiconductor at a
higher temperature.
11 B Considering where AB is, both F and τ will be a maximum. Both F and τ will
reverse direction after rotating 90°. Alternative B is the best choice to reflect this.
12 D p-type has acceptor level due to holes present in the lattice and n-type has donor
level due to extra electrons in the lattice. Alternative D is the best answer.
13 B When a material becomes a superconductor Cooper pairs of electrons form.
14 C The blue photons do not have sufficient energy to release a photoelectron from
platinum.
15 A A uniform electric field forms between parallel plates with opposite electric
charge, i.e. the electric field is the same at P, Q and R.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 179
515
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 179 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 516 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Section I, Part B
Question 16
(a) The weight of the probe on Earth Fg = mg = 500 × 9.8 = 4900 N down.

2 2
T 4π
(b) -----3- = ------------
r GM A
2 3
4π r
Therefore MA = -------------
2
GT
2 3 3
4 π × ( 50 × 10 )
= ---------------------------------------------------------------2-
– 11 4
6.67 × 10 × ( 5.9 × 10 )
= 2.13 × 1016 kg

Question 17
(a) A mass was hung from a string to form a simple pendulum. The pendulum was then
hung from the stand of a dynamics trolley as shown.

Inertial frame The trolley was examined in the following states:

• at rest
• travelling at a constant velocity along a horizontal
pendulum • surface
• accelerating down an inclined plane.

Trolley at rest or travelling at constant velocity

The first two states represent an inertial state and the pendulum was observed to hang
vertically as in the diagram above.

Non-inertial frame When the trolley was accelerating down the inclined
plane this represents a non-inertial frame and the
pendulum was observed to swing back as shown.

pendulum

Trolley accelerating down the slope

(b) Special relativity ONLY applies to inertial frames of reference, i.e. where the frame of
reference is at rest or moving at a constant velocity relative to the observer. When there
is an acceleration relative to the observer, i.e. a non-inertial frame of reference, then the
general theory of relativity must be applied.

180
516 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 180 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 517 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

Question 18
(a) Distance measured in the moving frame of reference is:
2
v 2
lv = l0 1 – ----2 = 1.7 × 105 1 – 0.99999
c

Therefore, lv according to the passenger = 760.261 light years.

l 760.261c
(b) Time for trip, t = ---v = ---------------------- = 760.269 years.
v 0.99999c

Question 19
V
(a) F = qE and E = ---- .
d
100
Therefore F = 1.602 × 10–19 × ⎛ ----------⎞ = 1.602 × 10–16 N to bottom of page.
⎝ 0.10⎠
Force on electron = 1.602 × 10–16 to the bottom of page (towards plate at 0 V).

– 16
F 1.602 × 10
(b) - = 1.7587 × 1014 ms–2 downwards.
a = ---- = -------------------------------
m 9.109 × 10 –31

uv and vv, are equal and opposite = 6.0 × 106 sin 60° = 5.196 × 106 m s–1, and a v is in the
same direction as vv .

6 6
– 5.196 × 10 – 5.196 × 10
Now vv = uv + av t, therefore t = ----------------------------------------------------------------
14
-
– 1.7587 × 10
Now vv = uv + av t, therefore t = 5.91 × 10–8 seconds.

Question 20

Electrical device Energy transformation/transfer

Incandescent light bulb Electrical energy is transformed to heat, and light which is
transferred to illuminate objects in the room.
Microwave oven Electrical energy is transformed to electromagnetic
radiation (microwaves) which transfers heat to water
molecules in food.
Toaster Electrical energy is transformed to heat radiation which is
transferred to heat bread (toast).

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 181
517
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 181 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 518 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM Chap

C H A P T E RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 21
(a) The mass is hung on side X to prevent rotation.

(b) Torque τ = Fd = 0.040 × 9.8 × 0.30 = 1.176 × 10–1 Nm.

(c) Now counter-torque τ = BIld = 1.176 × 10–1 Nm.

–1
1.176 × 10
Therefore B = ---------------------------------------
20 × 0.20 × 0.30
Therefore B = 9.8 × 10–2 T.

Magnetic field strength = 98 mT.

Question 22
Before the invention of the transistor, vacuum tubes (diodes and triodes) were used in
telephone exchanges and circuits were connected manually by an operator. The vacuum tubes
were also used in large home radios. Compared to transistors, vacuum tubes required large
amounts of energy, were less reliable, and far more fragile. The invention of the transistor led
to telephone exchanges adopting transistors which reduced the energy demands and size of
components significantly and allowed for the automatic switching of circuits, negating the
need for an operator. This made telephones much more accessible due to reduced costs and
improved the overall efficiency in making calls. It also made the transistor radio possible, thus
making long lasting, battery-operated portable radios very cheap and readily available. With
the invention of the transistor, communications in Australia improved and became more
accessible to the public.

Question 23
(a) W2 experiences an attractive force towards W1, i.e. to the LEFT of the page.

F kI 1 I 2
(b) Since ------m = -----------
- and I1 = I2, therefore
Δl d
–4 –2
6.9 × 10 × 5 × 10
I2 = -------------------------------------------------
–7
-
2 × 10 × 2.5
= 69 .
∴ Current in each wire = 8.31 A.

(c) W2 experiences an attractive force to W1 of 6.9 × 10–4 N to the left (given).

W2 is also attracted to W3, but in this case to the right.

F 1/2 kI 1 I 2 F 2/3 kI 2 I 3
- = ------------ and --------
Now force is given by -------- - = ------------
Δl d 1to2 Δl d 2to3

182
518 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 182 22/12/2016 2:10 PM Black

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 519 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

I3 I1
Considering similar terms then F2/3 α ---------
- and F1/2 α ---------
-.
0.08 0.05

Considering I3 is less than I1 then F1/2 is greater than F2/3 and the resultant force on W2
is towards W1 but is now reduced to less than 6.9 × 10–4 N.

Question 24
(a) The most flexible rubber band produces the greatest extension for a given mass
(weight). The graph for band E shows the greatest extension for a given mass.

(b) The strongest band holds the greatest mass before it breaks. Based on the graph, band F
required the greatest mass, with a extension uniform between a mass of 0 kg to about
1.25 kg.

Question 25
(a) Given that their paths are identical and the fact that the particles have the same mass and
are travelling at the same speed in opposite directions, this means the particles must
have an EQUAL but OPPOSITE charge.

(b) Force magnetic = Centripetal force, i.e.

2
mv
Bqv = ---------
r

mv
Therefore B = -------
qr
– 27 7
1.673 × 10 × 1.0 × 10
= -----------------------------------------------------------
– 19
-
1.602 × 10 × 4.2
= 0.0249

Magnetic field strength = 25 mT.

Question 26
The statement is correct. There are losses in power transmission due to the resistance of the
transmission wires, i.e. Plost = RI 2, and energy losses due to eddy currents in the transformers
used to change voltages. The greater the demand for power (increasing I) and the greater the
distance between the power station and consumer (increasing R), the more energy lost in
transmission. By using very high voltages for long distance transmission (reducing I for the
same P, i.e. P = VI ) and then using a transformer to lower the voltage close to consumers, or
by locating generators close to consumers, these losses can be reduced but not eliminated.

To improve the efficiency new higher voltage transmission lines could be built or, if a high
temperature superconductor could be developed, the efficiency of the system could be
dramatically improved. With zero resistance superconductors there would be no losses in the

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 519
183

9781741256451 Success
Black process 45.0° One_Physics_2017.indd
150.0 LPI 183 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 520 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM
Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

wires and less need for the transformers where losses also occur. At this stage suitable
superconducting materials are not known but, with the demand for power ever increasing, by
generating the energy closer to the site where it is to be used, or by using a higher voltage
transmission network, some improvement could be made.

Question 27
(a) Highest energy photon has shortest wavelength.
8
c 3 × 10
-7 = 2.0 × 1015 Hz.
f = --- = --------------------------
λ 1.50 × 10 –

(b) The measured maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons will not change but the
number of photoelectrons emitted (photocurrent) changes in direct proportion to the
change in intensity of the light.

(c) The p–n junction in the semiconductor wafer behaves as a diode with some free
electrons in the n-type semiconductor at the interface drifting across to fill holes in the
p-type semiconductor near the boundary to produce an electric field across the junction.
When a photon is absorbed by the semiconductor it produces an electron-hole pair. The
diode effect of the p–n junction means that when an external circuit is provided the free
electrons can flow from the n-type side into the external circuit to arrive back at the
p-type side of the wafer and combine with the holes that have travelled through the
p-type wafer. In this way the solar cell acts like a DC cell, producing a supply of current
to an external circuit as long as the light provides the energy to release electrons in the
semiconductor wafer.

184
520 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 184 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 521 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

2009 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2009 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Section II — Options

Question 29 — Medical Physics

(a) (i) A contrast medium, such as a barium meal, absorbs X-rays thereby making it visible
in the X-ray image. Because the contrast medium is inside the intestine, the X-ray
of the contrast medium shows the structure of the intestine. In cases, for example
where there is a blockage in the intestine that would not normally be visible in an
X-ray image, the blockage would become observable because there would be much
less of the contrast medium in that section of the intestine.

(ii) X-rays are produced in a special cathode ray tube.

high voltage evacuated

cathode ray
tube
tungsten
anode accelerating
electrons

heating
circuit
rotating
anode
heated
shielding cathode
X-rays exit through
window in shielding

Electrons from a heated cathode are accelerated to high velocities towards a rotating
tungsten anode by a strong electric field caused by a high voltage between the
cathode and anode. The electrons interact with the atoms of the tungsten anode in
three ways. Most of the electrons increase the vibrational energy of the tungsten
atoms causing heating of the anode. Some electrons are deflected and rapidly
slowed through interactions with the positive nuclei, resulting in Bremsstrahlung
(braking radiation) creating an X-ray spectrum. A small proportion of the high
velocity electrons from the cathode dislodge electrons from the inner shell of the
tungsten atoms. In these cases, electrons from higher energy levels in the tungsten
atoms fall into the lower energy inner shell. This results in a range of X-ray
frequencies which are characteristic of tungsten atoms shown on the graph below.

Characteristic X-rays

Intensity Bremsstrahlung

Energy

The X-rays exit through a window in the protective shielding around the cathode
ray tube. They are filtered to select the desired range of X-ray frequencies and to
adjust the size of the X-ray beam to produce an image.

The supply voltage is adjusted depending on the nature of the body part to be
X-rayed. For example, increasing the voltage produces faster electrons which
release more electromagnetic energy as they strike the anode, and thus produce
higher energy, more penetrating X-rays.
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 185
Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 521
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 185 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI

Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 522 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM Chap

C H A P T E RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

(b) (i) Acoustic impedance z = ρ v

Acoustic impedance z = 1.05 × 103 × 1.53 × 103
Acoustic impedance z = 1.61 × 106 kg m–2 s–1

(ii) Some of the ultrasound is reflected back into the blood from the boundary between
the blood and the new material and some is transmitted into the new material. The
intensity of the ultrasound will decrease as it passes into materials with increasing
acoustic impedance.

(iii) A piezoelectric crystal changes shape when a potential difference is applied across
its surfaces. When the polarity of the potential difference is alternated at very high
frequencies in the range 1–10 MHz, the surfaces of the crystal vibrate at those
frequencies thus producing ultrasound which can be transmitted from the transducer
into the body for diagnosis.

Ultrasound waves that reflect off boundaries in the body and return to the
piezoelectric crystal apply rapidly changing pressure to the surfaces of the crystal,
mechanically distorting it and causing it to vibrate. This distortion results in a
rapidly alternating potential difference between the surfaces of the crystal.
Monitoring this potential difference using fast computer technology and imaging
software allows the measured potential difference to be converted into ultrasound
images.

(c) (i) CAT scans involve the use of X-rays to make high quality structural images of
several thin slices of the body showing excellent (256 grey scale) detail of both soft
tissue and bones. They are often used to identify small tumours and minor damage
to the brain caused by very mild strokes. The computer-generated images can be
used to produce 3-D images of organs and tissues, further aiding diagnosis. Having
a CAT scan could therefore help to diagnose small tumours and other structural
defects before they become life threatening, leading to early remedy, and hence
could prolong life. Regular full body scans, however, could be a health risk. This
is because CAT scans are produced by moving a patient through a gantry around
which an X-ray tube moves in a circular path, continuously passing X-rays through
sections of the body. This exposes the patient to large amounts of ionising X-rays
which can damage body tissues. Excessive exposure to X-rays could therefore
cause problems that may later become life threatening, hence shortening the life of
people who would otherwise be healthy. The quote therefore is misleading and,
while it could be justified in some cases, routine scanning would be likely to cause
more problems than it would solve. Overall, the statement cannot be justified.

(ii) Positron emission tomography involves the use of a radioactive substance that emits
positrons. The radioactive element, e.g. fluorine 18, is tagged onto a molecule such
as glucose that is ordinarily metabolised by the body. The tagged glucose is then
injected into the blood of the patient. Body tissues that absorb more of the
radiopharmaceutical (e.g. tagged glucose) will emit more positrons. Positrons are
antimatter particles of electrons. Therefore, if a positron collides with an electron,
pair annihilation occurs, eliminating both the electron and the positron and
producing two gamma photons. These two photons, which travel in opposite
directions, easily penetrate the body tissues and can be detected using a gamma
camera. Photomultiplier tubes in the circular gantry of the camera turn scintillations

186
522 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 186 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 523 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

created by the gamma photons into electrical signals which can be processed by a
powerful computer, identifying them as pairs. Millions of annihilations are recorded
and used to show areas of more rapid absorption (hot spots) on an image of the
body. These hot spots are represented on the image provided, as dark areas, for
example, at the base of the brain, in the chest region and some organs of the
digestive system. The dark spots on the elbow at left in the image are hot spots.

(d) Firstly, a patient needs to be suitable for diagnosis using magnetic image resonance
(MRI). The patient must not have a pacemaker or other metallic implants which will
either be seriously affected by the strong magnetic field or cause problems from heating
effects, for example, due to the formation of electrical currents.

Patients who are suspected of having soft tissue damage or abnormalities, such as
tumours, are placed inside the MRI tunnel where there is a strong magnetic field
(~1–3 T) and have to remain very still while data is collected. The magnetic field is
produced using either strong permanent magnets or electromagnets and large currents.
Electromagnets are either conventional solenoids with large gauge windings or contain
superconducting coils cooled to below their critical temperature with a liquefied gas
such as helium or nitrogen.

Atoms in the patient’s body that have nuclei with odd numbers of nucleons (protons and
neutrons) have a net spin which gives them a magnetic property. An example is
hydrogen which has a single proton as its nucleus. The strong magnetic field causes the
magnetic axes of these nuclei to line up either parallel or antiparallel to the magnetic
field. The magnetic axes of rotation precess around the MRI’s magnetic field
orientation.

Magnetic field direction

Axes of spinning
nucleus

Spinning nuclei

Axes precessing around

the field direction

Axis of spin parallel to Axis of spin antiparallel

the field to the field

As the nuclei spin, their rotational axes precess at frequencies in the megahertz range
and proportional to the strength of the magnetic field. Each type of nucleus with net
spin has its own Larmor or resonant frequency at which its axis of rotation precesses.
Gradient coils are used to vary the magnitude of the magnetic field vector in the MRI
tunnel, so that the frequency of precession for similar nuclei varies slightly in different
parts of the patient’s body.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 187
523
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 187 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 524 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

A series of pulses of electromagnetic radiation in the radio frequency band is

administered through the patient in the MRI chamber using radio antennas. The range of
frequencies in the radio pulse is typically the same as the range of precession
frequencies for hydrogen nuclei (42.57 MHz/T). This is because hydrogen is
particularly abundant in the body, especially as it is a component of water.

The precessing hydrogen nuclei absorb the radio energy, and this increases the energy
of their precession, causing the axis of their rotation to ‘flip’ through 90°. When the
radio pulse ends, the ‘flipped’ nuclei ‘relax’ back to their lower precession energy level
by emitting the absorbed electromagnetic energy at the same radio frequency. The
transmitting aerials that produced the radio pulse are used as receivers to detect the
radio energy coming from the nuclei, converting it to electrical signals that are sent to
and processed by a computer.

The computer analyses the frequencies of the radio waves emitted by the nuclei in the
body for many pulses. The computer uses the frequency data to identify where each
voxel of the body is located. From the duration and strength of the radio signals coming
from them, which is related to the hydrogen density, the computer assigns a value
between 1 and 256 to each one. The information is then used by the computer to
determine the shade of grey (or colour enhancement) for each corresponding pixel on a
series of images. This data, recorded for all three dimensions, can thus produce images
of body slices in any direction. It can also be filtered by the computer to produce
enhanced images, such as 3-D images of isolated parts such as particular organs or
tumours, or images of the blood vessels in the brain. In addition, a series of images
taken over time can be used for functional diagnosis.

188
524 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 188 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 525 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

Question 30 — Astrophysics
(a) (i) The resolution of a telescope is a measure of its ability to form a clear image such
that it can distinguish between two close objects, and is the finest detail it can show.
The sensitivity of a telescope is a measure of its ability to capture photons; the more
photons it can collect, the fainter the objects it can detect.

(ii) Interferometry is a technique using several individual telescopes, spread apart to

capture incoming photons, but acting as a single ground-based device.
Interferometers are used for both radio and optical astronomy. A computer
combines the signals from each telescope to form an image. The sensitivity of such
devices is increased because it is proportional to the combined area of the
synthesised telescope. Since resolution is proportional to the diameter of the device,
however, the improvement in resolution is far more significant, because of the
separation of the furthest telescopes.
Active optics, however, is used almost exclusively for large ground-based optical
telescopes. A large primary mirror deforms under its own weight due to gravity, so
an active optics system is composed of individual segments on a flexible base.
Every few seconds computer-controlled actuators behind the mirror segments
adjust for the distortion and maintain the focus. As radio telescopes collect photons
with much greater wavelengths than visible light, and since the collecting surface
must be precise to within one quarter of the wavelength of photons collected,
distortion of the surface due to gravity is not significant.

(b) (i) An eclipsing binary is identified by a characteristic light-curve which is modelled

in the computer program. The luminosity (magnitude) of the binary is graphed
against time as the base. The modelling must show the light from the binary as
observed from Earth.

A 1 2
A
Luminosity

C
B
B 2

C 1
Time (years)
The modelling must show three ‘phases’ of the eclipsing binary:
A shows the normal maximum luminosity when both stars are visible;
B shows the dip when the brighter star is partially or wholly eclipsed by its
companion;
C shows the shallower dip when the dimmer star is eclipsed by its brighter
companion.

2 2
4π r
(ii) ∴ m1 + m2 = -------------
2
, where r is measured in metres, T is measured in seconds.
GT
2 11 3
4 π ( 7.2 × 10 )
∴ m1 + m2 = ---------------------------------------------------------------2-
– 11 8
6.67 × 10 × ( 2.1 × 10 )
= 5.0 × 1030 kg.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 189
525
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 189 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 526 Tuesday, February 16, 2010 9:32 AM Chap

C H A P T E RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

(iii) A spectroscopic binary is a pair of stars revolving around one another on a plane
that is not perpendicular to our line of sight. Consequently, while one star is
approaching the Earth, and hence its light is blue-shifted by the Doppler effect, the
other is receding, so its light is red-shifted. When both stars are moving across our
line of sight there is no Doppler shift.

Star X
To Earth
Star Y
Star X

The lines 7 and 8 in the first spectrum show line splitting, because in the second
diagram they are a single line. Consequently, the left-hand side of the diagram above
demonstrates Doppler shifting, while the right-hand side shows no Doppler shifting.
Therefore the lines emitted by Star X are marked 1, 3, 4 and 7 while lines 2, 5, 6 and 8
came from Star Y.

(ii) The colour index of a star can be measured in an observatory by first passing its light
through a blue filter to be measured by a CCD and then through a yellow-green filter
to be measured by the same CCD. The apparent magnitude measured through the
visual yellow filter is subtracted from the apparent magnitude reading through the
blue photographic filter.

(d) Photoelectric technologies, such as CCDs or photomultipliers, have a number of

advantages over photographic techniques. As they can count a single photon, their
sensitivity is far greater to dim or distant objects than that of photographs, where the
size of the image depends upon the amount of light received. Photographic images need
more time to produce, due to the need to fix and develop images, while computer
images are digital dots. Photoelectric devices produce linear responses, unlike images
taken photographically. Furthermore, the range of electromagnetic radiation that affects
photographic film is much narrower than that which can be detected by photoelectric
devices.

(e) The object at A represents a star forming from a nebula. Accretion of material occurs
where the mass of gas and dust is randomly greater, and as the amount of material
increases its gravitational field grows, attracting more. The loss in potential energy of
the infalling matter changes into kinetic energy and heat, while the pressure on the core
also steadily increases. When the conditions allow fusion of hydrogen into helium to
begin, the object is called a protostar. In time the inward gravitational pressure balances
the outward radiation pressure (hydrostatic equilibrium), light energy reaches the
surface of the star, and it has become a main sequence star, located at B on the diagram.

Within the core of the star hydrogen undergoes nuclear fusion to become helium by
either the proton-proton cycle or the CNO cycle. The star remains on the main sequence
for most of its life, until the hydrogen in its core is exhausted. Hydrostatic equilibrium
is unbalanced, and gravitation immediately compresses the core. The loss in potential
energy heats the core and a shell of hydrogen immediately surrounding it. This

190
526 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 190 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 527 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

hydrogen was previously unreactive, but the increased temperature is sufficient for it to
undergo fusion to form helium. In addition, the core temperature rises from about
15 million to 60 million degrees, causing the ‘helium flash’, the explosive reaction
when helium begins to form carbon by the triple-alpha reaction. The radiation pressure
now greatly exceeds that of a main sequence star, and the gravitational pressure is
insufficient to counterbalance it; the star expands to become the luminous, though cool
and orange-coloured, giant star located at point C.

Excel SS
UUCC
CCE SE SS SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 191
527
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 191 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 528 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM Chap

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE EX XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

Question 31 — From Quanta to Quarks

(a) (i) Based on the results of the experiment Rutherford proposed the nuclear atom where
the majority of an atom’s mass and all the positive charge are located in an
extremely dense central core which he termed the nucleus. Using this idea of a
nuclear atom, where the nucleus was only about 1/10,000th the diameter of the
atom, Rutherford was able to explain the experimental results and the observed
significant deflection of some alpha-particles scattering from gold foil.

(ii) The model proposed by Rutherford gave no real explanation as to how the electrons
that occupied the space around the nucleus of an atom were arranged and why,
given their negative charge, the electrons were not eventually pulled into the
positive nucleus.

To explain these problems Niels Bohr developed his postulates where he stated:
1 Contrary to classical predictions there are allowed positions where electrons can
orbit around a nucleus, like planets around the Sun, where the electrons’ angular
nh
momentum is quantised according to mvr = ------ , where n is an integer and h is
2π
Planck’s quantum constant.
2 When an electron moves between one allowable quantised energy level and
another, a photon is emitted or absorbed according to hf = Enf – Eni .

Although Bohr could give no reasons for his postulates, when they were applied to
hydrogen they accurately predicted many of the observed experimental results,
including spectra, and offered a possible solution for some of the problems with the
Rutherford model.

(b) (i) The de Broglie proposal arose from de Brogie considering Einstein’s equation
E = mc 2 and Planck’s equation E = hf. The two equations were related together to
h
give mc 2 = hf, and then solved to calculate the momentum of a photon, i.e. p = --- .
λ

de Broglie then hypothesised that, just as light has both wave and particle
properties, the equation also predicts that a particle with momentum will have an
associated wavelength. He proposed the idea of matter waves, suggesting that the
wavelength of a particle such as an electron is inversely proportional to the
h
particle’s momentum, i.e. λ = --- , where h is Planck’s constant.
p

(ii) Davisson and Germer used a cathode ray tube and examined the way the electrons
were scattered from a special nickel crystal inside the tube. The electrons (cathode
rays) scattering from the nickel surface created an interference pattern on a screen.
When measurements of the interference pattern were made, and known values for
the nickel and cathode ray tube considered, Davisson and Germer were able to
confirm the wave properties of the electron shown by their experimental results
were exactly as predicted by the de Broglie hypothesis.

192
528 E x c e l S SUUCCCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 192 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI Black
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 529 Tuesday, October 26, 2010 2:36 PM

22000099 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI N

I NA AT TI O
I ONN P PA APPE ER R •• AANNSSW
WEERRSS

h h h
(iii) Considering λ = --- , then me v = --- or v = --------- .
p λ λ me

– 34
6.626 × 10
– 10
- = 2.18 × 106 m s–1.
Therefore, v = ------------------------------------------------------------------
– 31
3.33 × 10 × 9.109 × 10

(c) (i) Mass defect is the difference between the sum of the individual masses of the
constituent nucleons (protons and neutrons) found in a particular nucleus if all the
nucleons were free compared to the actual mass of a nucleus when all the nucleons
are bound together. It is equivalent to the binding energy of the nucleus.

(ii) From the graph the average binding energy per nucleon for a nucleus of mass
number 50 is about 15.5 × 10–13 J, while for a nucleus of mass number 200 the value
is less at about 13.5 × 10–13 J. It can be noted from the graph that mass number 50
represents about the maximum binding energy per nucleon, suggesting that these
nuclei would be the most stable. The fact that the value for mass number 50 is
greater than for mass number 200 suggests that the nucleus of mass number 200 is
a less stable nucleus and if it was to undergo fission, energy would be released,
whereas to cause fission or fusion of mass number 50 nuclei would consume energy.

(d) The experiment carried out by Chadwick involved directing alpha particles at a sample
of beryllium (Be).

The atomic masses suggested that the Be nucleus may be able to yield the elusive
neutral particles suggested by Rutherford. To detect the particles, Chadwick set up an
apparatus as shown below. He conducted the experiment with and without the paraffin
block.

Detector

Source of alpha
particles

Thin sheet
of Be
Block of
paraffin wax

Chadwick worked with the laws of conservation of energy and momentum as the basis
of his experiment. He was able to use known values and the measurement of data
collected during the experiment to identify the neutral particles and calculate mass.
Based on known values for the alpha particle energies and the Be atoms, Chadwick was
able to predict that a neutron would be released when an alpha particle collided with a
Be nucleus and that the freed neutron could then travel into the paraffin wax where it
would hopefully be involved in a collision with one of the huge number of hydrogen
atoms present in the paraffin. The ejected proton (hydrogen nucleus) would then travel
on to the detector to be recorded. Without the paraffin in place no particles were
detected but with the paraffin in position particles did arrive at the detector. Using his
measured results and conservation laws Chadwick was able to verify the existence of
the neutron, and show that its mass is almost the same as that of a hydrogen nucleus
(proton).

Excel SS
UUCCC
E SE S SO N
O EN EH SHCS C• • P PH HY YS SI CI CS S 193
529

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 193 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
Chapter 12 - 2009 Answers NEW Page 530 Wednesday, February 10, 2010 12:53 PM

CH
C H AA P
P TT EE RR 18 2 • • 2 02 00 90 9H H
SCS CE X
E XA AMMI NI NA A
T IT OI ON N P PA AP PE ER R

(e) With the discovery of the neutron many scientists believed they now understood the
structure of atom but over the next 30 years experiments with particle accelerators
produced an array of new particles that steadily grew in number. With the development
of the standard model by Gell-Mann and Zweig it seemed that a relatively simple model
could explain all the observed particles in experiments and actually predict the existence
of others. The standard model was a theory that involves just 6 quarks and 6 leptons and
their antiparticles to create all matter. For example, the proton is composed of three
quarks (2 up and 1 down), while the electron is an example of a lepton. The standard
model also introduced the idea of force carriers (bosons) with gluons mediating the
strong interactions giving rise to the forces which bind quarks together to form protons
and neutrons, with residual strong forces binding nucleons together within the nucleus.
The bosons also include the photon, which mediates the electromagnetic force, the W
and Z bosons mediating the nuclear weak interactions, and the graviton, proposed to
mediate gravitational forces.

The standard model seemed to answer many previous questions but it also generated
certain questions that are yet to be answered. The graviton is yet to be observed and the
Higgs boson, involved in attributing mass to particles, although strongly supported in
theory, is yet to be found in experiments. The standard model has also generated the
question as to whether quarks and leptons (e.g. electrons) are really fundamental
particles. To resolve these questions larger particle accelerators continue to be built to
collide particles at even higher energies. Considering this, it is clear that the statement is
true and theories and experiment do increase our understanding but also generate new
questions.

194 34
530 E x c e l S SU UC CCCE ESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• P PH HY YS SI CI CS S

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 194 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI
2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 9

2010
H I G H E R S C H O O L C E R T I F I C AT E
E X A M I N AT I O N

Physics

Total marks – 100

General Instructions Section I Pages 2–25

• Reading time – 5 minutes 75 marks
• Working time – 3 hours This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
• Write using black or blue pen
• Draw diagrams using pencil Part A – 20 marks
• Board-approved calculators may • Attempt Questions 1–20
be used • Allow about 35 minutes for this part
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and
Part B – 55 marks
Periodic Table are provided at
the back of this paper • Attempt Questions 21–32
• Write your Centre Number and • Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part
Student Number at the top
where of
required
Section II Pages 27–36
pages 13, 15, 17, 21, 23 and 25
25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 33–37
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

3430 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 195

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 195 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 The International Space Station orbits Earth at an altitude of approximately 330 km.
Another satellite, Meteosat, is in geostationary orbit at an altitude of 36 000 km.

Which of the following correctly compares the orbital velocity and orbital period of these
satellites?

International Space Station Meteosat

(A) Greater orbital velocity Shorter orbital period

(B) Lesser orbital velocity Shorter orbital period

(C) Greater orbital velocity Longer orbital period

(D) Lesser orbital velocity Longer orbital period

2 Which of the following best describes Galileo’s analysis of projectile motion?

(A) A projectile launched with a great enough velocity would escape Earth’s gravity.
(B) A projectile would travel in a straight line until it ran out of momentum, then it
would fall.
(C) A projectile launched from the equator towards the east with a great enough
velocity would orbit Earth.
(D) A projectile would travel in a parabolic path because it has constant horizontal
velocity and constant vertical acceleration.

3 A scientist at a particle accelerator laboratory observes the lifetime of a particular

subatomic particle to be 1.0 × 10−6 s when it is travelling at 0.9999 c.

What would the lifetime of the particle be if it were stationary in the laboratory?

(A) 1.4 × 10−8 s

(B) 4.5 × 10−8 s
(C) 1.0 × 10−6 s
(D) 7.1 × 10−5 s

196 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 2–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 196 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

4 A ball was thrown upward at an angle of 45°. It landed at the same height as thrown.

Which graph best represents the kinetic energy of the ball during its time of flight?

(A) Ek (B) Ek

t t

5 A 200 g mass is swung in a horizontal circle as shown. It completes 5 revolutions in

3 seconds. The circle has a 2 m diameter.

NOT TO
string SCALE
mass

Which of the following forces is closest to that required to keep the mass moving in this
circle?

(A) 0.50 N
(B) 2.5 N
(C) 10 N
(D) 20 N

–3– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 197

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 197 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

6 Which statement about the Michelson-Morley experiment is correct?

(A) It was a valid experiment because it tested the principle of relativity.

(B) It was a valid experiment because it took into account the known properties of light.
(C) It was an invalid experiment because it did not take into account the particle nature
of light.
(D) It was an invalid experiment because the speed of Earth through the aether was not
taken into account.

7 The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Mercury is 3.6 m s−2.

How much does a 2.0 kg brick weigh on Earth and on Mercury?

Weight of brick on Weight of brick on

Earth Mercury
(A) 2.0 kg 2.0 kg

(B) 19.6 kg 7.2 kg

(C) 19.6 N 19.6 N

(D) 19.6 N 7.2 N

8 While drilling into a tough material, the DC motor in an electric drill is slowed
significantly. This causes its coils to overheat.

Why do the coils overheat?

(A) The resistance of the coils increases significantly.

(B) The increased friction on the drill is converted to heat.
(C) The back emf decreases and so the current in the coils increases.
(D) The induced eddy currents increase and so more heat is produced.

9 Why is high voltage used to transmit electrical energy from power stations to users?

(A) It helps to protect the system from lightning strikes.

(B) It allows the supporting structures to have smaller insulators.
(C) It minimises the effects of the electrical resistance of the wires.
(D) It ensures that, even with voltage losses, 240 V will still reach the user.

198 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 4–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 198 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

10 The diagram shows a model of a transformer in a circuit.

1 2

R AC voltage

Which of the following correctly identifies Part 1 and Part 2 and the function of this
transformer?

Part 1 Part 2 Function of transformer

(A) Primary coil Secondary coil Step-up

(B) Secondary coil Primary coil Step-down

(C) Primary coil Secondary coil Step-down

(D) Secondary coil Primary coil Step-up

–5– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 199

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 199 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

11 Two copper rings lie in the same plane as shown.

An increasing current flows clockwise around the outer ring.

What happens in the inner ring?

(A) A decreasing clockwise current flows.

(B) A decreasing anticlockwise current flows.
(C) An increasing clockwise current flows.
(D) An increasing anticlockwise current flows.

12 The terminal velocity (vt ) of a spherical object in Earth’s atmosphere is proportional to

the square root of its radius (r).

Which graph correctly shows this relationship?

(A) (B)

vt v 2t

r r

vt vt

r2 r

200 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 6–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 200 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

13 What was Max Planck’s contribution to the development of quantum physics?

(A) He combined the quantised wave and particle models of light.

(B) He analysed the photoelectric effect and described light as quantised energy packets.
(C) He explained black body radiation and the photoelectric effect using quantised energy.
(D) He hypothesised that the radiation emitted and absorbed by the walls of a black
body cavity is quantised.

14 Heinrich Hertz devised and performed an experiment to investigate electromagnetic

waves. In this experiment he was able to determine the speed of the waves.

Which method was used to determine the speed?

(A) Timing how long it took the wave to travel a known distance
(B) Producing a wave of known wavelength and using reflection to determine the
frequency
(C) Producing a wave of known frequency and using interference to determine the
wavelength
(D) Using an interference pattern to determine the distance travelled and time taken

–7– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 201

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 201 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

15 A charged particle, q, enters a uniform magnetic field B at velocity v. The particle follows
a circular path of radius r as shown.

q v

If the magnitude of the magnetic field were doubled and the other variables were kept
constant, what would the new radius be?

r
(A)
4

r
(B)
2

(D) 4r

16 A cathode ray beam strikes the screen at point P, producing a bright spot. The north end
of a magnet is brought towards the beam as shown.

D B N S
P

Towards which point does the bright spot move?

(A) A
(B) B
(C) C
(D) D

202 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS– 8–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 202 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

17 JJ Thomson determined the charge/mass ratio of the electron by constructing a device

which contained

(A) perpendicular magnetic fields.

(B) perpendicular electric fields.
(C) parallel electric and magnetic fields.
(D) perpendicular electric and magnetic fields.

18 What did William and Lawrence Bragg use X-rays to investigate?

(A) The speed of light

(B) The emission of photoelectrons
(C) The crystal structure of materials
(D) The charge to mass ratio of an electron

–9– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 203

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 203 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

19 Why is pure copper a better electrical conductor than pure silicon?

(A) Electrons move through copper in pairs.

(B) Silicon contains fewer free electrons than copper.
(C) Copper has a conduction band and silicon does not.
(D) Copper atoms contain more electrons than silicon atoms.

20 The diagrams show possible ways to connect the coils and rotor of a DC motor to a DC
power supply.

In which circuit will the rotor turn in a clockwise direction?

(A) (B)

+ − + −

204 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 10 – 34

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 204 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 55 marks
Student Number
Attempt Questions 21–32
Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part

Answer the questions in the spaces provided. These spaces provide guidance for the expected
length of response.
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 21 (2 marks)

The optimum angle for safe re-entry of a space vehicle into Earth’s atmosphere is 2
angle B.

Outline consequences of the space vehicle entering the atmosphere at angle A AND
angle C.

Space
vehicle

A B
C

Atmosphere
Earth
NOT TO
SCALE

.........................................................................................................................................

3431 – 13 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 205

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 205 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 22 (5 marks)

An astronaut on the Moon throws a stone from the top of a cliff. The stone hits the
ground below 21.0 seconds later. The acceleration due to gravity on the moon is
1.6 ms–2.

150 m

300 m

(a) Calculate the horizontal component of the stone’s initial velocity. Show your 1
working.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Calculate the vertical component of the stone’s initial velocity. Show your 2
working.

...............................................................................................................................

(c) On the diagram, sketch the path that the stone would follow if the acceleration 2
due to gravity was higher. The initial velocity is the same.

206 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 14 –
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel©Success
BoardOne
of Studies NSW
HSC Physics 2010

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 206 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 23 (5 marks)

A train is travelling on a straight horizontal track. A student on the train attaches a

mass on a string to the ceiling of the train. The student observes that the mass remains
stationary in the position shown.

Mass

(a) Why does the mass hang with the string at an angle to the vertical? 2
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(b) The string then breaks and the mass falls. 3

Indicate the path of the mass on the diagram above. Explain why the mass has
taken this path.

...............................................................................................................................

3432 – 15 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 207

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 207 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 24 (3 marks)

In 2014 the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST) will be placed in orbit around the 3
Sun. Earth and the JWST will follow the orbits shown, with identical orbital periods.
This appears to contradict Kepler’s law of periods.

NOT TO
Sun Earth JWST
SCALE

Why is it possible for the JWST to orbit the Sun with the same orbital period as Earth?
In your answer, refer to Kepler’s law of periods.
.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................

208 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 16 –

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 208 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 25 (4 marks)

The mass of a rocket decreases during launch as it burns fuel, as shown in the graph.
The rocket engine produces a constant upward force on the rocket.

Mass
of
rocket

t1 t2 Time

(a) How does the law of conservation of momentum apply to the motion of the 2
rocket?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Why do the g-forces on an astronaut in the rocket differ at times t1 and t2? 2

...............................................................................................................................

3433 – 17 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 209

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 209 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 26 (5 marks)

A bar magnet is dropped through the centre of a solenoid connected to a data logger
as shown.

S
N

Voltage Data
Solenoid sensor logger

The data are recorded in the graph as shown.

1.0
0.8
0.6
X
Potential difference (V)

0.4
0.2
0
−0.2
−0.4
−0.6
Y
−0.8
−1.0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time (s)

(a) Why is the magnitude of the potential difference at Y greater than at X? 2

...............................................................................................................................

Question
Question 26 continues
26 continues on page 19

210 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 18 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 210 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (continued)

(b) The magnet is dropped again with two changes being made. 3

1. It is dropped from a greater height.

2. The south pole of the magnet is pointing down.

Sketch a graph that represents the most likely outcome of this new experiment.

1.0
0.8
0.6
Potential difference (V)

0.4
0.2
0
−0.2
−0.4
−0.6
−0.8
−1.0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time (s)

End of Question 26

– 19 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 211

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 211 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 27 (6 marks)

Magnetic resonance imaging is a current technology that uses superconductors. 6

Identify two OTHER technologies that use superconductors. Evaluate the impact of
these technologies on society and the environment.

.........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................

212 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 20 –
Excel©Success One HSC Physics
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1
Board of Studies NSW 2010

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 212 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 28 (4 marks)

A copper rod is placed on a wooden frame, which is placed on an electronic balance. 4

A length of 0.2 m of the rod passes at right angles to a horizontal magnetic field.

magnetic
magneticfield
field
0.2
0.2mm

0.3
0.3AA insulating
insulatingframe
frame

Electronic
Electronicbalance
balance

When a current of 0.3 A is passed through the rod, the reading on the balance
increases by 7.5 × 10−4 kg.

What is the strength and direction of the magnetic field?

.........................................................................................................................................

3434 – 21 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 213

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 213 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 29 (3 marks)

Two sets of plates deflect an electron beam in a cathode ray oscilloscope to produce 3
the trace on the screen as shown.

Explain how the deflection plates produce this pattern.

.........................................................................................................................................

214 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 22 –

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 214 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 30 (5 marks)

Pure germanium can be doped by adding small amounts of boron.

(a) Is the doped germanium an n-type or a p-type semiconductor? Justify your answer. 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Explain how the addition of boron alters the electrical conductivity of germanium. 3

...............................................................................................................................

3435 – 23 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 215

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 215 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 31 (5 marks)

(a) What is the energy of a photon having a wavelength of 1000 nm? 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Explain why light having a wavelength longer than a certain value does not 3
produce an electric current in a photocell.

...............................................................................................................................

216 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 24 –

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 216 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 32 (8 marks)

Two significant problems that will affect a manned spaceflight to Mars are: 8
• the changes in gravitational energy
• protecting the space vehicle from high-speed electrically charged particles from
the Sun.
Use your understanding of physics to analyse each of these problems.

.........................................................................................................................................

3436 – 25 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 217

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 217 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2010 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 33–37
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer the first parts of the question in a writing booklet. Answer the rest of the parts in a
SEPARATE writing booklet. Extra writing booklets are available.
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Pages

Question 33 Geophysics (Not included in this reproduction)

........................................................................... 28–29

Question 34 Medical Physics ................................................................... 30–31

Question 35 Astrophysics ......................................................................... 32–33

Question 36 From Quanta to Quarks ............................................................. 34

Question 37 The Age of Silicon (Not included in this reproduction)

............................................................... 35–36

3437 218 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 27 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 218 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 34 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(c) in a writing booklet.

(a) Describe how an X-ray image of the bones in the hand is produced. 3

(b) (i) What is ONE advantage and ONE disadvantage of using a radioisotope 2
with a 6 hour half-life for medical imaging?

(ii) The half-life of Tc–99m is 6 hours. 2

Copy the following set of axes into your writing booklet, and draw a
graph to show how the mass of a 10 g sample of Tc–99m changes over
18 hours.

6
Mass (g)
4

0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18
Time (h)

(ii) Describe how energy from the radio frequency oscillator of a magnetic 3
resonance imaging machine interacts with hydrogen to obtain
information about the inside of the body.

Question 34 continues
Question 34 continues on page 31

– 30 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 219

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 219 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 (continued)

Answer parts (d)–(e) in a SEPARATE writing booklet.

(d) (i) The acoustic impedance of air is 400 kg m–2 s–1. 3

Tissue Density Velocity of sound

(kg m–3) (m s–1)
Muscle 1076 1580
Bone 1912 4080
Brain 1025 1540

Calculate the intensity of the reflected ultrasound at the interface

between chest muscle and air as a proportion of the incident intensity.

(ii) Describe how the Doppler effect is used in ultrasound imaging and 4
outline information that a Doppler ultrasound scan can provide about
blood flow in the heart.

(e) A cancer specialist has access to ultrasound, CAT and PET scanners. 6

Which of these technologies is the most appropriate to detect a 3 mm brain

tumour? Justify your choice.

End of Question 34

220 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 31 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 220 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 35 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(b) in a writing booklet.

(a) (i) The Japanese radio telescope HALCA was placed in an elliptical orbit 3
which took it as far as 21 000 km from Earth. It took measurements
simultaneously with ground-based radio telescopes.

Explain the benefit that the HALCA telescope gives radio astronomers.

(ii) SOFIA is an infrared telescope. It is operated from high-altitude aircraft. 2

Give TWO reasons for the greater validity of data from this telescope,
compared to ground-based observations.

(b) Properties of stars, including their surface temperature and chemical

composition, can be measured by using their spectra.

(i) Identify other properties of stars which can be determined from their 2
spectra.

(ii) Explain how surface temperatures and chemical compositions of stars 5

can be determined from their spectra.

Question 35 continues on page 33

Question 35 continues

– 32 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 221

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 221 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 35 (continued)

Answer parts (c)–(d) in a SEPARATE writing booklet.

(c) Hertzsprung-Russell diagrams can be used to deduce the properties of stars.

10 4
W
Luminosity (solar units)

10 2

10 −2
Z

10 −4
O B A F G K M
Spectral type

(i) Identify the type of stars found in region Z on the above diagram. 1

(ii) Describe the relationship between the masses of main sequence stars and 2
their luminosities AND lifetimes.

(iii) Contrast the energy production processes of stars in regions W and Z. 2

(iv) Copy the axes from the above Hertzsprung-Russell diagram into your 2
writing booklet. Sketch a Hertzsprung-Russell diagram for the stars in an
ancient globular cluster on these axes.

(d) Identify THREE advances in measurement technologies, and describe how they 6
have improved our understanding of celestial objects.

End of Question 35

222 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 33 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 222 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 36 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(d) in a writing booklet.

(a) Outline the relationship between Bohr’s atomic model and Planck’s equation 3
E = hf.

(b) Calculate the wavelength of a photon which is emitted when an electron in a 2

hydrogen atom moves from energy level n = 4 to n = 2.

(d)

Number
of β -particles

Energy of β -particles E max

How did Pauli account for the distribution of energies in the β-decay curve? 2

Answer parts (e)–(g) in a SEPARATE writing booklet.

(e) (i) James Chadwick discovered the neutron in 1932. How did Chadwick 3
apply conservation laws?

(ii) Outline how the properties of neutrons make them useful in scattering 2
experiments.

(f) Account for the existence of stable isotopes, referring to the forces which act 3
within the atomic nucleus.

(g) ‘Important fundamental discoveries in physics often lead to applications which 7

have a significant effect on society.’

Evaluate this statement, with reference to the contributions of Rutherford,

Einstein and Fermi to the development of the atomic bomb.

End of paper

© Board of Studies NSW 2010

– 34 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 223

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 223 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2010 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A (Total 20 marks)

1 C The International Space Station is in LEO with a much higher speed (~9 km s–1)
and a shorter orbital period (about 90 minutes) than Meteosat, which is in a
geostationary orbit moving much slower (~3 km s–1) and with a longer orbital
period (24 hours).

2 D Galileo considered the horizontal motion constant while the vertical motion was
uniformly accelerated down by gravity.

3 A Apply the time dilation equation to calculate to, the lifetime when in stationary
frame of reference, considering tv for the observed lifetime at high speed (0.9999 c)
is 1.0  10s–6 s.
1
4 B EK  2 mv2 and the vertical velocity is accelerated down at a uniform rate (g). At
maximum height the ball still has a horizontal velocity and, therefore, kinetic
energy. The graph will resemble an inverted parabola where the turning point does
1
not reach the origin, turning about 2 Ekmax.

mv2 πD π2 π2 2
5 D Required force  Fc  and v   . Therefore Fc  0.2   
r T 0.6 0.6
where r  1.0 m.

Therefore Fc  21.9 N and closest answer  20 N.

6 B The Michelson-Morley experiment was a valid experiment for the model of light
at that time. Their null result was later explained by Einstein.

7 D Weight  mg. On Earth  2  9.8  19.6 N; on Mars  2  3.6  7.2 N.

8 C The speed of the motor’s rotation determines the size of the back-emf produced.
As the motor speed is reduced, the back-emf also reduces and the forward supply
voltage produces a larger current in the motor loops.

9 C As P  VI, then the same power being transferred at a higher voltage means a
smaller current. Using higher voltages results in a smaller current and smaller
energy losses due to the resistance of the wires, i.e. Elost  RI 2 t.

10 D Part 1 is the secondary coil and Part 2 is the primary coil. Fewer loops in the primary
coil compared to the secondary coil means it will act as a step-up transformer.

224 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 224 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

11 D The increasing current in the outer ring produces a changing magnetic field. This
changing magnetic field induces a current in the inner ring. The direction of the
induced current will OPPOSE the change that created it, i.e. a current will flow
anticlockwise.

12 B Since v is proportional to , then the straight line graph is for v versus , or for
v2 versus r.

13 D Planck studied black body radiation and to explain the experimental results he
suggested that the radiation produced was quantised, i.e. E  hf.

14 C To determine the velocity, Hertz produced waves of known frequency and used
interference of the waves to measure the wavelength. He then used v  fλ to
determine the velocity.

15 B The force produced by the magnetic field, Fmag  Bqv, creates a centripetal force
mv2 mv2
 . Then Bqv  , which means that if the same particles enter the field at
r r
1
the same velocity, then B  r , i.e. they are inversely proportional and if the
magnetic field strength is doubled, then the radius will be halved.

16 A Considering cathode rays are negatively charged and they are travelling towards us,
with the North pole of the bar magnet in the position shown its field will interact
with the magnetic field produced by the cathode rays to create a force vertically UP
the page, i.e. towards A.

17 D The forces created by the fields were in opposite directions but the magnetic field
was arranged perpendicular to the electric field because magnetic fields create a
force perpendicular to the velocity of the charge.

18 C The Braggs developed X-ray crystallography using X-rays to study the arrangement
of the atoms within crystals.

19 B Silicon (Z14) does have fewer electrons than copper (Z29), but most importantly
copper has a metallic structure and silicon a semiconductor structure. This means
copper has more free electrons than silicon, giving copper a lower electrical
resistance.

20 B Careful analysis of the magnetic fields created shows that only arrangements A and
B have the coils producing opposite magnetic poles, with the North pole on the
right and South pole on the left (the current will produce the same pole from each
coil in C and D). To create clockwise rotation of the rotor, the current through the rotor
coil must flow in a clockwise direction (viewed from above), i.e. the set-up in B.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 225

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 225 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I, Part B

Question 21

Angle A is too small and the spacecraft might be reflected back into space as it encounters
the atmosphere.

Angle C is too large and the resistance from the atmosphere will lead to a very large
acceleration of the spacecraft and huge amounts of heat will be generated as air resistance
slows the spacecraft. This will result in the g-forces on passengers being too large and, if the
heating of the spacecraft is too extreme, it could burn out in the atmosphere. (2 marks)

Question 22
(a)
Horizontal displacement  x  300 m and time of flight  t  21 s.
x 300
Now x  uxt. Therefore ux   14.3 m s–1 to the right. (1 mark)
t 21

(b) Vertical displacement  Dy  150 m down. Time of flight  21 s.

1 1
Now y  uy t  2 ay t2, therefore, 150  21uy ( 2  1.6  212),
i.e. 150  21ux  352.8
150 – 352.8
Therefore ux   –9.66 m s–1  9.66 m s–1 vertically up. (2 marks)
21

(c)

Path with
higher gravity

150 m

300 m

With a larger acceleration due to gravity the path is still parabolic but the time of flight is
smaller. This results in the rock not going as high and the horizontal range being shorter.
(2 marks)

226 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 226 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 23

Question
(a) The 23
mass on the string hangs at an angle because the train is accelerating to the left at
a uniform
(a) The rate.
mass on the(Based
string on the at
hangs angle, the train
an angle is accelerating
because the train is at about 0.5 g.)
accelerating to the(2left
marks)
at a
uniform rate. (Based on the angle, the train is accelerating at about 0.5 g.) (2 marks)
(b) When the string breaks, the only force acting on the mass is vertically down due to
(b) When
gravity.the
Atstring breaks,
the instant thethestring
onlybreaks,
force acting on the
the mass hasmass is vertically
the same horizontaldown due toto
velocity
gravity. At the
the left as the train.
instant thetrain
The string breaks, the mass
is accelerating has
to the theand
left sameso, horizontal
relative to velocity to the
the passenger
left as the
on the train.
train, theThe
balltrain is accelerating
is accelerating to thedown
vertically left and so, itrelative
while to the passenger
also appears to have a on
the train, the
horizontal ball is accelerating
acceleration vertically
to the right. downthat
This means while foriteach
also equal
appears to interval,
time have a
horizontal
the changes acceleration to the
in the vertical andright. This means
horizontal that for each
displacement of theequal
mass,time interval,
relative the
to the
changes
train, areinalways
the vertical
in the and
same horizontal
ratio. Thisdisplacement of the mass,path,
results in a straight-line relative to the train,
as shown, beingare
always
observed in by
thethe
same ratio. This
passenger results
on the in a straight-line path, as shown, being observed
train. (3 marks)
by the passenger on the train. (3 marks)

Path
Path of
of mass
mass
relative
relative to
to train
train
when
when string breaks
string breaks
Mass
Mass

Mathematical proof:

The horizontal displacement of the mass relative to Earth is given by X = uT t ... 1.

The vertical displacement of the mass relative to Earth and the train is given by Y = 12 gt 2 ... 2.

The horizontal motion of the train relative to Earth is given by XT = uTt 1 14 gt 2 ... 3.
The resultant displacement of the mass relative to the train is given by X R = X 2 X T ... 4.

Substituting 1 and 3 into 4 gives X R = uT t 2 uT t 1 14 gt 2, i.e. X R = 14 gt 2.

This means X R = 14 gt 2 and Y= 12 gt 2, i.e. 2X R = Y or the vertical displacement of the mass relative
to the train per unit time is TWICE the horizontal displacement of the mass relative to the train
in the same time. This results in the mass following the straight-line path shown.

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 323

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 227

© Pascal SuccessOne
9781741255782 Press ISBN 978 12015Ed.indb
PHYSICS 74125 645323
1 Excel Success One HSC Physics 8/12/14 3:41 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 227 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 24

Kepler’s law of periods predicts that for a larger orbital radius, the period of the orbit would
also be larger, i.e. T2  r3. If the JWST had only the influence of the Sun affecting its orbit
this would be true, but in this case Earth is also exerting a gravitational force that is
influencing the orbit of the JWST around the Sun. In order to achieve the orbit of the JWST
as described, the combined forces created by the gravitational attraction to the Sun and the
gravitational attraction to Earth must create a centripetal force on the JWST of just the right
value when it is at this particular distance from the Sun and Earth, such that this centripetal
force holds the JWST in the position shown, where it has a higher orbital velocity than Earth
but remains directly behind the Earth with an orbital period around the Sun identical with
Earth’s. (3 marks)

Question 25

(a) A rocket relies on conservation of momentum to operate. As the fuel is burnt, it is

expelled as exhaust with a change in momentum  mf vf . To conserve momentum, the
change in momentum (impulse) DOWN for the exhaust gases produces an equal
and opposite change in momentum (impulse) UP to the rocket  mRvR ,
i.e. mf vf  mR vR. As fuel is burnt, the total mass of the rocket reduces so that a
constant force from the exhaust gases leads to an increasing acceleration of the rocket
over time. (2 marks)

(b) From the graph, the mass of the rocket at t1 is greater than the mass at t2. Since F  ma,
this means that the constant force from the rocket engine will be producing a larger
acceleration at t2 compared to t1. This would lead to astronauts experiencing larger
g-forces at t2 than at t1. (2 marks)

Question 26

(a) The potential difference induced is proportional to the rate of change of magnetic flux.
As the magnet is dropped, it starts at rest and accelerates down under the influence of
gravity. This results in the magnet moving faster the further it falls. X occurs with the
magnet entering the top of the coil while Y occurs as the magnet is leaving the lower
end of the coil. Because the magnet is moving more quickly at Y than at X, the rate of
change of magnetic flux in the loops of the coil is larger at Y and thus the induced emf
is larger but is in the opposite direction from when the magnet was entering the coil.
The directions of the induced emf produced a current in the coil at X (to oppose the
magnet entering the coil) and at Y (to try and oppose the magnet leaving the coil).
(2 marks)

228 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 228 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(b) 1.0
0.8
0.6
Potential difference (V)

0.4
0.2
0
20.2
20.2
20.6
20.8
21.0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time (s)

The magnet is released from a greater height with the South pole down.
This means the magnet will be travelling faster as it approaches the coil.
This will result in larger voltages being induced as it passes through the coil
in a slightly shorter period. With the South pole of the bar magnet entering
the coil first, a negative potential difference is induced first.

(3 marks)

Question 27

Two technologies that presently use superconductors are:

1. The Maglev train. This uses superconductors on the train to create a magnetic field that
interacts with magnetic fields created by currents flowing in the track to levitate, control
and accelerate the train.
Impact on society—benefits are that it provides high speed transport with very little
maintenance required, produces negligible wear on the tracks and trains so that they
have a long life and produces very little noise pollution. A disadvantage is that the train
and tracks require a large amount of resources to construct and are relatively expensive
to build. They generally require entirely new infrastructure and there is difficulty in
integrating networks with existing systems.
Impact on the environment—this train is relatively energy efficient compared to other
forms of transportation (planes, trucks), but there is a negative impact because of the
need to build special track with electricity supplies.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 229

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 229 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2. The Large Hadron Collider (LHC). This was designed to produce high energy collisions
between protons and anti-protons to collect fundamental information about the nature of
matter.
Impact on society—it provides fundamental information on the nature of matter that
may lead to new technologies, and it is a collaborative effort between many countries.
A drawback is that it was very expensive to build and is also very expensive to operate.
Certain people are also concerned that it may create a black hole that will swallow Earth.
Impact on the environment—despite being built efficiently and utilising existing
structures, huge tunnels had to be constructed, requiring significant investment of
resources, and when operating the LHC does consume very large amounts of energy.
Overall, the impact of these technologies on society is generally positive but, despite
some environmental benefits, they have a generally negative impact on the environment.
(6 marks)

Question 28

The balance is recording mass. When a current flows, mass increases by 7.5  104 kg.
This represents an increase in the downward force of 7.5  104  9.8  7.35  103 N.

Now this increase is due to a magnetic force that acts down in the same direction as gravity.
The magnetic force is given by FB  BIl, i.e. 7.35  103  B  0.3  0.2.

Therefore B  0.1225 T vertically into the page, i.e. the magnetic field created by the
current-carrying wire interacts with the external magnetic field above the wire to create a
high field strength that results in a force down the page. This means the external magnetic
field is acting INTO the page, i.e. B  122.5 mT vertically into the page. (4 marks)

Question 29

One pair of parallel plates lies on opposite sides and they are oriented vertically. The electric
field between the plates causes the beam of cathode rays to move horizontally across the
screen at a steady speed from left to right, and then to repeat this motion. The second pair of
parallel plates lies at the top and bottom and they are oriented horizontally. The electric field
produced by these plates deflects the beam of cathode rays vertically. These plates are
attached to a source that is producing a uniform frequency oscillating potential. The
combination of the forces produced by the two sets of parallel plates gives rise to the trace
seen on the screen. The vertical plates are moving the beam across the screen while the input
applied to the horizontal plates causes the electron beam to oscillate vertically up and down
with a frequency equal to that of the input signal. (3 marks)

230 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 230 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 30

(a) Boron is a Gp3 element in the Periodic Table whereas germanium is Gp4. This means
that doping with boron would give rise to a p-type semiconductor. Boron has only three
valence electrons while germanium has four. This leaves one germanium electron
without a partner and gives rise to a positive hole in the crystal lattice. This is a
characteristic of p-type semiconductors. (2 marks)
(b) Doping the germanium with boron gives rise to positive holes within the crystal lattice
formed. This improves the electrical conductivity of the germanium as, when a voltage
is applied to the semiconductor, the holes can accept an electron from the valence band
of an adjacent germanium atom. This allows the holes to drift through the lattice to act
as a current. These holes provide extra charge carriers within the semiconductor and less
energy is now required to mobilise charge to flow as a current than is the case in pure
germanium. This results in the doped germanium having a lower electrical resistance
and improved electrical conductivity. (3 marks)

Question 31
hc 6.626  10–34  3  108
(a) Now E  hf  λ   1.9878  1019 joules
1000  10–9

Photon energy  1.99  1019 joules. (2 marks)

(b) A photocell uses the photoelectric effect to operate. This means that there is a minimum
energy for the photons needed to release an electron within the photocell so that it can
flow as a current. Since the photon energy is given by E  hf, then to have enough
energy the photon frequency must be greater than a certain critical or threshold
frequency. Since frequency is inversely proportional to wavelength, this means the
wavelength must be small enough for the photons to have sufficient energy to be able
to release electrons to flow as a current in the photocell, i.e. if the wavelength is too
long, the photon does not have enough energy to release electrons. (3 marks)

Question 32

In travelling from Earth to Mars the spacecraft will leave Earth and be set in an orbit around
the Sun. As the spacecraft follows its path it will rendezvous with Mars in its orbit.
The spacecraft will first be placed into a Mars orbit and the landing will then be initiated.
The gravitational energy of the spacecraft and occupants will vary significantly for the
different stages of the mission. The astronauts will need to adopt particular strategies to
maintain their health and wellbeing, and there will need to be sufficient reserves of fuel for
the spacecraft to change the gravitational energy, both on the trip there and on the eventual
return to Earth. The gravitational energy is lowest on the surface of Earth and rises rapidly
as the spacecraft is launched by rockets and begins to orbit Earth. Rockets will then be used
to produce the slingshot effect around Earth to propel the spacecraft on a path to Mars.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 231

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 231 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

After leaving Earth’s orbit the spacecraft will continue to slowly increase gravitational energy
as it travels to rendezvous with Mars. On approach to Mars the spacecraft will begin to lose
gravitational energy and gain kinetic energy. To overcome the change in gravitational energy,
rockets will have to be used to control the approach to Mars, the descent and the eventual
landing on the surface. The gravitational energy on the surface of Mars is greater than the
energy when on the surface of Earth.

Exposure to the solar wind presents problems for the human occupants in that the high
velocity charged particles can produce electromagnetic effects that could interfere with or
damage electronic and communication equipment, while the prolonged exposure to the solar
wind as they travel to Mars could lead to possible radiation poisoning for the astronauts.
To protect the craft and occupants from the solar wind, it is planned to use a localised
magnetosphere around the spacecraft to deflect the majority of the charged particles in the
solar wind. This will operate in a similar way to Earth’s magnetic field. Shielding will also
be needed to increase the protection for equipment and occupants.
(8 marks)

232 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 232 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Section II—Options

Question 34 — Medical Physics

(a) The hand is placed in between the X-ray tube and an X-ray detector (film/camera).
Electron beam
Anode Cathode

Collimator

Soft rays
Lead shielding

X-ray film in dark box

The X-ray tube voltage is adjusted so that the potential between the cathode and the
anode produces soft X-rays of an appropriate frequency to penetrate the hand and
produce a high quality shadow image. Lead shielding may be placed over the patient’s
arm to protect it from unnecessary exposure to X-rays. The collimator is adjusted so
that the X-ray beam is just wider than the hand.

An X-ray plate is placed beneath the hand. The plate contains either a photographic film or
a CCD camera to directly record the image. The patient is asked to hold the hand very still.

The tube is turned on for a brief moment (about one second).

X-rays penetrate through the hand and expose the film. Regions where the bones have
absorbed some of the X-rays will be less exposed than others. When the film is
developed, the areas ‘shadowed’ by the bones will be lighter than areas where the
X-rays only had to penetrate soft tissue, and thus a shadow image of the bones can be
seen. (3 marks)

(b) (i) An advantage is that the radioisotope administered to the patient will not be very
active for very long. This helps to minimise any tissue damage that might be caused
by the decay of the isotope. A disadvantage is that the radioisotope supplied to the
imaging facility does not last very long before it decays. Imaging must therefore
occur close to the source of the radioisotope—usually in a large hospital—and
hence patients may have to travel long distances to be imaged. (2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 233

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 233 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(ii)
10

6
Mass (g)
4

0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18
Time (h) (2 marks)

(c) (i) Hydrogen has only one nucleon and hence has net nuclear spin. Thus it has the
necessary magnetic properties for nuclear magnetic resonance and relaxation.
Hydrogen is abundant in the body, e.g. as a component of water (H2O) in all
cells. (2 marks)
(ii) Hydrogen nuclei are caused to line up either parallel or anti-parallel in a strong
magnetic field. In doing so the axis of the proton rotation precesses around the
magnetic field vector at the Larmor frequency.
When energy from the radio oscillator is absorbed by these precessing protons,
the size of their precession increases. When the radio oscillator is turned off, the
precession returns to the lower energy state—the protons release the energy they
absorbed as radio waves at the same frequency as it was absorbed. Due to the
gradient field, hydrogen nuclei in different parts of the body absorb and emit
slightly different frequencies of radio energy. In addition, different tissues contain
different amounts of water (hydrogen) and have different relaxation times. The
radio receiver detects the emitted radio waves and produces electrical signals.
The signals are processed by a computer to produce 2-D and 3-D images of
structures within the body, which can then be used in medical diagnosis. (3 marks)

(d) (i) Z  xv

Z(muscle)  1076  1580  1.7  106
Z(air)  400
Ir [z2 – z1]2

Io [z2 + z1]2
(1.7  106 – 400)2

(1.7  106 + 400)2

 0.998
Hence 99.8% of the ultrasound is reflected. (3 marks)

234 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 234 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(ii) The Doppler effect can be detected whenever there is relative motion between a
source of waves and an observer/detector. When a source is moving towards an
observer/detector, the wavelength is shortened, resulting in an increase in the
source frequency. When a source is moving away from an observer/detector, the
wavelength is increased, resulting in a decrease in the source frequency.
The difference between the detected frequency and the source frequency detected
can be used to determine the velocity of the moving source.
If ultrasound is directed into the body and is reflected from a moving boundary
such as the walls of the heart or the blood cells flowing in an artery, the reflected
waves undergo changes in wavelength and hence frequency. A Doppler
ultrasound image often shows the movement away from the transducer as red and
the movement towards the transducer as blue.
This technique can be used to determine the direction of blood flow near the valves
in the heart. This helps to diagnose if the heart valves are operating effectively.
For example, if some blood flows the wrong way through a valve, then the valve
is leaking and may need to be replaced with an artificial valve. (4 marks)
(e) Ultrasound is unsuitable for imaging the brain or locating brain tumours because most of
the ultrasound is reflected from the skull/tissue boundary and therefore does not
penetrate the skull. Hence there is insufficient reflected ultrasound energy to produce an
image suitable for identifying a brain tumour.
The small size of the tumour is likely to make it very difficult to detect using
computerised axial tomography (CAT). A CAT scan provides good structural images of
the brain; however, CAT scans produce images from data compiled from voxels, which
have a small but finite size and represent slices of the body/brain ranging from 3 to
5 mm in thickness. Also, brain tumour cells are likely to have similar density to normal
brain tissue. Hence the X-rays used to produce the CAT scan may result in little variation
in the grey scale on the image between the tumour and normal brain tissue. In addition,
each pixel on the image produced using CAT represents an average of the data from each
voxel and unless the whole tumour was in one voxel it would be almost impossible to
detect. Hence a 3 mm brain tumour could easily be missed using a CAT scan.
Positron emission tomography (PET) relies on the uptake of a specific radioisotope.
The uptake of the radioisotope is different for tumour cells and normal cells. Even a tiny
tumour will assimilate a different amount of the radioisotope and therefore emit a
different number of gamma photons than the surrounding tissue as the positrons
annihilate local electrons. Thus, a PET scan is the most appropriate technology to detect
a 3 mm brain tumour.
PET scans, however, do not give good structural data for the brain. Typically, most
diagnoses of small brain tumours involve overlaying the PET scan image identifying the
tumour on a CAT scan image showing the structure of the brain. In this way, the specific
location of the tumour in the brain can be more accurately diagnosed. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 235

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 235 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 35 — Astrophysics

(a) (i) Being placed in an elliptical orbit around Earth, the HALCA radio telescope
provides two benefits for astronomers. Interferometry is a process that combines
the images received by two or more telescopes through computer linkage. The
resolution of images when a ground-based radio telescope is teamed with
HALCA (having a baseline distance of up to 21 000 km) is greatly enhanced. In
addition, being located in space HALCA gains from the usual advantages that the
radiation it detects has not had to pass through the atmosphere, with the
consequent distortion of the signal, although since radio waves have far longer
wavelengths than visible light, the distortion of the signal received on the ground
is far less significant. (3 marks)
(ii) Operating from high altitude aircraft, SOFIA’s infrared detectors would be
unaffected by water vapour or clouds, and would also be able to detect the full
range of frequencies of incoming I-R radiation. Moreover, much of the ultra-
violet and visible light reaching Earth is converted into infrared radiation and
reflected off into space, so another advantage of the SOFIA telescope relative to
ground-based telescopes is that it would collect much less of this ‘noise’ affecting
the signal it receives. Very high in the atmosphere the temperature is extremely
cold; this gives a further advantage to an I-R telescope aboard a high-flying
aeroplane since infrared light is radiant heat energy. For these reasons the
received data is less distorted and hence is far more valid. (2 marks)

(b) (i) The speed of approach or recession of a star can be determined from its spectrum,
as can its rotational velocity. (2 marks)
(ii) One way of determining the surface temperature of a star is by matching its
luminosity curve with that of a blackbody. A stellar spectrum is composed of a
blackbody radiation curve superimposed upon by a vast number of dark
absorption lines. Computer-generated blackbody curves representing different
temperatures can be matched against that of the star until they fit precisely and
the surface temperature of the star is found.
The absorption spectral lines of a star identify the specific wavelengths of the
continuous spectrum of radiation passing out from the core of the star that are
absorbed by elements in the star’s atmosphere. The specific electronic structure
varies for every element so the energy levels for their electrons differ. The
absorption lines of each element exactly match the emission lines they release
when excited by heat or electricity in a laboratory on Earth—they act as
‘fingerprints’ to identify that element. Consequently, the actual elements in the
star’s atmosphere can be identified, and even their relative proportions can be
estimated from the intensity of those dark lines. (5 marks)

236 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 236 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(c) (i) The stars found in the region marked Z are white dwarfs. (1 mark)
(ii) The greater the mass of a main sequence star, the greater the gravitational
pressure on its core and, therefore, the greater must be the radiation pressure
acting outwards to balance the inward pressure. The extra energy released by
higher mass stars to counterbalance the gravitational pressure eventually reaches
the surface of the star and is radiated off into space, and so more massive stars
must be more luminous than less massive ones.
To maintain the radiation pressure, stars having larger masses must consume
their fuel much more rapidly than lower mass stars and so they exhaust it more
rapidly. Their lifetimes are correspondingly far shorter than those having
lower mass. (2 marks)
(iii) The energy produced by stars in region W comes from the fusion of four
hydrogen nuclei to form one helium nucleus. The stars in region W are very
massive, and so it is likely the fusion reactions would involve a catalyst nucleus
such as carbon-12 (the CNO cycle) instead of the simple proton–proton reaction
believed to cause fusion in low-mass stars.

Stars in region Z, however, no longer have any fusion reactions occurring in their
cores. They are now stellar corpses. In the final stage of their lives they were
giant stars, and it is the loss of that vast amount of gravitational potential energy
as they collapsed inwards that is the source of their energy production during this
phase. Initially converted into kinetic energy of the star’s matter, it has become
heat as the matter crushed together. (2 marks)
(iv)

104
Luminosity (solar units)

102

1022

1024
O B A F G K M
Spectral type
(2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 237

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 237 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(d) When Galileo used the refracting telescope he had made to observe Jupiter, he was
enabled to see four of its moons because of the greatly improved sensitivity and
resolution of the device relative to human eyes. This discovery was a major influence
in changing our understanding of the solar system, converting belief in a geocentric
system to a heliocentric one, since now there was evidence that not all celestial objects
actually revolved around Earth and also that the Moon would not be left behind if Earth
actually orbited the Sun.
The measurement of the visible light received from celestial objects has evolved from
the comparative estimates of early astronomers such as Hipparchus to photographic
imaging and the modern photon-counting techniques of CCDs and photomultipliers.
Astronomers today use photon counting to create spectrograms and colour indices of
the target objects. Consequently, the H-R diagram has become a more powerful tool
able to compare the colour and brightness of stellar objects, which was previously
impossible. This capacity is not limited to the visible spectrum.
Modern ground-based telescopes have large photon-collecting primary mirrors that
allow far greater sensitivity and resolution of celestial objects than previously possible.
However, the weight of traditional mirrors is so great that their shape is distorted to
such an extent that their accuracy is reduced. Modern-day mirrors can, therefore, be
composed of large numbers of segments attached to flexible bases and individually
activated under the control of a computer. Since the direction the telescope is pointed
influences the shape of the mirror, it is not difficult for the computer to adjust all the
segments every few seconds such that the ideal shape is maintained. This is called
active optics, maximising the brightness and clarity of objects.
Many of the properties of celestial objects, including the period of Cepheid variables,
can be determined far more precisely with such techniques, allowing the distances of
other galaxies to be measured. (6 marks)

238 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 238 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2010 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS
2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 36 — From Quanta to Quarks

Question 36 — From Quanta to Quarks
(a)
(a) an attempt
In an attemptto toexplain
explainthetheresults
resultsfrom
fromblackbody
blackbodyradiation
radiationexperiments,
experiments,Planck
Planck
developed thethe idea
ideaof
ofquantised
quantisedenergy
energyandandsuggested
suggestedEE=hf. hf.Bohr,
Bohr,inindeveloping
developinghishis
atomic model, a modified
modified form of Rutherford’s nuclear model, postulated ‘stationary
Rutherford’s nuclear model, postulated ‘stationary
states’
states’ to explain the stability of electrons.Bohr
to explain the stability of electrons. Bohrsuggested
suggestedthe
theelectron’s
electron’sangular
angular
nhnh
momentum
momentum was was quantised
quantised according
according to tothe
theequation
equationmvrmvr=2π , where
, wheren nwas
wasananinteger.
2p
Bohr wasBohr
integer. one was
of the
onefirst
of to
theincorporate Planck’s idea
first to incorporate of quantised
Planck’s energy. He suggested
idea of quantised energy.
that an electron moving from one energy level (stationary state) to another
He suggested that an electron moving from one energy level (stationary state) to
would absorb
or emit radiation with an energy equivalent to the difference in energy of the levels, i.e.
another would absorb or emit radiation with an energy equivalent to the difference in
hf  Ef – Ei.
energy of the levels, i.e. hf = Ef 2E i.
Bohr was able to develop a model of the hydrogen atom based on his postulates and
Bohr was able
this model to develop
accurately a model
predicted theofline
the spectra
hydrogen atom based
produced on his postulates
by hydrogen. and of
The success
thisBohr
the modelmodel
accurately predicted
inspired others the line more
to look spectra produced
closely by hydrogen.
at Planck’s idea ofThe success of
quantised
the Bohr model inspired others to look more closely at Planck’s idea of quantised
energy. (3 energy.
marks)
(3 marks)

1 1 1 1 1 1
(b)
(b) Using the equation,
equation, 5 Ra 2 2 2 b , i.e. 5 1.097 3 107 a 2 b
l nf ni l 4 16
11
Therefore
Therefore 1.097310
51.097 3 0.1875 4 Wavelength
107 7[0.1875] Wavelength 4.862310
=4.862 m.
10–727m. (2(2marks)
marks)
λl

(c) De Broglie developed his idea of matter waves where the wavelength of a particle
(c) De Broglie developed his idea of matter waves where the wavelengthh of a particle was
was inversely proportional to the particle’s momentum, i.e. λh= , where h is Planck’s
p
inversely proportional to the particle’s momentum, i.e. λ  , where h is Planck’s
constant. De Broglie had noted that the Bohr model of the atomp introduced integers
constant. De Broglie had noted that the Bohr model of the atom introduced integers
when dealing with the stationary states for the possible electron orbits in hydrogen
when dealing with the stationary states for the possible electron orbits in hydrogen
atoms. He suggested that the stability of the electron orbit could be due to the electrons
atoms. He suggested that the stability of the electron orbit could be due to the electrons
existing as standing waves around the nucleus. When the wavelength of an electron
existing as standing waves around the nucleus. When the wavelength of an electron
with known momentum was calculated, the results were very close to the known size of
with known momentum was calculated, the results were very close to the known size
the atom. It was also noted that de Broglie’s hypothesis was mathematically equivalent
of the atom. It was also noted that de Broglie’s hypothesis was mathematically
nh
to Bohr’s suggestion of quantised angular momentum, i.e. mvr = , which Bohr
nh had
equivalent to Bohr’s suggestion of quantised angular momentum, 2p i.e. mvr  , which
used to accurately describe the emission of radiation from hydrogen atoms. 2π(3 marks)
Bohr had used to accurately describe the emission of radiation from hydrogen atoms.
distribution of electron energies (β-particles) shows that no electron really(3comes
(d) The marks)
off with the maximum energy available, with the large majority of electrons having less
than half the predicted maximum. In order to account for the apparent loss of energy,
(d) The distribution of electron energies (-particles) shows that no electron really comes
Pauli suggested that there was a second neutral particle being emitted along with the
off with the maximum energy available, with the large majority of electrons having less
electron. Pauli suggested the total energy of the electron and the neutral particle would
than half the predicted maximum. In order to account for the apparent loss of energy,
be equal to a constant and account for all conservation laws. He suggested that the
Pauli suggested that there was a second neutral particle being emitted along with the
particle was neutral, would have a tiny mass and would obey the exclusion principle.
electron. Pauli suggested the total energy of the electron and the neutral particle would
His proof was very convincing and the neutral particle became known as the neutrino.
be equal to a constant and account for all conservation laws. He suggested that the
(2 marks)
particle was neutral, would have a tiny mass and would obey the exclusion principle.
His proof was very convincing and the neutral particle became known as the neutrino.
(2 marks)

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 335
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 239

9781741256451
9781741255782 Success One_Physics_2017.indd
SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb239335 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
8/12/14 3:41
CHAPTER 11 • 2010 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
CHAPTER 9 • 2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(e) (i)
(e) (i) Chadwick
Chadwickused usedthe
theconservation
conservationlaws lawsas as they
they were
were known
known at at that time and
that time and
considered conservation of mass-energy and conservation
considered conservation of mass-energy and conservation of momentum in of momentum in his
his
experimentaldesign.
experimental design.Chadwick
Chadwickaimed aimedaastream
streamof ofalpha
alphaparticles
particlesatataathin
thinsheet
sheetof
of beryllium.
beryllium. Within
Within the the beryllium,
beryllium, collisions
collisions of an
of an alpha
alpha particle
particle withwith a beryllium
a beryllium
nucleus
nucleusledledtotoaanuclear
nuclearreaction,
reaction,i.e. 4 9 12
i.e. He2 1 Be4 S C6 1 n0 . Chadwick1
Chadwickhad hadaa
very
verysensitive
sensitivedetector
detectorthat,
that,ininthe
thefirst
first part
partofof the
the experiment,
experiment, could not detect
any
anyradiation.
radiation.InInthethesecond
secondpart partofofthe
theexperiment
experimentChadwick
Chadwickintroduced
introducedaa block
block
ofofparaffin wax between the beryllium sheet and the detector.
paraffin wax between the beryllium sheet and the detector. He reasoned that, He reasoned that,
given
giventhe
theresults
resultsfrom
fromprevious
previousexperiments,
experiments, the the elusive neutral particle
elusive neutral he was
particle he was
seeking
seekingwould
wouldhavehaveaamass
massvery
veryclose
close toto aa proton
proton andand that
thatthe
theparaffin
paraffinwax,
wax, being
being a
a saturated hydrocarbon, would provide a rich source of protons. A collision
saturated hydrocarbon, would provide a rich source of protons. A collision between
between a neutron and positively charged hydrogen nucleus (proton) would be
a neutron and positively charged hydrogen nucleus (proton) would be almost
almost completely elastic and the hydrogen nucleus would be ejected from the
completely elastic and the hydrogen nucleus would be ejected from the paraffin
paraffin and go on to the detector, where its charge made it easy to detect and
and go on to the detector, where its charge made it easy to detect and measure.
measure. Chadwick used conservation of mass-energy to predict the kinetic energy
ofChadwick
the neutron used conservation
ejected from theofberyllium,
mass-energy usedto conservation
predict the kinetic energy ofto
of momentum the
neutron
predict theejected frombetween
collisions the beryllium,
neutrons used
andconservation
hydrogen nuclei, of momentum
and thento predict
measured
thefinal
the collisions
energybetween neutrons
of the protons and hydrogen
received nuclei, and
at the detector. then measured
Through use of thethe final
energy of the
conservation protons
laws received
and careful at the detector.
measurement andThrough
analysis use of the conservation
of results, Chadwick was
lawstoand
able careful
confirm themeasurement
existence of and analysis and
the neutron of results, Chadwick
determine was able(3tomarks)
its mass.
confirm the existence of the neutron and determine its mass. (3 marks)

(ii) The neutron makes an ideal tool for scattering experiments because it is neutral
(ii) The neutron makes an ideal tool for scattering experiments because it is neutral
and therefore is not affected by the electric fields of electrons or nuclei and is
and therefore is not affected by the electric fields of electrons or nuclei and is able
able to penetrate deeper into a sample than X-rays or electron beams. Because it
to penetrate deeper itinto
is relatively massive hasaasample thanshort
relatively X-rays or electron beams.
wavelength,which Because
means it canit is
relatively
resolve verymassive it has a relatively
small features short pass
and can easily wavelength,which means it canspaces
through the inter-atomic resolve
very small
within features
a lattice. It is and
goodcanforeasily pass through
exploring nuclear the inter-atomic
properties becausespaces within ais
the neutron
lattice. Itby
scattered is interactions
good for exploring nuclear
with nuclei properties
rather because It
than electrons. thecan
neutron
be used is scattered
to find
detail on the structure and composition of large molecules, e.g. proteins. The on the
by interactions with nuclei rather than electrons. It can be used to fi nd detail
neutron
structuredoes
andhave magneticofproperties
composition that make
large molecules, e.g.itproteins.
ideally suited to exploring
The neutron does have
atomic
magneticmagnetism.
properties It that
has many
make and variedsuited
it ideally applications, including
to exploring atomicinmagnetism.
medicine,
engineering,
It has many mining and research.
and varied applications, including in medicine, engineering, mining (2 marks)
and research. (2 marks)

(f) The stability of a particular nucleus is influenced by the nucleons that compose that
(f) The stability of a particular nucleus is influenced by the nucleons that compose that
nucleus and the ratio of protons to neutrons. In a stable nucleus the electrostatic
nucleus and the ratio of protons to neutrons. In a stable nucleus the electrostatic
repulsion between the positively charged protons is overcome by the attractive force
repulsion between the positively charged protons is overcome by the attractive force
created by residual strong interactions (previously known as the nuclear strong force)
created by residual strong interactions (previously known as the nuclear strong
that act to hold the nucleons together and keep the nucleus stable. Providing there are
force) that act
not too many to hold
protons in the nucleonsand
the nucleus, together and
there is ankeep the nucleus
appropriate ratio stable. Providing
of protons to
neutrons, the residual strong interactions are strong enough to maintain the nucleusofin a
there are not too many protons in the nucleus, and there is an appropriate ratio
protons
stable to Too
form. neutrons,
manythe residual
or too strong interactions
few neutrons compared toare strongleads
protons enough to maintain
to instability of the
nucleus
the in aFor
nucleus. stable form. Too
the smallest manythis
nuclei or ratio
too few neutrons1:1
is basically compared to number
but as the protons ofleads to
instability
protons of the the
increases, nucleus.
ratio For
alsothe smallest
increases nuclei
with more this ratio isthan
neutrons basically
protons1:1needed
but as the
to
create stability,
number e.g. the
of protons most stable
increases, nucleialso
the ratio have around with
increases 26 protons with about
more neutrons than protons
30 neutrons, while the largest stable nucleus has 83 protons with 126 neutrons.
needed to create stability, e.g. the most stable nuclei have around 26 protons with
about 30 neutrons, while the largest stable nucleus has 83 protons with 126 neutrons.

336
240 E x c e lS U
SUCC
CCE ES SS S O ON NE E HHS SCC •• PPHHYYSSI ICCSS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 240 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 336 8/12/14 3:41 PM
2010 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Nuclei with more than 83 protons are all radioactive (unstable), irrespective of the
number of neutrons present. (3 marks)
(g) Rutherford was the first to propose the nucleus as a feature of atoms and did ongoing
research into radioactivity and the structure of the nucleus. He was the first to record an
artificial nuclear transmutation when he noted that bombarding nitrogen with alpha
particles led to the production of hydrogen nuclei and a form of oxygen (O17). His
studies led him to suggest the neutron as a component of nuclei. Although Rutherford
did not directly contribute to the atomic bomb, he developed many fundamental ideas
and laid the foundation for an understanding of nuclear reactions and the properties of
nuclei.
Einstein unknowingly made his first contribution to the atomic bomb when he developed
his relationship E  mc2 and suggested the equivalence of mass and energy. With the
development of the nuclear model of the atom and the studies on nuclear properties and
reactions, this fundamental prediction by Einstein was able to explain the energy
involved in radioactivity and was ultimately to predict the possibility of having energy
released in a nuclear reaction and the potential for an atomic bomb. Einstein’s main
contribution came after the start of World War II when he was convinced by Leo Szilard
to sign a letter to be sent to US President Roosevelt to convince him of the need to
develop a nuclear weapon before Hitler’s Nazi regime did. This letter was to give rise to
the Manhattan Project,which was responsible for developing the first atomic bombs.
Fermi had long studied aspects of the nucleus and made many significant contributions to
atomic physics. When the Manhattan project began, Fermi was given the responsibility
of producing a nuclear reactor to produce a controlled fission reaction. This reactor was
fundamental to supplying the fuel needed for the first atomic bombs. The Manhattan
Project and the atomic bombs created as a result drew on the fundamental experimental
work of many scientists and were ultimately to have a dramatic effect on society.
Although the exploding of the bombs did lead to Japan surrendering and the end of
World War II, it also began a long period of worldwide tension as the arms race
developed and the world was put under the threat of an all-out nuclear war. Although
this threat has reduced, the potential for the use of nuclear weapons still causes a lot of
serious concern for many in society. (7 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 241

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 241 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 10

2011
H I G H E R S C H O O L C E R T I F I C AT E
E X A M I N AT I O N

Physics

Total marks – 100

General Instructions
Section I Pages 2–22
• Reading time – 5 minutes
• Working time – 3 hours 75 marks
• Write using black or blue pen This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
Black pen is preferred Part A – 20 marks
• Draw diagrams using pencil • Attempt Questions 1–20
• Board-approved calculators may • Allow about 35 minutes for this part
be used
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and Part B – 55 marks
Periodic Table are provided at • Attempt Questions 21–30
the back of this paper • Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part
• Write your Centre Number and
Student Number where
at the top of
required Section II Pages 23–30
pages 9, 13, 15, 19 and 21
25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

3430
242 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 242 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 What is the main cause of orbital decay of a satellite in low Earth orbit?

(A) Tidal effects of the Moon

(B) The Sun’s gravitational field
(C) Friction between the atmosphere and the satellite
(D) The interaction of the solar wind with the satellite

2 A 60 kg object has a weight of 240 N on the surface of Planet X.

What is the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Planet X?

(A) 0.25 m s–2

(B) 4 m s–2
(C) 250 m s–2
(D) 14 400 m s–2

3 Metals have a crystal lattice structure.

What part of the metal’s structure does the lattice represent?

(A) The number of Cooper pairs

(B) The location of the metal ions
(C) The position of the free electrons
(D) The energy gap below the conduction band

4 Why are insulators poor conductors of electricity?

(A) Insulators do not have a conduction band.

(B) The valence bands of insulators do not contain any electrons.
(C) Insulators have a large energy band gap and a full valence band.
(D) Insulators have a small energy band gap and a partly filled conduction band.

–2– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 243

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 243 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

5 Which law best applies to the operation of an electrical transformer?

(A) Conservation of Mass

(B) Conservation of Energy
(C) Conservation of Charge
(D) Conservation of Momentum

6 Why is the back emf induced in a motor greater when the motor is rotating faster?

(A) A larger current is induced.

(B) It takes a greater emf to spin the motor.
(C) The rate of change of magnetic flux is greater.
(D) More magnetic field lines are being cut per rotation.

7 Two parallel plates are 2 mm apart and have a potential difference of 100 V between
them. An electron is placed halfway between the plates.

What is the magnitude of the force on the electron?

(A) 8.0 × 10–18 N

(B) 1.6 × 10–17 N
(C) 8.0 × 10–15 N
(D) 1.6 × 10–14 N

8 A rocket is launched. Its engine produces a constant thrust for the first 10 seconds and is
then switched off.

Which graph best illustrates the g-force experienced by an astronaut in the rocket?

(A) (B)
g-force

g-force

0 0
0 5 10 time(s) 0 5 10 time(s)

g-force

0 0
0 5 10 time(s) 0 5 10 time(s)

244 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 3–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 244 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

9 The diagram shows a stationary spacecraft next to a building, as seen by an observer

across the street.

A short time later the spacecraft is observed to be travelling vertically upwards at 0.8c,
relative to the building.

Which diagram best represents the appearance of the moving spacecraft, as seen by the
observer?

(A) (B)

10 A student performed an experiment using two identical metal rods connected to a power
supply. Rod A was placed at different distances from Rod B, and the measurements on
the electronic balance were recorded.

Rod A
Rod B

Electronic balance

Which is the independent variable?

(A) The length of the rods

(B) The current in Rod A
(C) The mass recorded on the balance
(D) The distance between the two rods

–4– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 245

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 245 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

11 A student set up the equipment shown to carry out a first-hand investigation.

Magnet

Galvanometer

Coil

What was the student investigating?

(A) Gravity
(B) The motor effect
(C) Magnetic levitation
(D) Electromagnetic induction

12 The diagram represents a DC electric motor.

Key
Iron core
Conducting wire
X Y Split-ring commutator

Brush
+
Axis of rotation

What is the polarity of the magnetic pole at X, and the direction of the motion of wire Y?

Polarity of magnetic pole at X Direction of motion of wire Y

(A) South Into the page
(B) South Out of the page
(C) North Into the page
(D) North Out of the page

246 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 5–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 246 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

13 A sample of pure silicon is doped with arsenic.

How does the electrical conductivity of the doped silicon change, and for what reason?

Change in Reason
electrical conductivity
(A) Increases Increased number of free electrons
(B) Increases Increased number of holes
(C) Decreases Decreased number of free electrons
(D) Decreases Decreased number of holes

14 A heavy copper split ring is attached by a light insulating rod to a pivot to form a
pendulum. A region of uniform magnetic field B is present as shown. As the pendulum
swings from Position 1 to Position 2, the induced emf in the ring is measured between
points X and Y.

Pivot

Position 1 Position 2

X Y
Y X

Which graph best represents the measured emf during the time that the pendulum swings
from Position 1 to Position 2?
emf

(A) t
emf

(B) t
emf

emf

–6– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 247

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 247 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

15 A marble rolls off a 1.0 m high horizontal table with an initial velocity of 4.0 m s–1.

How long will it take the marble to hit the floor?

(A) 0.20 s
(B) 0.25 s
(C) 0.45 s
(D) 3.20 s

16 A satellite is orbiting a planet at a constant speed.

Which of the following statements is correct?

(A) The satellite is not accelerating.

(B) The orbit of the satellite has a fixed radius.
(C) Fuel must be used to supply a constant thrust to the satellite.
(D) The centripetal force on the satellite is balanced by the gravitational force.

17 When photons with energy E strike a metal surface, electrons may be emitted.

The maximum kinetic energy (Ek) of the electrons is given by Ek = E − W where W is a

constant for the metal.

Which of the following graphs shows the relationship between the maximum kinetic
energy of these electrons (Ek) and the wavelength of the photons (λ)?

(A) Ek (B) Ek

l l

248 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 7–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 248 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

18 An electric motor is constructed using a square coil and a uniform magnetic field of
strength 0.45 T. The coil has 3 turns and sides of 10 cm. A current of 0.5 A flows through
the coil.

What is the maximum torque experienced by the coil as it rotates?

(A) 2.25 × 10–3 N m

(B) 6.75 × 10–3 N m
(C) 22.5 Nm
(D) 67.5 Nm

19 An electron, e, travelling with a velocity, v, passes through an electric field, E, between

two parallel plates.

E
e
v

What is the direction of the force that this electric field exerts on the electron?

(A) ↑
(B) 
(C) 
(D) ↓

20 A satellite, initially in a low Earth orbit, is moved to a new orbit where its gravitational
potential energy is half its initial value.

What is the gravitational force experienced by the satellite in its new orbit?

(A) Half the initial force

(B) Twice the initial force
(C) Four times the initial force
(D) One quarter the initial force

–8– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 249

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 249 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2011 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 55 marks
Attempt Questions 21–30 Student Number
Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part

Answer the questions in the spaces provided. These spaces provide guidance for the expected
length of response.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 21 (5 marks)

The electrical resistance, R, of a piece of wire was measured at different temperatures, T.

Near room temperature, the resistance of the wire can be modelled by the equation
R = mT + b.

Temperature (°C) Resistance (ohms)

12 0.122
16 0.125
32 Please turn over0.129
36 0.131

0.131
0.130
0.129
Resistance (ohms)

0.128
0.127
0.126
0.125
0.124
0.123
0.122
0.121
0.120
8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
Temperature (°C)

(a) Plot the TWO remaining data points on the graph provided. Draw a line of best 3
fit on the graph and use it to estimate the electrical resistance of the wire at 24°C.

...............................................................................................................................

3431 (b)
250 Assess Sthe
U C Cvalidity
E S S O N EofH Susing
C • P the C S – from
H Y S Idata 9 – this experiment to estimate the 2
electrical resistance at –100°C.
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

...............................................................................................................................
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 250 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

...............................................................................................................................
0.123
0.122
0.121
0.120
8 12 16 20 24S C
2011 H E X28
A M I N A T32
I O N P36
APER • QUESTIONS

Temperature (°C)

(a) Plot the TWO remaining data points on the graph provided. Draw a line of best 3
fit on the graph and use it to estimate the electrical resistance of the wire at 24°C.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Assess the validity of using the data from this experiment to estimate the 2
electrical resistance at –100°C.

– 10 –

End of Question 21

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 251

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 251 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 22 (5 marks)

(a) What was the purpose of the experiment that Michelson and Morley conducted 1
in 1887?
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

(b) Draw a labelled diagram that outlines how the experiment was performed. 4

252 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 11 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 252 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2011 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 23 (7 marks)

A rocket launches a satellite into an orbit 350 km above Earth’s surface. The weight
of the satellite is 14.0 kN at launch, and is 12.6 kN when in orbit.
(Radius of Earth = 6380 km, mass of Earth = 5.97 × 1024 kg)

(a) Why does the weight of the satellite change? 1

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Calculate the orbital velocity of this satellite. 2

(c) Explain TWO effects that a reduction in altitude would have on the motion of 4
this satellite.
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

3432 – 13 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 253

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 253 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 24 (4 marks)

Consider the following ‘thought experiment’. 4

A scientist on board a spaceship wishes to synchronise two clocks. To achieve this,
beams of light from a source placed midway between the clocks activate photocells,
turning on both clocks.

A B
0.95c
d d

The scientist observes the synchronisation of the clocks as the rocket flies past Earth
at 0.95c. A person on Earth observes that the clocks are not synchronised. Account for
these observations.

.........................................................................................................................................

254 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 14 –

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 254 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2011 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 25 (4 marks)

Identical magnets A and B are suspended above vertical copper tubes as shown in the 4
diagram.

Magnet A Magnet B
N N
S S

Copper tube Slotted

copper tube

The magnets are dropped at the same time. Each magnet falls straight through its tube
without touching the tube walls.

Which magnet leaves its tube first and why?

3433 – 15 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 255

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 255 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 26 (9 marks)

(a) Use a flowchart to show how electrical energy is transferred from a power 3
station to its point of use.

Question 26 continues on page 17

Question 26 continues

256 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 16 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 256 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (continued)

(b) Discuss the effects on the environment of the development of AC generators. 6

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 26

– 17 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 257

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 257 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2011 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 27 (4 marks)

A single turn coil is positioned in a region of uniform magnetic field with a strength
of 0.2 T. The plane of the coil is at 45° to the magnetic field. The coil is a square with
5 cm sides, and carries a current of 10.0 A.

45° D

(a) Calculate the magnitude of the force on side AB. 2

(b) Explain why the net force produced by the magnetic field on the coil is zero. 2

3434 258 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 19 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 258 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 28 (6 marks)

(a) How could a student test the hypothesis that cathode rays are streams of 3
particles? In your answer refer to the results that would be observed.
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(b) How is an electron beam produced in an electron gun? 3

...............................................................................................................................

– 20 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 259

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 259 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2011 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 29 (5 marks)

(a) Calculate the number of photons, λ = 450 nm, which are required to transfer 3
1.0 × 10−3 J of energy.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) A 1 W beam of light transfers 1 J per second from one point to another. 2

With reference to the particle model of light, contrast a 1 W beam of red light
and a 1 W beam of blue light.

3435 260 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 21 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 260 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 30 (6 marks)

The graph shows the relationship between the resistance of a metal alloy sample and
its temperature.

Resistance (ohms)

0
0 18 60 T (K)

(a) Why is the resistance of the sample higher at 60 K than at 30 K? 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Use BCS theory to explain why the resistance of the sample is zero at temperatures 4
below 18 K.
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

– 22 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 261

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 261 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2011 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer the parts of the question as indicated in Section II Answer Booklet 1 and Section II
Answer Booklet 2.
Extra writing booklets are available.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Pages

Question 31 (Not included in this reproduction)

Geophysics ................................................................................. 24

Question 32 Medical Physics ................................................................... 25–26

Question 33 Astrophysics ............................................................................... 27

Question 34 From Quanta to Quarks ............................................................. 28

Question 35 (Not included in this reproduction)

The Age of Silicon ............................................................... 29–30

3436 262 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 23 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 262 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 32 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(b) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

An ultrasound probe fires a pulse of ultrasound into the abdomen as shown in the
diagram.

Soft tissue
Wall of abdomen
Muscle tissue
Ultrasound probe

Bone

X Y

Analysis of the reflected sound produced the following scan.

Y
Signal X
strength

Time

(a) (i) Identify the type of scan and the information that can be obtained from it. 2

(ii) The peaks X and Y correspond to the ultrasound reflected from the muscle 2
tissue and bone respectively. Explain why the signal strength at Y is
greater than at X.

(iii) The acoustic impedance of the abdomen wall adjacent to the muscle is 3
1.56 × 106 kg m−2 s−1. If muscle tissue has a density of 1.04 × 103 kg m–3
and an acoustic velocity of 1580 m s−1, calculate the percentage of the
incident ultrasound pulse that is reflected at boundary X.

Question 32 continues
Question 32 continues on page 26

– 25 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 263

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 263 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 32 (continued)

(b) (i) Explain how X-rays are produced in an X-ray tube. 3

(ii) The photographs A and B show scans of the same part of the body. 3

A B

Compare the information provided by the two scans.

Answer parts (c)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(d) With reference to coherent and incoherent bundles of fibres, explain how an 3
endoscope is used to observe internal organs.

(e) An increased understanding of the properties of radioactive isotopes has been 6

important in the development of medical technologies used to analyse bodily
processes.

Justify this statement.

End of Question 32

264 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 26 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 264 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 33 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(b) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) (i) Using a diagram, define the term parsec. 2

(ii) Why was the resolution of Galileo’s telescope more important for his 3
observations than its sensitivity?

(iii) Describe ONE technology that has improved the resolution of 2

telescopes.

(b) Hertzsprung-Russell Diagram

for the Pleiades Cluster
–4

–2 W
Absolute magnitude

6 Z

–0.5 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0

Blue Red
B–V

(i) Compare the nuclear processes in a star found at W to a star found at Z 3

on the Hertzsprung-Russell diagram.

(ii) In 2008, the distance to the Pleiades cluster was determined as 135 pc. 2
Calculate the apparent magnitude of a star at W .

(iii) Calculate the relative brightness of a star found at W to a star found 2

at Z .

Answer parts (c)–(d) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(c) Using a Cepheid and one other named example, explain the difference between 4
intrinsic and extrinsic variable stars.

(d) Spectroscopy is an important tool in obtaining information about stars, but it is 7

a much more powerful tool when combined with photometry.

Justify this statement.

– 27 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 265

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 265 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(c) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) Name a radioisotope used in agriculture and describe its use. 2

(b) (i) Explain how the reaction rate in a nuclear reactor can be increased or 4
decreased.

235 1 140 92
(ii) 92
U + 0
n → 56
Ba + 36
Kr + 4 10 n 2

Explain why energy is released in this reaction.

Forces in atomic nucleus

Gravitational Electrostatic Strong

Strength Low

Direction Attractive

Range Infinite

Answer parts (d)–(g) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(d) A cricket ball has a mass of 156 g and a velocity of 20 m s−1. Calculate its 2
de Broglie wavelength.

(e) Identify the types and number of quarks and leptons in a tritium (31H) atom. 2

(f) Outline the main contributions of Heisenberg and Pauli to the development of 4
atomic theory.

(g) Mathematical models, validated by experimental evidence, have improved our 6

understanding of the atom.

Justify this statement, focusing on the models developed by Bohr and de Broglie.

End of paper

© Board of Studies NSW 2011

266 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

– 28 –
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 266 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2011 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A (Total 20 marks)

1 C The atmospheric gases create drag on satellites in LEO, causing orbital decay.
Remnant atmospheric gases persist to an altitude of nearly 1000 km.

2 B Weight  mass  gravity; therefore, 240  60 g, i.e. g  4 m s–2

3 B Metal nuclei (ions) are arranged into a regular crystal lattice. This is a characteristic
of metal elements.

4 C Insulators tend to have all their valence electrons involved in bonding and have a
large energy gap that is required to be overcome to reach the conduction zone.

5 B A transformer relies on conservation of energy where the energy input to the

primary coil is transformed to give energy in the secondary coil at a new voltage.

6 C The faster the coil rotates, the more rapidly the coils of the motor cut magnetic flux
and, by Lenz’s law, the greater the induced emf and current to create a magnetic
field opposing the motion, i.e. a back-emf.

7 C F  qE and V  Ed. Therefore 100  E  2  10–3, E  5  104 N C–1; therefore,

F  –1.6  10–19  5  104  8.0  10–15 N.

8 A Astronauts experience 1g before launch. As the rocket rises, total mass reduces and
acceleration increases. As thrust is constant, the g-force rises at an increasing rate
till it shuts down. Once the engine shuts down the g-force experienced is zero, i.e.
the astronauts are in free fall with the rocket.

9 B The length of the space craft will be contracted in the direction of the rocket’s
vertical velocity but its horizontal dimensions will be the same.

10 D The independent variable is the one the students chose to change, i.e. the distance
between the rods.

11 D The magnet moving into a coil will induce a voltage that can be observed on the
voltmeter, i.e. it demonstrates electromagnetic induction where a moving magnet
induces a voltage in a conductor.

12 A Using conventional current from the positive terminal, X must be a South pole and
the direction of current flow at Y is down the page. This results in an interaction of
the magnetic fields, producing a force on the wire Y acting into the page.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 267

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 267 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

13 A Arsenic from Gp5 in the Periodic Table will have an unbound electron in the silicon
lattice. This will lead to an increase in conductivity due to the increased number of
free electrons created by arsenic, i.e. it will be an n-type semiconductor.

14 A As the side Y enters the magnetic field a voltage will be induced. As X enters it will
also produce an equal voltage, as it is moving through the field in the same
direction. This leads to NO difference in voltage between X and Y while they are
both within the field. As they leave the field on the other side, a voltage is again
induced but in the opposite direction to the original voltage as the pendulum
entered the field. Graph A shows this.
1
15 C Since h  1.0 m and uv  0 m s–1, then 1.0  2 gt2; therefore, t  0.45 s.

16 B If the speed is not changing as it orbits, then the satellite is under a constant
centripetal force and will orbit in a circle at a fixed radius.
c c
17 B E  hf and f  λ ; therefore, E  h . This suggests the photon energy is
λ
1
inversely proportional to its wavelength, i.e. E   . The kinetic energy of the
λ
emitted photoelectrons will reduce to zero when the frequency of the photon is
below the threshold frequency, i.e. when its wavelength is too long. This means a
graph of Energy versus wavelength will be hyperbolic in shape but intersect the
Energy axis when λ is too long.

18 B The maximum torque is given by   n B I A

 3  0.45  0.5  (0.1  0.1)
 6.75  10–3 Nm.

19 D
The electron will be attracted to the positive plate in the opposite direction to the
electric field lines, i.e. vertically down.
m 1m 2 m 1m 2
20 D EP is halved; therefore, r must be doubled, i.e. EP  –G . Now Fg  G .
1 1 r r
 if r is doubled, then Fg will be 22  4 the original force.

268 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 268 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Section I, Part B

(Note: in order to provide a clear explanation for students some answers are longer than
would be required for an answer.)

Question 21

(a)
0.131
0.130
0.129
0.128
Resistance (ohms)

0.127
0.126
0.125
0.124
0.123
0.122
0.121
0.120
8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
Temperature (°C)

Based on the line of best fit, the resistance at 24oC is  0.1267 ohms (between 0.126
and 0.127 ).
(3 marks)

(b) The theory suggests that ‘near room temperature’ the resistance can be modelled using
R  mT  b. Minus 100°C is well below room temperature and well below the data
collected in the experiment. To extrapolate the data to –100°C is unlikely to yield a
valid answer as, even if the trend is maintained, the variation in the experimental
results from the line of best fit shows there is some experimental error. Given this, it is
not really valid to extrapolate these results to –100°C. (2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 269

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 269 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CC HH AA PP TT EE RR 11 02 • 2 00 11 11 HH SS CC EE XX AAM
• 2 MIINNAATTIIOONN PPAAPPEERR

Question 22

(a) The experiment was carried out in an attempt to detect an ‘aether wind’ and confirm
the existence of the ‘aether’, proposed as a medium to allow light waves to propagate
through free space. (1 mark)

(b) Mirror Y The whole apparatus could be

rotated on the circular base to look
for any changes in the appearance
of the interference pattern.

Path Y

Light from mirrors X

and Y recombine to
produce interference
pattern at detector.
Path X

Mirror X Detector where

Half-silvered mirror splits
interference
light beam along two
pattern forms
perpendicular paths to
mirrors X and Y.

Light source

Any changes in the appearance of the interference pattern would

indicate an ‘aether wind’ and confirm the existence of the aether.
(4 marks)

Question 23

(a) The weight change is due to reduced gravity at the increased distance from the centre
mE
of Earth, i.e. Weight = mg, and, g = G 2 . (1 mark)
r
(b) The gravitational force acting on a satellite in a stable circular orbit is equal to the
required centripetal force to maintain the orbit at that radius, i.e.
msv2 GmsmE GmE 6.67 3 10 211 3 5.97 3 1024
F c = Fg ∴ = ∴ v = = = 7692 m s21
r r2 Å r Å 1 6.380 1 0.350 2 3 106
The orbital velocity of the satellite is 7690 m s21 = 7.69 km s21. (2 marks)

270
366 E x c e l SS UU CC CC EE SS SS O
ONN EE H
H SS CC •• PP HH YY SS II CC SS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 270 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 366 8/12/14 3:41 PM
2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

1. As the distance to Earth is reduced, gravitational potential energy is lost and this
will be converted to kinetic energy with the satellite increasing its speed.

r3 GmE
2. Based on Kepler’s Law of Periods, i.e. 2  , as the satellite reduces its
T 4π2
orbital radius the period of the orbit will also be reduced. (4 marks)

Question 24

These observations are produced due to the Relativity of Simultaneity. Based on Einstein’s
Special Theory of Relativity, the speed of light is always the same value irrespective of the
frame of reference where it is measured, and simultaneous events in one frame of reference
may not be simultaneous when observed from a different frame of reference. The scientist and
the observer are in different inertial frames of reference. The scientist onboard the spacecraft
is moving at 0.95c relative to the observer on Earth but is at rest relative to the light source
and the clocks. In their frame of reference the distance from the light source to each clock is
exactly the same. This explains the scientist’s observation of the clocks being triggered
simultaneously. For the observer on Earth, in a different frame of reference where the
spacecraft is moving at 0.95c relative to them, the result is different because they will observe
the light reaching clock A first as, relative to the observer, clock A is moving at 0.95c towards
the position of the light source where it originally emitted the light. The observer sees clock
B being triggered slightly after A because, from their frame of reference, clock B is moving
at 0.95c away from the original position of the light source where it produced the light. This
explains the observer in a stationary frame of reference on Earth recording that the starting of
the clocks was NOT simultaneous and reporting clock A started before B. (4 marks)

Question 25

Magnet B leaves its tube first because it has experienced less opposition as it fell. The
moving magnets produce a changing magnetic field that affects the conductor and induces a
voltage in the copper tubes. By Lenz’s law, this induced voltage will produce a current that
flows in a direction to create a magnetic field to oppose the change that created it,
i.e. opposing the falling magnet. With no slots the induced currents can flow right around the
solid tube, allowing the current to become larger than that in the slotted tube. This produces a
stronger magnetic field to oppose the motion of the magnet falling through the tube. In the
slotted tube the induced currents cannot be as large because the slots prevent the current from
flowing sideways around the tube. As such, the magnetic field created to oppose the motion
of the moving magnet is smaller in the slotted tube, allowing magnet B to fall more quickly
than magnet A. (4 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 271

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 271 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 26

(a)
Power source provides STEP UP
AC generator
transformer
energy to operate (3 marks)
generator, e.g. coal,
dam for hydro, nuclear.
High voltage transmission
Industry wires to transfer energy
long distances

Domestic STEP DOWN STEP DOWN

consumers transformer transformer

(b) The development of the AC generator has had a significant effect on the environment.
In the initial stages of its widespread use the AC generator can be said to have had a
beneficial effect on the environment as the rate of deforestation reduced slightly as
people slowed their harvesting of wood (trees) for cooking, heating, and to act as a
source of energy. As time has progressed and the AC generator has become a more or
less essential feature of modern human communities they have had a significant
negative effect on the environment. Environmental damage results as resources are
mined to provide the energy required to run bigger and bigger generators, which in turn
results in increasing amounts of damaging pollution. Huge dams have been built to
allow AC generators to produce hydroelectricity and this has also had a significant
negative environmental impact. The associated infrastructure of towers, poles and wires
used to transport the power produced by the generators to consumers has also had a
negative impact on the environment. Overall the development of the AC generator has
resulted in a negative environmental impact. (6 marks)

Question 27

(a) Magnitude of force acting on side AB  FAB  B I l  0.2  10.0  0.05  0.10 N.
(2 marks)
(b) Considering the 10 A current runs around the coil, it is travelling in opposite directions
on the opposite sides, i.e. AB and DC, AD and BC. This means the magnetic force acting
on the opposite sides will be equal and opposite, giving a resultant translational force of
zero, i.e. FAB  –FDC and FAD  –FBC. (2 marks)

Question 28
(a) Because cathode ray particles have a negative charge they will have their path deflected
by an electric or magnetic field. If they were waves, their path would not be deflected.
The student could test the hypothesis by bringing the pole of a bar magnet in
perpendicular to the path of a beam of cathode rays and observing the results.

272 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 272 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

The magnetic force, Fmag  Bqv, produces a centripetal force on moving charged
mv2
particles, i.e. Fc  r . To confirm the hypothesis that cathode rays have mass, the
student would observe the straight beam of cathode rays being deflected into a curve
when they bring the magnet pole near to the beam. (3 marks)
(b) The electron beam is produced by thermionic emission of electrons from a heated
filament at the cathode. The beam is accelerated from the cathode towards the anode as
a result of the high potential difference between cathode and anode. The beam is
focused and collimated as it travels through the anodes and emerges as a focused beam
of electrons. (3 marks)
Question 29
Energy of a single photon is given by
(a)
hc –34
3  108
E  hf  E   6.626  10   4.417  10–19 joules per photon.
λ 4.5  10–7
(3 marks)
Now, ETotal  n(Ephoton)  1.0  10–3 J
1.0 10–3
∴ n   2.264  1015 photons per mJ.
4.417  10–19
(b) A photon represents a particle of light carrying a quantum of light energy related to its
frequency. Red light is lower frequency, longer wavelength than blue light. As E  hf,
the energy carried per red photon is less than the energy carried per blue photon. This
means that in order to transfer 1.0 W (1 J.s21) in a beam of red light, it would have to
contain more red photons per second than would be required to transfer the same amount
of energy per second using a beam of blue photons. 1 W equals 1 J per second  the
number of photons arriving per second, each with an energy, Ephoton and Ered  Eblue.
(3 marks)
Question 30

(a) The reason the metal alloy sample has a higher resistance at 60 K than at 30 K is that the
temperature is a direct indication of the average internal kinetic energy of the atoms making
the metal alloy. The higher the temperature, the quicker and further the particles move as
they vibrate. The more energetic the vibrations of the particles within the metal alloy, the
more difficult it is for electrons to move through the lattice of nuclei as a current, i.e. the
resistance at 60 K is more than at 30 K because of increased interactions of the electrons
in a current with the nuclei of the atoms at the higher temperature. (2 marks)
(b) Below 18 K the metal alloy has become a superconductor. The internal vibrations of
the nuclei of the metal alloy at this very low temperature are reduced to the point where
an electron moving through the lattice of positive nuclei can cause a temporary
distortion of the lattice, producing a positive region that attracts in a second electron
that becomes associated with the first electron to form a Cooper pair. This Cooper pair
of electrons is then able to drift through the lattice of positive nuclei with no resistance,
i.e. the alloy has become a superconductor and will exhibit perfect diamagnetism and
offer no electrical resistance. (4 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 273

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 273 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section II—Options

Question 32 — Medical Physics

(a) (i) The scan is an A (amplitude) scan. The time between peaks can be used to calculate
distances within the body. This is useful in measuring the size of features within
the body. For example, A scans are particularly useful in measuring distances in
the eye. Information about the acoustic impedance of various tissues can also be
determined from the amplitudes of the peaks. (2 marks)

(ii) The proportion of reflected ultrasound from a boundary between tissues is given
Ir [z2 – z1]2
by the formula  . Hence there will be more reflection from a
Io [z2 + z1]2
boundary at which there is a greater difference in the acoustic impedances of the
tissues. Since there is a larger difference in acoustic impedance between bone and
soft tissue, at Y, than there is between the two soft tissues at X, the peak at Y
representing the intensity of the reflected ultrasound will be greater than that at X.
(2 marks)
(iii) z  .v
Acoustic impedance of muscle z  1.04  103  1580  1.64  106
Ir [z2 – z1]2 [1.64 – 1.56]2
 = = 6.25  10–4
Io [z2 + z1]2 [1.64 + 1.56]2
Percentage of reflected ultrasound at the muscle interface (boundary X)
 6.25  10–4  100
 6.25  10–2% (3 marks)
(b) (i) Electrons are accelerated to great speeds by an electric field as they move from
the cathode to the anode in an evacuated chamber (see labelled diagram).
When the fast cathode ray electrons collide with the anode, they can cause heat to
be produced (most of the electrons do this) and they can produce X-rays.
Characteristic X-rays are produced when lowest level electrons, in atoms of the
anode, are dislodged by the cathode ray electrons, and other electrons from
higher levels within the atoms ‘fall in’ to take their place, emitting energy in the
form of X-rays. (These are the spikes on the graph below.)
Some of the electrons in the cathode beam undergo acceleration/change in direction
or slowing down when they reach the anode. Accelerating charges produce EMR.
The X-rays produced when the cathode ray electrons slow down rapidly are
called Bremsstrahlung (or braking) X-radiation. Since the electrons in the cathode
beam slow down at various rates, a broad spectrum of X-rays is produced (see
the graph below). (3 marks)

274 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 274 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

X-ray tube
Variable high-voltage

Tungsten anode

Evacuated
tube

Cathode
(heated)
Protective Cathode beam
shielding X-rays (electrons)

Characteristic
Intensity X-rays
of X-rays

Bremsstrahlung
radiation

Frequency of X-rays

(3 marks)
(ii) Scan A—X-ray B—CAT scan
Both show the same Scan A is a front-on X-ray Scan B is a cross-section
section of the body; shadow image of the of the upper torso
however, the views upper torso showing showing the structure of
are different. several ribs, some of the the lungs, ribs, spine and
spine and the right and heart.
left lungs. A faint shadow
of the heart can also
be seen.
The quality of the Poor quality image— Excellent quality image—
images is different. shadow image does not higher resolution allows
show fine detail. fine details to be visible.
The detail varies Shows most of the lungs Shows internal structure
considerably. and ribs—a whole view. of a single slice of the
Only the shape of the lungs, chambers of the
lungs is apparent. heart, cross-section of the
spine, etc.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 275

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 275 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(c) Brain tumours have a greater amount of water and higher blood flow than surrounding
brain tissue. The higher water content also means that there is a greater amount of
hydrogen. MRI involves the detection of changes in the precession of hydrogen nuclei
after a pulse of radio waves is administered to a patient in a strong magnetic field. A
greater number of hydrogen nuclei in a tumour produces an increase in the relaxation
time (T1 and T2), and hence the computer software analysing the signals detected by
the receiving coils assigns a different greyscale to the voxels containing the tumour
than it does for the surrounding brain tissue. Thus without any invasive processes the
tumour can be readily identified on the image. Not only can MRI detect the tumour,
unlike positron emission tomography MRI does not involve the use of ionising
radiation. This enhances the effectiveness of MRI as a diagnostic tool because it is also
a very safe way to image the sensitive tissues of the brain. (2 marks)

(d) An endoscope has a long, thin tube containing optical fibre bundles. The tube is
inserted into a patient’s body through small holes in the skin, so that organs etc. can be
viewed. Incoherent bundles of optical fibres are not in any particular order (see
diagram below). In an endoscope, these are used to direct light, via total internal
reflection, into the body, to illuminate the organs to be viewed. Endoscopes have an
eyepiece (or camera) at which light from within the body that is reflected along a
coherent bundle of optical fibres can be viewed. Each of the tiny fibres in the coherent
bundle transmits a small fraction of the image of the internal organ being viewed. For
this reason, the fibres in a coherent bundle must be in the same relative positions at
both ends (see diagram below). If this were not the case, the image would be
scrambled.
Image out

1 1 1 2
2 2 2 3 Light in
3 3 3 1
Coherent Incoherent

(3 marks)
(e) Radioactive isotopes have been, and are becoming, more important in the analysis of
bodily processes. This has been evident from the use of isotopes such as
technetium‑99m as a gamma emitter as well as various positron emitting isotopes,
including fluorine-18, carbon-11 and iodine-121.
Scientists have become aware that a nucleus that has an overabundance of neutrons is
unstable and undergoes radioactive decay, by emitting alpha, beta or gamma radiation.
This understanding has been used to manufacture the gamma emitting radioisotopes
such as Tc-99m. Tc-99m is derived from molybdenum-99, which is produced by
bombarding non-radioactive molybdenum with neutrons from a nuclear reactor. In
Australia Mo-99 is produced at Lucas Heights, placed in lead lined containers and
distributed to hospitals all over the country. The Mo-99 has a half-life of about
60 hours and decays by beta emission to the meta-stable Tc-99m. Hence the container

276 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 276 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

provides a useful source of Tc-99m for about a week. Tc-99m decays to stable Tc-99 by
emitting gamma radiation. The half-life of Tc-99m is about 6 hours. The container is
designed so that the space containing the radioactive isotopes can be flushed with
saline solution. Technetium salts are soluble and so, as the saline is extracted from the
container, it carries with it some of the technetium. The technetium can be tagged to a
substance that is readily absorbed by particular organs in the body, and when injected
into a patient the compound containing the Tc-99m is absorbed by the target organ.
Gamma from the decaying Tc-99m is highly penetrating and travels out of the body
and is detected with a gamma camera. The data from the camera can be used to make
functional images of the target organ and is used to make diagnoses about the target
organ. Bone cancers are often detected in this manner.
More recently it has become possible to produce positron emitting radioisotopes by
bombarding atoms with high speed protons and alpha particles. These high speed
particles are produced using cyclotrons. The resulting nuclei have an overabundance of
protons and their instability leads to radioactive decay by positron emission. Cyclotrons
located in hospitals are used to produce very short half-life positron emitting isotopes
for special uses, for example, the production of fluorine-18, which has a half-life of
about 100 minutes, by the bombardment of oxygen-18 with protons. The F-18 is tagged
to glucose, producing the radiopharmaceutical called fluoro-deoxy-glucose (FDG). In
the bloodstream FDG behaves like normal glucose and is, for example, readily taken
up by functioning brain cells (and more readily by cancer cells). When the F-18 decays
it emits a positron. The positron is the antimatter equivalent of an electron and so when
it meets an electron from a nearby atom, the positron and electron annihilate, producing
two gamma photons that travel in opposite directions. The two gamma photons are
detected by a special circular gamma camera. By using powerful computer software,
the location of millions of these annihilations can be plotted to produce a functional
image of the brain. Such images have been used to diagnose brain tumours,
schizophrenia, Parkinson’s disease and many other illnesses. C-11 tagged to oxygen to
make radioactive carbon dioxide assists in the diagnoses of lung function and blood
circulation, and iodine-121 tagged to sodium is selectively absorbed by the thyroid and
is useful in detecting normal and abnormal function of the thyroid. There is a growing
number of radioisotopes produced and used for specific diagnostic purposes.
Nowadays, positron emission tomography is often coupled with a CAT scan (producing
excellent structural images using X-rays) to overlay the functional information from the
PET scan on a high quality structural image. Together, these provide excellent
diagnostic capability.
Hence, as the understanding of the properties of radioactive isotopes increases and the
technology for their production improves, more people have access to functional
diagnoses and thus can have their illnesses more effectively diagnosed, leading to more
specific and timely treatment. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 277

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 277 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 33 — Astrophysics
(a) (i) Earth

1 parsec

1 AU 1"
Sun

One parsec is defined to be the distance away from Earth of an object such that
the average orbital radius of the Earth around the Sun (i.e. 1 AU) subtends an
angle of 1 arcsec. (2 marks)
(ii) The sensitivity of a telescope is defined to be its light-collecting ability. Its
resolution may best be defined as its ability to distinguish between two objects
that are very close together. The objective lens of Galileo’s telescope improved
both sensitivity and resolution compared to human eyes; however, he was
examining objects within our solar system that had already been identified
visually, so there was little significance in their appearing brighter. Its
improvement in resolution, however, allowed Galileo to observe mountains and
craters on the Moon, four of Jupiter’s moons, the phases of Venus and sunspots,
all of which changed humanity’s understanding of the heavens. (3 marks)
(iii) Any technology that increases the baseline length of the objective mirror of a
telescope will therefore improve its resolution. One major example of this is by
the use of interferometry, where two or more objectives (usually mirrors) that are
separated from one another each collect data from the same source. This data is
combined by a computer to form an image with greater detail than the separate
images, since resolution is proportional to the distance apart of those mirrors.
(2 marks)
(b) (i) Both stars, W and Z, lie on the main sequence. They are both in the Pleiades open
cluster, and therefore are effectively the same age and are the same distance away
as each other. Since they are both main sequence stars they are both fusing four
hydrogen nuclei (protons) to form a helium nucleus (-particle), releasing a great
deal of energy in the process. However, since their spectral classes are very
different (W is a B-type and Z is a G-type, like the Sun) their masses are also
different. In order for each star to maintain its stability they fuse their hydrogen at
a different rate, which means the actual process they use is different. In more
massive stars like W the CNO cycle predominates, but the proton-proton chain is
the main reaction in less massive stars like Z. (3 marks)

278 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 278 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS
2011 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(ii) Reading from the given H-R diagram, the absolute magnitude of star W is around
22. The distance of the Pleiades cluster is given to be 135 parsecs (i.e. d = 135 pc).
d 135
Since M 5 m 2 5 log10 a b 6 22 5 m 2 5 log10 a b 6 m 5 3.65 (2 marks)
10 10

(iii) Reading from the given H-R diagram the absolute magnitude of star Z is
around 16.
IW MZ 2 MW IW 6 2 22
Since 5 100a b6 5 100a b 5 1001.6 5 1585 times.
IZ 5 IZ 5
(2 marks)

(c) Intrinsic variable stars are those that, when observed from Earth, have a brightness, or
(c) Intrinsic variable stars are those that, when observed from Earth, have a brightness,
luminosity, that varies due to some internal process of the star itself. A Cepheid is an
or luminosity, that varies due to some internal process of the star itself. A Cepheid is
intrinsic variable because an internal instability causes the outward flow of heat and
an intrinsic variable because an internal instability causes the outward flow of heat
light to vary at a constant rate, causing the star to change its volume, surface temperature
and light to vary at a constant rate, causing the star to change its volume, surface
and colour periodically, with a time period of between one and 100 days.
temperature and colour periodically, with a time period of between one and 100 days.
Extrinsic variables are also observed from Earth to vary in brightness, but in this case
Extrinsic
the changevariables
is causedare
byalso observed
an external fromOne
factor. Earth to varyisinanbrightness,
example but in this
eclipsing binary,
case the change
consisting is caused
of a pair of starsby an external
orbiting factor. One
their common example
centre of massis an
oneclipsing binary,
a plane that is also
consisting
that of observers.
of Earth a pair of stars
From orbiting their
the point common
of view centre
of the of mass
observers theon a plane
stars eclipsethat
oneis also
that of Earth
another observers.
in a regular cyclicFrom the During
period. point ofthe view of the
cycle the observers
light from the bothstars
starseclipse one
is usually
another
seen, butinwhenever
a regularpart
cyclic period.star
of either During the cycle
is hidden behindtheitslight from both
companion thestars
totalislight
usually
seen, butiswhenever
received reduced, part of either
and within star isboth
a cycle hidden
starsbehind
will at its companion
least the totaltheir
partially obscure light
received is reduced, and within a cycle both stars will at least partially obscure(4
companion. their
marks)
companion. (4 marks)
(d) Spectroscopy is an essential tool for astrophysicists. By collecting the light from a star
(d) and splitting itisinto
Spectroscopy an its spectrum
essential toolwith a diffraction grating,
for astrophysicists. and withthe
By collecting a CCD
light or
from a
photomultiplier tube to count the photons repeatedly, an accurate
star and splitting it into its spectrum with a diffraction grating, and with a CCD spectrogram of or
the star
is produced. Thistube
photomultiplier graph to displays
count the a blackbody radiation an
photons repeatedly, curve superimposed
accurate spectrogramby a of
vast
the
number of darker absorption spectral lines. The surface temperature
star is produced. This graph displays a blackbody radiation curve superimposed by a of the star can be
determined
vast numberbyofmatching the spectrogram
darker absorption spectralagainst a setsurface
lines. The of blackbody curves.ofThe
temperature thespectral
star
lines
can be determined by matching the spectrogram against a set of blackbody curves. and
reveal many properties of the star, such as the elements in its outer atmosphere
their relative lines
The spectral proportions, but also
reveal many the linear
properties ofvelocity
the star,of the as
such star towards
the elementsor away
in its from
outer
the
atmosphere and their relative proportions, but also the linear velocity of the star The
Earth, its rotational velocity relative to our plane of sight, and even its density.
spectral
towards class
or awayof the
fromstarthe
canEarth,
also beitsapproximated.
rotational velocity relative to our plane of sight,
Photometry
and even itsisdensity.
not an The
altogether
spectraldifferent
class ofprocess,
the star except that
can also beinstead of the light
approximated.
received from the star being used to produce a spectrogram, it is used to determine the
Photometry
colour index isofnot
the an altogether
star. different
The received process,
starlight except
is passed that instead
through of the light
two coloured filters,
received from the star being used to produce a spectrogram, it is used
usually yellow-green (visual) and blue (photographic), and the average numbers of to determine
the colour
photons index of
received perthe star. The
second received starlight
are calculated. is passed
The computer through two
determines coloured
the apparent
filters, magnitude,
visual usually yellow-green
mv, and the(visual) andblue
apparent bluemagnitude,
(photographic),
mb, fromandthethedata
average
collected.
numbers of photons received per second are calculated. The computer determines the
apparent visual magnitude, mv, and the apparent blue magnitude, m b, from the data
collected. The colour index of the star is defined to be CI = m b – mv (usually written

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 279

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 375
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 279 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 375 8/12/14 3:41 PM

CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

The colour index of the star is defined to be CI  mb – mv (usually written as

CI  B – V). The surface temperatures of the stars can be compared against those
determined by spectroscopy for verification. Moreover, in combination with the H-R
diagram the colour indices of stars have revealed many other properties of stars to
astrophysicists, principally in terms of distances across space, using a process called
spectroscopic parallax. The colour index of a star allows its absolute magnitude to be
directly estimated from the H-R diagram, even in the case of evolved stars. This can be
compared against their apparent magnitude to give a very good estimate of their
distance, and knowing their distance, together with the distance of other special stars in
a cluster with them, has allowed astrophysicists to determine new properties of stars,
such as the relation between the mass of a main sequence star and its luminosity
. (7 marks)

280 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 280 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2011 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 34 2 From Quanta to Quarks

(a) An isotope used in an agricultural setting is nitrogen-15. Nitrogen is an essential

Question 34 — From Quanta to Quarks
nutrient for plant growth. This stable isotope can be used as a tag to measure the
rate of uptake of a fertiliser by a crop and to allow the amount of fertiliser remaining
(a) An isotope used in an agricultural setting is nitrogen-15. Nitrogen is an essential nutrient
in soils to be monitored. Testing of the soil or crops can measure the amount of the
for plant growth. This stable isotope can be used as a tag to measure the rate of uptake of
nitrogen-15 in the sample and compare this with known values to reveal the desired
a fertiliser by a crop and to allow the amount of fertiliser remaining in soils to be
information. (2 marks)
monitored. Testing of the soil or crops can measure the amount of the nitrogen-15 in the
(b) sampleThe
(i) andrate
compare this with
of a nuclear known
reaction invalues to reveal
a reactor the desired
core depends information.
on the amount of (2 marks)
(b) (i) The
fi rate ofmaterial
ssionable a nuclear(fuel)
reaction in aand
present reactor core depends
the number on theavailable
of neutrons amount of of a
fissionable
suitable material
energy (fuel) present
to produce fission of andthethe
fuelnumber
nuclei.ofTheneutrons
fuel rodsavailable
contain ofthea fuel
suitablethat
nuclei energy to produce
will undergo fission
fission. Theoffission
the fuelof anuclei. The fuel
fuel nucleus willrods contain
produce morethe
fuel nuclei
neutrons that
that canwill
go undergo fission.
on to create Theinfission
fission of anuclei.
other fuel fuel nucleus will produce
The moderator acts to
morethe
slow neutrons
very hot that can go on
neutrons to create
produced byfission in nuclei
fission of other fuel nuclei.
to allow theThe moderator
neutrons to
acts toa greater
have slow thechancevery hot neutrons
of being produced
absorbed by fission
to create fissionofofnuclei
another to allow the
fuel nucleus.
neutrons
The amount to have
of fuela greater chance of
and moderator being
tends to absorbed
be basicallyto constant
create fission of another
in a particular
fuel nucleus.
reactor. The rateTheofamount of fuelinand
the reaction the moderator tends to
core is generally be basically
controlled constant
by control rodsin
a particular
that regulatereactor. The rate
the number of the reaction
of neutrons available in to
thecreate
core is generally
fission. controlled
The control rodsby
control
are made rods that regulate
of elements like the
boronnumber of neutrons
and cadmium, andavailable
by loweringto create
them fission. The
deeper into
control
the corerods are made
the control rodofnuclei
elements like boron
are able to absorband neutrons,
cadmium,reducing
and by lowering
the number them
deeper into
available and theslowing
core the
thecontrol
rate ofrodthe nuclei
fission are able toBy
reactions. absorb
raisingneutrons, reducing
the control rods
the number
out of the core,available and slowing
more neutrons becomethe rate of thetofission
available producereactions. By raising
fission and the ratetheof
control
the rods
fission out of increases.
reaction the core, more neutrons become available to produce fission (4 marks)
and the rate of the fission reaction increases. (4 marks)
(ii) Energy is released because the total mass of the products, the barium-140 and
(ii) Energy is released because the total mass of the products, the barium-140 and
krypton-92 nuclei plus four neutrons, is less than the total mass of the uranium-235
krypton-92 nuclei plus four neutrons, is less than the total mass of the uranium-235
nucleus and the neutron that reacted together. The mass deficit leads to a release of
nucleus and the neutron that reacted together. The mass deficit leads to a release
energy, i.e. E = mc 2. 2 (2 marks)
of energy, i.e. E  mc . (2 marks)
(c)
(c) Forces in
in atomic nucleus
Forces nucleus
Gravitational
Gravitational Electrostatic
Electrostatic Strong
Strong (3 marks)

Strength
Strength Low Strong
Strong Very strong
strong
Direction
Direction Attractive
Attractive Repulsive
Repulsive Attractive
Attractive
Range Infinite Infinite
Infinite Very short
short
(3 marks)

h h 6.626 3 10 234
(d)
(d) Its de Broglie wavelength
wavelength is given by l 5 5 5 = 2.12 3 10234 m.
p mv 0.156 3 20
(2 marks)
(2 marks)
(e)
(e) Tritium is
Tritium is an
an isotope of hydrogen: 1 proton,
proton, 2 neutrons
neutrons and
and11electron.
electron.The
Theproton
proton
contains 2 UP and
contains and 11 DOWN
DOWN quarks,
quarks,and andeach
eachneutron
neutroncontains
contains22DOWN
DOWNand and1 1UP
UP
quarks. Therefore
quarks. Therefore tritium has
has aa total
totalof
of44UP
UPquarks,
quarks,55DOWN
DOWNquarks
quarksand
and11lepton
lepton(the
(the
electron).
electron). (2
(2 marks)
marks)

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 377

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 281

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 377 8/12/14 3:41 PM
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 281 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2011 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
CHAPTER 10 • 2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(f) In relation to the development of the atomic theory both Heisenberg and Pauli made
(f) In relation
signifi cant to the development
contributions. of the atomic
Heisenberg’s maintheory both Heisenberg
contributions were thatand Pauli madea
he developed
significant contributions. Heisenberg’s main contributions were that he developed a
mathematical model to predict the behaviour of electrons in atoms using matrices.
mathematical model to predict the behaviour of electrons in atoms using matrices.
Hiswork
His workwas was shown
shown byby Dirac
Diractotobe
bemathematically
mathematicallyequivalent
equivalenttotoSchrodinger’s
Schrodinger’swavewave
mechanical model.
mechanical model.Heisenberg
Heisenbergalso
alsodeveloped
developedhis hisfamous
famousUncertainty
UncertaintyPrinciple,
Principle,arising
arising
from from quantum
quantum theory
theory and and showing
showing that therethat
wasthere wasa always
always a very
very tiny tiny uncertainty
uncertainty when
trying
when to measure
trying the momentum
to measure and position
the momentum of an object
and position of anatobject
the same time,
at the particularly
same time,
relevant when
particularly the object
relevant being
when the measured wasmeasured
object being very tiny,was
e.g.very
an electron.
tiny, e.g. an electron.
Pauli’s main contributions were providing an explanation for the energy problem
Pauli’s main contributions were providing an explanation for the energy problem
involved in measurements of beta decay. He was able to produce a mathematical model
involved in measurements of beta decay. He was able to produce a mathematical model
that predicted the existence of a tiny neutral particle, later called the neutrino, being
that predicted the existence of a tiny neutral particle, later called the neutrino, being
emitted along with the beta particle. The idea was readily accepted because of the high
emitted along with the beta particle. The idea was readily accepted because of the high
quality of his work but it took many years to confirm the existence of the neutrino.
quality of his work but it took many years to confirm the existence of the neutrino. He
He also developed the Pauli Exclusion Principle, which showed that no two electrons
also developed the Pauli Exclusion Principle, which showed that no two electrons could
could have exactly the same set of quantum properties. This proved important in
have exactly the same set of quantum properties. This proved important in explaining
explaining the behaviour of the electrons in different atoms. (4 marks)
the behaviour of the electrons in different atoms. (4 marks)

(g) The
(g) Thestatement
statementthat
that‘Mathematical
‘Mathematicalmodels,
models,validated
validatedbybyexperimental
experimentalevidence,
evidence,have
have
improved our understanding of the atom’ is certainly true when we consider the work
improved our understanding of the atom’ is certainly true when we consider the work of
Bohr andand
of Bohr de Broglie.
de Broglie.

Bohr developed a mathematical model of the atom in 1911 incorporating Planck’s idea
Bohr developed a mathematical model of the atom in 1911 incorporating Planck’s idea
ofquantised
of quantisedenergy.
energy.Bohr Bohrhad hadmuch
muchcircumstantial
circumstantialevidence
evidencefromfrompast
pastexperiments
experimentsbut
but developed
developed his model
his model usingusing his postulates
his postulates to determine
to determine theand
the size sizearrangement
and arrangement
of the
energy levels for
of the energy electrons
levels as they as
for electrons orbited around the
they orbited nucleus
around the of an atom.
nucleus The
of an postulates
atom. The
postulates nh
relied on therelied
angular on momentum
the angular of momentum
an electronofinanitselectron in its
orbit being orbit being
quantised, i.e quantised,
mvr  ,
nh 2π
and Bohr5suggested
i.e. mvr and Bohrthat this allowedthat
suggested thethis
electron to maintain
allowed a stable
the electron orbit without
to maintain a stable
2p
radiating energy.
orbit without He alsoenergy.
radiating postulated that postulated
He also when an electron
that when moved betweenmoved
an electron allowed
energy
between levels, it would
allowed energy absorb oritemit
levels, woulda definite
absorb amount
or emit of energy
a defi nite as an electromagnetic
amount of energy
radiation (hf  E
as an electromagneticf – E ). Using his postulates as the basis, Bohr developed
iradiation (hf = E f 2 E i). Using his postulates as the basis, a
mathematical model and
Bohr developed a mathematical made predictions
model and formade
a hydrogen atom,for
predictions calculating
a hydrogen theatom,
radius
and energy for
calculating thethe single
radius andhydrogen
energy forelectron in thehydrogen
the single allowed electron
energy levels.
in theThe
allowed energy
relationship he derived took the same form as the Rydberg Equation,
levels. The relationship he derived took the same form as the Rydberg Equation, already known to
accurately predict
already known to the spectra produced
accurately predict thebyspectra
hydrogen, and explained
produced the reason
by hydrogen, for the
and explained
constant,
the reasonRHfor
, inthe
Rydberg’s
constant, equation, i.e.
R H, in Rydberg’s equation, i.e.
1 1 1
The Rydberg equation: 5 RH a 2 2 2 b
l nf ni
1 E1 1 1
The equation derived by Bohr: 5 a 2 2 2b
l hc nf ni
where E is the energy of the electron in the lowest energy stationary state, h is
where E11is the energy of the electron in the lowest energy stationary state, h is Planck’s
Planck’s constant and c is the speed of light. Although Bohr’s model was shown to be
constant and c is the speed of light. Although Bohr’s model was shown to be incomplete,
incomplete, it was fundamental
it was fundamental to giving
to giving quantum quantum
theory theory
its place its placethe
in providing in providing thethe
answers for
answers for
behaviour of the behaviour
particles at theofsub-atomic
particles at the sub-atomic level.
level.

378 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
282 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741255782Success
9781741256451 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb
One_Physics_2017.indd 282 378 8/12/14 2:10
22/12/2016 3:41PM
PM
2011 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

De Broglie’s concept of ‘matter waves’ arose from a mathematical analysis of previous

ideas and a bold proposal that came from his analysis. De Broglie was aware of the
suggestions from Einstein and Planck regarding energy, i.e. E mc2 and E  hf.
Combination of the equations had already been used to predict that a photon would carry
h
momentum. De Broglie hypothesised that the relationship p = suggests that a particle
λ
with momentum would have an associated wavelength inversely proportional to the
particle’s momentum. Based on his prediction, he theorised that the electron in atoms
existed in a standing wave and this could be the reason for the stability of the various
energy levels that existed for electrons in atoms. He used known values to calculate the
expected wavelength for an electron in an atom. This prediction of a wave-particle
duality was eventually shown to be correct by an experiment where Davisson and
Germer observed electron-wave interference. This was evidence that an electron did
have a wavelength as predicted by de Broglie. This idea had a significant impact on our
understanding of the atom.
The work of both Bohr and de Broglie are clear examples of mathematical models that
have been supported by experiment and have led to an increased understanding of atoms
and their structure. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 283

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 283 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 11

2012
H I G H E R S C H O O L C E R T I F I C AT E
E X A M I N AT I O N

Physics

General Instructions Total marks – 100

• Reading time – 5 minutes
Section I Pages 2–28
• Working time – 3 hours
75 marks
• Write using black or blue pen
Black pen is preferred This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
• Draw diagrams using pencil Part A – 20 marks
• Board-approved calculators may • Attempt Questions 1–20
be used
• Allow about 35 minutes for this part
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and
Periodic Table are provided at Part B – 55 marks
the back of this paper • Attempt Questions 21–30
• Write your Centre Number and • Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part
Student Number where required
at the top of
pages 13, 17, 19, 23, 25 and 27 Section II Pages 29–39
25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

4000
284 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 284 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 The diagram shows a device connected to a meter.

N S

0 2

Meter

What device is shown in the diagram?

(A) AC motor
(B) DC motor
(C) AC generator
(D) DC generator

2 What is currently used to define the standard metre?

(A) The speed of light

(B) The signals from GPS satellites
(C) The wavelength of light from a krypton lamp
(D) The distance between two lines on a platinum iridium bar

–2– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 285

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 285 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

3 What part of a cathode ray tube allows a person to observe the position of an electron
beam?

(A) A maltese cross

(B) A heated filament
(C) A fluorescent screen
(D) A uniform magnetic field

4 The graph shows how the gravitational potential energy (Ep ) of a satellite changes with
its altitude.

Altitude (km)
0 5000 10 000 15 000 20 000
0

–1

–2

–3

–4
Ep (109 J)

–5

–6

–7

–8

–9

–10

What is the change in gravitational potential energy of the satellite when its altitude is
reduced from 14 000 km to 4000 km?

(A) –8.8 × 109 J

(B) –2.8 × 109 J
(C) 2.8 × 109 J
(D) 8.8 × 109 J

286 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 3–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 286 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

5 Which of the following could be added to a crystal of silicon to create a p-type

semiconductor?

(A) Carbon
(B) Copper
(C) Gallium
(D) Phosphorus

6 The diagram represents the electric field around a negative charge.

If the magnitude of the charge were doubled, which diagram would best represent the
new electric field?

(A) (B)

–2 –2

–4– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 287

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 287 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

7 In moving-coil galvanometers, the coil experiences a torque because of the current

flowing through it.

What ensures that this torque is directly proportional to the current flowing through the
coil?

(A) A return spring

(B) A radial magnetic field
(C) A laminated soft iron core
(D) A constant cross-sectional area of the coil

8 A current-carrying wire passes through a region of uniform magnetic field, magnitude

0.05 T, and as a result experiences a force of magnitude 0.03 N.

0.2 m

30°

What is the current I?

(A) 1.5 A
(B) 1.7 A
(C) 3.0 A
(D) 6.0 A

9 Compared to a geostationary orbit, which row of the table correctly describes the relative
properties of a low Earth orbit?

Orbital velocity Orbital period

(A) Higher Higher
(B) Higher Lower
(C) Lower Higher
(D) Lower Lower

288 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 5–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 288 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

10 Which of the following ideal transformers could be used to convert an input voltage of
20 volts AC to an output voltage of 2 volts AC?

(A) (B)

4 turns 10 turns 20 turns 3 turns

20 turns 10 turns 3 turns 30 turns

11 Which of the following is correct about the forces acting during a rocket launch?

(A) Equal and opposite forces act on the rocket. This enables it to continue to accelerate
even in the vacuum of space.
(B) The engines exert an upward thrust on the rocket. This thrust exceeds the
downward force of the engines on the air.
(C) The rocket engines exert a downward force on the gases being expelled. These
gases exert an upward force on the engines.
(D) The expelled gases exert a force against the launch pad. The launch pad then exerts
an equal and opposite force on the rocket causing it to accelerate.

–6– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 289

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 289 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Use the data below to answer Questions 12 and 13.

Orbital period of the Moon around Earth 2.36 × 106 s

Mean orbital radius of the Moon 3.83 × 108 m

Mass of Earth 6.0 × 1024 kg

Mass of the Moon 7.35 × 1022 kg

12 What is the centripetal force experienced by the Moon due to Earth’s influence?

(A) 2.0 × 1020 N

(B) 1.6 × 1022 N
(C) 4.7 × 1026 N
(D) 7.6 × 1028 N

13 What is the orbital period of an Earth satellite having an orbital radius half that of the
Moon?

(A) 5.9 × 105 s

(B) 8.3 × 105 s
(C) 1.2 × 106 s
(D) 7.5 × 106 s

290 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSIC S– 7–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 290 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

14 The graph shows variation in magnetic flux through a coil with time.

Magnetic
flux
Time

Which graph best represents the corresponding induced emf in the coil?

(A) Induced
emf
Time

(B) Induced
emf
Time

(D) Induced
emf
Time

15 A magnet can be levitated above a superconductor, when the superconductor is below its
critical temperature.

Which statement best describes how this occurs?

(A) All of the magnet’s field is absorbed by the superconductor.

(B) The superconductor creates currents in the magnet, resulting in a repulsive force.
(C) Cooper pairs are exchanged between the superconductor and the magnet through
its field.
(D) Some of the magnet’s field is excluded by the superconductor, resulting in a
repulsive force.

–8– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 291

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 291 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

16 An ideal electric motor connected to a DC voltage source rotates at a constant rate of

200 revolutions per minute. There is no load on the motor.

Which of the following is a correct statement about the operation of the motor?

(A) The applied voltage must exceed the back emf in order to keep the motor running.
(B) There is no back emf because it is only produced in AC motors due to the changing
flux.
(C) The back emf is equal to the applied voltage because no work is being done by the
motor.
(D) The back emf must exceed the applied voltage to prevent the motor’s speed from
increasing.

17 The following equipment is attached to a DC power supply.

– +

Copper wires

2.00 mm 1.00 m NOT TO

SCALE

Liquid conductor

What current must be flowing through the wires to result in a force of 2.50 × 10–3 N
between them?

(A) 0.224 A
(B) 5.00 A
(C) 12.5 A
(D) 25.0 A

292 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 9–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 292 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

18 The gravitational force, due to Earth, on a mass positioned at X is Fx and on the same
mass positioned at Y is Fy. The diagram is drawn to scale.

Earth

X Y THIS DIAGRAM IS
DRAWN TO SCALE

Fx
What is the value of ?
Fy

(A) 1.5
(B) 2.0
(C) 2.25
(D) 4.0

19 The diagram represents an induction cooking system.

Base of the cooking pot

Ceramic cooktop

AC voltage source

Which row in the following table shows the set of conditions that would result in the most
rapid heating of the base of the cooking pot?

AC voltage frequency Electrical resistance of pot base

(A) Low Low
(B) Low High
(C) High Low
(D) High High

– 10 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 293

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 293 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

20 A company wishes to develop a semiconductor sensor to detect thermal radiation from

people. The sensor will work on the same principle as a solar cell.

Typical Human Blackbody Radiation Curve

Intensity

10 20
Wavelength (mm)

Semiconductor Band gap (eV)

HgCdTe 0.03
InSb 0.17
Si 1.1
GaN 3.4

Using the information provided, which semiconductor would be most suitable for this
purpose?

(A) HgCdTe
(B) InSb
(C) Si
(D) GaN

294 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 11 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 294 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 55 marks
Attempt Questions 21–30 Student Number
Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part

Answer the questions in the spaces provided. These spaces provide guidance for the expected
length of response.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 21 (6 marks)

(a) Outline a first-hand investigation that could be performed to measure a value for 3
acceleration due to gravity.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) How would you assess the accuracy of the result of the investigation? 1
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(c) How would you increase the reliability of the data collected? 1
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(d) How would you assess the reliability of the data collected? 1
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

4001 – 13 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 295

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 295 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 22 (6 marks)

A bar magnet is placed on a sensitive electronic balance as shown in the diagram. A

hollow solenoid is held stationary, such that the magnet is partly within the solenoid.

Copper wire
Solenoid
short circuit
N

Bar magnet
S
Electronic balance
42.42 g

The solenoid is then lifted straight up without touching the magnet. The reading on
the balance is observed to change briefly.

(a) Why does a current flow in the solenoid? 2

(b) Explain the reason for changes in the reading on the electronic balance as the 4
solenoid is removed.
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................

296 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 14 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 296 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 23 (4 marks)

Consider the following thought experiment. 4

Two towers are built on Earth’s surface. The height of each of the towers is equal to
the altitude of a satellite in geostationary orbit about Earth. Tower A is built at Earth’s
North Pole and Tower B is built at the equator.

Tower A

NOT TO
SCALE

Tower B

Identical masses are simultaneously released from rest from the top of each tower.
Explain the motion of each of the masses after their release.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 15 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 297

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 297 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 24 (5 marks)

(a) Using a labelled diagram, outline the differences in the energy bands of 2
conductors, semiconductors and insulators.

(b) Explain why a current is able to flow in a pure semiconductor when an electric 3
field is applied across it.

...............................................................................................................................

4002 298 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 17 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 298 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 25 (7 marks)

(a) Why have transistor circuits largely replaced thermionic devices? 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Assess the impact of the use of transistors on society. 5

...............................................................................................................................

4003 – 19 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 299

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 299 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 26 (6 marks)

A transmission line is to be used to supply 100 MW of power from a power station to

a substation 100 km away. Three possible designs are shown below.

Design A – Low voltage

Power station Substation

120 MW 100 MW input
output 33 kV input

100 km

Design B – High voltage

40 W total
Power station line resistance
Substation
with step-up
100 MW input
transformer,
500 kV input
508 kV output

100 km

Design C – Superconducting
Superconducting
transmission line
Power Substation
station 100 MW input

100 km

The cooling requirements for the

superconducting transmission line
consume 30 kW per km of line

Question 26 continues
Question 26 continues on page 21

300 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 20 –
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 300 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (continued)

Using physics principles and appropriate calculations, evaluate each design to determine 6
the best way of transmitting power from the power station to the substation.

.........................................................................................................................................

End of Question 26
End of Question 26

– 21 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 301

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 301 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 27 (4 marks)

A toy bird is launched at 60° to the horizontal, from a point 45 m away from the base 4
of a cliff.

NOT TO
34 m
SCALE

45 m

Calculate the magnitude of the required launch velocity such that the toy bird strikes
the base of the wooden building at the top of the cliff, 34 m above the launch height.

.........................................................................................................................................

4004 302 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 23 –
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 302 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 28 (7 marks)

(a) Outline ONE piece of evidence supporting Einstein’s theory of relativity. 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) What criteria are used to test and validate a theory? 3

...............................................................................................................................

If an electron travels through the tube at 3.0 × 107 m s–1, what is the apparent
distance from the cathode to the screen in the electron’s frame of reference?

...............................................................................................................................

4005 – 25 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 303

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 303 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 29 (5 marks)

How is the motor effect used to produce different sounds in a loudspeaker? Include a 5
labelled diagram.

.........................................................................................................................................

4006 304 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 27 –
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 304 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 30 (5 marks)

The diagram shows the paths taken by two moving charged particles when they enter
a region of uniform magnetic field.

B = 1.0 T Path P

Path Q

(a) Why do the paths curve in different directions? 1

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Why are the paths circular? 2

...............................................................................................................................

– 28 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 305

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 305 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2012 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

For Questions 31–34

• answer parts (a)–(c) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 1.
• answer parts (d)–(e) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Extra writing booklets are available.

For Question 35
• answer parts (a)–(b) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 1.
• answer parts (c)–(d) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Extra writing booklets are available.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Pages

Question 31 (Not included in this reproduction)

Geophysics ........................................................................... 31–33

Question 32 Medical Physics ......................................................................... 34

Question 33 Astrophysics ......................................................................... 35–36

Question 34 From Quanta to Quarks ............................................................. 37

Question 35 (Not included in this reproduction)

The Age of Silicon ............................................................... 38–39

4007 306 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 29 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 306 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 32 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(c) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) (i) The first X-ray image of a human was made in 1895 but it was not until 2
1972 that CAT scan imaging was developed.

Account for the time interval between the development of these two
related technologies.

(ii) Contrast the information provided by PET scans and CAT scans. 2

(iii) Contrast the production of radiation used for PET scans and CAT scans. 3

(b) (i) What effects do the pulses of radio waves have on hydrogen nuclei in the 3
body of a person having a magnetic resonance image scan?

(ii) Outline how advances in physics in the 20th century contributed to the 3
development of magnetic resonance imaging.

(c) Describe the properties that make a radioactive isotope useful for medical 3
imaging. Include a specific example of a radioactive isotope in your answer.

Answer parts (d)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(d) Explain how endoscopes obtain images of internal organs. 3

(e) Discuss the range of information obtained from, and the limitations of, 6
ultrasound medical imaging technology.

– 34 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 307

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 307 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 33 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(c) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) (i) Why do astronomers use both apparent and absolute measurements in 1
photometry?

(ii) Compare how astronomers obtain photometric and spectroscopic data. 4

(b) (i) Describe the problems associated with ground-based optical astronomy 3
in terms of resolution.

(ii) How can the resolution of ground-based optical telescopes be improved? 2

• Black hole
• Main sequence star
• Neutron star/pulsar
• Planetary nebula
• Red giant
• Supernova
• White dwarf.

(ii) All naturally occurring elements have been synthesised within stars. 3
Explain how this occurs.

Answer parts (d)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(d) (i) Explain how trigonometric parallax is used to determine the distances to 3
stars.

(ii) Outline ONE limitation of using trigonometric parallax to determine 1

distances to stars.

Question 33 continues
Question 33 continues on page 36

308 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 35 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 308 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 33 (continued)

(e) Astronomers have obtained the following data about stars in a binary system. 6

Star A Star B
Apparent magnitude 0.34 13.16
Spectral class F5 A4
Luminosity (relative to Sun) 7.3 0.0063
Average separation 2.2 × 109 km

Light Curve for the Binary System

1.0
Relative brightness

0 10 30 50 70
Time (years)

Herzsprung-Russell Diagram

–10

10 4 –5
Luminosity (solar units)

Absolute magnitude

10 2 0

1 +5

10 –2 +10

10 –4 +15
O B A F G K M
Spectral type

Analyse the above data to write a detailed description of this binary system.

End of Question 33
End of Question 33

– 36 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 309

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 309 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(c) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) (i) Using diagrams and text, outline Bohr’s explanation of the Balmer 3
series.

(ii) Outline TWO observations from atomic emission spectra that could not 2
be fully explained by the Rutherford-Bohr model.

(b) (i) What are the requirements for an uncontrolled nuclear chain reaction? 3

(ii) How does the equivalence between mass and energy relate to what 2
occurs during the natural radioactivity process?

(c) How can neutrons be used to probe the positions of nuclei within the structure of 4
a metal crystal? Make reference to the work of Louis de Broglie in your answer.

Answer parts (d)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(d) (i) Explain how the internal structures of the proton and neutron determine 3
their properties.

(ii) How are accelerators used to investigate the structure of matter? 2

(e) Describe the role of conservation laws in the development of atomic physics. 6

End of paper

© Board of Studies NSW 2012

310 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 37 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 310 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2012 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A (Total 20 marks)

1 D The coil is being rotated in a magnetic field; therefore, it will generate a voltage
(a generator). The generator has a split-ring commutator, thus it will supply
fluctuating DC to the meter.

2 A The speed of light is used today to define the metre, i.e. 1.00 m is the distance light
1
will travel through a vacuum in seconds, where c is the speed of light (constant).
c
3 C The position of the cathode ray is observed as light is emitted when the electrons
in the beam strike the fluorescent screen.

4 B Now Ep  Epf  Epi. From the graph, Ep  5.8  109  (3  109)
 2.8  109 J.

5 C The Group 3 element used for a p-type semiconductor is gallium.

6 C Electric field strength is indicated by the density of lines, i.e. C indicates double the
field strength.

7 B In order for I, the magnetic field influencing the motor coil must remain uniform,
i.e. a radial magnetic field is used.

8 A F  BIlsin. Magnetic field is perpendicular to current, therefore 0.03  0.05  Il.

From the diagram and considering trigonometry, l  0.4 m.
0.03
Therefore I   1.5 A.
(0.05  4)
9 B Low Earth orbit satellites travel at a higher orbital velocity with a shorter period
when compared to a geostationary satellite.

10 D In order to convert 20 V to 2 V, the number of loops in the transformer coils

V1 n1
needs to have a ratio of 10 to 1. 
V2 n2
11 C
The gases being expelled down from the rocket engine create an equal and opposite
reaction on the rocket engine, which acts upward.
mv2 2πr (7.35  1022  4π2  3.83  102)
12 A Fc  r and v  T . Therefore, Fc  (2.36  106)2
 2.0  1020 N towards Earth.
T2 T2 (2.36  106)2 T2
13 B Moon  Satellite ,  , T  8.34  105 s
r3 r3 (1)3 (0.5)3

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 311

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 311 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

14 D Induced emf is at its maximum when change of flux is greatest, i.e. where the
gradient of line is steepest on the flux versus time graph. Direction of induced emf
acts to create a current that produces a magnetic field to oppose the change in flux.
Flux versus time begins with the maximum positive slope, therefore induced emf
begins at a maximum negative value, i.e. answer D.

15 D A property of superconductors is that they exclude magnetic fields from

entering them.

16 C With no load on the ideal motor there is no energy being used, therefore the back-
emf being created will be about equal to the forward-applied voltage.
F kI1I2
17 B  . Now I1  I2, d  0.002 and l  1.0 m. Therefore, since
l d
F  2.5  103 then I  5 A.
GmEmm Fx 20.25
18 C Fg  . Now d y  4.5 units and dx  3 units,   2.25.
d2 Fy 9
19 C Electric power raises the temperature of the pot. The pot base has a low resistance.
P  RI 2. The more rapid the change in flux, the greater the induced emf. This
creates a larger current and more rapid heating of the saucepan. Therefore C.

20 A Max. energy output from human  E

 hf
hc
 λ

6.626  10–34  3  108


9  106
 0.138 eV.

Therefore the band gap should be less than 0.138 eV. This makes HgCdTe the best
choice.

312 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 312 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Section I, Part B
Question 21

(a) A simple pendulum was used where the length of the pendulum could be set to
different values from 0.5 to 1.3 m. With the length set to 0.5 m, the time taken for the
pendulum to complete 10 full oscillations was recorded. This was then repeated twice
more.
The length of the pendulum was then adjusted, in turn, to each of 0.7, 0.9, 1.1 and
1.3 m and the time for 10 oscillations of each pendulum was recorded three times.
From the data collected, the average period for each length was determined and a graph
of length versus period squared was drawn.
I 4 π 2l
Considering the slope of the graph is , and knowing from theory that g  T2 ,
T2
a value for g was determined by multiplying the slope of the graph by 4π2. (3 marks)
(b) The accuracy of the answer obtained from the experiment would be assessed by
comparing the experimental answer with the actual value of g for our location using a
reliable source (reference), e.g. the internet site for Geoscience Australia. (1 mark)
(c) The reliability of the answer could be increased by repeating the experiment several
more times. (1 mark)
(d) The reliability could be assessed by seeing whether the answers obtained from the
repeated experiment are the same or within 2% and whether the other groups
performing the same experiment got the same answer. (1 mark)

Question 22
(a) As the coil is raised, the loops of copper wire cut magnetic flux and experience a
changing magnetic field. According to Faraday’s law, a voltage is induced when a
conductor cuts magnetic field lines and, as the circuit is complete, while the solenoid
moves relative to the magnet the induced voltage will cause a current to flow in the
solenoid loops. (2 marks)

(b) According to Lenz’s law, when a conductor experiences a change in magnetic field the
direction of the induced voltage will result in a current flowing to create a magnetic
field in a direction to oppose the motion which created it. This means the bottom of
the solenoid becomes a South magnetic pole as the solenoid moves and the induced
current flows. This South pole attracts the North pole of the bar magnet in an equal and
opposite reaction which initially acts up on the bar magnet. This upwards force results
in a reduction in the reading on the electronic balance. As the solenoid moves further
away, this force reduces and the reading on the balance will eventually return to its
original value. (4 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 313

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 313 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER
CHAPTER 13 • 2012 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

Question 23
Question 23
Being over the pole when released, mass A has no horizontal velocity and will accelerate
Being over
vertically downthe pole
due when
to the released, mass
gravitational A hasof
attraction noEarth.
horizontal velocity
As it falls, theand will accelerate
acceleration will
vertically down due to the gravitational attraction of 1 Earth. As it falls, the acceleration will
increase as it gets closer and closer to Earth, i.e. g  2 .1The very high velocity achieved by
increase as it gets closer and closer to Earth, i.e. g da 2 . The very high velocity achieved by
d
thethe
time it nears
time Earth
it nears is likely
Earth to cause
is likely mass
to cause A toAburn
mass up as
to burn upitasbegins to enter
it begins the the
to enter
increasingly
increasingly dense
denseatmosphere
atmosphere of Earth.
of Earth.
Mass
Mass B, B,when
whenreleased at at
released thisthis
distance from
distance Earth,
from willwill
Earth, remain exactly
remain where
exactly it is.
where This
it is. is is due
This
duetotoit itbeing
beingdirectly
directlyabove
abovethe theequator
equatorand
andhaving
havingthe
thesame
sameangular
angular velocity
velocityas
asthethe surface
surface of
GmE
of Earth,
Earth, i.e. it will
i.e. it will be
be in
in aa geostationary
geostationary orbit
orbit with
with an
an orbital
orbital velocity,
velocity, VB 5 whered is
, where
Ä d
d isthe
thedistance
distancefrom
frommass
massBBtotothethecentre
centreofofEarth.
Earth.This
Thisvelocity
velocityisisjust
justthe
theright
rightmagnitude
magnitudefor
formass
massBBtotoremain
remainininorbit
orbitat
at this
this distance
distance directly
directly above
above the
the equator.
equator. (4 marks)
(4 marks)

Question 24
Question 24
(a)
Conduction
(a) band
Conduction
Conduction Conduction
band
band band
Conduction
Conduction band
band Forbidden zone Forbidden zone
(energy gap) (energy gap)
Forbidden zone Forbidden zone
Valence (energy gap) (energy gap)
Valence
band
band Valence
Valence
Valence band
band
Conductor band
Semiconductor Insulator
Valence
band
(2 marks)
Conductor Semiconductor Insulator
(2 marks)
(b) The applied electric field can provide the required energy for valence electrons to cross
the forbidden zone and move to the conduction band, leaving a positive hole in the
(b) The applied electric field can provide the required energy for valence electrons to
valence band. The electric field causes movement of the electrons through the
cross the forbidden zone and move to the conduction band, leaving a positive hole
semiconductor against the field (towards the positive side) while a hole current will
in the valence band. The electric field causes movement of the electrons through the
flow with the field towards the negative side. (3 marks)
semiconductor against the field (towards the positive side) while a hole current will
flow with the field towards the negative side. (3 marks)
Question 25

(a) Question 25
When compared to transistors, thermionic devices consumed much more energy and
produced more heat. They were also much larger and extremely fragile. The
(a) development
When compared
of the to transistors,
transistor thermionic
provided a moredevices
robust,consumed
much moremuch more and
efficient energy
reliable
and produced more heat. They were also much larger and extremely fragile. The
device that could perform the same job more cheaply than thermionic devices. (2 marks)
development of the transistor provided a more robust, much more efficient and reliable
device that could perform the same job more cheaply than thermionic devices. (2 marks)

314 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

410 E x c e l S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 314 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS
2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(b) The transistor has had an enormous impact on society, with its development
(b) The transistor has had an enormous impact on society, with its development and
and subsequent miniaturisation having led to its application in so many of our
subsequent miniaturisation having led to its application in so many of our modern devices,
modern devices, e.g. microprocessors, computers and communications technology.
e.g. microprocessors, computers and communications technology. The development of
The development of the transistor has led to the internet and the ability for humans
the transistor has led to the internet and the ability for humans all over earth to rapidly
all over earth to rapidly communicate and for news and images to be almost
communicate and for news and images to be almost instantly spread worldwide. The
instantly spread worldwide. The transistor has allowed the development of cheap
transistor has allowed the development of cheap portable devices like mobile phones
portable devices like mobile phones and this has dramatically changed our ability to
and this has dramatically changed our ability to communicate and receive
communicate and receive information. (5 marks)
information. (5 marks)

Question 26
Question 26
According to the information, Design A lost 20 MW of power as the current travelled the
According to the information, Design A lost 20 MW of power as the current travelled the 100
100 km distance in the transmission wires to the substation as only 100 MW arrived. The
km distance in the transmission wires to the substation as only 100 MW arrived. The power
power lost from Design B can be calculated based on the loss in potential difference, 508 kV
lost from Design B can be calculated based on the loss in potential difference, 508 kV down
down to 500 kV at the substation, with the current travelling through the transmission lines
to 500 kV at the substation, with the current travelling through the transmission lines of 40 
V2 80002
of 40 V resistance, i.e. power V 2
lost 5 800022 5 1.6 MW. The superconductors in
resistance, i.e. power lost  – R 40 1.6 MW. The superconductors in Design C have
Design C have no resistance to 40
R the transmission current but to cool the superconducting
no resistance to the transmission current but to cool the superconducting transmission lines
transmission lines requires power to be consumed, i.e. 30 kW per km over a distance of
requires power to be consumed, i.e. 30 kW per km over a distance of 100 km requiring a
100 km requiring a total of 3000 kW, i.e. 3.0 MW.
total of 3000 kW, i.e. 3.0 MW.
Based on the results, the most efficient system is Design B using the higher voltage,
Based on the results, the most efficient system is Design B using the higher voltage,
i.e. 500 kV. At this voltage, only 1.6 MW was consumed to transmit the 100 MW of power to
i.e. 500 kV. At this voltage, only 1.6 MW was consumed to transmit the 100 MW of power to
the substation compared with 3.0 MW for the superconductor lines of Design C and 20 MW
the substation compared with 3.0 MW for the superconductor lines of Design C and 20 MW
for the lower voltage (33 kV) of Design A. (6 marks)
for the lower voltage (33 kV) of Design A. (6 marks)

Question 27
Question 27
Vertical displacement, s v 5 34 m up, horizontal displacement, s y 5 45 m right.
1
For vertical motion, s v 5 uv t 1 a v t 2, i.e. 34 5 2usin60°t 1 4.9t 2. Equation 1
2
45
For horizontal motion, s h 5 u h t, i.e. 45 5 ucos60°t, 5 ut. Equation 2
0.5
Combining the two equations, 234 5 20.866 3 90 1 4.9t 2.
77.94 2 34
Therefore, t 5 5 2.99s.
Å 4.9 u
uv
45
Substituting into Equation 2, u 5 5 30.1 m s–1
2.99 3 0.5
up at 60° to horizontal.
60°
uh

(4(4marks)
marks)

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 411
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 315

9781741256451
9781741255782 Success One_Physics_2017.indd
SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb315411 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
8/12/14 3:42
CHAPTER 13 • 2012 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 28
Question 28
(a) The following are two examples of evidence for relativity.
(a) The following are two examples of evidence for relativity.
Particle accelerators must be constructed to allow for the relativistic effects for the very
Particle accelerators
high velocity must
particles be studied,
being constructed to allow for
i.e. increased the relativistic
masses and lengtheffects for the very
contraction.
high velocity particles being studied, i.e. increased masses and length contraction.
GPS atomic clocks must be corrected for time dilation (Special theory) because of their
GPS atomic clocks must be corrected for time dilation (Special theory) because of their
high speed and time changes due to the variation in the gravitational field (General
high speed and time changes due to the variation in the gravitational field (General
theory). (2 marks)
theory). (2 marks)
(b) The theory must be testable by experiment and make predictions which can be
(b) The theory must be testable by experiment and make predictions which can be verified
verified by measurements. Suitable experiments must be designed which can explore
by measurements. Suitable experiments must be designed which can explore whether
whether the predictions of the theory are observed and supported by the results. The
the predictions of the theory are observed and supported by the results. The
experiments will involve the use of accurate measuring devices which are sensitive
experiments will involve the use of accurate measuring devices which are sensitive
enough for the required measurements. For the theory to be validated, the experiments
enough for the required measurements. For the theory to be validated, the experiments
must follow the scientific method with suitable controls and when repeated be found to
must follow the scientific method with suitable controls and when repeated be found to
always produce results that are consistent with the predictions of the theory. (3 marks)
always produce results that are consistent with the predictions of the theory. (3 marks)

v2
(c) l y 5 l0 12 . The electron considers the tube to be moving relative to it. Therefore
Å c2
1014
ly 5 0.4 12 , ly 5 0.398 m. According to the electron, the distance is 39.8 cm.
Å 1016

(2(2marks)
marks)

Question 29

An AC current
Question 29 flows into the coil of the loudspeaker, which is directly attached to the
speaker cone. The outer edge of the speaker cone is mounted on rigid supports with the
An AC current flows into the coil of the loudspeaker, which is directly attached to the
centre on flexible mountings. The AC flowing in the coil produces a magnetic field which
speaker cone. The outer edge of the speaker cone is mounted on rigid supports with the
interacts with the external magnetic field created by the surrounding permanent magnet.
centre on flexible mountings. The AC flowing in the coil produces a magnetic field which
The alternating current results in a changing magnetic force acting on the coil causing it to
interacts with the external magnetic field created by the surrounding permanent magnet.
move back and forth due to the motor effect. As the coil is attached to the speaker cone and
The alternating current results in a changing magnetic force acting on the coil causing it to
is free to move, it oscillates back and forth causing the membrane of the speaker cone to
move back and forth due to the motor effect. As the coil is attached to the speaker cone and
vibrate at a frequency equal to the frequency of the AC passing into the coil. As a result the
is free to move, it oscillates back and forth causing the membrane of the speaker cone to
vibrating speaker cone produces a sound of a frequency equal to the frequency of the AC
vibrate at a frequency equal to the frequency of the AC passing into the coil. As a result the
passing into the coil with the volume of the sound related to the size of the electric current
vibrating speaker cone produces a sound of a frequency equal to the frequency of the AC
flowing in the coil, i.e. the force acting on the coil moving the speaker cone is directly
passing into the coil with the volume of the sound related to the size of the electric current
proportional to the AC flowing in the coil. The AC supplied to the coil varies in frequency
flowing in the coil, i.e. the force acting on the coil moving the speaker cone is directly
and form to produce the different frequency sounds and voice from the speaker.
proportional to the AC flowing in the coil. The AC supplied to the coil varies in frequency
and form to produce the different frequency sounds and voice from the speaker.

412 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
316 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 412 8/12/14 3:42 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 316 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

AC electric current flowing to coil

Speaker cone N

S
Coil of copper wire
N

Permanent magnet (poles indicated)

(5 marks)
Question 30

(a) The particles have opposite electric charges, with P positively charged and Q negatively
charged. (1 mark)

(b) The paths are circular because the magnetic force acts perpendicular to the initial
velocity of the particles and as such it is a centripetal force which produces a circular
path. The fact that the circular paths are uniform shows that the particles are
experiencing a constant centripetal force with no resistance to their motion (travelling
in a vacuum) and they are moving at a constant speed. (2 marks)

(c) The magnetic force acting on the charged particle is given by F  Bqv. This creates
mv2 mv2 mv
a centripetal force i.e. Fc  . Therefore, Bqv  . Rearranging gives r  .
r r Bq
As can be seen from the equation, the radius of the curving path is proportional to the
mass and velocity of the particles, and inversely proportional to the charge of the particles
and the strength of the external magnetic field. (2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 317

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 317 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section II—Options

Question 32—Medical Physics

(a) (i) X-rays are made by exposing photographic film with X-rays produced using
cathode ray tubes. Both photographic film and cathode ray tubes were available
in 1895.

However, computerised axial tomography not only requires the use of a cathode
ray tube to produce X-rays, it also requires the use of electronic X-ray detectors
and sophisticated computer technology which was not available until 1972.
Hence, CAT scan imaging could not be developed until the required computer
technology was developed. (2 marks)

(ii) PET (positron emission tomography) provides functional information as ‘fuzzy’

images about specific target organs/structures within the body but cannot provide
detailed anatomical images, whereas CAT (computerised axial tomography)
provides detailed structural information about organs and structures of the body in
the form of high quality images of thin slices but cannot provide detailed functional
data.

For example, a PET scan of the brain can be used to detect regions of the brain
that are underactive whereas a CAT scan clearly shows the structure of the brain
without detecting the abnormality. For this reason CAT and PET are often used in
conjunction so that areas of abnormality can be more specifically located.
(2 marks)

(iii) PET is based on the detection of gamma radiation emitted from places within the
body where a specific radiopharmaceutical, which has been introduced to the
body via inhalation or injection, has been absorbed. The gamma rays are emitted
as a result of the positron decay of specifically chosen positron-emitting
radioisotopes. The positrons emitted from the radioactive nuclei (e.g. carbon 11,
oxygen 15, fluorine 18) annihilate with electrons in the body. Each annihilation
event produces two gamma rays which travel in opposite directions. It is these
gamma rays that are detected and used to make the image. The radioisotopes are
typically produced in a cyclotron.

CAT relies on the production of X-ray radiation which is directed through the
body. The X-rays are produced in a cathode ray tube. Electrons from a heated
cathode are accelerated by a strong electric field, to high velocity, towards an
anode. When the electrons strike the anode, they undergo rapid deceleration and
loss of kinetic energy. This deceleration of the electrons causes the production of
useful X-rays called Bremsstrahlung radiation. The desired range of frequencies
of X-rays used is determined by adjusting the potential difference between the
anode and the cathode and through the use of filters. (3 marks)

318 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 318 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(b) (i) Inside a person there are countless billions of hydrogen atoms. The nuclei of
these hydrogen atoms ‘spin’ and the axes of spin ‘wobbles’ like a spinning top.
This wobble is called precession. Prior to the radio pulses being administered into
the patient, a strong magnetic field is applied and the hydrogen nuclei are affected
by the field, such that the axes of their precession are either parallel or anti-
parallel to the field. The frequency of their precession under these conditions has
a defined value which is proportional to the strength of the magnetic field, called
the Larmor frequency. A gradient magnetic field is also applied which provides
small, but significant, variations in the strength of the magnetic field and hence
resonance frequencies of the hydrogen nuclei, across the patient’s body. The radio
pulses have a range of frequencies which match the frequencies of the precessing
hydrogen nuclei. Hydrogen nuclei absorb energy from the radio pulse that
matches (resonates with) the frequency of their precession. When the energy is
absorbed, the amplitude of the precession increases. This heightened energy state,
however, is unstable and the nuclei emit radio energy at the same frequency as
the radio energy absorbed from the pulse, causing them to ‘relax’ back to the
lower energy state. It is the emitted radio wave energy that is detected, measured
and used to produce the magnetic resonance images. (3 marks)

(ii) Several advances in physics have contributed to the development of magnetic

resonance imaging (MRI). These have included historical inventions such as
RADAR which refined the production and reception of radio waves using special
antennae and tuned circuits, and displaying the collected information as signals
on a cathode ray screen.

Advances in computer technology included the development of the microchip

which made it possible to process the large amounts of T1 and T2 data collected
from the radio receivers. Software needed to be developed to allow, for example,
the production of 3-D images that could be rotated to view in any direction and
for the viewing of only particular tissue signals so that images, of perhaps just the
blood vessels in the brain, could be made. The development of understanding
about the importance of the gradient field in the MRI machine made possible the
voxel by voxel scanning required for 3-D imaging.

Developments in magnetic technology, such as the discovery and use of high-

temperature superconductors in the electromagnetic coils of MRI machines, has
enhanced the capabilities of MRI because it readily allows for the production of
stronger, stable magnetic fields of the order of 1.5 to 3 Teslas and higher. The
signals from the precessing protons are greater at higher magnetic fields because
the ratio of parallel to anti-parallel alignment of the magnetic moments of the
hydrogen nuclei is greater at higher field intensities. This allows for stronger
signals from the body tissues and thus greater resolution in imaging. (3 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 319

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 319 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(c) In order to be useful in medical imaging, a radioisotope should be readily accessible,

produce penetrating radiation that can easily be detected, have a short half-life and
cause little to no harm to the body. Tc99m has all of these properties.
• Water solubility. This is a useful feature because as a component of soluble salts,
Tc99m is readily extracted from it using ‘COW’-containing insoluble salts of
radioactive molybdenum (Mo99). The water solubility also makes the
radiopharmaceutical produced from the Tc99m easy to administer into the body
via the blood.
• Radioactivity. Tc99m emits gamma rays when it decays to Tc99. These gamma
rays are useful because they are highly penetrating, can be detected using a gamma
camera and are used to create an image.
• Short nuclear and biological half-life. The nuclear half-life of Tc99m is about 6
hours. In addition, because Tc99 is water soluble it is readily excreted via the
kidneys in the urine. Thus it also has a short biological half-life. Together, these
properties are useful because after a short period of time the person is effectively
no longer radioactive. This reduces the likelihood of tissue damage to them and
reduces the time they need to be isolated from other people. (3 marks)

(d) Endoscopes have a long thin tube that is surgically inserted into the body of a patient
via a small hole. Inside the tube, there are two types of bundles of optical fibres which
are used when obtaining images of internal organs. Incoherent bundles of optical fibres
deliver light using the principle of total internal reflection, into the body, to provide
illumination of the organs to be viewed. The fibres in these bundles are not specifically
ordered (see the diagram) because they are only delivering the light. On the other hand,
the optical fibres used to ‘collect’ various pieces of the image must be in the same
order at both ends (see the diagram). This is because each tiny fibre reflects light from
only a small view of the organ being imaged by the camera (or eyepiece) at the outside
end. In this sense, each piece of the image is like a pixel. For a clear image to be
formed, the fibres (hence pixels) must be in the same precise location at the camera end
as they are at the organ end. The light reflected from the internal organs travels along
each fibre in the coherent bundle via total internal reflection. This total internal
reflection is achieved in all of the optical fibres, in both types of bundles, because the
fibres are constructed from at least two layers of very clear glass with different
refractive indices. The central core of the fibres has a higher refractive index than the
glass surrounding it. Since the fibres are extremely thin, the angle of incidence of light
travelling through the fibres is so large that it is always greater than the critical angle
for the surface between the two different layers of glass. Hence, the light is totally
internally reflected from the boundary between the layers and can travel from one end
of the fibres to the other with minimal loss of intensity.

1 1 1 2
2 2 2 3
3 3 3 1
Coherent Incoherent (3 marks)

320 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 320 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(e) There are three main types of ultrasound imaging techniques.

A-scans (amplitude scans) are used to make accurate measurements of distances.

This type of scan does not result in a picture. It produces a reflection intensity image in
which the peaks of reflected ultrasound can be used to determine distances to specific
boundaries, e.g. between the retina and the back of the eye. This is useful in determining
if the retina is attached or detached.

B-scans (brightness scans) are where the ultrasound transducer head may have one
piezoelectric crystal (or many) to make the ultrasound waves. If there is just one crystal
in the transducer, the transducer is rocked over the surface of the skin to produce an
image of the structures below. The quality of the image is determined by the skill of the
sonographer in rocking the transducer. Multi-crystal transducers can be held stationary
over the expected location of the organ to be examined. Artificially controlled rocking
of an ultrasound beam is achieved by electronic phasing of the signal from each of the
piezoelectric crystals. This method produces straight waves, which provide much
clearer images of structures within the body. B-scans can be used to produce still
‘pictures’ and multiple images taken over time can be sequenced to produce ‘video
images’ of structures within the body. These images allow the health of a range of
organs/tissues to be determined from measurements of their size and identification of
abnormal shapes, e.g. the growth rate of a foetus from the size of its head. Muscle
tears and inflammation of tendons and other soft tissue abnormalities such as breast
tumours and ovarian cysts can also be determined.

Improvements in resolution, through the use of higher frequencies and improved

transducer technology, have allowed significant improvement in the size of structures
that can be identified and hence the quality of ultrasound images (e.g. amazingly
detailed 3-D ‘photos’ and 4-D ‘video’ of foetuses while still in the womb). However,
this use of higher frequencies has its limitations since, as frequency increases,
attenuation increases, reducing the strength of the reflections to be detected by the
transducer. Resolution issues can therefore make the detection of very small
abnormalities such as tiny breast tumours unlikely.

Doppler ultrasound scans can be used to ‘view’ and make real-time video images
showing the movement of fluids and surfaces inside the body. Examples include blood
flow in arteries and inside the heart and movements of heart muscles and valves.
In terms of diagnosis, this type of motion sensing can be used to detect heart health and
issues such as leaking heart valves and constrictions in arteries. Colour enhancement
of images is used to ‘see’ the direction and speed of blood flow in the images produced.
It can also be used to add audio to video files, e.g. to hear the heartbeat of a foetus.
Difficulties in positioning the ultrasound probe to get the best angle on the movement
being probed can limit the use of this technique.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 321

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 321 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Ultrasound is, however, of little to no use in imaging the lungs, stomach and intestines
due to the presence of air. The large difference in acoustic impedance between the air
and the surrounding tissue effectively prevents the ultrasound from entering these areas
and hence information about then is extremely limited. This air surface interface issue
is also the reason for the need to apply acoustic coupling gel between the transducer
and the skin; otherwise very little ultrasound would enter the body. Ultrasound is also
of little use for imaging structures behind bone such as the brain and the regions inside
joints. For example, almost no ultrasound penetrates through the skull and so
ultrasound is not effective for imaging the brain. Very low reflection percentages at
tissue boundaries that have the same or very similar acoustic impedance do not allow
for clear distinction on the image and hence limit the diagnostic ability for such
situations. (6 marks)

Question 33—Astrophysics
(a) (i) Photometry is the process of determining the distance away from Earth of
celestial objects by measuring the light received from them.
d
The distance modulus formula is M = m 5 log10 , where M is the measurement
10
of the absolute magnitude of a star, m is the measurement of its apparent
magnitude and d is its distance away from us (Earth). In order to determine d
using this method, both M and m are required. (1 mark)
(ii) There are similarities between the methods used by astronomers to obtain
spectroscopic and photometric data, and also differences. In each procedure the
objective of a telescope catches photons from the star, focuses them to a narrow
beam and sends them to a charge-coupled device (CCD) within a ‘black box’,
which counts them accurately. The reading is then converted by the computer into
a measurement of m, the apparent magnitude of the celestial object being
observed.
In the case of spectroscopic data, all the incoming photons entering the black box
pass through one of two coloured filters. In this course, the filters are yellow-green
(visual filter) and blue (photographic filter). The filters are regularly alternated.
The apparent magnitude of the star as viewed through these filters will almost
always be different. The colour index of the target star is defined using the formula:
CI  B – V, which in this case becomes CI  mB – mV. (If, in fact, mB  mV it
means that the star is white, an A0, as the colour index is an excellent way to
determine the spectral class of the star.)
In the case of the photometric data, the light beam is passed through a diffraction
grating to disperse the light into its spectrum. A thin collimator then moves across
the spectrum very rapidly and repeatedly, allowing only a very narrow band of
frequencies at any time to be passed to the CCD for counting. Each time the same
band is measured increases the accuracy of the count, and when the observation
interval is over the individual points of data are positioned on an apparent
magnitude/wavelength graph called a spectrogram. In appearance this graph is an

322 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 322 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

absorption spectrum, a blackbody curve superimposed by a large number of ‘valleys’

of distinct depths, allowing the star’s spectral class to be found. (4 marks)
(Teachers/students should note Syllabus 9.7.3, column 3, dot point 2, and 9.7.4,
column 3 dot point 2. The CLEA exercises Spectral Classification and
Photometric Photometry of the Pleiades are interesting, instructive ways for
students to satisfy these requirements.)
(b) (i) The resolution of a telescope is defined as its ability to observe fine detail, i.e. to be
able to separate two objects that are very close. Problems associated with ground-
based optical astronomy that reduce their resolution include seeing and attenuation.
Seeing is the apparent movement of target celestial objects due to atmospheric
effects such as turbulence. Even our eyes can notice stars twinkling and changing
colour, and this effect is greatly increased when they are observed through
powerful telescopes. Since the image is continually changing, fine details are
difficult to observe.
Attenuation refers to the selective scattering by the air of some frequencies of
light more than others, distorting the colour of the object being observed.
Molecules in the atmosphere scatter short wavelengths far more than longer ones,
the reason the sky is blue. The lower towards the horizon a telescope is
observing, the further light has to pass through the air, increasing this effect,
which is why the sun appears red at dawn or dusk. (3 marks)
(ii) The resolution of ground-based telescopes can be improved in several ways,
including adaptive optics (that corrects for the problem of seeing), and
interferometry, where data received by separated individual objectives is
combined by computers, yielding an image with the resolution of a single
objective with a diameter equal to their distance apart.
(c) (i)
Neutron Black hole
Main sequence star/pulsar
star

evolves < ~8 Mo > ~8 Mo

Red giant Mass?

White dwarf

evolves

Mass? Supernova

> 1.4 Mo
< 1.4 Mo

Planetary nebula

(2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 323

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 323 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(ii) When stars form within nebulae, they are initially composed of the material of
the nebula, almost entirely hydrogen (80%) and helium (20%). Once fusion
reactions have begun within the cores of stars, the hydrogen nuclei there join,
forming helium and releasing a vast amount of energy. When the hydrogen within
the core is exhausted, the star evolves. Many stars, including the Sun, become red
giants, fusing helium to carbon in the central core, and more hydrogen into
helium in a surrounding shell. Stars far more massive than the Sun evolve further,
and fusion reactions permit the synthesis of many other elements, but only as far
as iron.
The most significant events known in the universe that allow so many other
elements to be synthesised are supernovae. When the nuclear fuel of stars with
very large masses is exhausted so the radiation pressure can no longer restrain the
gravitational pressure crushing inwards, the star implodes. Atoms collapse into
nuclei and the gigantic loss of gravitational potential energy is converted into
heat resulting in a supernova, an explosion lasting for several weeks, during
which fusion reactions do not need to be exothermic. In this situation the massive
explosion not only synthesises all naturally occurring elements but a large
number of highly unstable isotopes as well, blasting them off in all directions to
become the metals scattered like fine dust in the nebulae where new stars may
form eventually, with new planets as well.
Supernovae are thought to be the only way these elements can ever become
available. (3 marks)
(d) (i)
E Position 1
1 AU

Earth’s orbit S
Sun
Star

F Position 2 (6 months later)

The distance to nearby stars is frequently measured by trigonometric parallax.

The star is observed through a telescope with a very accurate direction marker,
both ‘now’, when at position 1, and again six months later, when the Earth is on
the opposite side of the Sun. This provides the largest base for observing the star
currently available. The slight difference between the two measured readings is
called the 6-month parallax angle of the star. One parsec is defined to be the
distance away for which the average radius of Earth’s solar orbit subtends an
angle of exactly 1 arcsecond. This, of course, provides a baseline of 1 AU
(astronomical unit), so the measured 6-month parallax angle must be halved to
determine the true 3-month parallax angle. The distance away of that star (in
1
parsec) is found using d = . (3 marks)
p"

324 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 324 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(ii) Again, ground-based telescopes are at a disadvantage when using trigonometric

parallax to measure the distances to stars because atmospheric effects limit their
resolution. As a consequence, the furthest distance that can be determined using
CHAPTER 13 • 2012 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
parallax is just 30 pc. (1 mark)

(e)
(e) The
Thebinary
binary consists
consists of two stars,
of two stars,Star
StarA,
A,an
anF5
F5type,
type,and
andStar
StarB,B,
anan
A4A4 type.
type.
I1 m m
By comparing their apparent magnitudes using I1 1= 100 m22 2 m11 , we find
By comparing their apparent magnitudes using I2 1 5 100 5 ,
I2 5
IA IA13.16  13.16
0.34 2 0.34
we1= 100 1 5 100
find . .
IB IB 5 5
This
This shows
shows that
that Star
StarAAisis134 000
134 000 times brighter than
than Star
Star B. Since both
B. Since both stars are the
same distancefrom
samedistance fromEarth,
Earth,clearly
clearlystar
starBBmust
mustbe beaawhite
whitedwarf,
dwarf, while
while Star A
A is
is aa
yellow-white
yellow-white main
main sequence
sequence star.
star.This
This is confi
confirmed by the
rmed by the data for their luminosities
relative
relativetotothe
theSun,
Sun,and
andalso
alsousing
using the
theH-R
H-Rdiagram.
diagram.Their
Their positions
positions should
should be
be marked
marked
on
onthe
thegiven
givenH-RH-Rdiagram.
diagram.
Comparing the luminosities of Star A and the Sun, given to be 7.3 : 1, allows the
Comparing the luminosities of Star A and the Sun, given to be 7.3 : 1, allows the absolute
absolute magnitude of Star A to be determined in the same way. Taking the absolute
magnitude of Star A to be determined in the same way. Taking the absolute magnitude of
magnitude of the Sun to be 5, the absolute magnitude of Star A is shown to be 2.84.
the Sun to be 5, the absolute magnitude of Star A is shown to be 2.84. The H-R diagram
The H-R diagram confirms this value for an F5 star. The distance formula used to
confirms this value for an F5 star. The distance formuladused to determine the distance
d
determine the distance of the binary
d is M = m 5 log10 d 2.84 = 0.34 5 log10 ,
of the binary is M 5 m 5 log10 6 2.84 5 0.34 5 log1010 , so d 5 3.16 pc. 10
so d  3.16 pc. 10 10
The Light Curve shows that the period of the variable is 40 years. It also shows that the
The Light Curve shows that the period of the variable is 40 years. It also shows that the
eclipse causes total occlusion, since the base of each trough is horizontal. The smaller
eclipse causes total occlusion, since the base of each trough is horizontal. The smaller
dips correspond to when Star B is eclipsed; Star A is eclipsed when the larger dips are
dips correspond to when Star B is eclipsed; Star A is eclipsed when the larger dips
shown.
are shown.
The combined mass of the two stars can also be approximated, given their average
The combined
separation of 2.2mass
 10of9 the
km two stars
 2.2  can
1012also be approximated,
m, while given
T  40  365 their
 24  average
3600
9 12
separation of 2.2 3 10 km 5 2.2 3 10 m, while T 5401.262 3 365 3 24
9 3 3600
 10 s.
5 1.262 3 109 s.
4p2a3 4p2 1 2.2 3 1012 2 3
M1 1 M2 5 5 5 3.96 3 1030 kg
GT 2 1 6.67 3 1011 2 1 1.262 3 109 2 2
Finally, approximating the orbits of the two stars about their common centre of mass,
2pa
their average orbital speed can be estimated: v 5
T
2p 1 2.2 3 1012 2
5
1 1.262 3 109 2

5 1.095 3 104 m s21. (6(6marks)

marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 325

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 325 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 11 • 2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34—From Quanta to Quarks

(a) (i) Bohr described the hydrogen electron as having allowable energy levels
(stationary states) with a quantised angular momentum given by the formula mvr
nh
 mvr  , where n is an integer 1, 2, 3 and so on, and h is Planck’s constant.
2π
When the electron moved from a higher energy level to a lower energy level, a
photon of light was emitted with an energy corresponding to the difference
between the two allowable energy levels, i.e. hf  Ei  Ef. Bohr’s model
accurately predicted the Balmer series of spectral lines for hydrogen with the
electron moving from a higher energy level down to the n  2 stationary state, as
shown in the diagram.
400 nm 700 nm

n56
n55
n54
n53

n52

n51

(3 marks)
(ii) Two observations from atomic emission spectra that could not be fully explained.
• The model only worked well for hydrogen and could not accurately describe
the emission spectra of larger atoms.
• The model could not explain the relative intensity of the spectral lines
observed, i.e. how bright each spectral line appeared. (2 marks)
(b) (i) For an uncontrolled nuclear chain reaction there must be a sufficient concentration
and arrangement of fissionable nuclei (a critical mass), e.g. U-235 or Pu-239, and
neutrons must be produced in the fission and go on to create fission in another
fissionable nucleus with the number of neutrons yielded increasing rapidly and
causing further fission reactions. (3 marks)
(ii) In order to provide the energy released in the radioactive decay, the mass of the
parent radioactive nucleus must be greater than the combined mass of the nucleus of
the daughter element forming and the emitted radiation (,  or ). Since E  mc2,
the energy for the decay comes from the loss of mass which occurs as the
radioactive nucleus decays. The loss of mass is converted to kinetic energy carried
by the radioactive emission and daughter nucleus formed. (3 marks)
(c) The neutron has no charge and as such experiences no electrical interactions with
electrons and the atomic nuclei of the sample being studied. This allows them to
penetrate deeply into a sample. According to the deBroglie equation, the wavelength of a
h
matter particle is given by the equation   , where h is Planck’s constant and p is the
p
momentum of the particle. In order to study the metal crystal a beam of neutrons, usually
from a nuclear reactor or spallation, are passed through guides to produce a monochromatic

326 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 326 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2012 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

beam (single wavelength). This beam is then directed at the target metal crystal. Since
the neutron wavelength is very small, they can be used to locate the position of the
atomic nuclei within the metal crystal. The neutrons are scattered in their interactions
with nuclei and undergo diffraction and interference to allow the location and size of the
nuclei to be determined. The information collected can also reveal the magnetic
properties and movement of the nuclei. (4 marks)
(d) (i) Both particles are colour charge neutral and composed of three quarks which
exchange gluons to combine via the strong interaction. The particles are very
similar in mass with the neutron just a little more massive due to the down quark
being more massive than an up quark. The up quark has an electric charge of
 2 while the down quark is  1 . This results in an electric charge of +1 for the
3 3
proton and no net charge on the neutron. Both particles have an intrinsic angular
momentum (spin) of 1 .
2
u proton neutron u
u d
d d
(3 marks)
(ii) Accelerators are used to deliver energy to matter particles, e.g. electrons and protons.
This raises the velocity of the particles until they are approaching the speed of light.
As the speed of the particles begins to approach the speed of light, much of the energy
being delivered by the accelerator goes to increasing the relativistic mass of the
particles. These high-energy particles are then directed at a target or, as in the Large
Hadron Collider (LHC), protons are collided with anti-protons travelling in the
opposite direction. These high-energy collisions yield an array of subatomic particles
with many of them having a larger mass than the rest mass of a proton. In this way
the accelerators provide enough energy to the normal matter particles to allow the
study of other particles that do not normally exist. These studies with accelerators
have allowed the true building blocks of atoms, and the interactions between them, to
be studied and allowed testing of the ideas of the present Standard Model. (2 marks)
(e) The conservation laws have been fundamental to the development of atomic theory from
the earliest times with many early scientists using conservation of mass to develop their
model of atoms, e.g. John Dalton.
Einstein’s equation, E  mc2, explained where the energy for radioactive emissions
came from as the decaying nucleus was heavier than the combined mass of the daughter
nuclei and radioactive emission. This relationship between mass and energy became
fundamental to the future studies of atoms.
Chadwick used conservation of momentum and energy in his famous experiment to
confirm the existence of the neutron which, at the time, was considered to complete our
understanding of atomic structure.
The neutrino was originally proposed by Wolfgang Pauli in an attempt to explain the
so-called missing energy in -decay using conservation of momentum, energy and spin
as the basis for his proposal.
The conservation laws continue to play an important role in predicting the behaviour and
nature of matter and have provided a means to not only describe atoms but to also allow
the development of a theory on how matter and the universe came to be as we find it
today. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 327

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 327 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 12

2013
H I G H E R S C H O O L C E R T I F I C AT E
E X A M I N AT I O N

Physics

General Instructions Total marks – 100

• Reading time – 5 minutes
Section I Pages 2–27
• Working time – 3 hours
75 marks
• Write using black or blue pen
Black pen is preferred This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
• Draw diagrams using pencil Part A – 20 marks
• Board-approved calculators may • Attempt Questions 1–20
be used
• Allow about 35 minutes for this part
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and
Periodic Table are provided at Part B – 55 marks
the back of this paper • Attempt Questions 21–31
• Write your Centre Number and • Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part
Student Number where required
at the top of
pages 13, 17, 19, 23 and 25 Section II Pages 29–39
25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 32–36
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

2710 328 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 328 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 An investigation is designed to determine the size of the generated current when the
strength of a magnet is varied.

Which is the independent variable for this investigation?

(A) Speed of the magnet

(B) Strength of the magnet
(C) Size of the generated current
(D) Distance between the coil and the magnet

2 This diagram shows the path of a spacecraft as it goes past Jupiter and heads towards
Saturn.

Spacecraft
To Saturn

NOT TO
SCALE
Jupiter

Which effect influences the path of the spacecraft?

(A) Frictional
(B) Motor
(C) Photoelectric
(D) Slingshot

– 2 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 329

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 329 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

3 The diagram shows equipment attached to a battery.

Magnetic field lines

Current
Conducting
liquid
N
Y

DC power
source
Metal dish

In which direction will the wire XY move?

(A) Clockwise
(B) Anticlockwise
(C) Towards the magnet
(D) Away from the magnet

4 Students performed an investigation to determine the initial velocity of a projectile.

Which row correctly identifies a hazard of this investigation and a related precaution?

Hazard Safety precaution

(A) flying projectile wearing safety glasses
(B) range of projectile measuring the range with a tape measure
(C) enclosed shoes limiting the range of the projectile
(D) safety glasses flying projectile

330 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 3 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 330 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

5 The diagram represents an experiment that was conducted by Hertz.

Spark
DC power
source

Transmitter Receiver

What was Hertz trying to investigate?

(A) Photoelectric effect

(B) Electrical induction
(C) Black body radiation
(D) Properties of radio waves

6 This diagram shows the path of a cannonball, fired from a cannon.

Which set of vectors represents the horizontal and vertical components of the
cannonball’s velocity along the path?

Horizontal Vertical

(A) ⎯→ → → ⎯→ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

(B) ⎯→ → → ⎯→ ↑ ⏐
↑ ↓
⏐ ↓

(D) ⎯→ ⎯→ ⎯→ ⎯→ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

– 4 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 331

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 331 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

7 Eddy currents are a major source of energy loss in an iron core transformer.

What is one way to minimise this energy loss?

(A) Laminate the iron core with an insulator

(B) Put fewer turns of wire in the primary coil
(C) Operate the transformer with a higher current
(D) Decrease the distance between the primary and secondary coils

8 Which of the diagrams best represents an example of an inertial frame of reference?

(A) (B)

a
v

9 Three potentially hazardous conditions that can be experienced by astronauts in space are
listed.
I Extreme heat
II Weightlessness
III Communication blackout

Which combination of these conditions is associated with safe re-entry of a manned

spacecraft?

(A) I and II only

(B) I and III only
(C) II and III only
(D) I, II and III

332 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS– 5 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 332 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

10 The diagram represents the transfer of electrical energy from a power station to a laptop
computer.

Power Regional Local In-home

station substation substation laptop

Which flow diagram shows the correct use of transformers in this transfer?

(A) Step-down Step-up Step-up Step-down

(B) Step-down Step-down Step-up Step-up

(C) Step-up Step-down Step-down Step-down

(D) Step-up Step-up Step-down Step-up

11 Why did the Braggs use X-rays to determine the crystal structure of metals?

(A) X-rays have a low frequency.

(B) X-rays have a short wavelength.
(C) X-rays can pass through metals.
(D) X-rays travel at the speed of light.

12 Why is a magnet able to hover above a superconductor that is below its critical
temperature?

(A) The superconductor excludes magnetic flux.

(B) The superconductor loses conductive properties when placed in a magnetic field.
(C) The eddy current in the superconductor creates a potential difference between the
magnet and the superconductor.
(D) The gravitational force on the magnet is balanced by the force created by the crystal
lattice structure of the superconductor.

– 6 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 333

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 333 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

13 Different magnetic fields are passing through two copper rings, P and Q, as shown.

P Q

Which row of the table correctly identifies the ring with the greater magnetic flux and the
ring with the greater magnetic flux density?

Greater magnetic flux Greater magnetic flux density

(A) P P
(B) Q Q
(C) P Q
(D) Q P

334 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 7 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 334 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

14 Two charged plates are initially separated by a distance as shown in the diagram.

Distance

The potential difference between the plates remains constant.

Which of the graphs best represents the change in electric field strength as the distance
between the two plates is increased?

(A) (B)
Electric field

Electric field
strength

strength

Distance Distance

Electric field
strength

strength

Distance Distance

– 8 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 335

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 335 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

15 The diagram shows a single-loop motor.

30° Y

N
S

DC power supply

The equations τ = nBIA cos θ and F = BI l sin ω can be used to calculate the torque in
the motor and the force on the length of wire W X respectively.

What angles are represented by θ and ω in the above equations?

θ ω
(A) 30° 90°
(B) 30° 30°
(C) 60° 90°
(D) 60° 30°

16 Which physical phenomenon allows current to flow through a metal wire?

(A) Holes can move through a wire.

(B) Charged atoms can move through a wire.
(C) Electrons in a fully filled band can carry charge through a wire.
(D) Electrons in a partially filled band can carry charge through a wire.

336 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 9 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 336 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

17 Which graph best represents the change in torque for a DC motor, with a radial magnetic
field, from start up to operating speed?

(A) Torque

Motor speed

(B) Torque

Motor speed

(D) Torque

Motor speed

18 Michelson and Morley conducted an experiment to measure the relative velocity of the
Earth through the aether.

Why is the result of the experiment significant?

(A) The result supported Michelson and Morley’s hypothesis.

(B) The result showed their hypothesis was incorrect because their investigation was
not accurate enough.
(C) The failure to detect the expected relative velocity contributed to the development
of special relativity.
(D) The successful verification of the expected relative velocity contributed to the
development of special relativity.

– 10 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 337

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 337 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

19 A spaceship moves close to the speed of light, relative to a planet.

The rest-frame length of the spaceship can be determined by an observer who is

(A) on the spaceship measuring the time taken for light to travel between two points on
the planet.
(B) on the planet measuring the time taken for light to travel from the front to the back
of the spaceship.
(C) on the spaceship measuring the time taken for light to travel from the front to the
back of the spaceship.
(D) on the planet measuring the difference in the arrival time of light from the front and
the back of the spaceship.

20 The graph shows the maximum kinetic energy (E) with which photoelectrons are emitted
as a function of frequency ( f ) for two different metals X and Y.

E
X Y

0 5 10 15 f (× 1014 Hz)

The metals are illuminated with light of wavelength 450 nm.

What would be the effect of doubling the intensity of this light without changing the
wavelength?

(A) For metal X, the number of photoelectrons emitted would not change but the
maximum kinetic energy would increase.
(B) For metal X, the number of photoelectrons emitted would increase but the
maximum kinetic energy would remain unchanged.
(C) For both metals X and Y, the number of photoelectrons emitted would not change
but the maximum kinetic energy would increase.
(D) For both metals X and Y, the number of photoelectrons emitted would increase but
the maximum kinetic energy would remain unchanged.

338 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 11 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 338 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2013 HIGHER SCHOOL CER TIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 55 marks
Attempt Questions 21–31 Student Number
Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes f or this part

Answer the questions in the spaces provided. These spaces provide guidance for the expected
length of response.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Question 21 (4 marks)

During the course you studied one of the following scientists who has contributed to
the development of space exploration:

• Tsiolkovsky • Esnault-Pelterie
• Oberth • O’Neill
• Goddard • von Braun

Name of scientist studied: .................................................................

(a) Outline ONE contribution made by the named scientist to the development of 2
space exploration.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Outline how to ensure that secondary sources of information about the scientist 2
are reliable.

...............................................................................................................................

2711 – 13 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 339

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 339 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 22 (3 marks)

This set of data was obtained from a motion investigation to determine the acceleration 3
due to gravity on a planet other than Earth.

Time (s) Vertical velocity (m s–1)

0.60
0.02

1.00
0.09

1.20
0.12

1.40
0.17

1.80
0.23

Plot the data from the table, and then calculate the acceleration.

0.3
Vertical velocity (m s–1)

0
0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00
Time (s)

.........................................................................................................................................

340 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 14 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 340 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 23 (5 marks)

A planet orbits the star, Pollux, at a distance of 1.64 astronomical units (AU). It takes
590 Earth days to complete one orbit.

(a) Why does the mass of the planet play NO role in determining its orbital speed 2
around Pollux?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) A satellite orbits Pollux with a period of 365 Earth days.

How far is the satellite from Pollux in astronomical units (AU)?

...............................................................................................................................

– 15 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 341

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 341 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2013 HIGHER SCHOOL CER TIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 24 (5 marks)

With the aid of a diagram, explain how a photocell works.

.........................................................................................................................................

2712 342 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 17 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 342 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 25 (4 marks)

P, Q and R are straight current-carrying conductors.

Conductors P and R are fixed and unable to move. Conductor Q is free to move.

P Q R

1m 6A 2A 2A

5 mm 2.5 mm

(a) In which direction will the conductor Q move as a result of the current flow in P 1
and R?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Calculate the magnitude of the force experienced by Q as a result of the currents 3
through P and R.

...............................................................................................................................

– 18 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 343

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 343 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2013 HIGHER SCHOOL CER TIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 26 (5 marks)
An electric field is produced between two charged parallel plates, M and N.

M
N

(a) The plates, M and N, are 1.0 cm apart and have an electric field of 15 V m–1. 2
Calculate the potential difference between the plates.
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(b) The potential difference is now changed and a magnetic field of 0.5 T is placed 3
perpendicular to the plates, as shown in the diagram below.

M
Electron

Determine the magnitude and direction of the electric field required to allow the
electron to travel through undeflected, if the electron is moving at 1 × 104 m s–1.

...............................................................................................................................

2713 344 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 19 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 344 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 27 (7 marks)
(a) A generator starts at the position shown and is rotated by one revolution in the 3
first second. It is then rotated by two revolutions in the next second.

N motion

Sketch a graph on the axes showing the electromotive force (emf) produced by
this generator for these two seconds.

emf

0 time (s)
1 2

Question
Question 27 continues
27 continues on page 21

– 20 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 345

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 345 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 27 (continued)

(b) An electric motor can be used to propel a vehicle. The electric motor can be 4
made to operate as a generator when the vehicle is moving. This will have a
braking effect on the vehicle.

Explain the physics principles involved in the propelling and braking of this
vehicle.

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 27

346 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 21 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 346 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2013 HIGHER SCHOOL CER TIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 28 (6 marks)

Assess Einstein’s contribution to quantum theory.

.........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................

2714 – 23 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 347

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 347 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 29 (5 marks)

A 0.05 kg mass is lifted at a constant speed by a DC motor. The motor has a coil of
100 turns in a 0.1 T magnetic field. The area of the coil is 0.0012 m2. The motor shaft
has a radius of 0.004 m.

Motor
Motor shaft

Table
String

Mass

(a) Determine the force needed to lift the mass. 2

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Calculate the minimum current required in the coil to lift the mass. 3

...............................................................................................................................

348 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 24 –

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 348 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2013 HIGHER SCHOOL CER TIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I – Part B (continued)

Student Number

Question 30 (4 marks)

The diagram shows a futuristic space station designed to simulate gravity in a

weightless environment.

NOT TO
SCALE

Rotation

Astronaut

(a) Explain how rotating the space station simulates gravity for the astronaut.
2

...............................................................................................................................

Question 30 continues
Question on page 26
30 continues

2715 – 25 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 349

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 349 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 30 (continued)

(b) Calculate the rotational speed that a space station with a diameter of 550 m would 2
need for astronauts to experience 1 g of acceleration.

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 30

350 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 26 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 350 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 31 (7 marks)

Explain how changing the electrical properties of materials has led to the development 7
of new technologies which can benefit society.

.........................................................................................................................................

End of Question 31

– 27 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 351

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 351 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2013 HIGHER SCHOOL CER TIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 32–36
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

For Question 32
• answer parts (a)–(c) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 1.
• answer parts (d)–(f) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Extra writing booklets are available.

For Questions 33, 34 and 36

• answer parts (a)–(d) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 1.
• answer parts (e)–(f) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Extra writing booklets are available.

For Question 35
• answer parts (a)–(c) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 1.
• answer parts (d)–(e) of the question in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Extra writing booklets are available.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Pages

Question 32 Geophysics ...........................................................................

(Not included in this reproduction) 30–31

Question 33 Medical Physics ................................................................... 32–33

Question 34 Astrophysics ......................................................................... 34–35

Question 35 From Quanta to Quarks ............................................................. 36

Question 36 The Age of Silicon ...............................................................

(Not included in this reproduction) 37–39

2716 352 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 29 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 352 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 33 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(d) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) Outline differences between X-ray images and CAT scans. 3

(b) Outline a first-hand investigation to demonstrate the transfer of light by optical 2

fibres.

(d) (i) How is the orientation of the magnetic axis of a hydrogen nucleus 2
affected by the application of a strong magnetic field during an MRI
scan?

(ii) Explain the difference in the relaxation time of hydrogen in water and 3
the relaxation time of hydrogen in other molecules.

Question 33 continues
Question on page 33
33 continues

– 32 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 353

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 353 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 33 (continued)

Answer parts (e)–(f) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(e) (i) How is the Doppler effect used in ultrasonics to investigate blood flow 3
characteristics?

(ii) Outline TWO technologies that are required for an ultrasound scan. 3

(f) The data set gives information about a variety of radioactive isotopes, some of 6
which can be used in diagnostic tools for medicine.

Radioactive isotope Radiation emitted Half life

Fluorine-18 β+ 109.77 minutes

Strontium-90 β 28.8 years

Carbon-14 β 5730 years

Technetium-99m γ 6 hours

Cobalt-60 γ 5.27 years

Using the information in the table, justify which radioactive isotopes are suitable
for use in diagnostic imaging techniques.

End of Question 33

354 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 33 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 354 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 34 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a)–(d) in Section II Answer Booklet 1.

(a) Describe an investigation that can be used to show why it is desirable in terms of 3
sensitivity for a telescope to have a larger diameter lens.

(b) Matar is a star in the same spectral class as the Sun, yet it has four times the
mass of the Sun.

(i) Draw a labelled Hertzsprung–Russell (H–R) diagram, and mark the 3

position of Matar on the diagram with an X.

(ii) Contrast the physical properties, other than mass, of Matar and the Sun. 2

(c) Describe the dominant nuclear reaction in an A2 main sequence star. 3

(d) Describe the transition process of a G2 main sequence star, such as the Sun, 3
evolving into a red giant.

Question 34 continues
Question on page 35
34 continues

– 34 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 355

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 355 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 (continued)

Answer parts (e)–(f) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.

(e) The graphs give information that could be used to calculate the distance from
Earth to a Type 1 Cepheid Variable.

Light Curve for the Cepheid

6.0
Apparent magnitudes

6.5

7.0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Time (days)

The Period-Luminosity Relationship

–6

Absolute magnitudes

–5

–4

–3

–2

–1

2.5 5 10 20 40 80

Period (days)

(i) The star is claimed to be approximately 1260 parsecs from Earth. 3

Show how this claim is supported or refuted by the information in the

graphs.

(ii) State an advantage and a disadvantage of using the graphs above 2

to calculate the distance to a star.

(f) How is light analysed, using physics principles, in order to determine the 6
standard properties for the main sequence stars of Spectral Class A shown in this
table?

Effective
Spectral
Temperature Colour Mass/MassSun Luminosity/LuminositySun
Class
(K)

A 7500 – 10 000 White 2.0 – 3.0 8 – 55

End of Question 34

356 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 35 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 356 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Question 35 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 2marks) 013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS
Question 35 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)
Question 35 —
Answer parts FrominQuanta
(a)–(c) Section to II Quarks (25 marks)
Answer Booklet 1.
Question
Answer
Question 35
35 —
parts — From
(a)–(c)
Fromin Quanta
Section to II Quarks
Answer Booklet
(25
(25 marks) 1.
Answer parts (a)–(c) inQuanta
Section to II Quarks
Answer Booklet marks) 1.
(a)
Answer (i) Outline theSection
key features of the Rutherford model of the atom. 2
Answer parts
parts (a)–(c)
(a)–(c) in
in Section II II Answer
Answer Booklet
Booklet 1. 1.
(a) (i) Outline the key features of the Rutherford model of the atom. 2
(a) (i) Outline the key features of the Rutherford
(ii) Explain how the Bohr model of the atom overcomes an identified model of the atom. 23
(a)
(a) (ii)
(i) limitation
(i) Explain
Outline
Outline the
the
ofkey
how thefeatures
keythe
Rutherford
Bohr of
features model
of
model
the of ofthetheatom
the Rutherford
Rutherford
atom.
model
modelovercomes
of
of the an identified
the atom.
atom. 322
(ii) Explain how the Bohr model
limitation of the Rutherford model of the atom. of the atom overcomes an identified 3
(ii) limitation of the Rutherford model of the atom. 33
(ii) Explain
Explain how how thethe Bohr Bohr model
model of of the
the atom
atom overcomes
overcomes an an identified
identified
(b) This equation describes
limitation a nuclear reaction.of the atom.
limitation ofof the
the Rutherford
Rutherford model model of the atom.
(b) This equation describes a nuclear reaction.
(b) This equation describes
235 a1 nuclear141 reaction. 92
U + n → Ba + 36 Kr + 3 10 n
(b) This equation describes
92
235 a 0 nuclear reaction.
56
(b) This equation describes
92
U + a10nuclearn → 141 Ba + 36
reaction.
56
92
Kr + 3 10 n
235 1 141 92
92
+ 0 n → 56 Ba + Mass
U Particle Kr + 3 1 n
36 (amu) 0
235
235
92 U +
+235 110 nn →
U Particle →
141
141 Ba + Mass
56 Ba + 235.0439
92
36 Kr +
92 Kr(amu)
+ 33 110 nn
92 92 0
U
Particle 56 Mass
36 (amu) 0
235
141 U
Particle
92 Ba
235.0439
Mass (amu)
235
Particle
56 U 140.9144
Mass (amu)
235.0439
92
141
235
92 U
56
Ba 140.9144
235.0439
92 Kr
235
141
36 U
Ba 91.9263
235.0439
140.9144
92
56
141 Kr
1 Ba
36
91.9263
140.9144
141
92
56 n
Ba
Kr 1.008 665
140.9144
91.9263
10
56
36
92 n 1.008 665
91.9263
10 Kr
92
36
360
Kr
n 91.9263
1.008 665
(i) Use the data above 1 to calculate the energy released in this reaction.
1.008 665 3
10 n
(i) Use the data above n 1.008 665
0 to calculate the energy released in this reaction. 3
(i) Apply
(ii) Use theEinstein’s
data above idea to calculate the energyofreleased
of the equivalence mass and in this reaction.
energy to explain 32
(ii)
(i) the
(i) Apply
Use production
theEinstein’s
Use the data
data above
of idea
above
energy
to in the
of the
to calculate
calculate
reaction
equivalence
the energyof
the energy
above.
mass and
released
released in energy
in this
this to explain
reaction.
reaction. 332
(ii) Apply Einstein’s idea of the equivalence
the production of energy in the reaction above. of mass and energy to explain 2
(ii) the production of energy in the reaction above. 22
(ii) Apply
Apply Einstein’s
Einstein’s idea idea of of the
the equivalence
equivalence of of mass
mass and and energy
energy to
to explain
explain
the
the production
production of of energy
energy in in the
the reaction
reaction above.
above.
(c) Pauli is said to have ‘suggested’ the existence of the neutrino. 4
(c) Pauli is said to have ‘suggested’ the existence of the neutrino. 4
(c) Explain
Pauli is said
why to
thehave ‘suggested’
neutrino the existence
was ‘suggested’ but ofnotthe neutrino.by Pauli.
discovered 4
(c) Explain
(c) Pauli is
Pauli
Explain said
why to
is said thehave
to
why thehave
neutrino was ‘suggested’
‘suggested’
‘suggested’
neutrino
the
the existence
was ‘suggested’existencebut of
but of
notthe
discovered
notthe neutrino.by
neutrino.
discovered
Pauli.
by Pauli. 44
Explain why
Explain why the
the neutrino
neutrino was was ‘suggested’
‘suggested’ but but not
not discovered
discovered by by Pauli.
Pauli.
Answer parts (d)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Answer parts (d)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
Answer parts (d)–(e) in Section II Answer Booklet 2.
(d)
Answer (i)
partsIdentify
(d)–(e) intheSection
in fundamental forces proposed by the standard model of the 2
Answer parts (d)–(e) Section II II Answer
Answer Booklet
Booklet 2. 2.
(d) (i) atom.
Identify the fundamental forces proposed by the standard model of the 2
(d) (i) Identify
atom. the fundamental forces proposed by the standard model of the 2
(d) (ii) atom.
(i) Explain
Identify how the stability of
the fundamental
fundamental atomic
forces nuclei by
proposed is maintained.
the standard
standard model
model ofof the
the 32
(d) (i) Identify the forces proposed by the 2
(ii) atom.
Explain how the stability of atomic nuclei is maintained.
atom. 3
(ii) Explain how the stability of atomic nuclei is maintained. 3
(ii) Explain
(ii) Explain how
how thethe stability
stability of of atomic
atomic nuclei
nuclei isis maintained.
maintained. 33
(e) How did de Broglie use existing concepts and ideas to come up with new 6
(e) interpretations
How did de Broglie that have useincreased
existing our understanding
concepts and ideasof the structure
to come up of matter?
with new 6
(e) interpretations
How did de Broglie that have useincreased
existing our concepts and ideas
understanding of the to come up of
structure with new
matter? 6
(e) interpretations
(e) How did
How did de that have
de Broglie
Broglie useincreased
use existing our
existing
understanding
concepts
concepts and ideas
and
of the
ideas structure
to come
to come up of
up
matter?
with
with new
new 66
interpretations that have increased End
our – of paper
understanding
36 –
of the structure of matter?
interpretations that have increased our understanding of the structure of matter?
© Board of Studies – 36 –
NSW 2013
– 36 –

–– 36
36 –
–
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 357

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 357 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2013 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A (Total 20 marks)

1 B The independent variable in an investigation is the factor that is being changed in

order to cause a change in what is being measured (in this case the size of current
generated).

2 D The slingshot effect is a gravitational effect that causes a change in the path of a
spacecraft as it passes close by a planet.

3 A According to Oersted’s law (or what is often called the right-hand grip rule), as
current flows from X to Y along the hanging wire it would tend to force the north
pole of the magnet to move in a clockwise direction around the wire. However, the
magnet cannot move in this case, but the wire can, so it rotates around the magnet
in a clockwise direction.

4 A An investigation involving a flying projectile is hazardous because the projectile

could strike people, and do damage to them. Being struck in the eye can be serious,
so a strongly advised safety precaution is that investigators should wear safety glasses.

5 D In his experiment Hertz created radio waves, and was trying to investigate their
properties. It should be noted that although he did discover the photoelectric effect
during the course of his experiments, that was not what he was trying to investigate.

6 C The horizontal component of the velocity of the cannonball does not change in
direction or magnitude; its vertical velocity does change, and eventually reverses
direction.

7 A By laminating the iron core of a transformer with an insulator (and aligning it

correctly), the continually changing emf induced across it by the generating process
allows very little current to flow through the metal.

8 D An inertial frame of reference cannot be accelerating—whether centripetally,

vertically or horizontally.

9 B Extreme heat is experienced in re-entry due to friction of the craft with the
atmosphere. There is a communication blackout as the air surrounding the craft is
ionised by the heat. However, the deceleration of the astronauts means they will not
feel weightless.

10 C A step-up transformer is used to raise the generated voltage at the power plant to a
very high level for transmission to cities. It is stepped-down at substations to
reduce hazards within the city, stepped-down to 240 V to supply homes, and further
stepped-down for use in personal computers, both for safety and to avoid damage
to electronic components.

358 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 358 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

11 B Since the atoms in crystals are very close together, it was necessary for the waves
the Braggs used to have wavelengths similar to the distances between atoms of the
crystal to produce diffraction patterns.

12 A When cooled below its critical temperature, a superconductor excludes magnetic

flux. It does this by generating an eddy current in its surface that exactly opposes
the field of the magnet that was penetrating it. This repels the magnet upwards,
counterbalancing its weight and allowing it to hover.

13 D Nine flux lines penetrate ring Q, but only four penetrate ring P, so there is greater
magnetic flux through ring Q. Nevertheless, the flux lines around ring P are more
closely packed than those around ring Q, corresponding to a greater flux density
around ring P.
V
14 B E = is the formula relating electric field strength between parallel plates to
d 1
the potential difference between them. The other graphs do not represent a
d
relationship.

15 A The force acting on wire WX depends upon the angle between the wire and that of
the magnetic field, , which in this case is 90°. The torque on the motor depends
upon the angle between the plane WXYZ and the magnetic field, , which is marked
as 30°.

16 D Electrons are the only charge carriers free to move in a wire, and metal wires are
able to conduct electricity because their valence bands are only partially filled.

17 D In theory a DC motor with a radial magnetic field should apply a fairly constant
torque, showing a graph like B; however, this ignores the effect of back emf that
always reduces the current as the motor speeds up. Decreased current means
decreased torque.

18 C Although the Michelson-Morley experiment was accurate, reliable and valid, it

produced a null result. This meant that the underlying theory of the aether was
incorrect, so a new theory was needed to explain the transmission of light through
a vacuum, that is, relativity.

19 C The proper length, Lo, of an object moving at a very high speed relative to another
frame of reference can only be measured using a device within its own reference
frame.

20 B The threshold frequency of metal X is about 3.5  1014 Hz; that of Y is about
8.5  1014 Hz. The illuminating light has a wavelength of 450 nm, corresponding
to a frequency of 6.67  1014 Hz. This means that only metal X releases
photoelectrons when illuminated by this light. Increasing the light intensity
increases the number of photoelectrons emitted.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 359

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 359 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I, Part B

Question 21
Name of scientist studied: Goddard

(a) One of Robert Goddard’s important contributions to space exploration was to develop
a cooling system for rocket engines by wrapping the metal tube that carried liquid
oxygen to the engine around the engine casing. He had learned from experience that
without this measure, the engine quickly overheated and exploded. Another advantage
of this modification was that the intense heat from the rocket engine converted the
oxygen into gaseous form before it entered the engine, so it was ready to combust the
rocket fuel. If the oxygen entered as liquid some would not evaporate before escaping
the chamber, and would be wasted. This cooling technique was later used in rockets
such as the Saturn V. (2 marks)
(b) In order to ensure that secondary sources of information about this scientist are reliable
it is necessary to compare several sources, ideally from a variety of types of media. If
all are in agreement, their content can be considered reliable. (2 marks)
Question 22
0.3
Vertical velocity (m s–1)

0
0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00
Time (s)
v 0.25  0
The acceleration is found from a  . Here a   0.176  0.18 m s–2.
t 1.86  0.44
(3 marks)

360 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 360 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS
2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 23
Question 23
(a) The gravitational force acting on the planet due to the star Pollux is given by
m1m2
Fg 5 G 2 , where Fg is the gravitational force; G is the universal gravitational
r
constant; m 1 is the mass of Pollux; m 2 is the mass of the planet; and r is the distance
between them.

The centripetal force required to keep the planet in its circular orbit is given by
m2v2
Fc 5 where m 2 is again the mass of the planet and v is its orbital velocity.
r

Since it is the gravitational force that acts as the centripetal force on the planet,
m1m2 m2v2
Fg = F c, that is, G 2 5 . Since m 2 is on both sides, it cancels: the mass of the
r r
planet plays no role. (2 marks)

(b) Kepler’s law can be applied directly to this situation. In such a case the orbital periods
of the planets need not be converted into seconds, nor their orbital radii into metres.
r1 3 r2 3 1.643 r2 3 4.411 3 133 225
5 ∴ 5 ∴ r23 = ∴ r2 = 1.19 AU
T1 2 T2 2 5902 3652 348 100
(3 marks)

Question 24
Question 24
The photoelectric
The photoelectric effect
effect was
was discovered
discovered by by Heinrich
Heinrich Hertz. As he
Hertz. As he was
was investigating
investigating the
the
properties of the radio waves he produced with his induction coil, he noticed that the
properties of the radio waves he produced with his induction coil, he noticed that the detector
detector responded
responded more
more easily, andeasily, and at adistance
at a greater greater from
distance from thewhen
the source, source, when illuminated
illuminated with UV
with
light.UV light.

In
In its
its simplest
simplest form
form aa photocell
photocell (or
(or photoelectric
photoelectric cell)
cell) is
is aa Geissler
Geissler evacuated
evacuated tube
tube with
with
two metal plates at opposite ends. The cathode is made of a metal that has a
two metal plates at opposite ends. The cathode is made of a metal that has a low work low work
function, , such
function, c, such asas potassium.
potassium.(A(A strong
strong vacuum
vacuum inside
inside the
the tube
tube prevents
prevents the
the metal
metal from
from
reacting
reacting with
with the
the oxygen.)
oxygen.)
Incoming radiation
Incoming radiation
Cathode
Cathode Anode
Anode

V V

When light that has a frequency greater than the threshold frequency of the metal of the
When light
cathode that has the
illuminates a frequency
cathode, greater than the
the incoming threshold
photons havefrequency
sufficient of the metal
energy of
to free
the cathode
electrons illuminates
from the If
the cathode. cathode,
the DCthe incoming
battery photons
connected have suffi
between the cient energy
electrodes is to free
switched
electrons
on, from the
the electrons cathode.
freed from Ifthethe DC battery
cathode connected
are able to cross between
the tube, the
andelectrodes is switched
the galvanometer
registers that a current is flowing. This will continue until the light is cut off.

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 459
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 361

9781741255782 Success
9781741256451 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb
One_Physics_2017.indd 361459 8/12/14 3:42
22/12/2016 2:10 PM
PM
CHAPTER 14 • 2013 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
CHAPTER 14 • 2013 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

on, the electrons freed from thefromcathodecathode

are able to cross the tube, and the galvanometer
Con,
H A the
P T E electrons
R 1 2 • 2 freed
0 1 3 H S C E Xthe
A M I N A T I O N are
PAPable
E R to cross the tube, and the galvanometer
registersregisters
that a current is flowing.
that a current is flThis willThis
owing. continue until theuntil
will continue lightthe
is cut off.
light is cut off.

In the past photocells

In the
the had several
past photocells
photocells uses,
had several oneuses,
several of which was to act astoburglar alarms. A light A light
In past had uses, one of which was
was to act
act asas burglar
burglar alarms.
alarms. A light
beam that has a
beam that frequency
that has greater
has aa frequency than
frequency greater the threshold
greater than
thanthe frequency
thethreshold of the
thresholdfrequency cathode
frequencyofofthe was
thecathode refl
cathodewas ected
wasreflected
reflected
beam
off a series of mirrors mirrors
arrangedarranged
around aaround
room before being shone onto the cathode of the
off a series of arranged around aa room room before
beforebeing
beingshone
shoneontoontothe thecathode
cathodeofofthe
the
photocell. If an intruderintruder
entered entered
the room the
theroombeam
roomthe would
thebeam be cut
beamwould
wouldbeoff. If
becut this
cutoff. happened,
off.IfIf this even
this happened,
happened,even
even
photocell. If an intruder entered the
briefly, light would
briefly, lightnot reach the cathode so the galvanometer would register zero. This would
briefly, light would
would not
not reach
reach the
the cathode
cathode so the galvanometer would register zero. This This would
immediately cause the burglar alarm to sound.
immediately cause the burglar alarm to sound. (5 marks)
(5 marks)
would immediately cause the burglar alarm to sound. (5 marks)

Question 25
Question
Question 25
25
(a) (a) Wire
Wire Q forced
will be will be forced away from wire R because the magnetic fields established by the
(a) Q Wire Q will beaway from
forced awaywire R because
from the magnetic
wire R because fields established
the magnetic by the by
fields established the
currentscurrents
in both in bothare
wires wires are stronger
stronger in-between
in-between them. them. Simultaneously,
Simultaneously, wire Q wirebe
will
currents in both wires are stronger in-between them. Simultaneously, wire Q will be
Q will be
forced towards
forced towards wire P because
wire P because their associated
their associated magneticmagnetic
fields arefields are weaker in-between
weaker
forced towards wire P because their associated magnetic fields are in-between
weaker in-between
them. wire
them. Hence, Hence,Q wiremove
will Q will movewire
toward toward
P. wire P. (1 mark) (1 mark)
them. Hence, wire Q will move toward wire P. (1 mark)

(b) (b) formula

The The formula concerning
concerning the forcethe forcebetween
acting acting between long parallel
long parallel current-carrying wires is
current-carrying
(b) The formula concerning the force acting between long parallel current-carrying
FB I1I2
F I I
wires is wires kB B 5. k 1 2 .
5 is
l ld . B d
FB 1 FB13 1027 2 6 3272 5
5is1 2.0 634.82 35104.8
The force between wires P and Q is 3 ←.
N
24
The force between wires P and 1 Q 5 1 2.0 3
5 3 2
101023 1024 N ←.
1 5 3 10 23

FB 2 FB23 1027 2 2 3 2
The force between wires Q and R is 5is1 2.0 27 2325 2 3 1024 N ←.24
33.2
The force between wires Q and1 R 5 1 2.0 3
2.510
3 2
10 5 3.2 3 10 N ←.
1 2.5 3 1023
–4 N ←.
Therefore, the totalthe
Therefore, force acting
total forceon wire on
acting Q is 8.0 Q
wire 108.0
3 is 3 10–4 N ←. (3 marks)
(3 marks)

Question 26
Question 26
Question 26
V V V
(a) E (a)
5 ∴ V ∴ 15 5 22 VV
5 15 5\ ∴ V 5 0.15 V5 0.15 V (2 marks)
d E
(a) E d 1.0153101.0 3 1022–2 ∴ V\ V = 0.15 V (2
(2 marks)
marks) 
D 1.0  10
(b) The(b)magnetic
(b) force acting
The magnetic forceon the moving
acting electronelectron
on the moving is given isbygiven
F B =by
given Bqvsinu.
by FFB In this .InInthis
Bqvsinu.
Bqvsin this
B =
case u iscase
90°, so
u is F
is 90°,
90°,so
B = Bqv. The
soFFBB=Bqv. electric
Bqv.The force acting
Theelectric
electricforceon the
forceacting same
actingononthemoving
thesame electron
samemoving
movingelectron
electron is
is given given
by F
is given
e byby
= qE.
FeF For the
qE.
qE. Forelectron
Forthe
the to pass
electron
electron through
toto pass
pass the combined
through
through thethe fi elds
combined
combined without
fields
fields without
without
e =
deflection F F
deflection FB 
deflection
B = e . Hence
=F Bqv
Fee.. Hence qE.
Hence Bqv
= Since
Bqv  the charge
= qE. Since
Since the on the electron, q, features on
the charge on the electron, q, features on
both sides of the
both sides
both formula, it can be ignored.
sides of the formula, it can be ignored.
4 –1
Bv = EBv E ∴(10.5
 0.5
Bv ∴
= E 3∴
4)(1=E104 )∴EE= 5000
3 10
0.5 3 (1
∴E
3 10 ) = E ∴ E V =m
5000 V m
21
5000 V m21
In order to counteract the magnetic field, which would tend to force the electron to
In orderIntoorder
counteract the magnetic
to counteract field, which
the magnetic field,would
which tend
would to force theforce
tendwould
to electron to
thetoelectron to
bend ↓ (towards the bottom of the page), the electric field need be directed
bend ↓ (towards the
bend ↓ (towardsbottom of the
theofbottom page),
of thethe electric fi eld would need to be directed
towards the bottom the page ↓ sopage),
as to the electric
apply a force field would
in the needdirection
reverse to be directed
on the
towardstowards
the bottom
the of the
bottom page
of ↓
the so as
page to
↓ apply
so as a
to force
apply in
a the
force reverse
in the direction
reverse on the on the
direction
negative electron. Hence plate M is positive. (3 marks)
negativenegative
electron.electron.
Hence plate
Hence is positive.
M plate M is positive. (3 marks)(3 marks)

460 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
460 E x c e l S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S

362 S U 460
9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb CCESS ON E HSC • PHYSICS 8/12/14 3:42 PM
9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 460 8/12/14 3:42 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 362 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 27

(a) In this question it is important to note that when a coil is rotated through 180° the
change in magnetic flux is identical, whether the rotation is rapid or slow. Hence the
area between the graph and the time axis will be the same for each half-rotation.
emf

0 Time (s)
1 2

(3 marks)
(b) The underlying principle in this question is the law of conservation of energy.
As a vehicle powered by electricity is accelerating, stored charge (chemical potential
energy) changes into the kinetic energy of electrons passing through a coil, that is,
electric current. When current flows through a conductor within a magnetic field it
makes the coil rotate (the motor effect), producing torque that accelerates the vehicle,
and is converted into increased kinetic energy of the vehicle.
When the vehicle needs to be slowed down, electricity to the motor is switched off. At
this point the generator effect comes into play. Because the coil is now forced to rotate
within the same magnetic field, due to the kinetic energy of the moving vehicle, it now
begins to generate electric current in accordance with Faraday’s law. As its kinetic
energy is decreasing the car will slow down. Provided the coil is equipped to a split-
ring commutator, direct current starts to charge the battery, and will do so as long as the
vehicle is decelerating. Although it is not a 100% conversion, is still much better than a
100% waste of energy. (4 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 363

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 363 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 28

By the end of the 19th century many scientists thought that physics was almost totally
understood, and could be explained by applying the mathematics and the laws that had been
discovered through work by renowned scientists such as Newton. Theory usually
corresponded well with experiment—except in two situations (blackbody radiation and the
cause of the photoelectric effect), which they thought would soon be resolved.

A blackbody is an object that absorbs all of the radiation falling on it. It therefore heats up,
and radiates electromagnetic energy according to a defined curve, called a blackbody
radiation curve. Experiments showed that for each temperature there was one wavelength at
which a maximum amount of energy was released, beyond which the energy emitted at
increasingly shorter wavelengths reduced to zero, which was logical. However, the
theoretical curve predicted that vast amounts of energy should be emitted at the very shortest
wavelengths, even by extremely cold blackbodies. It did not fit experiments, but appeared to
be mathematically perfect.

Max Planck managed to reproduce the actual graph using the same mathematical theory;
however, to do so he proposed that electromagnetic radiation was not continuous, as was the
current understanding, but rather composed of tiny packets. He called these packets quanta,
stating that the energy of any particular quantum was directly proportional to its frequency,
E  hf. Most scientists ridiculed this proposal; if energy were not continuous, as Planck
proposed, it would have to be composed of particles—yet all particles possess mass!
Moreover, since blackbodies must absorb all electromagnetic radiation, and emit radiation at
all frequencies, they argued that the E  hf formula had to be incorrect—what would occur
in the case of electromagnetic radiation having frequencies other than these?

Einstein resolved the impasse by using Planck’s quantum theory to resolve the other
outstanding query—the cause of the photoelectric effect. Hertz discovered this effect while
investigating the nature of radio waves. During his investigations he noted that sparks were
emitted in his detector more easily when irradiated with UV light. Other scientists discovered
unexpected properties of this effect.
• If a metal surface is irradiated with electromagnetic radiation with a high enough
frequency, it emits electrons.
• Unless the frequency of the light is above a certain threshold frequency, a metal cathode
emits no photoelectrons, irrespective of the intensity (brightness) of the incoming
radiation.
• The actual threshold frequency is different for every metal tested, and always constant.
• If photoelectrons are emitted they are released as soon as the illumination begins, even if
the light intensity is very low.
• If photoelectrons are emitted, the size of the photocurrent depends on the intensity of
the light.
• The kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons depends upon the frequency of the
light.

364 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 364 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Einstein called the quanta of visible light photons. He explained that each metal has a unique,
constant work function, , equating to the energy needed to release an electron from the
metal surface. He then employed Planck’s quantum theory, in particular the controversial
E  hf formula, stating that only three possibilities were available.

1. E  hf1 <  when no electrons would be emitted, regardless of how many photons hit
the metal.
2. E hf2   (the threshold frequency) when electrons are released, but have zero
excess kinetic energy.
3. E  hf3 >  when electrons are released having excess kinetic energy. The extra
energy is the difference between the energy of the incoming photon and the work
function of the metal, that is, EK  hf  .
This simple, elegant explanation fully accounted for all the properties of the photoelectric
effect, thus establishing the quantum theory as well. Einstein’s contribution was essential to
its acceptance, and opened a new branch of science. It is worth noting that Einstein’s
explanation of the photoelectric effect did not require a brilliant mind—merely an open one.
(6 marks)

Question 29

(a) The mass is lifted at a uniform rate, so the force applied upwards by the motor is equal
to the force downwards, the weight of the mass: FUP  mg  0.05  9.8  0.49 N ↑.
(2 marks)

(b) The torque required by the motor in order to raise the mass is found using t  Fd.
In this case the torque required is t  0.49  0.004  1.96  10–3 Nm. The same
torque must be supplied by the motor to raise the mass, so the minimum value of the
torque of the DC motor must also be 1.96  10–3 Nm, assuming friction is negligible.
If it is assumed that the DC motor has a radial magnetic field, so the cos factor can be
ignored, then the formula for the torque becomes t  BIAn.

∴ BIAn  1.96  10–3 Nm ∴ 0.1 I  0.0012  100  1.96  10–3 so I  0.16 A

(3 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 365

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 365 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 30

(a) According to Newton’s first law, every object continues in its state of rest, or uniform
ation.
speed in a straight line, unless acted upon by a resultant force. In space, an astronaut
o the experiences weightlessness, because there is nothing pushing back on his or her feet,
bottom or back. Even inside a spacecraft (with its motor switched off) the astronaut
marks)
experiences no reaction force.

However, if the craft is rotating the astronaut is forced to move in a circle as well, just
as a passenger inside a car is forced around by the door pushing against him or her as
the car turns a corner. Inside a revolving space station that force may be experienced
through the feet, bottom or back of the astronaut, and hence simulates gravity. (2 marks)

(b) Since the centripetal force Fc is equal to the astronaut’s weight,

mv2
∴ Fc  mg
r
∴ v2  r g
Since the diameter of the Space Station is 550 m, its radius is 275 m
∴ v  (275  9.8) = 51.9 m s–1 (2 marks)

Question 31

Changing the electrical properties of silicon not only made the development of transistor
radios possible, but also led to the development of a number of other new technologies.

After the end of World War II, servicemen returned home from active duty in the Pacific
talking about the radios that had been used to contact battleships and support aircraft when
soldiers invaded enemy-held islands. Unlike the radios they had left behind, these new ones
were small, lightweight and ran on batteries. No massive transformers had to be carried
around in the jungles, and no heavy lead accumulator batteries were needed, much less cords
attached to power sockets. Very soon everybody wanted to own a transistor radio. The demand
was enormous, but the supply was extremely limited because the transistors in the radios
were made of germanium. This element was so rare that Mendeleev was unaware of it
when devising the periodic table of elements—though he did predict its existence, calling it
‘eka-silicon’. Due to its rarity and demonstrated usefulness it was very expensive. Another
element had to be found that could replace germanium.

The most likely candidate was silicon. It was far more abundant and far cheaper than
germanium, but its electrical resistance was much too high. Research was undertaken to
reduce the resistance of silicon by doping it with minute amounts of valence-3 elements, such
as aluminium, or valence-5 elements, such as arsenic. This research was successful, with the
development of both p-type and n-type dopants, enabling silicon to be used successfully in
transistor radios. An entire industry was established in many countries, enabling a worldwide

366 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 366 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

communications revolution. This has continued to expand, and has diversified into many
different technologies. Society in general has benefited from the development of cheap, light
radios. For example, people located in remote areas now have access to doctors, ambulance
services, weather warnings, education and entertainment.

Joining a crystal doped with p-type impurity to one doped with n-type impurity formed a
p-n junction, a dielectric diode. The invention of diodes opened up a vast range of
technologies. The diode’s ability to rectify AC current to produce DC without the power losses
and sheer volume of the previous thermionic diodes enabled the 240 V household power supply
to be varied safely and cheaply. This not only allowed the transistor radios to function without
batteries, but also meant that numerous electronic devices in people’s homes (including
personal computers) could be powered, providing information, education and relaxation.

Furthermore, far better transistors were developed soon after the dielectric diode. Their
capacity to replace thermionic triodes was soon apparent, with appliances becoming smaller,
lighter, more portable and consuming far less power. Further technologies sprang from this new
branch of physics, leading to integrated circuits and microchips, one clear benefit being the
ubiquitous, cheap calculators used today by students in examinations throughout the world.

Solar cells are another application of the p-n junction. Their potential for obtaining cheap,
clean energy from sunlight for the benefit of the future society of the world seems limitless
and very exciting! (7 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 367

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 367 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section II—Options

Question 32—Medical Physics

(a)
Differences X-ray images CAT scan
Production Static X-ray tube and flat film or Rotating X-ray tube and multiple
charge-coupled device (CCD) photomultiplier tube receivers,
plate in a case, positioned under which send signals, proportional
or behind the body part being to X-ray absorption, to computer.
imaged. Short X-ray exposure Longer X-ray exposure needed
time needed for image to form. for image to form.
Output Single image of area being Multiple images of thin slices of
investigated. the body. Multiple perspectives
available (i.e. slices in any plane).
Image nature A 2-D shadow image, mainly of Both 2-D and rotatable 3-D
bones, which can be an exposure computer-generated images of
on film or viewed on a computer hard and soft tissues, which are
screen and printed. viewed on a computer screen and
can be printed.
Resolution Low resolution with 16 shades High resolution with 256 shades
of grey. of grey.
Clarity/detail Good detail of hard structures Very clear images showing
(mainly bones and implants). excellent detailed structure of
Clarity/detail of some areas is soft and hard body tissues.
hidden by overlying or
underlying structures.
Frequency/intensity can be
adjusted for limited poor quality
soft tissue imaging (e.g. lungs
and breasts).
Usefulness Identifying fractures and Identifying structural
dislocations in bones, identifying abnormalities in both hard and
areas of abnormality in some soft tissue, including blood clots
soft tissues (e.g. mammograms). in the brain and tumours.

(3 marks)

368 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 368 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(b) When an optical fibre lamp is turned on, light from a light source in the lamp’s base
can be seen as bright spots at the ends of the fibres. The light travels along the thin
glass fibres by total internal reflection. When the fibres are held close together to form
a bundle, the light from the bundle can be projected as a bright spot onto a paper screen
held close to the ends of the fibres.

Bright spot of Bundled fibres

light at the end
of each fibre

Light spot
on screen

Light source inside

the base of the lamp
(2 marks)
(c) An endoscope has a long, thin tube that can be inserted into the body through a body
orifice, such as the mouth, or through a small incision made in the skin. The tube
contains several components which, used together, allow the operator to take samples
of internal organs.
• Two sets of optical fibres: an incoherent bundle to transfer light into the body,
and a coherent bundle which allows the operator to see images of internal organs
via an eyepiece or TV screen. (In modern tubes, a tiny CCD camera at the
internal end and electrical wires replace the coherent bundle.)
• A thin flushing tube which allows the operator to rinse areas for viewing. This
tube can also provide air to pressurise the area for easier viewing.
• Tiny implements attached to the ends of thin wires which can be inserted along
the tube and manipulated by the operator to remove small pieces of tissue from
the organ they are viewing.
• A thin suction tube which enables the operator to remove excess fluids and tissue
fragments from within the body. (3 marks)

(d) (i) The orientation of the axis of a hydrogen nucleus becomes aligned either parallel
or anti-parallel to the strong magnetic field direction and precesses around the
field direction at its Larmor frequency.
Hydrogen nucleus

Parallel Anti-parallel

(2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 369

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 369 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(ii) In the strong MRI magnetic field, the hydrogen nuclei align with the field. Under
the influence of a narrow range of applied radio frequencies (RF), the hydrogen
nuclei absorb energy and resonate in phase. When the radio signal is turned off,
the nuclei release the absorbed energy and precess at random in a lower energy
state. The rate at which the RF energy is released is called relaxation time. The
relaxation time depends on the proton density and on the surrounding molecules.
The relaxation time for hydrogen nuclei in free water is longer than for hydrogen
nuclei in other molecules. In water, both hydrogen atoms are bonded to oxygen
and their nuclei have the same relaxation times. Due to the high proton density in
free body water, strong RF echo signals with long relaxation times occur when
the RF signal is turned off. The density of hydrogen nuclei in other molecules,
such as fat, is less than for free water. In addition, due to a range of bonding
types, there is variation in relaxation times of the hydrogen nuclei. These factors
contribute to the production of weaker RF echo signals, with shorter relaxation
times than for free water.
In addition, the Larmor frequencies for the hydrogen nuclei in non-water
molecules are also slightly less than for hydrogen nuclei in water. When the MRI
radio frequency is tuned to the Larmor frequency for free water, the pulse length
is chosen to maximise the in-phase 90° flipping of the water-bound hydrogen
nuclei, resulting in maximum relaxation time. Due to the lower Larmor
frequencies for the hydrogen nuclei in non-water molecules, it is likely that the
phases and flip angles are less than maximum, contributing to shorter relaxation
times for those hydrogen nuclei when returning to a random state. (3 marks)

(e) (i) In order to investigate blood flow characteristics using ultrasonics, acoustic gel is
applied to the skin in an area that will allow ultrasound to be directed towards an
area of blood flow interest (e.g. in blood vessels, such as the aorta, and around
heart valves). An ultrasound transducer is then placed on the gelled skin and
pointed at the target area. The operator views a screen that shows a B-scan image
(generated by a computer) of the ultrasound reflected back from within the body.
The reflected ultrasound frequency varies from that of the emitted frequency due
to the Doppler effect and the B-scan is colour enhanced to show the direction of
blood flow. Blood that is moving away from the transducer will cause the reflected
ultrasound to have a lower frequency (longer wavelength) and is usually shown
as red on the screen. Blood that is moving towards the transducer will reflect the
ultrasound at a higher frequency (shorter wavelength) and be shown as blue on the
screen. The greater the change in frequency, the greater the speed of the blood.
In the case of a heart valve, the real-time Doppler images allow the operator to
identify if blood is flowing in appropriate directions, and to determine if the
valves are opening and closing effectively (or not). For blood vessels, the images

370 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 370 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

can be used to detect changes in blood velocity, identifying if constrictions, such

as those due to plaque, are present. (3 marks)
(ii)
Ultrasound transducers contain piezoelectric crystals, such as lead zirconate
titanate (PZT), which change shape when an alternating potential difference is
applied between crystal surfaces. This causes the PZT crystals to change shape
millions of times per second (e.g. 3 MHz), resulting in the ultrasonic vibrations
required for scans. The PZT crystals can also detect ultrasound, since changes in
pressure across the crystal faces produce changes in potential difference that can
be measured.
A computer is used to produce the rapid oscillations in potential difference
needed to power the transducer(s) to produce the ultrasound. For phase sector
scan transducers, which contain many piezoelectric crystals, the computer
software controls the phase of the potential difference between crystals, causing
the sweeping beam of ultrasound produced. The computer is also required to
process the signals returning from the transducer and produce the image on the
computer monitor. (3 marks)

(f) The suggested answer to this question is given in two formats here—in a table and as
text.
Isotope Suitable Justification
F-18 Yes—using F-18 is a positron emitter with a short half life of
positron 109.77 minutes. It is very useful for imaging because
emission when positrons annihilate with electrons at the site of
tomography decay, two highly penetrating gamma photos are produced
(PET) which can be detected using a gamma camera. F-18 is
readily tagged to glucose to produce a radiopharmaceutical
called fluoro-deoxy-glucose (FDG), which is water soluble
and easily administered into the blood of a patient. The
decay of the fluorine in FDG results in ‘ordinary’
glucose, which is biologically harmless. Since the F-18 in
the FDG has a short half life, most of the radioactivity
decays in about 24 hours. This minimises damage to
body tissues from positron and gamma emission. FDG is
readily absorbed by cells, especially active brain cells, so
F-18 is very suitable for producing functional computer
images of body tissues, especially the brain.

Continued

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 371

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 371 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Isotope Suitable Justification

Sr-90 and No The beta particles produced by Sr-90 and C-14 do not
C-14 easily penetrate through matter and are therefore of
limited value in imaging from the outside of the body.
Both of these isotopes are also unsuitable due to their
long half lives. Unnecessary damage to body tissue
would be caused by the ionising beta radiation that a
patient may have to endure for the rest of their life.
Tc-99m Yes—using Tc-99m is a gamma emitter with a short half life of six hours.
single Its salts are water soluble and easily administered into a
photon patient’s blood. Tc-99m can be tagged to a number of
emission substances making it suitable for targeting a range of
computer different organs. Using a gamma camera, functional computer
tomography images of the organs absorbing the Tc-99m can be produced.
(SPECT) For example, tagging Tc-99m to phosphate leads to
absorption by bone tissue. The images produced from the
highly penetrating gamma emitted from the bones can be
used to identify the presence or absence of bone cancer.
Co-60 No While gamma photons emitted by Co-60 could be used to
produce images for diagnoses, the relatively long half life
of 5.27 years would result in unnecessary damage to body
tissue caused by gamma radiation. The radiation would
affect not only the patient, but also any others that came
close to the patient. Any biological wastes would also be
radioactive, and could remain radioactive for decades.

Alternate answer format

For a radioisotope to be suitable for medical diagnoses it needs to: produce or cause
highly penetrating radiation (gamma photons) that is detectable from outside of the
body; have a short half life; and be able to be tagged to substances that are water
soluble and readily absorbed by the body tissues under investigation. Only two of the
isotopes, F-18 and Tc-99m, meet these criteria.
F-18 is a positron emitter with a short half life of 109.77 minutes. Using positron
emission tomography (PET), F-18 is very useful for imaging because when positrons
annihilate with electrons at the site of decay, two highly penetrating gamma photons
are produced which can be detected using a gamma camera. F-18 is readily tagged to
glucose to produce a radiopharmaceutical called fluoro-deoxy-glucose (FDG), which is
water soluble and easily administered into the blood of a patient via injection.

372 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 372 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

The decay of the fluorine in FDG results in ‘ordinary’ glucose which is biologically

harmless. Since the F-18 in the FDG has a short half life, most of the radioactivity
decays in about 24 hours, minimising damage to body tissues from positron and
gamma emission. FDG is readily absorbed by cells, especially active brain cells, so
F-18 is very suitable for imaging of body tissues, especially the brain.
Tc-99m is a gamma emitter with a short half life of six hours. Its salts are water soluble
and easily administered into a patient’s blood. Tc-99m can be tagged to a number of
substances making it suitable for targeting a range of different organs. In single photon
emission computer tomography (SPECT), a gamma camera is used to produce
functional computer images of the organs that absorb the Tc-99m. For example, tagging
Tc-99m to phosphate leads to absorption by bone tissue. The images, produced from
the highly penetrating gamma emitted from the bones, can be used to identify the
presence or absence of bone cancer.
The isotopes Sr-90, Co-60 and C-14 all have long half lives. In addition, Sr-90 and
C-14 do not produce the necessary penetrating gamma radiation. All three are
unsuitable for medical diagnoses. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 373

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 373 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34—Astrophysics

(a) One simple way to show why it is desirable in terms of sensitivity for a telescope to
have a larger diameter lens is to aim the telescope at a region of sky that has a number
of stars of varying brightness. Cover the telescope’s (objective) lens with a series of
concentric thick black paper diaphragms that can be positioned to vary the area of the
objective available to collect starlight as shown below. Record the number of stars that
can be observed.

Uncovered With one With two With three

objective diaphragm diaphragms diaphragms

Although the field of view of the telescope remains the same when the stars are viewed
(or preferably, photographed), the observed brightness of all the stars within the field of
view decreases as the diaphragms are successively placed over the objective to reduce
its area. The dimmer stars progressively disappear as too few photons are received from
them for an image to be formed, indicating reduced sensitivity of the telescope.(3 marks)

(b) (i)

–10
Supergiants (various classes)
Absolute magnitude (M)

–5
X
0
Red giants
+5 Ma
in
White dwarfs seq
+10 ue
nc
e
+15
O B A F G K M
Spectral class
Like the Sun, Matar is a G2 star, so it lies along the vertical line marked here.
It must be located well above the main sequence on the H–R diagram. (3 marks)

(ii) Because its mass is four times that of the Sun, the gravitational pressure acting on
the core of Matar is greater than that of the Sun. Its radiation pressure must also be
greater to counter this, so its absolute magnitude is lower (more negative).
Consequently, Matar must be brighter than the Sun. Since Matar has exactly the
same colour as the Sun, both stars have the same surface temperature. Matar must
therefore be much larger than the Sun, so it has evolved to become a giant.
(2 marks)

374 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 374 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(c) The dominant nuclear reaction in an A2 main sequence star is believed to be the
carbon–nitrogen–oxygen (CNO) cycle fusion of hydrogen into helium. Carbon acts as a
catalyst, and is transformed into nitrogen then oxygen, which is finally converted back
into carbon with the release of further energy. The net reaction involves four hydrogen
nuclei combining to form a helium nucleus, with the release of energy, two neutrinos
and two positrons. (3 marks)
(d) A main sequence star fuses hydrogen nuclei to form helium with the release of energy.
Helium builds up in the core, until eventually the hydrogen is exhausted and fusion in
the core ceases. The core contracts, greatly increasing the temperature in the core and
the surrounding shell of hydrogen. Fusion of the hydrogen in that shell now starts,
while the helium in the core also starts to fuse. This causes the star to expand to a huge
diameter, so its surface temperature decreases. The star is now a red giant. (3 marks)

(e) (i) The upper graph shows that the mean apparent magnitude of the Cepheid Variable
is +6.5. It also allows determination of its period, which is approximately 11 days.

The lower graph allows the mean absolute magnitude of a Cepheid having a period
of 11 days to be estimated to be –4.2.

The distance formula is now used to find the distance away from Earth of the
Cepheid Variable:
d d
M = m 5 log10  – 4.2 = 6.5 – 5 log10 \ d  1380 pcs
10 10
The error involved in estimating the period of the Cepheid and applying this to the
estimate for its mean absolute magnitude from the given line of best fit means that
the claimed distance of the Cepheid being 1260 pcs is supported. (3 marks)

(ii) An advantage of using the graphs provided is that it allows vast distances away
from Earth to be estimated with a fair degree of precision. This is not possible
using known technology since, even for space-based data receivers, the more
accurate astrometric methods are limited to 1000 pcs.
A disadvantage is that even small variations in individual estimations lead to
substantial variations in results. The 11-day period is approximate, as is the
correlation of the consequent mean absolute magnitude of the Cepheid being
–4.2, because the lower graph is simply a line of best fit based on measurements
that are themselves imperfect. (2 marks)

(f) The modern method of determining the spectral class of a star is by analysis of its
spectrum. Stellar spectra consist of two parts: a blackbody radiation curve onto which
is superimposed a set of narrow dark absorption spectral lines. These lines not only
indicate the elements present in the outer atmosphere of the star, they are also very
precise indicators of the surface temperature of the star.
The light from a star is diffracted into a spectrum when passed through a diffraction
grating. A collimator is repeatedly passed across the spectrum to select a very narrow

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 375

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 375 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2013 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
CC H A P T E R 1 4
2 •• 22 00 1133 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR

band of frequencies at a time. The light is reflected onto a charge-coupled device

band of
band of frequencies
frequencies atat aa time.
time. The light is
is refl ected onto
reflected onto a charge-coupled device
device
(CCD) tube or photomultiplier device mounted at the rear of the telescope, and the
(CCD) tube
(CCD) tube or
orphotomultiplier
photomultiplierdevice
devicemounted
mountedatatthe therear
rearofofthe
thetelescope,
telescope,and
andthe
the
number of photons is counted. This is repeated many times, and the average count
number of
number of photons
photons is
is counted.
counted. This is repeated
repeated many times, and and the average count for
for every frequency is assessed every time. Eventually a graph of the intensity of each
for every
every frequency
frequency is assessed
is assessed every
every time.time. Eventually
Eventually a graph
a graph of the
of the intensity
intensity of each
of each
group of frequencies is created. This is called a spectrogram. The computer matches it
group of frequencies is created. This is is called
called aa spectrogram.
spectrogram. The The computer
computer matches it
against defined spectrograms to identify its type.
defined spectrograms to identify its type.
against defined
The surface temperature is available from the spectrogram because of its blackbody
The surface temperature
temperature isis available
available from
from the
the spectrogram
spectrogram because
because ofof its
its blackbody
blackbody
radiation curve component. A computer matches this curve against the theoretical
radiation
radiation curve
curve component.
component. A A computer
computermatches
matchesthis
thiscurve
curve against
against the
thetheoretical
theoretical
blackbody curves of various temperatures, enabling a very precise determination.
blackbody curves of various temperatures, enabling a very precise determination.
The colour of a star can be determined by measuring the numbers of received
The
The colour
colour ofof aa star
star can
can be
be determined
determined by by measuring
measuring the the numbers
numbers of of received
received photons
photons after they have passed through two filters of different colours. In this course
after
photonstheyafter
havethey
passed
havethrough
passedtwo filterstwo
through of fidifferent colours. In
lters of different this course
colours. In thisa course
yellow-
a yellow-green visual (V) and a blue photographic (B) filter are used. The CCD or
green visual (V)visual
a yellow-green and a(V)
blueand
photographic (B) filter are
a blue photographic (B)used.
filterThe
are CCD or CCD or
used. The
photomultiplier device measures the apparent visual magnitude and the apparent
photomultiplier
photomultiplier device
device measures
measures thethe apparent
apparentvisual
visual magnitude
magnitudeand andthe
theapparent
apparent
blue magnitude of any specific star. Colour index (CI) is defined by: CI = B 2 V.
blue magnitude
blue magnitude of of any
any specific star. Colour
specific star. Colour index
index (CI)
(CI) is
is defi
defined by:CI
ned by: CI=BB2– V. V.
The CI of a perfectly white A0 star is exactly zero, while the CI of an A9 star would be
The CI of
The CI of aa perfectly
perfectly white A0 star
white A0 star is exactly zero,
is exactly zero, while
whilethe the CI
CI of
ofan
anA9A9 star
star would
wouldbebe
around 10.3.
around
around +0.3.
10.3.

The mass
The mass of
of aaa specifi
specificc star
star relative
relative to
to that
that of
of the
the Sun
Sun is
is estimated
estimated by
by using
using the
the H–R
H–R
The mass of specifi c star relative to that of the Sun is estimated by using the H–R
diagram,
diagram, once the spectral class of that star has been determined.
diagram, once
once thethe spectral
spectral class of that
class of that star
star has
has been
been determined.
determined.

The luminosity
The luminosity ofof aaa star
star relative
relative toto the
the Sun can
can be found
found from aa plot
plot of luminosity
luminosity
The luminosity of star relative to the Sun
Sun can bebe found from
from a plot of of luminosity
values against
values against spectral class.
class. It
It cannot
cannot simply
simply bebe found
found by
bycounting
countingthe the photons
values against spectral
spectral class. It cannot simply be found by counting the photons
photons
reaching us,
reaching us, since
since that
that would
would ignore
ignore the
the effect
effect of
of distance.
distance.There
There is a formula
formularelating
reaching us, since that would ignore the effect of distance. There isisaaformula relating
relating
the relative
the relative luminosities of of any twotwo stars:
the relative luminosities
luminosities of anyany two stars:
stars:
m 2m
L1 1 m2 2 m1 2
L1 5 100 1 2 55 1 2 where L1 and L 2 represent the luminosities of the two stars,
L2 5 100 where L1 and L 2 represent the luminosities of the two stars,
L2
and m 1 and m 2 are their magnitudes.
and m 1 and m 2 are their magnitudes.
For this formula to compare the luminosity of the A star relative to that of the Sun (as
For this formula to compare
compare thethe luminosity
luminosity of thethe AA star
star relative
relativetotothat
thatof
ofthe
theSun
Sun(as(as
shown in the table) both m 1 and m 2 must be their absolute magnitudes, so the H–R
shown in the table)
table) both
both mm11 and
and m m22must
mustbe betheir
theirabsolute
absolutemagnitudes,
magnitudes,so so the
theH–R
H–R
diagram is again used to approximate the absolute magnitude of any A star. The main
diagram is again used to approximate the the absolute
absolute magnitude
magnitude of of any
any AAstar.
star.The
The main
main
sequence is assumed to be a line rather than the somewhat broader ribbon it actually
sequence
sequence is assumed to be a line ratherrather than
than the
thesomewhat
somewhatbroader
broaderribbon
ribbonititactually
actuallyis.
is. The same method can be used to estimate the luminosity of the Sun, however, the
The same
is. The samemethod
methodcancan
be be
used to estimate
used to estimatethethe
luminosity
luminosityof of
thethe
Sun, however,
Sun, however, thethe
apparent luminosity of the Sun observed from the Earth is known accurately, as is
apparent
apparent luminosity
luminosity of
of the
the Sun
Sun observed
observed fromfrom the
the Earth
Earthisisknown
knownaccurately,
accurately, asas is
is its
its mean distance away. A more precise determination of the Sun’s luminosity at the
mean distance
its mean away.
distance A more
away. A moreprecise determination
precise determination of the Sun’s
of the luminosity
Sun’s luminosity
1 at the
at the
defined distance of 10 parsecs is available using the formula L 5 k 12 that in this case
defined distance of2 10 parsecs is available using the formula L 5 k d 2 that in this case
L10 pc d 2Earth d
leads to L10 pc 5 d Earth
2 where L10 pc is the value to be found, and d Earth is the mean
leads to L Earth 5 d 210 pc where L10 pc is the value to be found, and d Earth is the mean
L Earth d 10 pc
distance from the Earth to the Sun. (6 marks)
distance from the Earth to the Sun. (6 marks)
(Note: in order to provide a clear explanation for students some answers are longer
(Note: in order
(Note: order to
to provide
provide aa clear
clear explanation
explanation for
for students
studentssome
someanswers
answers are
arelonger
longerthan
than would be required for an answer in the exam.)
than would
would be required
be required for anfor an answer
answer in theinexam.)
the exam.)

474 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
474
376 E x c e l S U C C E S S OO NN EE HH SS CC •• PPHHYYSSIICCSS

9781741255782 Success
9781741256451 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb
One_Physics_2017.indd 376474 8/12/14 3:42
22/12/2016 2:10 PM
PM
9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 474 8/12/14 3:42 PM
2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 35—From Quanta to Quarks

(a) (i) The Rutherford atom features a small, dense, positively charged nucleus with
negative electrons orbiting around it in circular paths, like planets around the
Sun. In this model, the nucleus is so tiny compared to the atom, and so very
dense (containing almost all of the mass of the atom), that the atom was
considered to be mostly empty space.
–
–
Tiny, dense, positively
charged nucleus with
almost all of the
Negative electrons – + – atom’s mass
orbiting in circular
paths around the
– –
nucleus

Atom mostly
empty space
(2 marks)
(ii) Classical physics postulated that accelerating charges gave off energy in the form
of electromagnetic radiation. It was also known that objects undergoing circular
v2
motion were accelerating a  . Therefore, in the Rutherford model, the
r
electron orbits ought to be unstable because the orbiting electrons should lose
energy and spiral into the nucleus, collapsing the atom. This obviously was not
the case and so the model was flawed.
The Bohr model included the idea that electrons could only occupy specific
orbits, which he called stationary states. Bohr used the frequencies of the atomic
emission spectrum of hydrogen atoms to develop a model that suggested that
electrons could move between stable energy states. The model suggests that
electrons could exist in these stable energy states without radiating energy,
overcoming the issue of the unstable electron orbits that were inherent in the
Rutherford model. (3 marks)

(b) (i) Particle Mass (amu)

Before U-235 235.0439
neutron 1.008665
Total mass before 236.052565
After Kr-92 91.9263
Ba-141 140.9144
neutrons  3 3.025995
Total mass after 235.866695

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 377

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 377 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Mass change  236.052565 – 235.866695  0.18587 amu

Energy  0.18587  931.5  173.14 MeV
1 eV  1.602  10–19 J
173.14  106  1.602  10–19
Therefore, energy also 
 2.78  10–11 J
Alternatively
1 amu  1.661  10–27 kg
E  mc2
E  0.18587  1.661  10–27  (3  108)2
 2.78  10–11 J (3 marks)
(ii) During the nuclear reaction there is a reduction in mass of 0.18587 amu due to
changes in binding energies per nucleon in the original and final nuclei.
Einstein’s idea of the equivalence of mass and energy, given as E  mc2,
identifies that the relativistic mass/energy of the system will remain the same.
Therefore, the missing mass is not lost, it is just now an equivalent amount of
energy, which increases the combined kinetic energy of the product particles by
2.78 × 1011 J. (2 marks)

(c) Pauli’s hypothesis sought to explain the continuous spectrum for the momentum of beta
rays emitted from Lithium-6 beta decay experiments. Based on the law of conservation
of energy, it was expected that during beta decay, the masses of the two known
products plus the mass defect, calculated from the kinetic energies of the products
(using E  mc2), would be equivalent to the masses of the original radioactive atoms.
It was found, however, that the energies of the beta particles produced (determined
from measurements of linear and angular momentum) varied from a maximum (that
matched expected values) through a continuous range of lower values. Pauli suggested
that the missing energy/momentum of the beta particles was due to the existence of a
third particle. On 4 December 1930, Pauli wrote a letter to the Solvay congress,
suggesting the existence of an undetectable, light, neutral particle in the nucleus of
atoms that was emitted during beta decay. He called it a neutron, but it was later
renamed a neutrino (little neutron) by Fermi, after Chadwick discovered what are now
called neutrons.
Pauli was not able to discover the almost mass-less, charge-less neutrinos, because the
technology needed to design experiments to detect them was not available. (4 marks)

378 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 378 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(d) (i) There are four fundamental forces:

• gravitational—the force of attraction between masses
• weak—the force that binds electrons and neutrinos in the nucleus
• electromagnetic—the force between charges
• strong—the force that holds the nucleons together.
The standard model of the atom includes the electromagnetic, strong and
weak forces. (2 marks)
(ii) Protons are positive; therefore, all nuclei with more than one proton should be
unstable, due to electrostatic repulsion between the protons. An attractive force
that is stronger than the electrostatic force, the strong nuclear force, is required to
ensure that the net forces in nuclei are attractive. The standard model of the atom
accounts for the maintenance of nuclear stability. Baryons (protons and neutrons)
are a combination of three quarks. Protons are two up quarks and a down quark.
Neutrons are two down quarks and an up quark. Quarks have a property called
colour which provides a strong charge-like force that holds the quarks together.
Bosons called gluons are the carriers of this colour force, which only operates
over tiny distances. Gluon exchanges between the quarks within protons and
neutrons are responsible for the strong nuclear force which keeps the quarks
together. Gluon forces between baryons are mediated by mesons called pions,
which consist of a quark and anti-quark pair. Interactions of pions between
baryons help to provide the glue, or residual strong force from the gluons in the
quarks, that holds the positive protons and neutrons together. Stable nuclei have
an appropriate ratio of protons and neutrons, and hence enough gluon and meson
interaction to overcome the repulsive electrostatic forces between protons, thus
creating long‑term stability. (3 marks)

(e) Prior to de Broglie’s ideas:

• Bohr developed a model of the atom that accounted for the atomic spectrum of
hydrogen. While the model allowed electrons to exist in stable orbits without
radiating energy, Bohr did not provide a mechanism that explained it.
• Planck postulated that light existed as small packets of energy, and that the amount
of energy could be determined using E  hf, where h is Planck’s constant and f is
the frequency of the light.
• Einstein confirmed E  hf, through interpretation of photoelectric experiments,
establishing the idea of photons as quantised particles of electromagnetic
radiation.
•
Compton found that the momentum (p) of X-rays could be determined using
hc
p  λ , where λ is the wavelength for the X-rays. Hence it was established that
photons behave as if they are small particles with mass.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 379

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 379 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 12 • 2013 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

De Broglie built on these ideas to provide an explanation for stable electron orbits.
He suggested that if photons can have specific energies and momentum like matter,
then perhaps matter could behave like waves. He calculated the wavelength of matter
h
by rearranging the momentum equation for photons, λ  , where mv is the
mv
momentum of the matter.
De Broglie calculated the wavelength for electrons in the atom and established that for
the radii of electron orbits in the Bohr model, whole numbers of electron wavelengths
would fit into the circumference of the electron orbits. He suggested that at these radii
the electrons existed as standing waves and hence did not behave as matter would.
Thus de Broglie provided an explanatory model for the specific stable electron energy
levels in atoms, increasing our understanding of the structure of matter.
In addition, de Broglie’s ideas have led to the development of the electron microscope.
This tool has added significantly to the ability of scientists to explore the structure of
matter by using very fast electrons as waves to probe matter to the atomic level.
(6 marks)

380 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 380 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 13

2014 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE

EXAMINATION

Physics

General Instructions Total marks – 100

• Reading time – 5 minutes
Section I Pages 2–26
• Working time – 3 hours
75 marks
• Write using black or blue pen
Black pen is preferred This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
• Draw diagrams using pencil Part A – 20 marks
• Board-approved calculators may • Attempt Questions 1–20
be used
• Allow about 35 minutes for this part
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and
Periodic Table are provided at Part B – 55 marks
the back of this paper • Attempt Questions 21–31
• Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part

Section II Pages 29–39

25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 32–36
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

1260 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 381

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 381 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 Why are spacecraft that are placed into orbit around the Earth generally launched in an
easterly direction?

(A) To gain assistance from the wind

(B) To help slow down the spacecraft so it can go into orbit
(C) To reduce the interference from the Earth’s magnetic field
(D) To use the Earth’s rotation to increase the spacecraft’s speed

2 Wire, axle, armature, commutator and brushes can be used to build a device.

Which of the following devices requires ALL of these components?

(A) Transformer
(B) DC generator
(C) Galvanometer
(D) Induction motor

3 A pendulum is used to determine the value of acceleration due to gravity. The length of
the pendulum is varied, and the time taken for the same number of oscillations is recorded.

Which of the following could increase the reliability of the results?

(A) Changing the mass of the pendulum

(B) Identifying the independent and dependent variables
(C) Recording all measurements to at least four significant figures
(D) Repeating each measurement several times and recording the average

382 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 2–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 382 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

4 Why was germanium used to make the first transistors?

(A) It was an abundant semiconductor.

(B) It was cheaper than other semiconductors.
(C) Its properties allowed for simpler circuit design.
(D) It was easier to purify than other semiconductors.

5 Electricity is transported over long distances by transmission lines that are supported by
pylons.

How are these transmission lines protected from lightning strikes?

(A) The pylons are insulated from the ground.

(B) There is a grounded wire on top of each pylon.
(C) The transmission lines carry voltages similar to that of lightning.
(D) Large ceramic insulators separate the transmission lines from the pylons.

6 A satellite is in a high orbit around the Earth. A particle of dust is in the same orbit.

Which row of the table correctly compares their potential energy and orbital speed?

Potential energy Orbital speed

(A) Different Same
(B) Different Different
(C) Same Same
(D) Same Different

–3– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 383

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 383 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

7 The diagram shows a magnet moving upward into a coil.

Which row of the table correctly identifies the direction of the induced current as viewed
from the top, and the direction of the magnetic field inside the coil?

Current direction Magnetic field direction

(A) Anticlockwise ↓
(B) Anticlockwise ↑
(C) Clockwise ↑
(D) Clockwise ↓

8 Why is an iron core used in a transformer?

(A) To limit eddy currents

(B) To reduce the heat generated
(C) To separate the magnetic fields
(D) To increase the linkage of the flux

9 The resistance of two identical-looking wires is measured. One of the wires is made of
copper and the other is made of a copper alloy.

Why does the wire made of the copper alloy have a higher resistance?

(A) The alloy has more impurities than the copper.

(B) There are more holes in the copper than the alloy.
(C) The alloy retains heat more easily than the copper.
(D) There is a greater energy gap between the conduction and valence bands for the alloy.

384 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 4–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 384 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

10 The diagram shows two experiments. In Experiment 1, the magnet is moved away from
the coil. In Experiment 2, the coil is moved away from the magnet.

G G 3 m s–1

3 m s–1
N N

Experiment 1 Experiment 2

Why is the same electromotive force (emf) produced in both experiments?

(A) Energy is conserved.

(B) The motor effect generates the same force.
(C) The relative motion between the coil and the magnet is the same.
(D) Both the direction of the magnetic field and the direction of the motion change.

11 Why is there low intensity of black body radiation at very short wavelengths?

(A) The energy of each photon is reduced at very short wavelengths.

(B) There are fewer photons with high energy at very short wavelengths.
(C) Only photons of very short wavelengths are reabsorbed by the black body.
(D) Photons of very short wavelengths interact with each other causing destructive
interference.

–5– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 385

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 385 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

12 The diagrams show a wire loop rotating clockwise in a radial magnetic field and in a
parallel magnetic field. There is a constant current in the wire loop.

Q Q

N P S N P S

Radial magnetic field Parallel magnetic field

Which pair of graphs best describes the behaviour of the force (F) on the length of
wire PQ as a function of time (t) for one revolution of the wire loop?

Radial field Parallel field

(A) F F

0 0
t t

(B) F F

0 0
t t

0 t 0 t

(D) F F

0 0
t t

386 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 6–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 386 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

13 Which of the following is a consequence of the motor effect?

(A) Rapid heating in an induction cooktop

(B) Minimising energy loss in transmission lines
(C) The wire loops of an operating transformer pulling its coils together
(D) A superconductor repelling small magnetic dust particles vertically above it

14 The diagram shows a generator circuit connected with a switch.

N motion

The generator is rotated by one revolution in the first second with the switch open. It is
then rotated by one revolution in the next second with the switch closed.

Which graph shows the current produced by this generator for these two seconds?

Current (A) Current (A)

(A) 0 Time (s) (B) 0 Time (s)

1 2 1 2

Current (A) Current (A)

(C) 0 Time (s) (D) 0 Time (s)

1 2 1 2

–7– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 387

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 387 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

15 Two masses have a gravitational force of 12 N between them.

If the distance between the masses is doubled, what would be the new gravitational force
between them?

(A) 3 N
(B) 6N
(C) 12 N
(D) 24 N

16 How did Hertz determine the speed of radio waves?

(A) By measuring the interference pattern of radio waves

(B) By sending radio waves through a block of pitchblende
(C) By balancing the effect of a magnetic field in a cathode ray tube
(D) By comparing the intensity of two perpendicular beams of radio waves

17 The diagram shows an alpha particle ( ) and a proton ( ), placed at equal distances
from two large charged metal plates.

Key
proton
neutron

Which of the following best describes the motion of the particles?

(A) Both particles move with the same acceleration.

(B) The alpha particle moves with half the acceleration of the proton.
(C) The alpha particle moves with twice the acceleration of the proton.
(D) The alpha particle moves with a quarter of the acceleration of the proton.

388 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 8–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 388 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

18 The diagram shows a cathode ray entering a magnetic field.

Cathode ray

An electric field is applied to cancel the effect of the magnetic field on the cathode ray.

Which row of the table correctly describes the direction of the applied electric field, and
the direction of the force acting on the cathode ray as a result of the magnetic field?

Direction of the Direction of force as result

electric field applied of the magnetic field
(A) ↑ ↑
(B) ↓ ↑
(C) ↑ ↓
(D) ↓ ↓

19 The rest length of a train is 200 m and the rest length of a railway platform is 160 m. The
train rushes past the platform so fast that, when observed in the platform’s frame of
reference, the train and the platform are the same length.

How fast is the train moving?

(A) 0.60 c
(B) 0.75 c
(C) 0.80 c
(D) 1.25 c

20 A ball is launched horizontally from a cliff with an initial velocity of u m s–1. After
two seconds, the ball’s velocity is in the direction 45° from the horizontal.

What is the magnitude of the velocity in m s–1 at two seconds?

(A) u
(B) 1.5 u
(C) 19.6
(D) 27.7

–9– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 389

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 389 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER
Centre Number
Section I (continued)
2014 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Part B – 55 marks
Attempt Questions 21–31 Centre Number
Student
Section
Allow aboutI (continued)
1 hour and 40 minutes
for this part


Part B – 55 marks
Attempt the
Answer Questions 21–31
questions in the spaces Student Number
Allow about 1 hour
provided. These spaces and 40 minutes
provide
for this part
guidance for the expected length of


response.
Answer the questions in the spaces
provided.
Extra writing These
space spaces provide
is provided on
guidance for the expected length
pages 27–28. If you use this space, of
response.
clearly indicate which question you
are answering.
Extra writing space is provided on
in this area.

pages
Write 27–28. If you use
your Centre this space,
Number and
clearly
Student Number at the top of you
indicate which question this
are answering.
page.
writearea.

Write your Centre Number and

Student Number at the top of this
in this

page.
writeNOT

Please turn over

Do NOT Do

Please turn over




– 13 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line.
4393310351
1261 15330
– 13 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line.
4393310351
390 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
1261 15330
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 390 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 21 (3 marks)

Identify THREE limitations of the use of superconductors. 3

.........................................................................................................................................


Question 22 (3 marks)

How does the re-entry angle affect the safety of astronauts returning to Earth in a 3
spacecraft?

.........................................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 14 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 391
2381310356
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 391 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 23 (3 marks)

A square current-carrying wire loop is placed near a straight current-carrying conductor, 3

as shown in the diagram.

B C


A D

Explain how the current in the wire loop affects the straight conductor.
.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 15 –
392 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
1159310358
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 392 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 24 (5 marks)

The primary winding of a transformer contains 2000 turns. The primary AC voltage
is 23 000 volts and the output voltage is 660 000 volts.

(a) Calculate the number of turns on the secondary winding. 2

...............................................................................................................................


...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(b) If the current in the primary winding of the transformer is 100 A, and the 3
secondary winding has a resistance of 2000 Ω, what is the power loss in the
secondary winding, assuming there is no power loss in the primary winding?
(Show calculations.)

...............................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

– 16 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 393
4873310354
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 393 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 25 (5 marks)

(a) Outline an investigation that can be used to demonstrate the principle of an 2

AC induction motor.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................


...............................................................................................................................

(b) Explain how the motor effect is used in an AC motor. 3

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................


– 17 –
394 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
7471310351
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 394 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (5 marks)

(a) Calculate the energy of a photon of wavelength 415 nm. 2

...............................................................................................................................


(b) An experiment was conducted using a photoelectric cell as shown in the 3
diagram.

Light source
Aluminium
Evacuated
surface –
e tube

Do NOT write in this area.

Collector

4.1 V

Question 26 continues
Question 26 continues on page 19

– 18 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 395
9964310350
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 395 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 26 (continued)

The graph plots the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons
against radiation frequency for the aluminium surface.

6


Maximum KE (eV)

1
Do NOT write in this area.

0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Frequency (× 1014 Hz)

The experiment is planned to be repeated using a voltage of 0.0 V.

Draw a line on the graph to show the predicted results of the planned experiment,
and determine the radiation frequency which would produce photoelectrons with
a maximum kinetic energy of 1.2 eV using a voltage of 0.0 V.
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................


End of Question 26

– 19 –
396 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
5638310354
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 396 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 27 (7 marks)

The diagram illustrates the path of a space probe launched from Earth and sent to
Neptune.

Neptune

Uranus NOT TO


Earth SCALE
Saturn
Jupiter

(a) Explain, using physics principles, why the space probe takes this path instead of 3
travelling directly to Neptune.
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

Question 27 continues
Question on page 21
27 continues

– 20 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 397
9657310359
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 397 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 27 (continued)

(b) The space probe is placed in an orbit at an altitude of 188 km above Earth. 2

Given Earth has a radius of 6380 km, calculate the period of this orbit.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................


...............................................................................................................................

Sketch a graph on the axes showing the changes in gravitational potential energy
for the first 40 minutes.
Do NOT write in this area.

Gravitational Potential Energy

0 Time (min)
10 20 30 40


End of Question 27

– 21 –
398 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
6157310351
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 398 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 28 (6 marks)
(a) Thomson’s experiment measures the charge/mass ratio of an electron. 3

Use an annotated diagram to show how Thomson’s experiment can be

performed.

 Do NOT write in this area.

(b) An electron is projected at 90° into a magnetic field of 9 × 10–4 T, at a speed 3
of 1 × 107 m s–1. This causes the electron to undergo uniform circular motion.

Calculate the radius of the electron’s path.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................


– 22 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 399
1086310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 399 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 29 (5 marks)

How does doping affect the way a current is carried in a semiconductor? 5

.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................


– 23 –
400 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
6784310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 400 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 30 (7 marks)
Cannonballs P and Q are fired so that they leave their barrels from the same height.
Cannonball P is fired vertically upwards while cannonball Q is fired at an angle as
shown.

Both cannonballs take 3 seconds to reach the same maximum height.

P Maximum height Q


Cannon P Cannon Q

(a) Explain how the resulting motion of the cannonballs supports Galileo’s analysis 3
of projectile motion.

Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

Question 30 continues
Question on page 25
30 continues


– 24 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C E below
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 401
7927310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 401 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 30 (continued)

(b) The position of cannonball P is plotted at the 3rd, 4th and 5th seconds of its flight. 4
The position of cannonball Q is plotted at the 3rd and 4th seconds of its flight.

Plot the positions of the balls at each second for the remainder of their flight.
Show calculations.

Key


Ball P
Ball Q
Do NOT write in this area.

Vertical displacement

Horizontal displacement


...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 30

– 25 –
402 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
9403310358
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 402 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 31 (6 marks)

Explain how the adoption of AC as the dominant electricity supply benefits society in 6
terms of the advantages of AC over DC.

.........................................................................................................................................


.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................


End of Question 31

– 26 –
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any
S Umarks
C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 403
8246310352
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 403 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2014 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFIC ATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 32–36
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer parts (a)–(e) of ONE question in the Section II Writing Booklet. Extra writing booklets
are available.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Pages

Question 32 Geophysics ...........................................................................

(Not included in this reproduction) 30–31

Question 33 Medical Physics ................................................................... 32–33

Question 34 Astrophysics ......................................................................... 34–35

Question 35 From Quanta to Quarks ....................................................... 36–37

Question 36 (Not included in this reproduction)

The Age of Silicon ............................................................... 38–39

1262 404 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 29 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 404 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 33 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) Outline how ultrasound can be used to determine the flow of blood in the 2
human heart.

(ii) The diagram shows part of a lower leg cross-section and its 3
corresponding ultrasound scan image from a single transducer.

Skin Muscle Vein Bone

Pulse

Pulse
strength
Time

Explain how this type of scan can be used to construct a two-dimensional

image of internal body structures.

(b) (i) Outline a method of generating X-ray radiation. 2

(ii) Compare the use of a conventional X-ray image to a CT scan in an 3

investigation of the lungs.

(c) Describe how this transmutation is used to produce a diagnostic image. 4

11 11 0
6
C → 5
B + +1
e

Question 33 continues
Question 33 continues on page 33

– 32 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 405

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 405 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 33 (continued)

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) Describe how properties of protons in nuclei are used in the production of 5
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI).

(e) Assess the impact of medical applications of physics on society. 6

End of Question 33

406 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 33 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 406 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 34 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) The diagram shows stars in the same section of sky viewed six months 2
apart.

2 March 2 September

Explain why star X appears in different positions.

(ii) Star X is 2.5 pc from Earth. 3

Calculate how much brighter star X would appear from Earth than if it
were viewed from a distance of 10 pc.

(b) (i) Why would a spectral class A star be brighter when viewed through a 2
blue filter than through a red filter?

(ii) Why is it useful to view stars through different coloured filters? 3

(c) An astronomer has noticed that a star has become brighter. 4

Explain TWO possible reasons for the change in brightness.

Question 34 continues
Question on page 35
34 continues

– 34 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 407

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 407 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 (continued)

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) A Hertzsprung–Russell (H–R) diagram of a cluster of stars and the spectral lines 5
for stars P and Q are shown.

H–R Diagram

P
Luminosity

O B A F G K M N

Spectral lines

Explain how this data provides evidence for the evolutionary age of the stars in
this cluster.

(e) Evaluate methods of obtaining good quality images of celestial objects using 6
ground-based telescopes.

End of Question 34

408 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 35 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 408 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 35 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) A photon is emitted when an electron in a hydrogen atom transitions 2

from the n = 3 excited state to the ground state.

Calculate the wavelength of the photon.

(ii) A photon is incident on a hydrogen atom in the ground state. 3

Explain, using de Broglie’s hypothesis, why the photon is not absorbed

by the hydrogen atom.

(b) (i) Outline why gravitational forces are irrelevant in the nucleus of an atom. 2

(ii) The graph shows the binding energy per nucleon. 3

Using this diagram, explain how energy may be released in a nuclear

reaction.

10
Fe Pd
Si
8 C U
per Nucleon (MeV)
Binding Energy

He
6

H
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Atomic number

Question 35 continues
Question 35 continues on page 37

– 36 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 409

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 409 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 35 (continued)

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) Describe the significance of the Manhattan Project to society. 5

(e) Assess the effectiveness of the Bohr–Rutherford model of the atom in 6

accounting for experimental observations.

End of Question 35
End of Question 35

410 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 37 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 410 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS
2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2014 HSC
2014 HSC Examination
Examination Paper
Paper
Sample
Sample Answers
Answers
SectionI,I,Part
Section PartAA (Total
(Total 20 20 marks)
marks)

11 D
D Since the
Since the Earth is rotating in the direction from west to east, a spacecraft being
launched into orbit is already moving with a significant
significant speed
speed in in that direction, so
less energy
less energy isisneeded
needed to
to reach
reach the
the speed
speed required
required to
to place
place itit in
in orbit.
orbit.

22 B
B A transformer
transformer does not
not require
require an
an axle,
axle, armature, commutator or brushes.
Galvanometers and induction motors require neither commutators nor
nor brushes.

33 D
D Repeating the
Repeating the individual tests more
individual tests more times yields aa result
times yields result that
that averages
averages thethe individual
individual
results (except
results (except when
when one
one oror more
more of
of these
these are
are outliers,
outliers, too
too distinct
distinct from
fromthethe rest
rest to
to
be included),
be included), providing
providing aa measure
measure ofof reliability.
reliability. Changing
Changing thethe mass
mass simply
simply adds
adds an an
additional variable.
additional variable. Identifying
Identifying dependent
dependent and and independent
independent variables
variables is good
is good
practice but
practice butdoes
does
not not improve
improve reliability.
reliability. RecordingRecording measurements
measurements to four
to four significant
significant
figures mayfigures
improvemay improve
accuracy, butaccuracy, but not reliability.
not reliability.

44 D
D Germanium is
Germanium is aa rare
rare element.
element. This
This makes
makes itit far
far more
more expensive
expensive than
than silicon,
silicon, which
which
is the
is the second
second most
most common element in
common element in the
the Earth’s
Earth’s crust.
crust. The
The design
design ofof circuits
circuits
containing semiconducting
containing semiconductingcomponents
components is effectively
is effectively the same,
the same, although
although pure
pure silicon
siliconrequire
would would require more batteries
more batteries than
than pure pure germanium.
germanium.

55 B
B The grounded
The grounded wirewire is
is at
at the
the top
top ofof each
each pylon,
pylon, and and also
also stretched
stretched above
above the
the
transmission lines.
transmission lines.The
Theaimaim of
of this
this wire
wire isisto
to discharge
discharge the the cloud
cloud that
that would
would cause
cause
lightning.Because
lightning. Becauseof ofits
itsplacement,
placement,lightning
lightningwillwillhithitthe
thegrounded
groundedwire wirerather
rather than
than
strike aa transmission
strike line, so
transmission line, so the
the electricity
electricity passes
passes directly
directly toto Earth.
Earth. Although
Although
ceramic insulators
ceramic insulators do
do separate
separate transmission
transmission lines from pylons,
lines from pylons,they
they serve
serve to
to prevent
prevent
power loss
power loss by
by arcing
arcingrather
rather than
than protecting
protecting thethe transmission
transmissionlineslinesfrom
fromlightning.
lightning.
GmE mobj
66 A
A The potential energy of an object in orbit is given by EP 5 where EP is
r
the potential energy, mE is Earth’s mass and m obj is the object’s mass. Because the
masses of the objects are different, their potential energy is also different. The
2pr
orbital speed of any object is given by the formula v 5 where v is the orbital
T
speed, r is its orbital radius and T is the orbital period. Here the mass of the orbiting
object is not included, so their orbital speed is equal.

77 B
B According
According to to Lenz’s
Lenz’s law
law the
the approach
approach of
of aa south
south pole
pole from
from below
below induces
induces aa south
south
pole
pole in the base of the coil (hence a north pole at its top), so the direction offield
in the base of the coil (hence a north pole at its top), so the direction of the the
within the coil is ↑. Because a north pole is induced at the top of the coil, the
field within the coil is ↑. Because a north pole is induced at the top of the coil, the current
direction is anticlockwise.
current direction is anticlockwise.

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 509
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 411

9781741256451 SuccessOne
9781741255782 Success One_Physics_2017.indd
PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb411509 22/12/2016 2:10PM
8/12/14 3:42 PM
CHAPTER 15 • 2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

8
8 D
D The iron
The iron core
core allows
allows eddy
eddy currents
currents to
to flow,
flow, which
which generate heat; this
generate heat; this is
is not desirable
not desirable
as it
as it wastes
wastesenergy.
energy.ItItis is
useful because
useful because it links the magnetic
it links fieldsfields
the magnetic between the coils,
between the
concentrating the flux in the secondary coil––it certainly does not separate
coils, concentrating the flux in the secondary coil––it certainly does not separate them! them!

9
9 D
A Because
A thereofiscopper
wire made a greater energy
alloy has agap between
higher the valence
resistance band and
than a similar wireconduction
made of
band of the alloy than those of the copper, less free electrons move when
pure copper because the other metal's atoms are impurities that impede the flow the same
of
potential difference is applied across both, so the current in the
electrons, resulting in a lower current for the same applied voltage. alloy is lower. Since
V = IR, its resistance is greater.
10 C The two experiments are distinct, so the conservation of energy is not applicable
10 C The two experiments
between them. It is theare generator
distinct, soeffect
the conservation of energy
in action here, is not
not the motor applicable
effect.
The direction of the magnetic field does not change. The significant point is The
between them. It is the generator effect in action here, not the motor effect. the
direction of the magnetic field does not change. The significant point
relative motion being equal. The rate of change in magnetic flux, and so the is the relative
motion being equal.
electromotive force The rate of is
generated, change in magnetic
the same in bothflux, and so since
situations the electromotive
the relative
force generated, is
motion is the same. the same in both situations since the relative motion is the same.

11
11 B
B The intensity
The intensity of of electromagnetic
electromagnetic radiation
radiation represents the number
represents the number of of photons
photons
present, having
present, having been emitted by
been emitted by the
the blackbody.
blackbody. If
If emitted
emitted they
they are not reabsorbed;
are not reabsorbed;
neither is
neither is there
there interference
interference between
between them.
them.

12
12 C
C The force
forceacting
actingonon thethe
wire PQ PQ
wire is given by theby
is given formula F = BIlFsinu. It
the formula issin
BIl important
. It is
to note that
important is thethat
tounote angle
 isofthe
theangle
wire inofrelation
the wiretointherelation
field, and so infield,
to the bothand
cases is
souin
90°. As
both thecoil
cases rotates
is 90°. As thethrough 360° the
coil rotates current
through supplied
360° is constant
the current supplied(except as the
is constant
brushes as
(except cross
the the insulator),
brushes the insulator),
cross the length of PQ does not
the length of change,
PQ doesand notthe magnetic
change, and
fieldmagnetic
the is constant fieldinisthe case ofinthe
constant theparallel
case of field, and may
the parallel beand
field, considered uniform in
may be considered
the case of
uniform in the
the radial
case of field.
theThe direction
radial of the
field. The applied of
direction force
thedoes change,
applied as does
force
the torque
change, on the
as does coil,
the but these
torque on theare notbut
coil, asked.
these are not asked.

13
13 C
C motor effect
The motor effect is described as the movement of a current-carrying conductor
magnetic field.
when in a magnetic field. Current
Current flowing
flowing through the
the transformer’s
transformer’s coils
coils makes
each of its loops into a thin magnet, a north pole on one face and a south pole on
the opposite
the opposite face.
face. They are simultaneously
simultaneously current-carrying conductors, so they are
forced to move (together).
(together).

14
14 B
B the switch
When the switch is open the
the resistance
resistance inin the
the outside
outside circuit
circuit is
is infinite,
infinite, so the
potential difference generated produces zero current (V
potential = IR, when R
(V  IR, is ∞
R is ).).
However, when
when the
theswitch
switchisisclosed
closeda cycle of AC
a cycle potential
of AC difference
potential causes
difference a cycle
causes a
of current
cycle to flow.
of current to flow.
Gm1 m2 Gm1 m2 1 Gm1 m2
15 A
15 A FG 5 ∴ FG 5 2 = ? ∴ FG = 3 N
r2 1 2r 2 4 r2

16 A
16 A Using
Using the
the induction
induction coil to generate
coil to generate radio
radio waves
waves Hertz
Hertz could
could count
count their
their frequency.
frequency.
He
He used their interference pattern when they reflected along the same path
used their interference pattern when they reflected along the same path to
to
measure their wavelength, and used the v  fλ formula to determine their
measure their wavelength, and used the v = fl formula to determine their speed. speed.

510
412 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 412 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 510 8/12/14 3:42 PM
2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS
2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

17
17 B
B Because the
Because the charge
charge onon an
an alpha
alpha particle
particle is
is twice
twice that
that of
of aa proton,
proton, the
the force
force applied
applied
to itit within
to within the
the electric
electric field
field is
is twice
twice as
as great.
great. However,
However, since
since the mass of
the mass of the
the alpha
alpha
particle is
particle is four
four times
times that
that ofof the
the proton,
proton,and
and FF  its acceleration
ma, its
= ma, acceleration is
is half
half that
that of
of
the proton.
the proton.

18 D
18 D The charge
The charge onon aa cathode
cathode ray
ray (electron)
(electron) isis negative,
negative, soso within
within aa magnetic
magnetic field
field
directed vertically
directed vertically into
into the
the page
page itit would
would experience
experience aa force
force towards
towards the
the bottom
bottom of
of
the page, ↓.
the page, ↓. In
Inorder
order to
tocounteract
counteractthat that force,
force,the
theelectric
electricfield
fieldmust
mustapply a force
apply in
a force
thethe
in opposite
opposite direction, ↑. Therefore,
direction, ↑. Therefore, thethe
electric field
electric must
field be directed
must towards
be directed the
towards
bottom
the of of
bottom thethe
page
pagebecause
becauseit itisisalso
alsobeing
beingapplied
applied onto
onto the same negatively-
the same negatively-
charged cathode
charged cathode ray.
ray.

v2 v2 v2
19 A Lv 5 L0 12 ∴ 160 5 200 12 ∴ 0.82 = 1 2 so v 5 0.6c
Å c2 Å c2 c2

20 D The vertical velocity of an object initially launched horizontally is found using

v = u + at so after two seconds v = 0 + 9.8 × 2 = 19.6 m s21 ↓.

u
45°

u
2u

Since at this instant the object is moving at 45° below the horizontal, the values of
Since
the at this instant
horizontal the object
and vertical is movingare
components at exactly
45° below the horizontal,
equal, so u  19.6the
mvalues of
s–1. The
the horizontal
magnitude of itsand vertical
velocity at components are exactly 2u
that point is therefore equal, so um=s19.6
 27.7 –1 m s . The
21

magnitude of its velocity at that point is therefore "2u = 27.7 m s21

Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
511
413

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 413 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 511 8/12/14 3:42 PM
CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I, Part B

Question 21
Materials only become superconductors at very low temperatures. Type-1 superconductors
require temperatures lower than the boiling point of liquid helium.

This leads to a number of limitations of the use of superconductors, so answers may vary.
Three examples are given below.
1. Very low temperatures are expensive both to reach and maintain.
2. Very low temperatures are also extremely hazardous—such low temperatures can easily
cause burns as well as frostbite, loss of fingers, and so on.
3. So-called high-temperature superconductors, that only need to be cooled to –150° or so,
are made of ceramics. They are very fragile and expensive to manufacture, which
certainly limits their usefulness. (3 marks)

Question 22

If the re-entry angle of a spacecraft returning to the atmosphere is too shallow, the friction
and loss of kinetic energy would be insufficient to slow the spacecraft down enough, so it
would appear to bounce off the atmosphere and return to space.

If the re-entry angle is too steep, the atmospheric drag would decelerate the craft too rapidly,
causing excessive g-loads on the astronauts on board. At the same time, the kinetic energy
lost by the craft would change to heat too rapidly, so the craft may overheat and burn up.

Between these angles is the re-entry corridor in which energy is lost at an acceptable rate for
both the spacecraft and those on board. (3 marks)

Question 23

There is current flowing towards the right in the wire. According to Oersted’s law, this causes
a magnetic field around the wire that is directed downwards, into the page, in the region
between it and section BC of the loop. Since BC carries current in the same direction, the
magnetic field between it and the wire is directed vertically out of the page, so the two fields
partially annul one another, causing the wires to experience a force towards each other.

However, section AD of the loop carries current in the opposite direction, so the magnetic
field between it and the wire is directed vertically into the page, so these two fields reinforce
one another, causing the wires to experience a force away from each other. Since AD is
further from the wire than BC, this force is weaker than the attractive force.

Sections AB and CD of the loop lie perpendicular to the wire, so the magnetic fields around
them have no effect on the current-carrying wire. The result is that the wire is attracted
towards loop ABCD. (3 marks)

414 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 414 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 24
nP VP 2000 23 000
(a) =  ∴ nS  57 391 (57 000) turns (2 marks)
nS VS nS 660 000

(b) According to the principle of conservation of energy, the power input is equal to the
total power output (useful power plus power loss) PIN  POUT
P  VI, so VP IP  VS IS ∴ 23 000  100  660 000  IS ∴ IS  3.485 A
PLOSS  IS2RS  3.4852  2000  24 290 J (24 kW) (3 marks)

Question 25

(a)

This device is called an Aragó disc. A circular plate made of aluminium or another non-
magnetic metal is free to rotate on a crank handle. A long horseshoe magnet fixed to
the crank handle is forced to rotate as the handle is turned, so the magnetic poles at
opposite ends of the magnet move across the disc’s surface. This changes the magnetic
flux penetrating it, generating an emf opposing this change, in accordance with Lenz’s
law. The plate is a bulk metal, so eddy currents occur in the disc. As long as the crank
handle is turned, the disc is forced to turn in the same direction. This demonstration
shows that a rotating magnetic field causes a conductor to turn in the same direction
without direct contact or supplied current to the rotor, which is the principle of the AC
induction motor. (2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 415

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 415 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(b) Electromagnet 1
(b) Electromagnet 1

Electromagnet 3 Electromagnet 4
Electromagnet 3 Electromagnet 4

Electromagnet 2
Electromagnet 2

The rotor in place The ‘squirrel

within the aperture cage’ rotor
The rotor in place The ‘squirrel
within the aperture cage’ rotor
The motor effect states that a current-carrying conductor within a magnetic field
The motor effect states that a current-carrying conductor within a magnetic field
experiences a force.
experiences a force.
In
In an
an AC
AC induction
induction motor,
motor, alternating
alternating current
currentisisconnected
connectedto toelectromagnets
electromagnets11andand2,
and a second
2, and alternating
a second alternatingcurrent, 90°90°
current, outout
of of
phase, is is
phase, connected
connectedto to
electromagnets 3 3
electromagnets
and 4. This results
and 4. This results in
in aa magnetic
magnetic fifield that rotates
eld that rotates at
at 50
50 Hz
Hz within
within the
the aperture.
aperture.
The rotor is designed to have low resistance, to maximise the currents induced within it
The rotor is designed to have low resistance, to maximise the currents induced within
when it is located within the aperture. Currents flow in circuits created by bars of the
it when it is located within the aperture. Currents flow in circuits created by bars of the
squirrel cage and conducting top and bottom plates. As demonstrated by the Aragó
squirrel cage and conducting top and bottom plates. As demonstrated by the Aragó
disc, the rotor is then forced to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic
disc, the rotor is then forced to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic
field created by the electromagnets. (3 marks)
field created by the electromagnets. (3 marks)

Question 26
Question 26
hc 6.626 3 10234 3 3.0 3 108
(a)
(a) E = hf but fl = c ∴E5 5 = 4.79 × 10219 J (2(2marks)
marks)
l 415 3 1029
(b)
(b) The
The graph
graph indicates
indicates that
that with
with aa voltage
voltage of
of 4.1
4.1 V V applied
applied to
to the
the photocell
photocell electrons
electrons are
are
liberated
liberated from
from the
the surface
surface of
of the
the aluminium
aluminium plate,
plate, so
so the
the work
work function
function  Cofof aluminium
aluminium
is
is 4.1 eV. Therefore
4.1 eV. Therefore thethe threshold
threshold frequency
frequency forfor the
the aluminium plate is
aluminium plate found by
is found by
4.1 (1.6× –19 –34
(1.6
4.1 × 1010
219) = )hfhf
= (6.626
(6.626 234) f ) f . Hence
10
× 10 THTH
. Hence thethreshold
the thresholdfrequency
frequencyis is
calculated 14
calculated toto be
be 9.894
9.894 ×10 1014 Hz.
Hz.
The required line on the graph is parallel to the original line, but displaced so that it
touches the maximum KE  0 baseline at frequency  9.894  1014 Hz.
514 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S

416 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 514 8/12/14 3:42 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 416 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Maximum KE (eV)
5

0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Frequency (× 1014 Hz)

From the graph, the frequency producing photoelectrons with a maximum KE of

1.2 eV using a voltage of 0.0 V is 12.8  1014 Hz. (3 marks)

Question 27

(a) The probe is launched in the direction of Earth’s rotation, and uses the Earth’s
gravitational acceleration to change its direction to be similar to the direction of motion
of the planet. Using the Earth’s rotation and gravitational pull to change its direction
reduces the amount of energy required, thereby reducing the fuel necessary.
The reason the probe then takes the path shown in the diagram has to do with the
amount of energy required to move away from the Sun. Providing sufficient energy for
a more direct path would be expensive, and might not even be possible, since the
weight of the extra fuel required would also increase the energy the probe would need
firstly to leave the Earth, and then to obtain the enormous amount of gravitational
potential energy to move so far away from the Sun.
Following a path that bypasses the planets in turn allows the probe to gain energy using
the slingshot effect, in an elastic collision process. A close fly-by in the correct
direction allows the probe to take advantage of the momentum/kinetic energy of each
planet, rather than carrying extra fuel to provide this energy.
The curved path of the probe as it makes its way towards Neptune is caused by the
Sun’s gravitational field, similar to the way a ball thrown horizontally travels in a
curved path due to the Earth’s gravitational field. (3 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 417

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 417 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

The curved path of the probe as it makes its way towards Neptune is caused by the
CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER
Sun’s gravitational field, similar to the way a ball thrown horizontally travels in a
curved path due to the Earth’s gravitational field. (3 marks)

r3 GmE 1 6568 3 103 2 3 1 6.67 3 10211 2 1 6.0 3 1024 2

(b) 5 ∴ 5 ∴ T = 5.287 × 103 s (2 marks)
T2 4p2 T2 4p2
GmE mP
(c) E P (Earth) = 2 = 2 1 6.73 3 107 2 mP
rE
GmE mP
E P (orbit) = 2 = 2 1 6.09 3 107 2 mP
rorb
Gravitational Potential Energy

0 Time (min)
10 20 30 40

(2 marks)

Question 28

Question
(a) 28
Bulb with
(a) High voltage source Path of fluorescent surface
cathode ray
Bulb with
High voltage source Path of fluorescent surface
cathode ray + +
Both fields
Heater + +– – switched on
filament Both fields
Heater – – switched on
filament Electron gun Velocity selector Only the magnetic
field switched on
Electron gun Velocity selector Only the magnetic
field switched on
Thomson’s cathode-ray tube
(3 marks)
Thomson’s cathode-ray tube
(3 marks)

516 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S

418 S U2015Ed.indb
9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS CCESS O N
516 E HSC • PHYSICS 8/12/14 3:42 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 418 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

22001144 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• AA NN SS W
W EE RR SS

(b) The centripetal force acting on the electron is the magnetic force, so F C ≡ F B.

mv2
∴ = Bqv sin u
r
mv
u = 90° so 5 Bq
r
mv 1 9.109 3 10231 2 1 1 3 107 2
∴r5 5 = 6.32 × 1022 m (3 marks)
Bq 1 9 3 1024 2 1 1.602 3 10219 2

Question 29
Question 29
Semiconductors are materials that are neither conductors of electricity nor insulators. They
Semiconductors
may be elements,are materials
such that are or
as germanium neither conductors
silicon, of electricity
or compounds. nor insulators.
Their band structure isThey
may
shown beinelements, such as
the following germanium
diagram. or silicon,
The valence bandor does
compounds. Theirthe
not overlap band structureband
conduction is
shown
(as in ainconductor).
the following diagram.
However, The valence
because band does
the forbidden gapnot overlap
between themthe is
conduction
narrow, atband (as
normal
in a conductor).
temperatures However,
there because the
is a substantial forbidden
number gap between
of electrons them is narrow,
in the conduction band,atso
normal
they are
temperatures there is a substantial
free to move through the crystal. number of electrons in the conduction band, so they are
free to move through the crystal.

Conduction
Conduction band
band

Valence
Valence band
band
Forbidden
Forbidden gap
gap
Full
Full electrond
electrond band
band

Forbidden
Forbidden gap
gap

Band
Band theory
theory diagram
diagram forfor a semiconductor
a semiconductor

When an electron
electron does
does receive
receive enough
enough thermal
thermal energy
energy toto jump
jump into
intothe
theconduction
conductionband,
band,it
leaves behind
it leaves behind a hole
a holewhere
whereit had been.
it had been.AnAn electron from
electron froman anadjacent atom
adjacent cancan
atom drop into that
drop
hole, which
into that is therefore
hole, considered
which is therefore positive, positive,
considered and it migrates through the
and it migrates crystal
through theascrystal
electrons
from nearby from
as electrons atomsnearby
continue to move
atoms into to
continue themove
placeinto
of the
the missing
place ofelectron, such
the missing that the
electron,
direction
such that of
thehole migration
direction is opposite
of hole migration theisdirection
opposite of
theelectron
directionmovement.
of electronIn movement.
an undoped
semiconductor
In an undoped both electrons and
semiconductor bothholes carry and
electrons current
holesthrough the crystal
carry current as they
through themove.
crystal as
they move.
To increase the conductivity of a semiconductor, particularly silicon, it can be doped by the
intentional addition of a miniscule amount of an impurity called the dopant. There are two
To increase the conductivity of a semiconductor, particularly silicon, it can be doped by
types of dopants, either atoms of elements having a valency of 3 (e.g. gallium) or 5
the intentional addition of a miniscule amount of an impurity called the dopant. There are
(e.g. arsenic).
two types of dopants, either atoms of elements having a valency of 3 (e.g. gallium) or 5
(e.g. arsenic).

E x c e l SSUUCCCCEESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• PP HH YY SS II CC SS 419

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 419 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 517 8/12/14 3:42 PM
CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Consider a crystal of silicon. If a valence-3 impurity replaces a silicon atom it can only share
three electrons, leaving a hole. An electron from an adjacent atom can drop into the hole
leaving a new hole behind, so the hole migrates. A hole attracts electrons so it is regarded as
positively charged, and the charge-carriers in this type of doped crystal are considered
positive. For this reason it is called a p-type semiconductor.

If a valence-5 impurity replaces the silicon atom it can only share four electrons, so the other
is almost free to move through the crystal. The charge-carriers in this type of doped silicon
crystal are electrons, so it is said to be an n-type semiconductor.

Si Si Si Si Si Si

Si Ga Si Si As Si

Hole Extra
electron

Si Si Si Si Si Si

In each case the conductivity of the semiconductor is increased. Doping actually increases
the flow of current by creating an acceptor level within the gap between valence band and
conduction band of the semiconductor for the p-type dopant, or a donor level in that gap for
the n-type dopant. The charge-carriers in a p-type crystal are holes, while in an n-type crystal
they ar electrons. (5 marks)

Question 30

(a) Galileo’s analysis of projectile motion asserts that the motion of a projectile consists of
two components, one in the vertical and one in the horizontal direction, and that these
components are independent of one another—apart from the time interval of their
motion. The horizontal motion is constant, while the vertical motion features constant
acceleration due to gravity.
Since in the given situation both cannonballs took exactly the same time to reach the
same height, Galileo’s analysis is supported, because cannonball P has no horizontal
component velocity, whereas cannonball Q does have such a component, although the
vertical components of their velocity were demonstrated to be equal. (3 marks)

420 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 420 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

22001144 HHSSCC EEXXAAMMI INNAATTI IOONN PPAAPPEERR •• AA NN SS W
W EE RR SS

(b) Ball
(b) Ball P

x-direction: Δx = ut + 12 at 2 y-direction: Δy = ut + 12 at 2
1
=0 =02 2 × 6 × 32
= 227 units
Ball Q

x-direction: Δx = ut + 12 at 2 y-direction: Δy = ut + 12 at 2
1
= 3 × 2 + 0 = 6 units =02 2 × 6 × 22
= 212 units

x-direction: Δx = ut + 12 at 2 y-direction: Δy = ut + 12 at 2
1
=3×3+0 =02 2 × 6 × 32
= 9 units = 227 units

Key
Ball P
Ball Q
Vertical displacement

Horizontal displacement

(4 marks)
(4 marks)

E x c e l SSUUCCCCEESSSS OONNEE HHSSCC •• PP HH YY SS II CC SS 421

519

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 421 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

9781741255782 SuccessOne PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb 519 8/12/14 3:42 PM
CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 31

Thomas Edison supplied DC electricity to the northern United States. Despite his extensive
campaign to demonstrate the higher risk of death by electrocution through the use of AC
power, the state of New York decided upon AC instead. They considered several substantial
advantages of AC, and ever since then almost all the world’s electricity supply has been AC.

Society benefits from this decision for a number of reasons.

AC is easier to generate than DC. AC and DC generators can appear very similar, with a coil
being forced to rotate at a fixed rate through a strong magnetic field, powered by falling water,
or by steam produced by nuclear reactors or burning fossil fuel. However, the slip‑rings used
to conduct AC electricity are much more efficient than the split-ring commutators required
for (variable) DC.

Unlike DC, the voltage of AC can easily be varied by the use of transformers. This is crucial,
because the electricity must be distributed to customers through wires, the resistance of
which makes power losses unavoidable. These losses are greatly reduced if the current is
reduced (PLOSS  I 2R). Transformers are used to raise the generated voltage to extreme levels
for transmission, then decrease it to usable levels close to where it is to be used. In this way
AC can be generated in places far away from the cities. This is still not currently possible for
DC generation, and few in our societies want to live close to power-generating facilities.

It is also easier to connect AC supply to a larger number of users than it is for DC, and once
within factories, offices or homes those same transformers are used to step up the voltage for
heaters, lift motors and machinery, or step it down for electric shavers, hair dryers or
computers.

Although DC motors are capable of supplying greater torque than AC types for the same
voltage supply, AC induction motors are simple to run, much cheaper, and are used for far
more appliances where high torque and variable speed are not important.

For important reasons such as these AC has shown to provide greater benefits for society
than DC was able to do. (6 marks)

422 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 422 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Section II—Options
Question 33—Medical Physics

(a) (i) After application of acoustic gel, an ultrasound transducer is positioned against
the skin of the chest wall and directed towards the heart. Ultrasound waves travel
towards the beating heart. Reflected ultrasound is detected using the transducer,
and the image produced on the computer screen is focused to locate the blood
inside the heart. The computer uses Doppler analysis of the reflected ultrasound to
show the direction of blood flow on the screen. Ultrasound reflected from blood
that is flowing towards the transducer will have higher frequencies than ultrasound
reflected from blood that is not moving. Blood that is moving away from the
transducer will reflect the ultrasound at even lower frequencies. The difference in
frequencies of the reflected ultrasound is used to determine the velocity of the
blood. Computer software is typically used to represent the directions of blood
flow as different colours on the image (typically blue and red). (2 marks)
(ii)
Computer software can be programmed to use the time data (the peaks on the graph)
of reflected ultrasound and accurate estimates of the speed of ultrasound waves in
the tissues being investigated to determine the distance to the surfaces reflecting
the ultrasound waves. These distances can then be plotted as points along a single
line. The position of these dots then needs to be saved or frozen on the computer
screen. Moving the transducer across the skin a little and taking another reading
will result in more dots that can be plotted and saved to the developing image.
Moving the single transducer back and forward across the skin, over the area to
be imaged, will then produce a series of dots that will translate into a two-
dimensional image of the internal body structures. In this way, the multiple
A-scans are converted into a B-scan image that can be viewed, saved and printed.

Transducer
moved

Spots plotted at distances calculated

by using peak times on graph (3 marks)
(b) (i) X-rays are produced when fast-moving electrons are rapidly decelerated. This
occurs inside an X-ray tube, where fast-moving electrons are generated by
creating a large potential difference between a heated cathode and a tungsten
anode inside an evacuated cathode ray tube. The kinetic energy (EK) of the
electrons is 1 mv2 = qV, so the higher the potential difference, the faster the
2
electrons will be moving when they hit the anode. Electrons accelerate from the
heated cathode towards the tungsten anode. When the electrons strike the anode
they are rapidly stopped. This rapid deceleration produces a wide spectrum of
X-rays called bremsstrahlung radiation. (2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 423

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 423 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(ii) The following table compares the use of conventional X-ray images and CT
scans to investigate the lungs.
Feature Conventional X-ray CT scan
Image quality Low Very high
Image resolution Low—16 greyscale Excellent—256 greyscale
Time required Very little time (1–2 minutes). Longer time (5–10 minutes).
The person stands in front of The person lies down and is
the X-ray machine, which passed through a gantry while
fires X-rays through the X-rays are passed through the
person onto a plate. The plate body and detected using
is developed within a few photomultiplier tubes. The
minutes and printed onto data is sent to a powerful
acetate film, or an image is computer for processing into
viewed on a screen and saved images.
to a computer if digital.
Nature of image 2D shadow image. 2D slice images and 3D
high‑quality images.
Lungs are masked by the
heart and the bones of the Images can be filtered to show
skeleton in the upper body just the lungs with detailed
(ribs and spine). internal and external
structures.
Uses Unusual shadows are used to Detailed structural analysis is
help diagnoses, such as fluid used in the identification of
on the lungs, tumours or issues such as lung tumours or
cancers, and potential lung cancers, and airway blockages.
injury (from fractured ribs).
Sometimes matched with
positron emission tomography
(PET) data.
Exposure to Low (single shot) High (multiple shots or
X-rays continuous spiral);
approximately 100 times
greater than a single X-ray
Cost Low ($100–$200) Approximately 10 times more
expensive than a conventional
X-ray
Equipment costs Moderate Very high
Availability High—most places, including Much lower—only in larger
small towns, most small hospitals, large imaging clinics
hospitals and small radiology and regional centres
centres

(3 marks)

424 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 424 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(c) The positron-emitting carbon-11 (C-11) is typically incorporated in a substance

(radiopharmaceutical) that is readily taken into the body, such as being tagged to
oxygen as CO2, which could then be inhaled by the patient. During the transmutation to
boron-11, the C-11 emits a positron that annihilates a local electron inside the body at
the site of absorption. Each annihilation results in the production of two gamma
photons, which leave the body in opposite directions.
+1e  –1e → 2
The patient is positioned inside a gamma camera gantry that detects the gamma
photons emitted from millions of positron-electron annihilations. The data is processed
by a computer to produce an image that identifies where the C-11 was absorbed. Sites
of higher-level absorption become bright (hot) spots on the image. These PET scans are
functional images, so are particularly useful in diagnosis, identifying normal or
abnormal functioning within the body and identifying cancerous tissue. (4 marks)
(d) The magnetic properties of protons (in hydrogen atoms) are used to cause non-ionising
radio frequency electromagnetic radiation (EMR) to be emitted from the body. This is
detected, processed by powerful computers and used to produce diagnostic images
(MRIs).
Protons and neutrons have a magnetic property called spin. Spin can be up or down.
Up and down magnetic spin cancel each other out. A nucleus with an odd number of
nucleons will have a net spin. Since most hydrogen atoms have only one nucleon (a
proton), nearly all of the hydrogen nuclei in our bodies have net spin and hence
magnetic property. This magnetic property is used in producing MRIs.
A person is placed inside a cylinder that is constructed in such a way that a very strong
magnetic field is applied to the body. This magnetic field causes the nuclei with net
spin to align either parallel or anti-parallel with the field.
When the nuclei with net spin are aligned with the field their spin axis rotates (precesses)
around the magnetic field direction. The frequency of precession (Lamor frequency)
varies for different nuclei. For hydrogen nuclei, the Lamor frequency is approximately
42.6 MHz/T. Electromagnetic pulses are directed into the body at the Lamor frequency.
This energy is absorbed by the protons in hydrogen nuclei, causing the precession
angle to increase (flip). This is an unstable situation, so when the pulse is stopped, the
nuclei release the EMR at the same Lamor frequency as they return to their more stable
orientation. This is called relaxation. Hydrogen atoms are bound slightly differently in
different molecules, affecting the rate at which the nuclei relax. A small gradient
magnetic field is used to create slight differences in the strength of the field across the
body and so the frequency at which the hydrogen nuclei precess. This allows for
accurate location of EMR emitted from the body.
The proton density in blood and other body fluids (which are mostly water) and various
body tissues is different, so the strength of the emitted EMR produced when the
protons relax varies for different tissues. Coupled with the different frequencies of
precession for the hydrogen’s protons, due to the slight variations in magnetic field,
high-contrast images can be produced. There are also two types of relaxation, T1

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 425

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 425 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(spin‑lattice) and T2 (spin-spin), which occur at slightly different rates. Diagnosticians

can use T1 and T2 weighted images, taken at different times during relaxation, to
enhance particular features of the body shown on the image. (5 marks)
(e) Medical physics has had a significant impact on society in a number of ways.
The development of diagnostic tools such as ultrasound, X-ray, endoscopy, MRI, CT,
SPECT and PET has greatly improved the ability of diagnosticians to discover and treat
medical issues correctly and at an earlier stage. Improved diagnostic imaging enhances
the ability of surgeons to minimise the impact of surgery and more adequately treat
illnesses and repair injuries. This reduces the time off work, increasing productivity. It
also reduces the burden on society of supporting those who cannot work due to their
illnesses and injuries. The range of medical physics technologies available and the scope
of their application have improved over time. This has led to improvements in the ability
of medical practitioners to more accurately diagnose an increasing number of medical
issues and has assisted in finding solutions to many of those issues (e.g. the early
identification of the onset of Alzheimer’s disease, the identification of minute blood
clots in the brain and the development of artificial implants that perfectly match the
structure of the body).
Education and employment opportunities have also been created by medical physics.
New courses not only open up new areas of study for students, but also require
lecturers and facilities. Other employment opportunities in this field are for skilled
technicians, who are required to operate the equipment, and diagnosticians, who are
required to interpret the scans. Clerical and nursing staff is also needed to administer
the finances and manage the patients. In addition, skilled people are required to build,
install and maintain the equipment.
Medical physics has provided new opportunities for medical research. Medical scientists
are constantly reviewing, testing and improving the application of the various
technologies. They are also increasing our knowledge and understanding about the
human body and a range of disorders, including diseases of the brain.
A negative impact of medical physics is the issue of inequity of access. Only those people
who are well situated, both geographically and financially, are able to access many of
the top-end medical physics applications, such as CT, MRI, SPECT and PET. Facilities
offering these technologies are typically only located in major centres in affluent countries,
and there is considerable cost involved in the more elaborate scans. On the positive
side, the many people that do have access to such impressive diagnostic equipment
often suffer less and have the opportunity to live longer, happier and healthier lives.
The increased longevity of populations who have access to this technology can also be
considered a negative impact, as there is a possibility of increased pressure on
governments to provide for those who live longer and perhaps become a burden on
society. On the other hand, people are able to work longer, so they will be able to
provide for themselves to a greater extent in their longevity. Governments will reap the
benefits of collecting tax from individuals who stay in the workforce for a greater time.
While there are some negative impacts of medical physics, they are far outweighed by
the significant positive impacts on society. (6 marks)

426 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 426 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 34—Astrophysics

(a) (i) 34—Astrophysics

Question Star X appears to have changed position relative to the other stars because of
parallax. X is a nearby star. The background stars are too distant from Earth for
(a) (i) Star
theirXown
appears to have
apparent changedtoposition
movement relativeAs
be noticeable. to Earth
the other stars around
revolves becausetheof Sun,
parallax. X isappear
nearby stars a nearby star. Theposition,
to change background
with astars are tooapparent
maximum distant from Earthevery
variation for
their own apparent movement to be noticeable. As Earth revolves around the Sun,
six months.
nearby stars appear to change position, with a maximum apparent variation every
six months.
F 2 March
F 2 March

Background stars
Background stars
Earth’s orbit X
Earth’s orbit X
Sun
Sun

E 2 September (2 marks)
E 2 September (2 marks)
1 k I1 d2 2 102
(ii)
(ii) I ~ ∴ I 5 ∴ 5 5 = 16 times
d2 d2 I2 d1 2 2.52
Star X as viewed from Earth is 16 times as bright as if it were 10 pc distant
Star X as viewed from Earth is 16 times as bright as if it were 10 pc distant
from Earth. (3 marks)
from Earth. (3 marks)
(b) (i) Stars of spectral class A are classified as white stars. The blackbody radiation
(b) (i) from
Starsthese stars contains
of spectral class A areapproximately equal stars.
classified as white amounts
The of blue andradiation
blackbody violet light
as red,these
from orange and
stars yellow approximately
contains light, with the equal
peak intensity
amounts within
of blue the
andgreen
violetrange.
light
Our eyes
as red, interpret
orange andthis as white
yellow light,the
light, with andpeak
if the star is viewed
intensity within thethrough
greenarange.
blue
(photographic) filterthis
Our eyes interpret andasalso
whitethrough a (yellow)
light, and visual
if the star filter, through
is viewed the image appears
a blue
to(photographic)
be equally bright.
filter and also through a (yellow) visual filter, the image appears to
be equally bright.
However, in this question the star is viewed through a blue filter and a red filter.
The red filter reduces the amount of violet and blue passing through even more
However, in this question the star is viewed through a blue filter and a red filter.
than a yellow filter does, and also decreases the amount of green and yellow
The red filter reduces the amount of violet and blue passing through even more
light. Since fewer photons pass through the red filter to be counted by the
than a yellow filter does, and also decreases the amount of green and yellow
charge‑coupled device (CCD), the image appears less bright than when the light
light. Since fewer photons pass through the red filter to be counted by the
from the A-star passes through a blue filter. (2 marks)
charge-coupled device (CCD), the image appears less bright than when the light
(ii) Viewing
from theany starpasses
A-star through filtersaofblue
through twofilter.
(or more) different coloured filters(2ismarks)
very
useful for astronomers because it allows the intensity of its image to be very
(ii) accurately
Viewing any star through
measured usingfialters
CCD.of two
Once(orthis
more) different
is done, imagecoloured filters
intensities areis
very usefuland
compared forthe
astronomers because
colour index it allows
(CI) of the starthe intensity
can be foundof (CI
its image
 B –toV).
be
very accurately measured using a CCD. Once this is done, image intensities are
Once the colour index of the star has been determined, astrophysicists are able to
compared and the colour index (CI) of the star can be found (CI = B – V).
estimate its spectral class quite accurately.

Spectral class O3 B0 A0 F0 G0 K0 M0

Colour index –0.3 –0.15 0.0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.8

526 Excel S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 427

9781741255782
© Pascal SuccessOne
Press ISBN 978 1PHYSICS 2015Ed.indb
74125 645 1 526
Excel Success One HSC Physics 8/12/14 3:42 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 427 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

From its spectral class, the star’s location on the H–R diagram is found, allowing a
good estimate of its distance from Earth to be calculated using spectroscopic parallax:
d
M = m – 5 log10  (3 marks)
10
(c) There are several possible reasons why the brightness of a star is observed to have
increased. Only two reasons are required in this answer but four examples are given here.
The star may be an intrinsic variable, such as a Cepheid, which has a regular cycle of
varying brightness, with a period of between 1 day and 100 days. Spectroscopic
analysis shows that the star actually does expand and contract, and its colour also varies
slightly, being redder when it is largest. Astrophysicists believe these stars are very old,
having evolved into supergiants. It is thought that the cycle of changing brightness has
to do with ions that trap the heat forming at specific temperatures within their
atmosphere, causing the star to overheat, expand and release the trapped energy rapidly.
The star may be about to evolve into a red giant. All stars have a huge gravitational
pressure crushing inwards onto their core, due to their weight. In order to maintain their
stability stars are forced to balance this pressure by fusing the hydrogen fuel in their
core to generate radiation pressure outwards. Eventually the fuel is exhausted, so the
star collapses inwards. The huge loss in potential energy changes into heat, igniting
hydrogen in a shell around the original core. Along with the great pressure on the core,
this heat now causes the helium that had been created in the core to fuse as well. The
total energy then released by the star is far greater than before, so it appears brighter.
The star may be an extrinsic variable, in which the brightness varies as a consequence
of external influences, such as being partially eclipsed or revealed by the movements of
an orbiting companion in a binary or alternative system, or due to its rotation to a
position where the surface features less sunspots directed towards Earth.
More rapid increases in brightness may be due to a star rapidly outputting energy
during a supernova process. (4 marks)

(d) The given H–R diagram shows a very short main sequence section, with a turn-off
point at G-stars. This means that the stars of higher spectral classes than G have all
evolved. G-stars have a life span on the main sequence of around 10 billion years, so
the cluster corresponding to this diagram would be the same age and extremely old.
The branch directed upwards indicates the existence of very many red giants, including
star P, confirming that the cluster is ancient.
Star P has exactly the same colour as star Q, which is still on the main sequence. Q is
far smaller in mass and size than P, but the surface temperature of both stars is equal.
Their position on the H–R diagram shows both stars to be K-types, around K7, which
equates to a surface temperature of around 3500 K. The individual spectra match each
other very closely, which confirms their matching surface temperatures; however,
star P has evolved, having initially been a star with a much higher surface temperature
than Q, possibly an A-type.

428 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 428 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Both stars display strong hydrogen spectral lines, but those of star Q are more intense,
showing that its density is much greater than that of P. This again is consistent, because
red giants have a diameter up to 100 times greater than main sequence stars of the same
spectral class, which means their volume is up to a million times greater. Although the
mass of such stars could be as much as 20 times greater than their main sequence
equivalents, their density would be just a fraction of that of the main sequence stars.
The spectral lines of star Q also display broadening, while the lines of star P do not.
This effect usually indicates that the star is rotating very quickly. There is no such
evidence in the spectral lines of P, as giants rotate very slowly because of their size.
The evidence provided by the H–R diagram shows that this cluster is indeed an ancient
one, and is almost certainly a globular cluster. Comparison of the stars’ spectra shows
significant properties of stars, in particular differences between giants and main
sequence stars, which are very important for astrophysics students to recognise.
However, the fact that there are both main sequence stars and red giants in a cluster
does not in itself allow determination of the cluster’s age, merely that giants were once
more massive bright stars that have evolved, while the main sequence stars, born at the
same time as the brighter ones, have not yet evolved because they consume their
hydrogen fuel at a much slower rate. (5 marks)

(e) In order to obtain quality images of celestial objects from ground-based telescopes,
their sensitivity and resolution need to be as great as possible. This is because the
images need to be able to identify the existence of dim objects as well as to separate
objects close to one another and distinguish their features.
Both sensitivity and resolution are improved simply by using larger objectives—either
mirrors or lenses—but making them larger creates further problems. Larger objectives
necessarily have greater mass, and their consequently increased weight is a source of
distortion in a mirror (or lens). Furthermore, since the weight is always directed
vertically downwards, the distortion of the primary mirror is variable, depending upon
which direction the telescope is pointing in.
Active optics can be used to overcome this problem in mirrors, but not in lenses.
Instead of the mirror being a single piece, it is composed of a large number of intersecting
sectors on rubber bases, each controlled by a computer. Since the computer ‘knows’ the
direction it is pointing in, it adjusts the sectors every few seconds to maintain the
perfect shape. This certainly overcomes the problem of the distortion of large mirrors.
Adaptive optics is a similar process, using a computer to adjust for the effects of
atmospheric turbulence and temperature variations that otherwise cause images to
move about and change colour. In this case, the computer makes adjustments hundreds
of times each second based on the data being received from standard stars in the
vicinity. This procedure is even more important, since the atmosphere continually plays
havoc with viewing through powerful ground-based telescopes.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 429

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 429 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Interferometry is a useful way to greatly increase the resolution of a telescope. While

the sensitivity of a telescope is directly proportional to its surface area, its resolution is
directly proportional to the diameter of the instrument. This allows data to be received
at two or more separate mirrors, and the signals received from each one combined by
computer to produce a composite image showing celestial objects in great detail.
Interferometry is of major and growing importance because high detail is essential
when looking for planets in other star systems, or when investigating the entire
universe, which is the intent of the Square Kilometre Array, currently being built in
CHAPTER 15 • 2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
South Africa, Australia and New Zealand. (6 marks)

Question
Question35—From
35—FromQuanta
QuantatotoQuarks
Quarks
1 1 1
(a) (i)
(a) (i) = Ra 2 2 2 b
l nf ni
1
= 1.097 × 107 a1 2 b
9
= 9 751 111
Therefore λ 1.02 × 10–7 m
Therefore l = 1.02 × 1027 m
(2(2marks)
marks)
(ii) De Broglie’s hypothesis suggested that particles display wave-like behaviour,
(ii) De Broglie’s hypothesis suggested that h particles display wave-like behaviour,
which can be characterised by λ  h . He applied this when describing stable
which can be characterised by l =
mv. He applied this when describing stable
electron states using the idea of standing mv wave patterns. In this model, there needs
electron
to states
be whole using the
numbers idea of standing
of electron wave in
wavelengths patterns. In this
each stable model, there
state/energy needs
level/
to be whole
circular orbit.numbers of electron
This is shown wavelengths
in the equation nλ in 
each stable
2πr. state/energy
So, for an electronlevel/
to
absorb a photon, the photon must have an exact amount of energy, which ifabsorb
circular orbit. This is shown in the equation nl = 2pr. So, for an electron to
a photon,will
absorbed the photon
allow the must have an
electron exact amount
standing of energy,
wave pattern which
to gain if absorbed
a whole number
will allow the electron standing wave pattern to gain a whole number
(n) of wavelengths to fit into a new stable orbit. Since the energy of the photon (n) of is
wavelengths to fi t into a new stable orbit. Since the energy of
E  hf, the photon will not be absorbed if it does not have an appropriate the photon is E = hf,
the photon will not be absorbed if it does not have an appropriate frequency.
frequency. (3 marks)
(3 marks)
(b) (i) While there are gravitational forces of attraction between nucleons, the force is
(b) (i) millions of times
While there weaker thanforces
are gravitational the electrostatic
of attractionforce tryingnucleons,
between to push the
the protons
force is
apart. Even stronger still is the nuclear force of attraction that overcomes
millions of times weaker than the electrostatic force trying to push the protons the
electrostatic repulsionstill
apart. Even stronger andisholds the protons
the nuclear andattraction
force of neutronsthat
together when the
overcomes they are
very close to repulsion
electrostatic each other.
and Compared
holds theto the strong
protons nuclear force,
and neutrons the when
together gravitational
they are
forces in the nucleus of an atom are irrelevant.
very close to each other. Compared to the strong nuclear force, the gravitational (2 marks)
forces in
(ii) During a the nucleus
nuclear of an atom
reaction, are irrelevant.
total binding energy of products differs from total (2 marks)
binding energy of reactants. When the total binding energy increases during the
(ii) course
Duringofa nuclear reaction,
the reaction, totalisbinding
energy released.energy of products
The amount differsreleased
of energy from totalis given
binding energy of reactants. When2 the total binding energy increases
by Einstein’s equation E  mc where m is the mass defect between the initial during the
course
and ofelements.
final the reaction,
Theenergy
shape isofreleased.
the graphThe amount
shows thatof energy
there are released is given
two possible
2 where m is the mass defect between the initial and
by Einstein’s
types equation E =
of energy-releasing mc reactions.
nuclear
final elements. The shape of the graph shows that there are two possible types of
1. Nuclear fusion of two elements that will combine to form an element up to
energy-releasing
iron. nuclear reactions.

2. Nuclearfusion
1. Nuclear fission,
of in
twowhich elements
elements thatcombine
that will are moretomassive
form anthan iron up
element breakto iron.
apart to form lighter elements. (3 marks)
2. Nuclear fission, in which elements that are more massive than iron break apart
to form lighter elements. (3 marks)
430 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

(c)PressNeutrons
© Pascal are subatomic
ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 particles
Excel Successwith no net
One HSC charge. They
Physics exist in the nuclei of atoms
and are emitted by radioactive elements in the stabilisation process of nuclear fission.
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 430 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
High-density neutron beams can be produced at nuclear facilities such as the OPAL
2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(c) Neutrons are subatomic particles with no net charge. They exist in the nuclei of atoms
and are emitted by radioactive elements in the stabilisation process of nuclear fission.
High-density neutron beams can be produced at nuclear facilities such as the OPAL
reactor at Lucas Heights in Sydney. These neutron beams can be used as probes for
scientific experiments and analysis of materials.
Neutrons have excellent penetrating properties because they are small and uncharged.
They can therefore penetrate the electron clouds of atoms and are not deflected by the
positive charge of the nucleus. Neutrons also have a small de Broglie wavelength.
These properties allow neutrons to be effectively used in diffraction experiments on
very dense materials. For example, scientists can examine the structure of metals and
assess the integrity of welds, identifying risks of failure.
Materials that have been probed with neutrons may remain slightly radioactive for
some time and need to be dealt with appropriately. (4 marks)
(d) The Manhattan Project was a top-secret project in the United States during World
War II to develop atomic weapons ahead of the Germans. The project employed
thousands of scientists and resulted in the development of technology to refine and
concentrate uranium. This led to the production of the plutonium bombs that were
dropped on the cities of Hiroshima and Nagasaki in Japan in 1945. Nearly 200 000
people were killed by these two bombs, and many thousands more suffered injuries or
died later. Radioactive fallout rendered the areas uninhabitable. The development and
use of these bombs shortened the war, saving many lives. It also led to the proliferation
of nuclear weapons with far greater killing capabilities than those used in 1945 in the
ensuing years, during the Cold War between the United States and Russia. This has
probably prevented direct warfare between Russia and the United States ever since.
At present, several countries have access to nuclear weapons. Despite efforts towards
nuclear disarmament, there is ongoing concern about the potential for a nuclear war,
which could possibly bring about the extinction of the human race.
Nuclear technology has also had several peaceful applications. It has led to the
development of nuclear power stations that provide clean electrical power to millions
of people worldwide, reducing emissions of greenhouse gases and pollutants. However,
there are concerns about the possibility of a reactor core meltdown and the subsequent
nuclear fallout. This would cause widespread issues, such as radiation sickness and the
contamination of land and food supplies as occurred as a result of the Chernobyl
reactor incident in 1986.
Applications of medical physics have been developed in both diagnostic and
therapeutic medicine. They have provided a diverse range of employment opportunities
and helped save the lives of millions of people worldwide. In addition, the use of
nuclear reactors in the development of extrinsic semiconductor materials has enhanced
the computer industry and there are wide-ranging applications for semiconductors in
industry and scientific research.
Whether the development of nuclear weapons is positive or negative is debatable, but
the peaceful uses of nuclear technology have had wide-ranging positive implications
for humanity. There is no doubt that the Manhattan Project has been hugely significant
to our global society. (5 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 431

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 431 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 13 • 2014 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(e) The Bohr–Rutherford (B–R) model of the atom is a simplistic one, based on a typical
hydrogen atom with a single proton and electron.

n=3
Increasing energy
n=2 of orbits

n=1

A photon is emitted
with energy E = hf

The B–R model accounts for Thompson’s cathode ray experiments, in which he
discovered that atoms contained electrons. It also accounts for the behaviour of alpha
particles which, for the most part, pass straight through gold foil with little deflection.
The fact that only a small number are deflected at large angles suggests that atoms are
largely empty space with a tiny positively charged nucleus that contains most of the
mass of an atom.
While it is a useful model in providing explanations for some experimental
observations, the B–R model falls short in other areas.
Rutherford hypothesised the presence of neutrons, which were discovered by Chadwick
when he bombarded paraffin with alpha particles. However, neutrons are not
specifically in the B–R model.
The Bohr model was developed to account for the spectral lines of hydrogen. It suggested
that the atoms absorb and emit electromagnetic radiation at specific energy levels,
creating the observed emission and absorption spectra. The stable energy states,
suggested by Bohr, are largely supported by the B–R model and the equations to predict
the emitted and absorbed frequencies of electromagnetic radiation as electrons move
between levels. However, this is only accurate for hydrogen and not for larger atoms.
Hyperfine spectral lines and the splitting of spectral lines in magnetic fields (the
Zeeman effect) cannot be explained using the B–R model.
Modern experiments using high-powered accelerator collisions have recently
discovered particles such as quarks, neutrinos and gluons. The B–R model does not
account for any of these.
Since the B–R model does not account for any experimental discoveries made after 1932,
it is largely inadequate in representing a modern understanding of atoms. (6 marks

432 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 432 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 14

2015 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE

EXAMINATION

Physics

Total marks – 100

Section I Pages 2–28

General Instructions 75 marks

• Reading time – 5 minutes This section has two parts, Part A and Part B
• Working time – 3 hours
Part A – 20 marks
• Write using black pen
• Attempt Questions 1–20
• Draw diagrams using pencil
• Allow about 35 minutes for this part
• Board-approved calculators may
be used Part B – 55 marks
• A data sheet, formulae sheets and • Attempt Questions 21–30
Periodic Table are provided at • Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes for this part
the back of this paper
Section II Pages 29–39

25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 433

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
1100
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 433 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 The components of a galvanometer are shown.

Scale

Pointer Spring

N S

Current-carrying coil Soft iron core

What is the purpose of the spring in the galvanometer?

(A) To ensure a uniform force on the coil

(B) To complete the circuit through the coil
(C) To counteract the motor effect on the coil
(D) To increase the magnetic flux through the coil

434 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS – 2 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 434 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2 The diagram shows an apparatus that can be used to investigate properties of crystals.

Detector

X-ray

Crystal

Collimator

X-ray tube

Using this apparatus, what significant information was determined about crystals by the
Braggs?

(A) How well crystals reflect X-rays

(B) How the atoms in crystals are arranged
(C) Whether crystals exhibit the property of superconductivity
(D) Whether the electrical resistance of crystals is increased by impurities

3 The diagram shows a type of cathode ray tube.

Which of the following statements CANNOT be inferred from observations made when
using the apparatus shown?

(A) Cathode rays possess energy.

(B) Cathode rays possess momentum.
(C) Cathode rays travel in straight lines.
(D) Cathode rays cannot pass through metals.

– 3 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 435

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 435 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

4 A projectile is launched from a cliff top. The dots show the position of the projectile at
equal time intervals.

Assuming negligible air resistance, which diagram best shows the path of the projectile?

(A) (B)

5 Why does the electrical resistance of a metal increase as temperature increases?

(A) Lattice vibrations increase, scattering more electrons.

(B) Electrons pair up, increasing their interactions with the crystal lattice.
(C) Fewer electrons are free to move, as they fill the holes in the conduction band.
(D) Electrons move more freely through the metal, unimpeded by the crystal lattice.

6 Which of the following is a true statement about scientific theories, such as Einstein’s
theory of special relativity?

(A) They are valid but unreliable ideas.

(B) They are useful in making predictions.
(C) They are concepts that lack an experimental basis.
(D) They are ideas that can’t be accepted until they have been tested.

436 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS – 4 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 436 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

7 A current-carrying wire is placed perpendicular to a magnetic field.

Which graph correctly shows the relationship between magnetic field strength (B) and
current (I) if the force is to remain constant?

(A) (B)

I I

B B

I I

B B

8 In which of the following situations does the magnetic field exert the greatest force on
the proton ( ), given that all of the fields are of equal magnitude?

(A) B (B) B
v=0 v = 60 m s–1

– 5 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 437

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 437 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

9 P, Q and R are straight, current-carrying conductors. They all carry currents of the
same magnitude (I ). Conductors P and Q are fixed in place. The magnitude of the force
between conductors Q and R is F newtons.

P Q R

I I I

10 mm 10 mm

What is the net force on conductor R when it is in the position shown?

F
(A) newtons to the left
2

F
(B) newtons to the right
2

3F
(C) newtons to the left
2

3F
(D) newtons to the right
2

438 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS – 6 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 438 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

10 Which of the following represents a doped semiconductor?

(A) Si Si Si Si (B) Si C Si C

Si Si Si Si C Si C Si

Si P Si Si Si C Si C

Si Si Si Si C Si C Si

Si Ge Si Si C Si

Si Si Si Si Si Si

11 Which of the following diagrams correctly represents the force(s) acting on a satellite in
a stable circular orbit around Earth?

Fg = gravitational force Fp = propulsive force

Fc = centripetal force Fr = reaction force

Fc
(A) (B)
Fp Fp
Fg Fg

– 7 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 439

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 439 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

12 A simple AC generator was connected to a cathode ray oscilloscope and the coil was
rotated at a constant rate. The output is shown on this graph.
Voltage
Voltage
1
1
0
0 Time
Time
–1
–1

Which of the following graphs best represents the output if the rate of rotation is
decreased to half of the original value?

(A) Voltage
(A) Voltage
1
1
0
0 Time
Time
–1
–1
(B) Voltage
(B) Voltage
1
1
0
0 Time
Time
–1
–1
(C) Voltage
(C) Voltage
1
1
0
0 Time
Time
–1
–1
(D) Voltage
(D) Voltage
1
1
0
0 Time
Time
–1
–1

440 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS – 8 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 440 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

13 The following diagram represents the band structure of four materials.

NOT
TO SCALE

0.67 eV 1.11 eV 1.43 eV

9 eV
Ge
Si
GaAs

SiO2

Which material would absorb a photon of wavelength 8.60 × 10−7 m, causing an

electron to just jump the band gap?

(A) Ge
(B) Si
(C) GaAs
(D) SiO2

14 A passenger is playing billiards on a train that is travelling forwards on a level track. The
ball takes the path shown when hit by the cue.

Front
of train
Initial position
Cue of ball
Path of ball
Motion of cue

Later position
of ball

What can be inferred about the motion of the train?

(A) It is turning left.

(B) It is speeding up.
(C) It is turning right.
(D) It is slowing down.

– 9 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 441

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 441 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

15 A circular loop of wire is stationary in a magnetic field. The sides are then pushed
together to change the shape, as shown in the diagram.

Before After

As the loop is compressed, a current is induced.

Which row of the table shows the direction of the current and explains why it is induced?

Current direction Why the current is induced

(A) Clockwise Change in magnetic flux
(B) Anticlockwise Change in magnetic flux
(C) Clockwise Change in magnetic flux density
(D) Anticlockwise Change in magnetic flux density

16 Astronauts travel at a velocity of 0.9 c to Alpha Centauri. Newtonian physics predicts that
this journey would take 4.86 years.

How many years will the journey take in the frame of reference of the astronauts?

(A) 0.923
(B) 1.54
(C) 2.12
(D) 11.1

442 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 10 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 442 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

17 Which row of the table correctly shows ideas that Planck and Einstein contributed to
quantum theory?

Planck Einstein
(A) Hot objects emit radiation in discrete Light consists of packets of energy
amounts. with specific values.
(B) Planck’s constant determines the Objects emit energy that increases
energy of photons. exponentially with frequency.
(C) No energy is lost from black body Energy is absorbed if the band gap is
radiators. less than the photon energy.
(D) The energy of photons decreases as Photons have energy proportional to
the wavelength increases. their frequency.

18 The diagram shows an ideal transformer.

Iron core

V G

When the switch is closed, the pointer on the galvanometer deflects.

How could the size of the deflection be increased?

(A) Decrease the number of primary coils

(B) Decrease the number of secondary coils
(C) Replace the iron core with a copper core
(D) Place a resistor in series with the galvanometer

– 11 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 443

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 443 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

19 An astronaut working outside a spacecraft in orbit around Earth is not attached to it.

Why does the astronaut NOT drift away from the spacecraft?

(A) The force of gravity acting on the astronaut and spacecraft is negligible.
(B) The spacecraft and the astronaut are in orbit around the Sun with the Earth.
(C) The forces due to gravity acting on both the astronaut and the spacecraft are the
same.
(D) The accelerations of the astronaut and the spacecraft are inversely proportional to
their respective masses.

20 A projectile was launched from the ground. It had a range of 70 metres and was in the
air for 3.5 seconds.

At what angle to the horizontal was it launched?

(A) 30°
(B) 40°
(C) 50°
(D) 60°

444 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 12 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 444 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2015 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 55 marks
Attempt Questions 21–30 Student Number
Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes
for this part

Answer the questions

Answer the questions inin
thethe spaces
spaces provided. These spaces provide
provided. These spaces provide
guidance for the expected length of response.
guidance for the expected length of
response.
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Write your Centre Number and Student Number at the top of this page.
Show all relevant working in questions
involving calculations.

Extra writing space is provided on

Do NOT write in this area.

pages 27 and 28. If you use this space,

clearly indicate which question you
are answering.
Question 21 (4 marks)
Write your Centre Number and
Student Number at the top of this
A projectile is fired horizontally from a platform.
page.
Projectile

NOT TO
SCALE Please turn over

Height
of platform
Landing position
of projectile

Distance travelled from base of platform

Do NOT write in this area.

Measurements of the distance travelled by the projectile from the base of the platform
Question 21 continues
are made for a range of initial velocities.
Initial velocity Distance travelled from
of projectile (m s–1) base of platform (m)
1.4 1.0
2.3 – 13 – 1.7
S Umarks
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline. 445
HSC • PHYSICS
3.1 2.2 4393310351
1101
© Pascal Press ISBN 15330
978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
3.9 2.3
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 445 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
4.2 3.0
Height
of platform
Landing position
of projectile
CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 21 (continued) Distance travelled from base of platform

Do NOT write in this area.

Measurements of the distance travelled by the projectile from the base of the platform
are made for a range of initial velocities.
Initial velocity Distance travelled from
of projectile (m s–1) base of platform (m)
1.4 1.0
2.3 1.7
3.1 2.2
3.9 2.3
4.2 3.0
Question 21 (continued)

(a) Graph the data on the grid provided and draw the line of best fit. 2
Distance travelled from base of platform (m)

Question 21 continues on page 15

– 14 –
0 Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line.
0 1 2 3 4 5 2381310356
Initial velocity (m s−1)
Do NOT write in this area.

(b) Calculate the height of the platform. 2

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 21

446 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P End
H Y S I of
C S Question 21
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 446 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 22 (5 marks)

The diagram represents a simple DC motor. A current of 1.0 A flows through a square
loop ABCD with 5 cm sides in a magnetic field of 0.01 T.

N
1.0 A A B

Power Axis of rotation

supply

D C
S

(a) Determine the force acting on section AB and the force acting on section BC due 3
to the magnetic field, when the loop is in the position shown.

Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) How is the direction of the torque maintained as the loop rotates 360° from the 2
position shown?

...............................................................................................................................

– 16 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line. 447
4873310354
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 447 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 23 (5 marks)

(a) Outline a procedure that could be used to model electrical conduction in a 3

semiconductor.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

(b) Explain a limitation of the model outlined in part (a). 2

...............................................................................................................................

– 17 –
448 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• P H Y write
NOT S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
7471310351
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 448 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 24 (7 marks)

A part of a cathode ray oscilloscope was represented on a website as shown.

5000 V

Heating
filament e–
−
e

e−

2 cm

Cathode Anode Deflection plates

Electrons leave the cathode and are accelerated towards the anode.

Do NOT write in this area.

(a) Explain why the representation of the path of the electron between the deflection 3
plates is inaccurate.

...............................................................................................................................

Question 24 continues on page 19

Question 24 continues

– 18 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line. 449
9964310350
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 449 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 24 (continued)

(b) Calculate the force on an electron due to the electric field between the cathode 2
and the anode.

...............................................................................................................................

(c) Calculate the velocity of an electron as it reaches the anode. 2

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 24

– 19 –
450 S U C C E S S Office
O N EUse
H SOnly
C •– Do
P HNOT
Y S Iwrite
C S anything, or make any marks below this line.
5638310354
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 450 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 25 (6 marks)

(a) Outline the conversion of electrical energy by devices in the home into TWO 3
other forms of energy.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) The diagram shows a label on a transformer used in an appliance. 3

Input: 240 V AC 5.0 A

Do NOT write in this area.

Output: 2 kV AC 1.0 A

Explain why the information provided on the label is not correct. Support your
answer with calculations.

...............................................................................................................................

– 20 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line. 451
9657310359
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 451 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 26 (6 marks)

Consider the following two models used to calculate the work done when a 300 kg satellite is
taken from Earth’s surface to an altitude of 200 km.

You may assume that the calculations are correct.

Model X Model Y

Data: g = 9.8 m s−2 Data: G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2

m = 300 kg rEarth = 6.38 × 106 m
Dh = 200 km rorbit = 6.58 × 106 m
M = 6.0 × 1024 kg
W = Fs m = 300 kg
= mgDh W = D EP
2 5
= 3 × 10 × 9.8 × 2.0 × 10
= 5.9 × 108 J ΔE p = E p final − E p initial
Do NOT write in this area.

GMm ⎛ GMm ⎞
=− −
r orbit ⎜⎝ r Earth ⎟⎠

(
= −1.824 × 1010 − −1.881 × 1010 )
= 5.7 × 108 J

(a) What assumptions are made about Earth’s gravitational field in models X and Y 2
that lead to the different results shown?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Why do models X and Y produce results that, although different, are close in 1
value?

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Question 26 continues
Question 26 continues on page 22
– 21 –
452 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• P H Y write
NOT S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
6157310351
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 452 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (continued)

...............................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

End of Question 26

– 22 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line. 453
1086310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 453 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 27 (6 marks)

In 1865, James Clerk Maxwell developed the theory of electromagnetism. This theory 6
explained the nature of light. It also predicted the existence of other electromagnetic
waves.

How did Hertz test and validate Maxwell’s theory?

.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 23 –
454 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• P H Y write
NOT S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
6784310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 454 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 28 (5 marks)

A copper plate is attached to a lightweight trolley. The trolley moves at an initial 5

velocity, v, towards a strong magnet fixed to a support.

Support
Strong magnet
Copper plate
v
Trolley

A B C D

The dashed line on the graph shows the velocity of the trolley when the magnet is not
present.

On the axes, sketch the graph of the velocity of the trolley as it travels from A to D
under the magnet, and justify your graph.

Do NOT write in this area.

Velocity
of
trolley

0
A B C D

Position of the front of the trolley

...............................................................................................................................

– 24 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line. 455
7927310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 455 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 29 (5 marks)

In the Large Hadron Collider (LHC), protons travel in a circular path at a speed
greater than 0.9999 c.

(a) What are the advantages of using superconductors to produce the magnetic 2
fields used to guide protons around the LHC?

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Discuss the application of special relativity to the protons in the LHC. 3
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

– 25 –
456 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• P H Y write
NOT S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
9403310358
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 456 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 30 (6 marks)

The following is a timeline for the Cassini space probe mission to Saturn. 6

Earth Venus Venus Earth Jupiter Saturn

Launch Slingshot Slingshot Slingshot Slingshot Orbit

15/10/1997 26/4/1998 24/6/1999 18/8/1999 30/12/2000 1/7/2004

Explain how Newton’s Laws of Motion and Universal Gravitation were applied to the
Cassini mission.

.........................................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 26 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any marks below this line. 457
8246310352
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 457 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2015 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer parts (a)–(e) of one question in the Section II Writing Booklet. Extra writing booklets
are available.

Show all relevant working in the questions involving calculations.

Pages

(Not included in this reproduction)

Question 31 Geophysics ............................................................................. 30–31

Question 32 Medical Physics ..................................................................... 32–33

Question 33 Astrophysics ........................................................................... 34–35

Question 34 From Quanta to Quarks .......................................................... 36–37

Question 35 The Age of Silicon ................................................................. 38–39

(Not included in this reproduction)

1102458 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS – 29 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 458 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 32 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) Describe how ultrasound can be used to distinguish between different 2
types of tissue in the body.

(ii) Use data from the table below to calculate the acoustic impedance of 3
bone and hence determine the ratio of reflected to initial intensity for
ultrasound striking a muscle–bone boundary.

Material Density (r) Acoustic Velocity (v) Acoustic Impedance (Z)

kg m–3 m s–1 × 10 6 kg m–2 s–1
Muscle 1075 1590 1.71
Liver 1050 1570 1.65
Brain 1025 1540 1.58
Bone 1910 4080

(b) After a patient had been treated for lung cancer, no tumours were detected in an
X-ray image of the lungs.

The doctor has now recommended that the patient have a whole-body PET scan.

(i) Outline TWO differences between the method used to produce an X-ray 2
image and the method used to produce a PET scan.

(ii) Justify the doctor’s recommendation to use the whole-body PET scan. 3

(c) escribe how the structure of an endoscope enables it to be used to detect the
D 4
presence of a tumour in the stomach wall and to collect a tissue sample for
analysis.
Question 32 (continued)

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) (i) How does a magnetic resonance image (MRI) scan distinguish between 2
grey and white matter in the brain?
Question 32 continues on page 33

(ii) How is the process of resonance used in the production of an MRI scan? 3

(e) ssess the impact of advances in understanding of waves on the development

A 6
of imaging technologies. Support your answer using THREE examples.

– 32 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 459

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
End of Question 32
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 459 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 33 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) The star Canopus has an absolute magnitude of –5.51. Its distance from 2
Earth is 95.9 pc.

Calculate its apparent magnitude.

(ii) Outline TWO methods of determining distances to stars. 3

(b) The light curves of two binary systems are shown.

1 1
Relative brightness

Relative brightness

0.75 0.75

0.5 0.55

0.25 0.25

0 0
Time Time

(i) Explain why many binary star systems do not produce the types of light 2
curves shown.

(ii) Account for the different shapes of the light curves shown in the graphs. 3

Question 33 continues
Question on page 35
33 continues

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 460 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 33 (continued)

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) The position of the Sun, star W and star Z are shown on the H-R diagram.

10 4 W Z
Luminosity (solar units)

10 2

Sun
1

10 −2

10 −4
O B A F G K M
Spectral type

The curves A and B show intensity versus frequency for star W and the Sun,
measured from the same distance.

A
Intensity

Frequency

(i) Identify which curve (A or B) represents star W and justify your choice. 2

(ii) Account for differences between stars W and Z that can be deduced from 3
the H-R diagram.

(e) Assess the impact of the development of space-based telescopes on the 6

understanding of celestial objects.

End of Question 33
End of Question 33

– 35 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 461

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 461 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) Polonium-218 is an unstable isotope that can decay to either lead-214 by alpha
decay, or astatine-218 by beta decay.

(i) How could a Wilson Cloud Chamber, or similar device, be used to 2

distinguish between alpha decay and beta decay?

(ii) The mass of a polonium-218 nucleus is 218.00897 u, the mass of a 3

lead-214 nucleus is 213.99981 u, and the mass of an alpha particle is
4.00260 u.

Calculate the energy released by this alpha decay.

(b) An instrument uses a beam of neutrons with a wavelength of 0.2 nm to study the
structure of new materials.

(i) Calculate the speed of the neutrons. 2

(ii) Explain why this beam of neutrons is useful in determining the structure 3
of materials.

Question
Question 34 continues
34 continues on page 37

462 S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S– 36 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 462 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 34 (continued)

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) In 1927, Davisson and Germer reported the results of an experiment in which
they fired electrons at a crystal of nickel and observed how the electrons were
scattered.

(i) State their conclusion, with reference to the results they obtained. 2

(ii) Explain the significance of this experiment to the Rutherford-Bohr 3

model of the atom.

(e) Assess the impact of THREE advances in knowledge about particles and forces 6
on the understanding of the atomic nucleus.

End of
End of Question
Question 34
34

– 37 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 463

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 463 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2015 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A (Total 20 marks)

1 C The torque on the coil due to the motor effect must be counterbalanced to enable
the value of current on the scale to be read.

2 B The Bragg team was interested in the crystal structure of solids. Crystals do reflect
X-rays, but that was not the Bragg team’s interest. The apparatus shown has
nothing to do with conductivity or superconductivity.

3 B The Maltese cross tube does not have any parts that cathode rays can move, so
momentum cannot be determined. (A paddle-wheel tube does have moving parts,
so can be used to show that cathode rays have momentum.)

4 D Projectiles within a gravitational field move in a parabolic path. D is the only actual
parabolic path shown.

5 A Answers B and D refer to superconductivity and C to semiconductors.

6 B Theories, notably relativity, certainly are useful in making predictions (but are not
always correct). D is a strong distractor; strictly it applies to hypotheses, not
theories.

7 C The active formula here is F = BIl (sin 90°). For l and F to remain constant, the
graph must be hyperbolic.

8 C For a magnetic force to act on the proton it must be moving across magnetic flux
lines. Of these, the force 40 N is larger than 50 sin 45° N.

9 B The operating factors here are that parallel current-carrying wires attract if their
currents are in the same direction, repel if in opposite directions, and that the force
is proportional to 1/d. P and R attract, Q and R repel. P is twice as far away as Q.

10 A B and C are compounds consisting of valence-4 elements. D is unlikely to be a

genuine chemical substance.

11 D A and B each include a tangential force but the object’s orbital velocity is not
changing. C shows the forces balanced so the satellite would move away in a
straight line.

12 D If the rate of rotation of the generator is reduced, its period increases. The change
in flux per rotation remains constant so as t is doubled, the induced voltage of the
generator is halved.

464 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 464 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

13 C Using the constants provided in the data booklet:

E = hf = hc/ = 2.3  10–19 J = –1.4428 eV
This is sufficient to jump the band gap of GaAs.

14 C When the train turns right, unattached objects within it will continue in a straight
line due to their inertia. When viewed from the frame of reference of the train they
appear to move to the left, as the billiard ball does in this diagram.

15 A A north pole is located above the page. By Lenz’s law, as the flux through the loop
is reduced a south pole is induced above to oppose the change (i.e. clockwise emf).
to 4.86
16 C The applicable relativity formula is tv = = = 2.12 years
v2 (0.9 c)2
1 – c 2 1 – c2

17 A In B and C statements attributed to both scientists are incorrect. D is incorrect

because Planck’s observations were not directed
m m at m photons—that
v2 m was Einstein.Gm
G E 2 S = S G E = v2 v = r E
r r r
18 B Deflection could only increase if the current through the secondary coil increases;
meaning that the step-down voltage must be reduced, since P = V  I, and P is
fixed. GmE (6.67 × 10–11) × (6.0 × 1024)
v = r
= 6.58 × 106
= 8.0 × 103 m s–1 (
19 B A is incorrect as the gravitational force is not negligible. C is incorrect as the
gravitational force depends upon the masses affected, which are unequal. D is
v2

incorrect as the gravitational acceleration (0.9999c)2 at the same point in
1 – acting= on
1 –all masses = 0.014142
c2 c2
space is equal.

20 B 1 velocity
The horizontal component of the initial 1 1 = 20 m s–1. Its vertical
= R 2 – is 270/3.5

2 nf ni
component is found by Dy = v0t + ½gt so v0 = 17.15 m s–1. The projectile was
therefore launched at an angle of 40°.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 465

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 465 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I, Part B
Question 21
Distance travelled from base of platform (m)

(a)
3 ×

× ×
2

×
1 ×

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Initial velocity (m s–1)
Δx
The slope of the line of best fit, , gives the (average) time interval for the projectile
Δv0
to fall.
According to the line of best fit drawn for this graph,
3.5 – 0.2
\t= = 0.67 seconds.
4.9 – 0
Students should note there is one outlying point, which should not be taken into account
because it is located well outside the variation of the other points, and should be
regarded as experimental error. (Ideally that test should be repeated.) (2 marks)

(b) The height of the platform is found using the formula Dy = uyt + ½gt2, where Dy is the
displacement of the projectile \ Dy = 0 – 4.9 × 0.672 = 2.2 m. (2 marks)

Question 22
(a) The formula for the force acting on a straight current-carrying conductor within a
uniform magnetic field is Fb = BIl sin , where  is the angle between the directions of
the wire and the magnetic field.
Wire AB: Fb = BIl sin  = 0.01  1.0 × (5 × 10–2) sin 90° = 5  10–4 N directed into
the page
Wire BC: Fb = BIl sin  = 0.01  1.0 × (5 × 10–2) sin 0° = 0 N (3 marks)

(b) The situation shown in the diagram is the point of maximum torque on the coil. When
it has rotated through 90° the torque drops to zero, and beyond 90° its direction is
reversed. In order to maintain the direction of the torque so the motor actually
functions, the current direction through loop ABCD is reversed. This is achieved using
a split-ring commutator and brushes: as the coil rotates, the section of the split-ring
attached to wire AB turns as well, until having rotated through 180° it comes in contact

466 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 466 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

with the other brush (i.e. is at an angle 270° from the original position). The opposite
happens with the section of the split-ring attached to wire DC. With torque in the same
direction, the loop returns to its initial position. The current again changes direction
when the split in the commutator passes under the brushes. (2 marks)

Question 23
(a) One appropriate model to demonstrate electrical conduction in a semiconductor
consists of a flat sheet of metal or cardboard with a regular array of identical holes
drilled into it. Marbles representing electrons are located randomly in half the holes.
Conduction without external potential difference is represented when the plate is held
horizontal and shaken. As the ‘temperature’ rises by shaking more vigorously, more
marbles are able to escape their hole, each moving in random directions to another one.
As each ‘electron’ moves in one direction, the hole has migrated in the opposite direction.
Conduction with an external potential difference is demonstrated by elevating one side
and then shaking the plate. The movement of the ‘electrons’ is no longer random, and
less shaking is needed to make them move. (3 marks)
(b) One limitation of this model is that ‘electrons’ are frequently lost from the model
semiconductor as they drop off the edges of the sheet, especially in the case of the
external potential difference. This is expected, of course, but since they are not being
replaced at the higher end, the semiconductor ‘crystal’ soon loses all its ‘electrons’.
Furthermore, a 2D model cannot really describe a 3D crystal very well. (2 marks)

Question 24
(a) There are two problems associated with the given diagram.
The most obvious is that it shows the electrons being deflected towards the negative
plate instead of away from it. Being negatively charged, electrons experience a force
within an electric field that is applied in the direction opposite to that of the field.
The second error is that the deflection should be parabolic, identical to that of a
projectile within a gravitational field, and not a path in the form of two straight lines
with a sharp angle as shown. (3 marks)
V
(b) The electric field strength between the cathode and the anode is given by E = .
d
V 5000
Here, E = = = 2.5  105 V m–1. This field is directed towards the cathode.
d 2  10–2
The force on an electron within the electric field is determined by F = qE.

In this case the force is (1.602  10–19)  (2.5  105) = 4.0  10–14 N (towards the
anode). (2 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 467

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 467 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(c) The initial velocity (hence kinetic energy) of the electron on the cathode is considered
to be effectively zero. The acceleration of an electron within a uniform field is found by:
F = ma \ 4.0  10–14 = 9.109  10–31a \ a = 4.38  1016 m s–2
v2 = u2 + 2as \ v2 = 0 + 2  (4.38  1016)  (2  10–2)
\ v = 4.2  107 m s–1 towards the anode. (2 marks)
(Note: although it is obvious, since the question asks for the velocity of the electron
and not its speed, students should guarantee their full marks by including its direction.)

Question 25
(a) There is a large range of acceptable answers to this question; however, the key word is
‘outline’, not ‘state’ or ‘identify’.
Electrical energy is converted into heat for cooking food with improved safety using
induction cooktops. Normal 240 V, 50 Hz AC electricity passes through a coil located
safely below the surface. Consequently, a magnetic field also varying in magnitude and
direction at 50 Hz is produced that passes through the surface of the cooktop. This is
only converted into heat when it passes through a conducting surface. As explained by
Faraday’s law, the changing magnetic flux at the base of a metal saucepan or frying pan
generates emf, causing eddy currents that heat the base, cooking the food.
Electrical energy is also converted to light in modern fluorescent light globes. 240 V,
50 Hz AC passes to the terminals of the tubes causing ‘cathode rays’, streams of electrons,
to flow back and forth through them. The tubes are lined with a powder that fluoresces
when struck by electrons, emitting white light with little heat, so they are far more
efficient than the old incandescent globes. (3 marks)

(b) In terms of electricity, the power dissipated by a device is the product of the potential
difference across its terminals and the current flowing through it, i.e. P = VI.
In this case the device is a transformer which has two principal components: a primary
coil and a secondary coil. The power supplied to the primary is found to be
Pp = 240  5.0 = 1200 watts
The power claimed to be available from the secondary would be Ps = 2000  1.0 =
2000 watts
Since power is a measurement of energy transformed every second, this would violate
the fundamental law of conservation of energy, so it cannot be correct.
(3 marks)

Question 26
(a) Model X assumes that the acceleration due to gravitation is 9.8 m s–2 both at sea level
on Earth and at a height 200 km above. Model Y correctly assumes that it does not—
rather that the strength of Earth’s gravitational field decreases with height
1
in the form G  2 where d is the distance from the Earth’s centre. (2 marks)
d

468 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 468 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(b) The calculation used in the incorrect Model X produces a result that is not greatly
different from the correct one because the radius of Earth from which the satellite is to
be launched, 6.38  106 m, is not very different from its orbital height, 6.58  106 m.
Therefore, the actual gradual decrease in the value of gravitational acceleration over
such a short range does not produce a markedly different outcome. (1 mark)

(c) In order for to maintain a stable circular orbit around the Earth it must
to a satellite 4.86
texperience
v = = = 2.12 years
va2 centripetal (0.9
force
c)2 that is constant in magnitude, but with its direction
continually
tv =

1 t–o 2
=
1 –4.86 2
cchanging, always
c towards the centre of its orbit. This force is provided by
= 2.12 years
v2 (0.9 c)2
1– 2
gravitation—the gravitational
1–
c 2
force is the centripetal force, i.e. Fg  Fc.
c

mEmS mSv2 mE GmE

G
r2
r r
= Gr = v2 v =
m m mv m 2 v = Gm
2
G m represents
where r
= E
sr 2
G
S
the mass
r
= vthe
of
S
rm represents the mass of the Earth, and v
satellite,
E E
e

is the Gm
orbital velocity
(6.67 ×of
10the) ×satellite.
(6.0 × 10 ) –11 24
v = r = E
= 8.0 × 103 m s–1
6
(3 marks)
6.58 × 10
Gm (6.67 × 10 ) × (6.0 × 10 ) –11 24 (3 marks)
v = r = E
= 8.0 × 103 m s–1
6
(3 marks)
6.58 × 10
v
1 – c = 1 – c = 0.014142
2 (0.9999c) 2
2 2

v
11 –27c 1= 11– c = 0.014142
2 (0.9999c) 2
Question 2 2

In order to R 2 – Maxwell’s
= validate theory of electromagnetism, the first task Hertz needed to do
nf ni2
was generate
1 a 1new type
1 of electromagnetic wave distinct from light, because in 1888 neither
= R 2 – 2
X-raysnor -radiation
nf ni had been identified. Relying upon the relationship between changing
electric and magnetic fields that Maxwell had postulated, Hertz used an induction coil (RLC
circuit) to produce a series of electric sparks, each of which caused a rapidly varying magnetic
field having a frequency much lower than that of visible light. He designed a fairly simple
loop detector to demonstrate that the waves he had generated really did pass through the air
and caused sparks—an electromagnetic field, just as Maxwell had proposed.
He then needed to demonstrate that his e-m radio waves displayed the same properties as light
waves. He successfully showed that they reflect from shiny surfaces by blocking the detector
from the source, then reflecting the waves from a copper sheet to cause sparking. Refraction
was similarly verified using a triangular prism made of pitch. By rotating the detector through
360°, producing maxima when the two sparks were parallel, yet reduced sparking in the
detector reducing to zero when the sparking gaps were perpendicular, he successfully
demonstrated they were polarised.
Finally, it was necessary to show his radio waves possessed the same velocity through air as
did visible light. Although strictly it should have been a vacuum, this was sufficient. He varied
the aerials attached to his induction coil to change the frequency of the sparks, then used
interference to measure the wavelengths of the resulting waves. The v = fλ formula could then
be used to show that the wave velocity was close enough to match that of visible light. In this
way Hertz tested Maxwell’s theory and verified it. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 469

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 469 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 28

v
Velocity of trolley

0
A B C D
Position of the front of the trolley

The trolley’s velocity remains constant from point A until the trolley is close enough to point
B for the strong magnet to begin to affect the copper plate—any form of friction is negligible.
As the copper plate penetrates the magnetic field close to point B, an emf is generated within
it. In accordance with Lenz’s law, this emf opposes the motion of the trolley, causing it to lose
kinetic energy which is converted into eddy currents and hence heat. As the trolley slows, the
rate of change in magnetic flux reduces, so the rate of deceleration of the trolley also
decreases. As the front of the trolley reaches point C, its rear continues passing through the
magnetic field of the strong magnet. Although the direction of the eddy currents within the
copper plate has reversed, they are still converting the kinetic energy of the trolley into heat,
slowing it down, until at last the field is left behind. Its speed would then remain constant if
friction really was negligible. (5 marks)

Question 29
(a) Extremely powerful magnetic fields are required in order to contain the particles within
the Large Hadron Collider (LHC) because the mass of even the tiniest particles
increases enormously when its velocity exceeds 0.9999c. Only superconductors are
capable of to carrying the4.86
huge currents essential to create such magnetic fields; ordinary
tmaterials
v = cannot,= due to(0.9
their = 2.12 years
v2 c)2electrical resistance.
1– 2
c
1– c2
Furthermore, since their electrical resistance is zero, superconductors can maintain
these high currents indefinitely, whereas the power losses inherent in any other
materials reduce their usefulness effectively to zero. Provided the magnetic field needs
mEmS mSv2 mE Gm
to
be G kept2 constant,
r
=
r
Gcurrent
once
r
= vis
2
induced
v = inr Ea superconductor kept below its critical
temperature it continues to act as a super-powerful magnet indefinitely. (2 marks)
(b) Special relativity affects –11
three properties of matter: their apparent length, mass and time
GmE (6.67 × 10 ) × (6.0 × 1024)
v =viewed
as r
by
= observers in our frame
6.58 × 106
of reference.
= 8.0 × 10The
3 mcommon
s–1 (3 factor
marks)affecting all
three is:
v2
1 – c 1 –
(0.9999c)2
= = 0.014142
2 c2

1 1 1
=R –
nf 2 ni2

470 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 470 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

This means that the length of a proton, if it could be seen through some kind of
microscope, would be only 1.4% of its true length—hardly important. More
significantly, however, it would ‘observe’ the actual length of the LHC to be only 1.4%
of its true length. Since, from its frame of reference, the much shorter length observed
is moving past almost at the velocity of light, it would note a relativistic time effect.
The observed mass of each proton would be over 70 times its rest mass, and since its
actual velocity is very close to that of light, the kinetic energy of each proton is very
high. This allows protons moving in opposite directions to annihilate one another,
releasing quarks and other fragments, allowing scientists to research the very fabric of
matter. It also explains why such powerful magnetic fields are essential to keep them
trapped within the LHC, for no ordinary matter could possibly restrain them.
It should also be noted that the particles are moving in a circular path. Hence this is
actually a situation involving an accelerated frame of reference, so special relativity
doesn’t actually apply (it only applies in inertial frames of reference). Calculations
should actually be done using general relativity. (3 marks)

Question 30
The Cassini mission was launched 18 years ago as an application of Newton’s third law, the
law of action-reaction. As fuel and oxygen combined in the huge motors, forcing tonnes of gas
downwards away from the craft, it was the reaction force acting upwards onto the craft that
made it rise off the ground. Once it was moving upwards, Newton’s second law came into play,
since the upward acceleration of the craft depended directly on the magnitude of the thrust
force applied by the rocket motor. The booster rocket reached the correct height, exhausted its
fuel accelerating the mission craft to the correct orbital velocity, then dropped away.
At the correct time, the transfer of the mission craft from the Earth to Saturn via a sequence of
close planetary fly-bys began. The main challenge of sending craft to the outer planets is to
overcome the Sun’s enormous gravitational attraction. Newton’s law of universal gravitation
explains why a spacecraft remains in orbit around Earth, and why it is such a major operation
to send a craft from Earth to Saturn. It is also fundamentally essential in overcoming that
difficulty. Newton’s law of universal gravitation explains that the Sun’s gravitational force
accelerated Cassini towards Venus, greatly increasing its kinetic energy without using any
fuel. Then the local gravitation of Venus, and subsequently of each of the listed planets,
enabled the craft to pick up more and more kinetic energy, using the skill of the scientists and
mathematicians to plot the correct route to be able to collect it.
The craft continued its long journey between the planetary by-passes in obedience to Newton’s
first law: every object continues in its state of rest or uniform speed in a straight line unless
acted upon by an external force. Since its motor was not functioning at those times, inertia
kept it moving; however, the continual gravitational force of the Sun caused it to move in a
curved path as well as to gradually slow down until accelerated by the slingshot effect
(another example of the third law) at the following planetary fly-by. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 471

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 471 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section II—Options

Question 32––Medical Physics

(a) (i) The structures of different tissues can be identified from the ultrasound reflection
images from within the body. These images show internal and external features of
different tissues, e.g. muscle, tendons, fat layers, heart, heart valves and chambers.
The difference in acoustic impedance encountered as the ultrasound wave moves
from one medium to another determines the amount of reflection versus
penetration. The speed of ultrasound varies between different types of tissues due
to density differences. By measuring ultrasound reflection times, velocities can be
determined, allowing identification of tissue types. (2 marks)
Z = v = 1910  4080 = 7.79 106 kg m–2 s–1
(ii)
Ir/Io = [Z2 – Z1]2/[Z2 + Z1]2 = [7.79 – 1.71]2/[7.79 + 1.71]2 = 36.97/90.25 = 0.41
(3 marks)
(b) (i) Two differences between the method used to produce an X-ray image and that
used to produce a positron emission tomography (PET) scan are the placement of
the body relative to the radiation required, and how the image is produced.
X-ray images are produced by positioning part of the body in between a special
cathode ray tube that produces electromagnetic radiation in the X-ray frequency
range and an X-ray sensitive film or charge-coupled device (CCD) plate. The
X-rays passing through the body are absorbed differently by different body
structures, forming a shadow image on the film/plate.
PET scans are produced by detecting gamma rays. The gamma rays are produced
from positron/electron annihilations that result from the decay products
(positrons) from suitably chosen radioisotopes. These radioisotopes are placed
inside the body using radiopharmaceuticals that target particular organs/tissues.
The gamma rays emanate from where the annihilations occur, and are detected on
the outside of the body using a gantry of photomultiplier tubes. Electrical signals
from the photomultiplier tubes are used to produce an image on a computer
screen. (2 marks)
(ii) PET provides functional information about the body. Selective uptake of the
positron emitting radiopharmaceuticals by overactive cells will produce
concentrations of gamma rays that can be identified as ‘hot spots’ on the PET
image. This means that PET can detect any small secondary tumours that may
have developed, anywhere in the body. These tumours would not show up in an
X-ray, so the doctor’s recommendation to have a PET scan is justified. (3 marks)
(c) An endoscope consists of a thin, flexible outer tube that contains two bundles of optical
fibres, a suction hose, a water tube and a biopsy tube.
The flexible endoscope tube is inserted into the stomach via the mouth and oesophagus.
The position of the end of the tube can be controlled by adjusting the tension on small
cables inside the tube.

472 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 472 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Eyepiece/
camera attachment

Thin, flexible endoscope tube containing:

− Two bundles of optical fibres
− Suction hose
− Water tube
− Cutting probe to sample tissue

Light is directed into the stomach by total internal reflection (TIR) through a bundle of
non-coherent optical fibres in the tube. This light illuminates the area of interest on the
stomach wall. Light from the area of interest enters the ends of optical fibres in a coherent
bundle via a lens at the end of the endoscope tube. The light travels along the fibres by TIR
to the eyepiece or camera, where a clear image of the stomach wall/tumour can be seen.
Water or air can be applied through the endoscope tube to flush or dry the area to be
viewed or sampled. Small instruments on thin cables can be inserted into the biopsy tube
to cut small samples of the tissue which can be suctioned through the tube for collection
and analysis. (4 marks)
(d) (i) Grey and white matter in the brain have different chemical compositions. Due to
the different amounts of water and fat they contain, grey and white matter have
different proton densities. These differences result in different proton relaxation
times during a magnetic resonance image (MRI) scan, so the radio frequency
(RF) signal from each will have a different strength when the signal is sampled
during relaxation. The signal strength from each voxel area is used by the
computer when producing the image. Different signal strengths result in different
grey scales on the screen image, identifying the grey and white matter. (2 marks)
(ii) Nuclei with odd numbers of nucleons, such as hydrogen, have a net magnetism.
The magnetic moment of these nuclei aligns with the strong magnetic field, and
the vector direction of the magnetic moment precesses about the strong field
direction at the Lamor frequency. An applied gradient field varies the strength of
the magnetic field and hence the frequency of precessing protons across the
patient. When a RF pulse is directed into the body, the precessing nuclei can
absorb energy from the radio pulse at the same frequency as they are precessing.
This is resonance and it causes the vector direction of the rotation to flip into the
x–y plane. When the pulse is stopped, the vector direction spirals back to line up
with the strong magnetic field. During this process, radio waves at the Lamor
frequency are released. They can be detected by the RF receiving coils and used
to produce the MR images. (3 marks)

(e) A number of answers are possible. The following examples could be included.
Advances in the understanding of waves – particularly sound waves, light waves,
X-rays, gamma rays and radio waves – have had a huge positive impact on the
development of a wide range of imaging technologies.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 473

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 473 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

The discovery and application of piezoelectric materials, such as PZT, to generate

ultrasound in the megahertz range has led to the construction of transducers that are used
for a wide range of special purpose, non-invasive ultrasonography. As well as high-
definition 2D and 3D structural imaging, ultrasound applications such as Doppler
ultrasound are now regularly used to check foetal heart rate and to investigate blood
flow through heart valves and in arteries and veins.
An understanding of total internal reflection of light through optical fibre technology has
led to the development of endoscopes that allow minimally invasive medical procedures
such as gastroscopy, endoscopy and keyhole investigations of joints and areas of the
abdomen.
With improved understanding about their production, X-rays can now be produced in a
range of frequencies. This gives radiographers the flexibility to select the most
appropriate energies for improved resolution on X-ray images. In addition, with the
introduction of improved charged-coupled device (CCD) technologies, imaging has
moved from film to the digital environment, allowing much improved communication
and storage of X-ray scans. Further advances in the use of X-rays have led to the
development of computed axial tomography (CAT), which provides excellent structural
2D and 3D images of both hard and soft body tissues. This technology can help to
identify minute defects such as hairline fractures, regions of blood clotting and areas
suspected to be tumours.
Identifying that a pair of highly penetrating gamma photons travelling in opposite
directions is produced during positron/electron annihilation has allowed the invention of
positron emission tomography (PET). Detector tubes couple crystals that respond to the
absorption of gamma waves by producing visible light, with photomultiplier tubes that
create electrical signals for analysis by a computer. A gantry of these tubes allows for the
production of images that provide functional information about the body. This technology
has greatly improved the ability of doctors to correctly diagnose the location of tiny
tumours and the onset of Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s diseases.
An understanding of the absorption and emission of radio frequencies (RF) by protons
precessing in a strong magnetic field has led to the development of magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI). By sampling the energy of the RF emitted by the protons in hydrogen
atoms at various times during their relaxation phase, the technician can maximise the
contrast of images to enhance the diagnostic quality of the scan. MRI provides highly
detailed structural images, especially of soft tissues within the body, and has become a
major medical diagnostic tool for a wide range of conditions, from strains and sprains to
defects in brain structure. (6 marks)

474 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 474 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER •ANSWERS

Question 33––Astrophysics
(a) (i) M = –5.51 d = 95.9 pc

M = m – 5log10  10d  \ –5.51 = m – 5log  95.9

1010
\ m = –5.51 + (5  0.9818) = –0.60 (2 marks)
(ii)
Triangulation or trigonometric parallax method: The oldest method of measuring
the distance to a star uses the longest baseline we have—the diameter of the
Earth’s orbit (3 × 108 km)—to measure the difference in the angle of the star’s
location at both extremities against a background of distant stars.

Earth
Angle now

distance
Sun 3 × 108 km Parallax angle Star

Angle later
6 months later

Spectroscopic parallax: Few stars are close enough for their distance to be
measured by triangulation. Another way to determine how far away they are is by
accurately measuring their spectra using yellow and blue filters to determine their
colour index, hence their spectral class using the H-R diagram. This provides a
good estimate of their absolute magnitude which, when compared with their
apparent magnitude, allows their distance to be found. (3 marks)
(b) (i) Both diagrams show the light curves of eclipsing binaries. As with all binaries,
these stars revolve on a plane around their common centre of mass. They are
observed to be eclipsing binaries only if Earth lies on the same plane, which is
statistically unlikely. (2 marks)
(ii) The first of these light curves indicates a fairly typical eclipsing binary, a brighter
star in a pair with a dimmer companion. The troughs indicate one star occluding
the other and the flat maxima indicate when both are visible. The deeper trough
indicates occlusion of the brighter star. The curve at the bottom of each
trough indicates that from Earth’s point of view, neither star is totally eclipsed
by the other.
The second light curve is quite unusual, and different interpretations are possible.
The most likely is that the two stars have almost exactly the same brightness and
size, and totally eclipse one another. Consequently, their combined brightness
drops to 50% when either is occluded, and the sharpness of the trough indicates
the equality of their diameters. They are effectively identical twins. (3 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 475

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 475 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(c) Emission spectra are normally produced by two very dissimilar sources. Quasars are
very distant objects. Their exact nature is not certain, but their diameter is roughly the
size of the solar system while their brightness is as great as that of a galaxy. As a result,
they are extremely hot and the electrons of the gas atoms in their outer atmosphere are
continually excited, releasing photons and dropping to less excited states only to be
excited again. The spectrum of a quasar is a rainbow, superimposed by a series of
narrow brighter lines.
By contrast, emission nebulae are vast clouds of extremely cold gas, around 3 K, within
which no stars have yet developed. As with most of the universe, they consist almost
entirely of hydrogen and helium. As light passes across the universe, particularly from
relatively nearby stars or bright nebulae, the electrons from these atoms inevitably
absorb photons, and are excited. They soon drop back to ground state, releasing photons
again. The spectrum of an emission nebula is black, superimposed by a few narrow
bright lines, mainly the red and green spectral lines of hydrogen.
All but a few rare stars emit absorption spectra, observed as a rainbow superimposed by
a series of thin dark lines. On average, the vast energy produced in their core is absorbed
and re-released countless times, taking a million years to reach the outer layer. As the
energy crosses the cooler outer atmosphere, electrons on the gas atoms there absorb
specific frequencies.
Galaxies are ‘star cities’, composed of hundreds of thousands to millions of stars.
Therefore it is understandable that galaxies also emit absorption spectra, since every
individual star contributes its own amount of light, including its particular dark lines, so
observers see the combination of all the individual stars. (4 marks)
(d) (i) Curve A represents the frequency/intensity of star W, while curve B pertains to
the Sun. The luminosity of star W, which is basically what the area below each of
the curves represents, is around 8000 times that of the Sun. (2 marks)
(ii) Stars W and Z are both shown to have the same luminosity, but W is a blue-white
B0 main sequence star, where Z is an orange K0-class giant. This is supported by
what is displayed on the H-R diagram, because luminosity  T4. The temperature
of a B star is approximately five times that of a K-type, so based on temperature
alone its luminosity will be about 3000 times greater. For the stars to have the
same luminosity, the surface area of Z would need to be hundreds of times
greater—it is indeed a giant.
Since W lies in the main sequence it is a comparatively young star (still fusing
H to He by the CNO cycle), while Z is far older, as all giants are. This is because
they have evolved. At one point the hydrogen in their core was exhausted. With
no radiation pressure to counterbalance gravitation pressure, the star imploded,
heating the core sufficiently to initiate fusion of the helium there and also heating
a shell around the core enough for it to start fusing further hydrogen into helium.
The combination of the two sources of radiation pressure overcame the inward
gravitational pressure so the aging star was converted into a giant. (3 marks)

476 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 476 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(e) Many important discoveries have been made by ground-based telescopes, which retain
the advantage of much larger mirrors than space-based telescopes. In the future arrays of
telescopes spreading across continents are likely to lead to new revelations about the
universe. However, since the first space-based telescopes were launched and installed
there has been a steady stream of amazing positive impacts.
With space-based telescopes, no ‘nights’ are lost due to cloud or inclement weather.
Since light is not being scattered by the air, space-based telescopes can continue collecting
results even during the day. Space-based telescopes have smaller mirrors than ground-
based telescopes, so there is no reason to use active optics. Since there is no atmosphere,
and so no problems of ‘seeing’, adaptive optics is not required.
Although much visible light, a range of radio and microwaves, and even some infrared
‘windows’ do allow ground-based telescopes to collect astronomical data, the full range
of electromagnetic radiation is available for the appropriate instruments located in space.
Space-based telescopes were able to verify the existence of the cosmic background
radiation. Then, due to improved resolution in space, the Hipparcos mission successfully
mapped three million nearby stars, with great benefits for physics, particularly astronomy.
Then came the triumphs of the Hubble Space Telescope, including the image of deep
space that showed a vast array of previously unseen galaxies.
Further triumphs for space-based telescopes collecting other forms of electromagnetic
radiation for analysis and interpretation by scientists include: the capacity to view the
invisible, such as clouds of gas at 40 million degrees, and the neutron star heart of the
Crab Nebula; collection and analysis of infrared light to see protostars developing in the
Orion Nebula; and observations of exoplanets resembling Earth. Even grander plans lie
in the future.
The only major challenge is the enormous cost of developing these technologies, locating
them appropriately and securely in space, and the infrastructure necessary to interpret
the data being collected. It certainly is expensive, and many important critics question
the cost of these discoveries in a world where many people have no food, shelter or basic
necessities. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 477

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 477 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34––From Quanta to Quarks

(a) (i) Moving charged particles create visible trails in vapour in a Wilson Cloud Chamber.
Alpha and beta particles can be distinguished in two ways: by the nature of their
tracks and the direction of their paths in a magnetic field. Alpha particles typically
produce straight (if no magnetic field is applied), short (<2.5 cm) and thick tracks
because they are relatively large ( 42 He) and highly ionising (charge = +2qp). Beta
tracks are much longer and thinner because they are much smaller (electrons) and
less ionising (charge = –qe). Since alpha particles are positive and beta particles
are negative, they would travel in circular paths with opposite directions if a
magnetic field was applied to the region of emission. (2 marks)
(ii) Mass of polonium = 218.00897 u
Mass of products = 213.99981 + 4.00260 = 218.00241 u
Difference in mass (mass defect) = 218.00897 – 218.00241 = 0.00656 u
1 u = 931.5 MeV/c2
Hence E = 0.00656  931.5 = 6.11 MeV
OR converting to joules (1 eV = 1.602  10–19 J)
E = 0.00656  931.5  106  1.602  10–19 J
= 9.79  10–13 J
OR converting u to kg (1 u = 1.661  10–27 kg) to find joules using E = mc2
E = 0.00656  1.661 × 10–27  (3  108)2
= 9.81  10–13 J (3 marks)
h
(b) (i) λ 
mv
h
So v =
mλ
6.626  10–34
v =
1.675  10–27 0.2  10–9
= 1978
= 2000 m s–1 (considering significant figures in the data) (2 marks)
(ii) Neutrons are neutrally charged so can penetrate more deeply into materials than
other forms of imaging radiation. Such a beam is useful, for example, when ‘looking’
through a metal exterior to see structures inside. Since the neutrons are only
scattered by the nuclei of atoms (rather than electrons, as is the case for X-rays and
electron beams) they can provide information about the nuclei. Neutrons have
considerable mass and can be used to dislodge subatomic particles from the nuclei
of target materials, revealing details about the composition of the target. The known
wavelength of the neutrons in the beam is useful in diffraction investigations
since it is similar to spacing between interatomic layers. Metals have a regular
lattice structure and so diffraction investigations are particularly useful in detecting
defects in metal structures. The energy of thermal neutrons is similar to the lattice
vibration which enables the motion of atoms to be studied. The magnetic moment
of neutrons also allows the study of magnetic properties. (3 marks)

478 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 478 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(c) Spectroscopes are devices that can resolve electromagnetic radiation into its component
wavelengths. Spectral lines identified in the emission and absorption spectra of excited
atoms showed that for specific elements only specific wavelengths could be absorbed
and emitted. Hence different elements had characteristic spectra. The Balmer series of
visible wavelengths for hydrogen is named after Johann Balmer, who first measured and
analysed the spectrum of hydrogen in the late 19th century.
CHAPTER 15 • 2014 HSC EXAMINATION PAPER
Bohr hypothesised that the electron absorbed and emitted the energy only when moving
between allowable stationary energy states. The data was modelled using the following
mathematical
Question 35—From relationship.
Quanta to Quarks

1 1 1
(a) (i) = Ra 2 2 2 b
l nf ni
1
where λ is the
= 1.097 × 10wavelength
7
a1 2 b of the electromagnetic radiation emitted, nf is the final energy
9
level
= for the111
9 751 electron and ni is the initial energy level. R is the Rydberg constant.
This relationship can be used to accurately predict the wavelengths emitted(2when
Therefore l = 1.02 × 1027 m marks)
an
electron in hydrogen ‘moves’ from the second energy level to a higher energy level, as it
(ii) gains energy from
De Broglie’s specific
hypothesis wavelengths
suggested of light in
that particles the visible
display spectrum.
wave-like These same
behaviour,
wavelengths of light are emitted when h the electron ‘falls’ back into the second level. The
which can be characterised by l = . He applied this when describing stable
equation can also be used to predictmv other spectral series for hydrogen. For example, the
electron states using the idea of standing wave patterns.
wavelengths absorbed and emitted as the electron In thisand
moves from model,
back there
to theneeds
first energy
to be whole numbers of electron wavelengths in each stable state/energy level/
level are in the ultraviolet part of the electromagnetic spectrum (the Lyman series).
circular orbit. This is shown in the equation nl = 2pr. So, for an electron to absorb
The spectral analysis, possible only with a spectroscope, allowed Bohr to provide a
a photon, the photon must have an exact amount of energy, which if absorbed
hypothesis and model to explain why electrons in atoms did not continuously emit
will allow the electron standing wave pattern to gain a whole number (n) of
radiation as predicted by classical physics, and hence improved on the Rutherford model
wavelengths to fit into a new stable orbit. Since the energy of the photon is E = hf,
of the atom. (4 marks)
the photon will not be absorbed if it does not have an appropriate frequency.
(d) (i) Davisson and Germer identified that rather than scattering in all directions, (3 marks)the
electrons were scattered in particular directions: they formed a pattern similar to
(b) (i) Whilethethere are gravitational
diffraction forces ofpattern
and interference attraction between
of X-rays, nucleons,
formed the force is and
by constructive
millions of times weaker
destructive than of
interference thewaves
electrostatic force
diffracted bytrying to push
the metal the protons
lattice. Their conclusion
apart.was
Even stronger still is the nuclear force of attraction that overcomes
that the electrons behaved as if they were waves with a wavelength the given by
electrostatic
λ = h/prepulsion
(where p and
is theholds the protons
momentum andelectrons
of the neutronsand
together when they
h is Planck’s are
constant).
very close
to each other. Compared to the strong nuclear force, the gravitational(2 marks)
forces in the nucleus of an atom are irrelevant. (2 marks)
(ii) This experiment led de Broglie to apply the formula for the wavelength of a
(ii) During particle λ = reaction,
a nuclear h/mv to the electron
total bindinginenergy
the Rutherford–Bohr model
of products differs fromoftotal
the hydrogen
atom.
binding He hypothesised
energy that for
of reactants. When thecircular orbits energy
total binding the circumference was nthe
increases during λ = 2πr
course(where
of the nreaction,
= the excitation
energy islevel for the
released. Theelectron).
amount of Hence,
energyinreleased
the revised model, the
is given
ground state
by Einstein’s path Elength
equation = mcequated
2 where tom one
is theelectron wavelength.
mass defect betweenInthetheinitial
first excitation
and
state, n = 2, the path length was 2 λ
final elements. The shape of the graph shows that there are two possible types ofonly
, etc. In this model the electron could
exist as a standing wave with a whole number of wavelengths. In this scenario
energy-releasing nuclear reactions.
the electron was a wave rather than a particle. This provided a plausible model to
1. Nuclear
explainfusion
why ofthetwo elements
electrons didthat
notwill
emitcombine to formwhile
any radiation an element up to iron.
in the allowable
stationary
2. Nuclear orbits
fission, or energy
in which levels
elements of are
that the more
Rutherford–Bohr
massive thanmodel.
iron break apart (3 marks)
to form lighter elements. (3 marks)

(c) Neutrons are subatomic particles with no net charge. They exist in the nuclei of atoms
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 479
and are emitted by radioactive elements in the stabilisation process of nuclear fission.
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125
High-density 645 1
neutron Excel Success
beams can beOne HSC Physics
produced at nuclear facilities such as the OPAL
reactor at Lucas Heights in Sydney. These neutron beams can be used as probes for
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 479 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

scientific experiments and analysis of materials.

CHAPTER 14 • 2015 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(e) A number of answers are possible. The following is an example.

Rutherford’s alpha scattering experiments identified that atoms had a nucleus that was
positively charged, contained most of the mass of the atom and was tiny compared with
the size of the atom. He postulated that electrostatic forces of attraction between the
negative electrons and the positive nucleus provided the centripetal force needed to
keep the electrons in orbit. This was a huge change in the understanding of the
structure of atoms, previously thought to be solid particles (Dalton and Thompson).
Rutherford’s model largely persists today.
Experiments, such as those conducted by Thompson and Chadwick, identified that the
nuclei of atoms heavier than hydrogen contained multiple protons and neutral neutrons
and that atoms of the same element could have nuclei of different mass, i.e. isotopes.
This realisation that multiple positive charge particles (protons) were held close together
in a tiny nucleus required an explanation as to why the nucleus did not fly apart due to
what ought to be enormous forces of electrostatic repulsion. The concept of a force that
was much stronger than the electrostatic force, called the strong nuclear force, provided
a plausible explanation. This force operated only over very short distances between
protons and protons, protons and neutrons, and neutrons and neutrons.
Much more recently, analysis of experiments involving collisions between charged
particles accelerated to enormous speeds (energies) in particle accelerators has had a
major impact on modern understanding of the atomic nucleus. These experiments have
revealed the existence of more than 60 previously unknown subatomic particles and
have led to the development of the Standard Model that includes quarks, leptons and
bosons. In particular, probing protons with very high energy electrons has shown
protons to be made up of three quarks—two up quarks and a down quark. Similarly,
neutrons have been found to be made up of one up quark and two down quarks.
Up quarks have a charge of +2/3 ( 1.6  10–19 C) and down quarks have a charge of
–1/3 ( 1.6  10–19 C). This explains the net charge value on protons and neutrons.
In the Standard Model, the strong force that binds quarks together within the protons
and neutrons is due to attraction between quarks with a different colour charge (red,
green or blue) and is mediated by bosons called gluons. This strong force is much
stronger than the previously named strong nuclear force between nucleons, which is
now considered to be only a residual part of the strong force that binds the quarks
together inside the protons and neutrons of the nucleus. (6 marks)

480 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 480 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

CHAPTER 15

2016 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE

EXAMINATION

Physics

Total marks – 100

Section I Pages 2–28

General Instructions 75 marks

25 marks
• Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
• Allow about 45 minutes for this section

1060 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 481

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 481 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I
75 marks

Part A – 20 marks
Attempt Questions 1–20
Allow about 35 minutes for this part

Use the multiple-choice answer sheet for Questions 1–20.

1 Some mobile phones are recharged at a power point using a charger that contains a
transformer.

What is the purpose of the transformer?

(A) To convert AC at the power point to DC

(B) To convert DC at the power point to AC
(C) To increase the AC voltage at the power point
(D) To decrease the AC voltage at the power point

2 Both Westinghouse and Edison proposed methods for supplying electricity to homes.

What advantage did Westinghouse’s method have over Edison’s?

(A) DC could be supplied at a lower current, making it safer for the consumer.
(B) DC could be supplied at a lower voltage, making it safer for the consumer.
(C) AC allowed for the use of a lower transmission current, reducing energy losses.
(D) AC allowed for the use of a lower transmission voltage, reducing energy losses.

3 A region of space contains a constant magnetic field and a constant electric field.

How will these fields affect an electron that is stationary in this region?

(A) Both fields will exert a force.

(B) Neither field will exert a force.
(C) Only the electric field will exert a force.
(D) Only the magnetic field will exert a force.

482 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS –2–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 482 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

4 The graph shows information about three superconductors X, Y and Z including their year
of discovery.

100 Z
90
80
Critical temperature (K)

70
60
50
40
30
20 Y
10 X
0
1910 1930 1950 1970 1990
Year of discovery

Which row of the table correctly classifies X, Y and Z?

X Y Z
(A) Metal Metal alloy Compound
(B) Metal Compound Metal alloy
(C) Metal alloy Metal Compound
(D) Metal alloy Compound Metal

5 The diagram shows two parallel charged plates 5 × 10–3 m apart.

+15 V

5 × 10–3 m

What is the magnitude of the electric field between the plates in V m−1?

(A) 3.3 × 10−4

(B) 0.33
(C) 3
(D) 3000

–3– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 483

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 483 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

6 In a thought experiment, a jet is travelling at 0.5 c relative to the ground, towards a train
that is travelling at 0.1 c relative to the ground, as shown.

0.5 c

0.1 c

What is the speed of the light emitted from the train’s headlight, as measured by a pilot
in the jet?

(A) 0.1 c
(B) 0.4 c
(C) 0.6 c
(D) 1.0 c

7 A magnet passes through a copper tube at constant velocity along the path shown.

A current is induced in the tube by the motion of the magnet.

Copper tube

Path of magnet
N S P Q

Which row of the table correctly describes the forces acting between the tube and the
magnet at points P and Q?

Force at P Force at Q
(A) Attraction Repulsion
(B) Repulsion Attraction
(C) Attraction Attraction
(D) Repulsion Repulsion

484 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS– 4–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 484 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

8 Which movement of the magnet(s) will produce the greatest deflection of the
galvanometer?
(A) 2v (B) v
N S N S
S N

G G

9 How does back emf affect a DC motor?

(A) It creates heat in the iron core.

(B) It limits the speed of the motor.
(C) It reverses the current in the coil.
(D) It increases the torque of the motor.

10 In a thought experiment, a train is moving at a constant speed of 0.8 c. A lamp is located

at the midpoint of a carriage. There are doors W and Z at each end of the carriage which
open automatically when light from the lamp reaches them.

Lamp 0.8 c

W Z

The passenger
The passengerstanding
standingatatthe
themidpoint
midpointofofthe
thecarriage
carriageswitches
switchesononthethe lamp.
lamp.
Which statement best explains what the passenger observes about the doors?
Which statement best explains what the passenger observes about the doors?
(A) Z opens before W because the lamp is moving towards Z .
(A)
(B) ZWopens
opensbefore
beforeWZbecause
becausethe
W lamp is moving
is moving towards
towards Z.
the lamp.
(B)
(C) W Wopens
and Zbefore Z because W is because
open simultaneously moving the
towards
lampthe lamp. at an equal distance from
is placed
both.
(C) W and Z open simultaneously because the lamp is placed at an equal distance
(D) from
W andboth.
Z open simultaneously because the distance from the lamp to each door has
(D) W contracted by simultaneously
and Z open the same amount.
because the distance from the lamp to each door has
contracted by the same amount.
–5– S U C C E S S O N E H S C • P H Y S I C S 485

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics
11 What is the wavelength, in metres, of a photon with an energy of 3.5 eV?
9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 485 22/12/2016 2:10 PM
−6
(A) 1.2 × 10
(B) W opens before Z because W is moving towards the lamp.
(C) W and Z open simultaneously because the lamp is placed at an equal distance
from both.
(D) W and Z open simultaneously because the distance from the lamp to each door has
CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER
contracted by the same amount.

11 What is the wavelength, in metres, of a photon with an energy of 3.5 eV?

(A) 1.2 × 10−6

(B) 3.5 × 10−7
(C) 1.18 × 10−15
(D) 5.67 × 10−26

12 Which diagram correctly shows the deflection of a cathode ray by a bar magnet?

(A) (B)

–6–

13 When light of a specific frequency strikes a metal surface, photoelectrons are emitted.

If the light intensity is increased but the frequency remains the same, which row of the
table is correct?

Number of photoelectrons Maximum kinetic energy

emitted of the photoelectrons
(A) Remains the same Remains the same
(B) Remains the same Increases
(C) Increases Remains the same
(D) Increases Increases

486 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 486 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

14 A satellite orbits Earth with period T. An identical satellite orbits the planet Xerus which
has a mass four times that of Earth. Both satellites have the same orbital radius r.

Earth r Xerus r

What is the period of the satellite orbiting Xerus?

T
(A)
4
T
(B)
2

(D) 4T

15 Which of the following statements correctly describes the effect of light in a solar cell?

(A) The light produces electron-hole pairs.

(B) The light causes pure silicon to become n-type silicon.
(C) The light increases the potential difference across the p-n boundary.
(D) The light transfers energy to electrons in the conduction band of the p-type
semiconductor.

–8– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 487

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 487 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

16 The cone of a speaker is pushed so that the coil moves in the direction shown.

N
Movement

X Y
Conductor

Which row of the table correctly identifies the behaviour of the speaker and the direction
of the current through the conductor?

The speaker The direction of the

behaves like a … current is from …
(A) generator X to Y
(B) generator Y to X
(C) motor X to Y
(D) motor Y to X

488 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS –9–

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 488 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

17 A projectile was launched horizontally inside a lift in a building. The diagram shows the
path of the projectile when the lift was stationary.

Lift

The projectile was launched again with the same velocity. At this time, the lift was
slowing down as it approached the top floor of the building.

Which diagram correctly shows the new path of the projectile (dotted line) relative to the
path created in the stationary lift (solid line)?

(A) Lift (B) Lift

(C) Lift (D) Lift

– 10 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 489

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 489 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

18 A motorcycle travels around a vertical circular path of radius 3.6 m at a constant speed.
The combined mass of the rider and motorcycle is 200 kg.

3.6 m Path of motorcycle

What is the minimum speed, in m s–1, at which the motorcycle must travel to maintain
the circular path?

(A) 0.42
(B) 1.9
(C) 5.9
(D) 35

19 Muons are subatomic particles which at rest have a lifetime of 2.2 microseconds ( µs).
When they are produced in Earth’s upper atmosphere, they travel at 0.9999 c.

Using classical physics, the distance travelled by a muon in its lifetime can be calculated
as follows:

x = vt
= 660 m

Which row of the table correctly summarises the behaviour of these muons?

Muon’s reference frame Earth’s reference frame

Distance travelled Lifetime Distance travelled Lifetime
(m) ( µs) (m) ( µs)
(A) 660 2.2 > 660 > 2.2
(B) > 660 > 2.2 660 2.2
(C) 660 2.2 < 660 < 2.2
(D) < 660 < 2.2 660 2.2

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 490 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

20 In the motor shown, the rotor spins clockwise, as viewed from point P, when connected
to a DC supply.

–
P +

What happens when the motor is connected to an AC supply?

(A) There is no movement of the rotor.

(B) The rotor produces clockwise movement only.
(C) The rotor vibrates at the frequency of the AC supply.
(D) The rotor continuously turns half a rotation clockwise, then half a rotation
anticlockwise.

– 12 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 491

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 491 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

2016 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Centre Number
Section I (continued)

Part B – 55 marks
Attempt Questions 21–30 Student Number
Allow about 1 hour and 40 minutes
for this part

Answer the
the questions
questionsininthethe
spaces provided. These spaces provide
spaces
provided.
guidance forThese spaces
the expected provide
length of response.
guidance for the expected length of
Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.
response.
Write all
Show your Centreworking
relevant Numberinand Student Number at the top of this page.
questions
involving calculations.

Extra writing space is provided on

Do NOT write in this area.

pages 27 and 28. If you use this space,

clearly indicate which question you
Question 21 (5 marks)
are answering.
(a) Why does orbital decay occur more rapidly for satellites in a low-Earth orbit 2
Write your Centre Number and
than for satellites in other orbits?
Student Number at the top of this
page. ...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Please turn over
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the gravitational force that acts on a 50 kg satellite 3
when it is 8000 km from Earth’s centre.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

– 13 –
492 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• NOT
P H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
4393310351
1061
© Pascal Press 15330
ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 492 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 22 (6 marks)

(a) When an alternating current is passed through coil A, a voltage is observed on 2

the oscilloscope connected to coil B.

Coil A Coil B

Oscilloscope

How could a bar magnet be used, instead of coil A, to produce a similar pattern
on the oscilloscope?
...............................................................................................................................

Do NOT write in this area.

Question 22 continues
Question 22 continues on page 17

– 16 –
S Umarks
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any CCES S Othis
below N E line.
HSC • PHYSICS 493
4873310354
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 493 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 22 (continued)

(b) A strong magnet is at rest a few centimetres above a solid metal disc made of a 4
non-magnetic metal. The magnet is then dropped.

Strong magnet

Solid non-magnetic, metal disc

The velocity of the magnet is shown in this graph.

Time (s)
0
Do NOT write in this area.

Velocity
(m s–1)

Gradient = –9.8

Account for the shape of the graph.

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 22

– 17 –
494 S U C C E S Office
S O NUse
E H S C – •Do PNOT
Only H Y Swrite
I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
7471310351
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 494 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 23 (6 marks)

(a) Explain the role of the deflection plates in displaying voltage changes applied to 3
the input of a cathode ray oscilloscope.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) The diagram shows electrons travelling in a vacuum at 5.2 × 104 m s–1 entering 3
an electric field of 10 V m–1.

Do NOT write in this area.

Electric field

Electrons

A magnetic field is applied so that the electrons continue undeflected.

What is the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field?

...............................................................................................................................

– 18 –
S Umarks
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any C C E below
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 495
9964310350
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 495 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 24 (4 marks)

The graph shows the effect of temperature on the resistance of a metal wire. 4

Resistance

Temperature
Tc

Explain the shape of this graph in terms of the behaviour of electrons in the metal,
both above and below the critical temperature (Tc ).
Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 19 –
496 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• NOT
P H Y write
SICS anything, or make any marks below this line.
5638310354
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 496 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 25 (5 marks)

Two teams carried out independent experiments with the purpose of investigating
Newton’s Law of Universal Gravitation. Each team used the same procedure to
accurately measure the gravitational force acting between two spherical masses over
a range of distances.

The following graphs show the data collected by each team.

Team A’s results

5.0

4.0
Force (× 10–8 N)

3.0

2.0

Do NOT write in this area.

1.0

0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Distance between the centres of masses (m)

Team B’s results

5.0

4.0
Force (× 10–8 N)

3.0

2.0

1.0

0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Distance between the centres of masses (m)

Question 25 continues
Question 25 continues on page 21
– 20 –
S Umarks
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline. 497
HSC • PHYSICS
9657310359
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 497 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 25 (continued)

(a) Compare qualitatively the relationship between force and distance in the graphs. 2
...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Assess the appropriateness of Team A’s data and Team B’s data in achieving 3
the purpose of the experiments.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

End of Question 25

– 21 –
498 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• NOT
P H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
6157310351
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 498 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 26 (5 marks)

Explain how applications of transformers have affected society. 5

.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................
Question 27 (7 marks)
.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................
(a) Outline observations that Hertz made that were consistent with the photoelectric 3

Do NOT write in this area.

effect. In your answer, identify equipment that was essential for him to make
these observations.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Explain how the result of ONE investigation of the photoelectric effect changed 4
the scientific understanding of the nature of light.
Do NOT write in this area.

...............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................
– 22 –
S Umarks
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 499
1086310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 499 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 28 (5 marks)

The following diagram shows the acceleration of a rocket during the first stage of its 5
launch.

a = 25 m s–2

NOT TO
SCALE
a = 10 m s–2

a = 4.6 m s–2
Earth

Do NOT write in this area.

Explain the acceleration of the rocket with reference to the law of conservation of
momentum.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 24 –
500 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• P H Y write
NOT S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
7927310357
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 500 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 29 (6 marks)

Explain how different discoveries in physics led to the development of THREE 6

technologies, including the electric generator.

.........................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................
Do NOT write in this area.

.........................................................................................................................................

– 25 –
S Umarks
Office Use Only – Do NOT write anything, or make any C C Ebelow
S S Othis
N Eline.
HSC • PHYSICS 501
9403310358
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 501 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 30 (6 marks)

The following makeshift device was made to provide lighting for a stranded astronaut
on Mars.

The mass of Mars is 6.39 × 1023 kg.

Light bulb
Switch
DC +
generator –

Rope
2 kg

The 2 kg mass falls, turning the DC generator, which supplies energy to the light bulb.
The mass falls from a point that is 3 376 204 m from the centre of Mars.

Do NOT write in this area.

(a) Calculate the maximum possible energy released by the light bulb as the mass 3
falls through a distance of one metre.

...............................................................................................................................

(b) Explain the difference in the behaviour of the falling mass when the switch is 3
open.

...............................................................................................................................

– 26 –
502 S U C C E SOffice
S O NUse
E Only
H S C– Do
• PNOT
H Y write
S I C Sanything, or make any marks below this line.
8246310352
© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 Excel Success One HSC Physics

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 502 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

2016 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION

Physics
Section II

25 marks
Attempt ONE question from Questions 31–35
Allow about 45 minutes for this section

Answer parts (a)–(e) of one question in the Section II Writing Booklet. Extra writing booklets
are available.

Show all relevant working in questions involving calculations.

Pages

Question 31 Geophysics .............................................................................

(Not included in this reproduction) 30–31

Question 32 Medical Physics ........................................................................... 32

Question 33 Astrophysics ................................................................................. 33

Question 34 From Quanta to Quarks ................................................................ 34

Question 35 The Age of Silicon .................................................................

(Not included in this reproduction) 35–37

1062 – 29 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 503

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 503 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 32 — Medical Physics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) What are the differences between hard and soft X-rays? 2

(ii) Account for the widespread use of X-rays to create images of human 3
limbs.

(b) (i) Describe the piezoelectric effect and its application in ultrasound imaging. 3

(ii) An ultrasound pulse leaves the transducer and passes from the gel 3
through soft tissue and bone as shown. A table of acoustic impedances
is provided.

Gel Soft tissue Bone

Transducer

Medium Acoustic impedance (kg m–2 s–1)

Gel 1.632 × 106
Soft tissue 1.632 × 106
Bone 6.732 × 106

Describe what happens to the intensity of the ultrasound pulse at each

boundary. Use calculations to support your answer.

(c) Contrast the use of Doppler ultrasound imaging with the use of computed axial 4
tomography (CAT) imaging. In your answer, include an example of how each
is used.

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) Describe how positron emission tomography (PET) scanning is used in 4

diagnosis. In your answer, refer to the interaction of positrons and electrons.

(e) Explain how principles of physics are applied in magnetic resonance 6

imaging (MRI).

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 504 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

Question 33 — Astrophysics (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) Distinguish between the terms resolution and sensitivity as applied to 2
optical telescopes.

(ii) Outline ways of improving the resolution of ground-based telescopes. 3

(b) (i) Explain how trigonometric parallax is used to determine the distance to 3
a star.

(ii) Determine the absolute magnitude of a star which has an apparent 3

magnitude of 4.2 and a parallax of 0.055 arc seconds.

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) Explain how the study of different types of variable stars has increased our 4
understanding of celestial objects.

(e) Describe how the distribution of stars on a Hertzsprung–Russell diagram relates 6

to the processes that occur during their evolution.

– 33 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 505

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 505 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34 — From Quanta to Quarks (25 marks)

Answer parts (a), (b) and (c) of the question on pages 2–4 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(a) (i) Identify the TWO types of nucleon and state ONE difference between 2
them.

(ii) Explain the stability of 42He nuclei in terms of TWO forces. 3

(b) (i) Outline features of the hydrogen spectrum that Bohr’s model could not 3
explain.

(ii) Calculate the initial energy level of an electron in a hydrogen atom if it 3

emitted 4.089 × 10–19 J on transition to the n = 2 level.

Answer parts (d) and (e) of the question on pages 6–8 of the Section II Writing
Booklet. Start each part of the question on a new page.

(d) Explain how evidence from experiments involving particle accelerators and 4
detectors has provided support for the standard model of matter.

(e) How did Fermi’s work in nuclear physics lead to applications that have affected 6
society?

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 506 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

2016 HSC Examination Paper

Sample Answers
Section I, Part A (Total 20 marks)

1 D Although transformers can step up voltage, to charge a mobile phone does not
require voltage greater than 240 volts. Transformers do not change AC to DC or
vice versa.

2 C A and B are incorrect because they refer to advantages of DC, which was not the
form Westinghouse supplied. The formula PLOSS = I 2R shows that lower current,
rather than lower voltage, reduces power loss, so D is incorrect.

3 C This question is tricky; there are almost two correct answers to question 3—in fact
the most correct answer is C because, at the instant given, the electron is stated to
be stationary, in which case only the electric field applies a force on it. However, a
miniscule fraction of a second later the electric field will have caused movement,
at which instant the magnetic field will also apply a force on the moving charge.
Therefore, the best answer must be C, but it’s a genuine challenge for many
students—who could reasonably consider an electron as a ‘cloud’ that cannot truly
be stationary, or take Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle as precluding such a
state—who would be very good physicists.

4 A The first superconductor, the metal mercury, was discovered by Onnes when he
managed to liquefy helium. Fifty years later it was discovered that metal alloys
could also act as superconductors, and with higher critical temperatures. Ceramic
superconductors having much higher critical temperatures were discovered nearer
the end of the 20th century.

5 D
The correct equation to use in this situation is
V 15
E = = = 3  103 V m–1
d 5  10–3
where E is the strength of the electric field between the plates,
V is the potential difference between the parallel plates,
d is the distance between them.

6 D According to Einstein’s Special Relativity Theory the speed of light through empty
space is a definite speed irrespective of the speed of the source or observer. That
speed is 1.0 c.

7 B In accordance with Lenz’s Law an emf is set up within a conducting coil to oppose
any change in flux within the coil. Consequently, at point P as the south pole of the
magnet is approaching the coil, a like pole (south) is induced at that end of the
coil—repelling it.

However, at point Q the north pole of the magnet is receding from the coil, so an
opposite pole (south) is induced at that end of the coil to oppose the flux change—
attracting it.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 507

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 507 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

8 D In theory there would be zero deflection in case A since the magnetic poles of the
two magnets would cancel each other’s effect. There would certainly be a deflection
in case B that is greater than in case C because there are more loops within which
an emf would be induced. However, in cases B and D the number of loops is equal,
but the greater speed of the magnet in D means that the change in flux would be
greater, hence also the emf induced.

9 B In order for the rotor in a DC motor to continue to turn, the direction of current
flowing through it must reverse (or stop). Every time this occurs back-emf is
induced, which creates a ‘back-current’. The more rapidly the motor is rotating the
more frequently the change in flux, therefore the greater the back-emf opposing the
applied voltage. Once the two are equal the motor will no longer turn any faster—
its rotational speed is limited.

10 C All three of the alternatives are incorrect because the observer, the lamp and both
doors are all in the same inertial frame of reference.

11 B E = hf ∴ 3.5  1.062  10-19 = 6.63  10–34 f

c 3.0  108  6.63  10–34
λ  ∴ λ  = 3.5  10–7 m
f –19
3.5  1.062  10 

12 B Answer A would be correct for the north pole deflecting positively charged
particles, but cathode rays are charged negatively. Answers C and D refer to the
cathode rays being attracted by the north or the south pole of the magnet; however,
they are actually deflected in a perpendicular direction.

13 C Since photons are being emitted the light frequency equals or exceeds the threshold
frequency for the metal surface. When the intensity of the light is increased, the
number of photons striking the surface increases and, since every photon is able to
release one electron, the number of photoelectrons is greater. However, since the
frequency of the photons remains the same, so does the energy of each photon.
Since the Work Function of the metal is uniform, the maximum kinetic energy of
every released photoelectron remains the same.
r13 GM1 r23 GM2
14 B 2 = Equally, 2 = As r1 = r2 and by removing common factors
T1 4π2 T2 4π2
G and 4p2
1 M1 1 M2 T12 M2 4 1
∴  and  ∴ 2 = = ∴ T2 = T
T1 2
1 T2 2
1 T2 M1 1 2 1
15 A Answer B is incorrect because only doping can change silicon to n-type silicon.
C is incorrect because the potential difference across the boundary is fixed,
depending upon the dopants. D is incorrect because electrons are not the charge
carriers in p-type semiconductors.

508 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 508 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

16 A At first glance Question 16 has two possible answers. The question reads, ‘The
cone of a speaker is pushed ...’ as it is—by the magnetic field’s action on the
current-carrying coil, in which case the answer would be D since it experiences the
motor effect (as identified in the syllabus). Equally, it might have been pushed by
(say) a finger—in which case the answer is A as in this case, because no DC or AC
source is connected between points X and Y. Had the question included
‘… by a finger …’, or had a finger been included in the diagram provided, errors
due to misinterpretation, rather than incorrect physics, might have been avoided.

17 C Since the lift is decelerating as it is rising, in fact it is accelerating downwards, so

the frame of reference within the lift is undergoing that acceleration. Because the
falling projectile is observed from within that frame of reference its acceleration
downwards appears to be less. Its horizontal motion is unaffected.

18 C In order to maintain the circular path the motorcycle must be in contact with the
surface at all times—including when at the position in the diagram. For it to move
in a circle, the motorcycle must experience a centripetal force. At the position
shown its weight can be just enough force to apply this—in which case this will be
the minimum force required to keep it moving in the circle.
mv2 v2
Fw FC mg =
–1
r g = r i.e. v (minimum) = 3.6 9.8 = 5.9 m s

19 A Alternatives B and D are incorrect because within the frame of reference of the
actual muons there can be no relativistic effects. C is incorrect because from
outside the muons’ frame of reference they are observed to travel much further
because their time to travel has been extended relativistically.

20 B The motor will operate as a universal motor. Right-hand push rule can be used to
show that at the moment captured in the diagram the coil will experience a
clockwise torque. After the loop passes the vertical, the current from the source
changes direction (as it is AC). Consequently both the electromagnetic polarity and
the direction of current through the loop have reversed so the torque’s direction is
maintained. This will result in an ongoing clockwise torque and therefore rotation.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 509

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 509 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Section I, Part B

Question 21
(a) Even in the emptiest regions of space between the galaxies there are some atoms scattered
around; however, there are a far greater number close to planets (due to gravitational
attraction) including Earth, even where craft are located in ‘the vacuum of space’. The
closer a craft is to the ground, the more particles are present and must be pushed aside
by any moving craft, removing some of its kinetic energy and resulting in orbital decay.
Then, as they lose gravitational potential energy, their speed increases, so the collisions
with atmospheric particles cause even more rapid energy losses. Consequently low-Earth
orbit satellites experience more rapid orbital decay than those on other orbital paths.
(2 marks)
GmEmsat 6.67  10–11  6.0  1024  50
(b) FG 
∴ FG  = 312.7 = 310N
d 2 8000  1032
(3 marks)

Question 22
(a) The pattern observed on the oscilloscope when AC is switched on in coil A on the left
would be a regular sinusoidal wave pattern having the identical frequency as the AC
input into coil A. (Its amplitude depends upon the number of loops in each coil, which
appear to be equal.)

If coil A is replaced by a bar magnet, a similar pattern would appear on the oscilloscope
if either pole of the bar magnet were moved rapidly back and forth towards either end
of coil B. The pattern would again appear wave-like. The frequency would depend on
the rate of back-and-forth motion of the magnet. Amplitude would be determined by
the strength of the magnet, the rate of motion and the number of coils. (2 marks)

(b) At time t = 0 s the magnet falls, having an acceleration vertically downwards of 9.8 m s–2.
The graph shows that its downward acceleration decreases rapidly to zero when it is
about halfway down. It then experiences a slowing descent until it stops as indicated by
the slope of the graph changing from –9.8 to 0 and rapidly to positive until reaching v = 0.
This is caused by the falling magnet inducing an emf in the metal solid underneath
(Faraday’s Law), which in accordance with Lenz’s Law causes an opposing force.
The metal is not magnetic, but the change in magnetic flux as the magnet approaches
from above induces a like pole in the surface of the metal opposing the flux change,
hence an eddy current flows. This flow of current in the conductor requires energy, and
the only energy in this action is the potential and kinetic energy of the falling magnet,
which is therefore reduced.

It is important to note that because the graph shows velocity/time, the bottom of the
curve does not identify that the magnet has stopped, merely that the downward
acceleration has become upward. It is still moving downwards, but slowing rapidly to
zero because the flux change increases while the magnet moves downwards, maintaining
the induced current (as shown by the upward curve) even while the magnet rapidly slows
down, therefore continuing to remove mechanical energy from the magnet. (4 marks)

510 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 510 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 23
(a) There are two pairs of deflection plates that control the beam of cathode rays displaying
voltage changes within a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO). The vertical plates control
the horizontal sweep of the beam. They act as a time-base, and the rate of the sweep
can be changed to accommodate rapid variations or fairly slow ones. The sweep is
controlled by a voltage that increases uniformly, deflecting the beam from left to right
across the screen (as observed from in front of the CRO). The horizontal plates control
the vertical sweep of the beam. The incoming signal data being observed determines
the plate voltage at each instant. This scale can also be adjusted to measure very weak
signals or much stronger ones. In this way a varying input signal, whether light, pH,
nerve signals, etc., can be ‘imaged’. (3 marks)

(b) Since the electric field shown is directed into the page it would apply a force vertically
out of the page on the electrons. The force on each electron, Fe = qE, so here
Fe = 10q N.

The magnetic force on each electron, Fb = Bqv, = Bq  (5.2  104) N.

Since Fe = Fb \ 10q = (5.2  104) qB, so B = 1.9  10-4 T.

To maintain a straight path for the electron beam the magnetic field must exactly oppose
the force from the electric field, so it must deflect the electron beam into the page.
According to the right-hand rule it must therefore be directed up the page. (3 marks)

Question 24
The graph shows the resistance of a typical metal that becomes a superconductor when its
temperature is lowered to its critical temperature or lower. At higher temperatures the electrons
act as individuals, experiencing resistance to their movement within (thermal) or through the
metal (when a potential difference (PD) is applied across its ends), although the graph also
shows that this resistance reduces as the temperature lowers. The higher the temperature of
the metal, the greater the vibrations of the metal ions within the crystal lattice, which means
it is harder for the electrons to ‘flow’, meaning that less current passes when the PD is
applied than when the temperature is lower. Consequently, its resistance is higher.

At the critical temperature (Tc), the graph shows that the resistance of the conductor drops
directly to zero, since when the temperature falls to or below the critical temperature of the
metal, electrons ‘pair up’ into what are called ‘Cooper pairs’. In such a situation these
electron pairs encounter zero resistance to their flow through the superconductor as a
consequence of lattice distortion effects. Their energy is quantised, and their flow is no
longer negatively affected by movements of the positive ions of the metal. (4 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 511

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 511 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 25
k k
(a) Team A: Their graph indicates a hyperbolic relationship, such as F = or 2 etc.
d d
Team B: Their graph indicates a linear relationship, of the form AF + Bd = C.
(2 marks)

(b) Team A: Although Team A carried out only four actual measurements, the range of its
k
distance measurements was broad enough for the relationship to be identified F = 2 .
d
From theory we know this is the correct relationship.

Team B: Team B did carry out eight measurements, but because the range of the readings
it took was far too small, the true shape of the line of best fit appeared to be linear.

[This is a common error in investigations, notably when students are trying to determine
the relationship between the length of a simple pendulum and its period—it is essential
to include a few readings with the mass on a short length of cord.] (3 marks)

Question 26
There are numerous ways in which transformers have affected society and, furthermore, there
are few negative impacts associated with them, especially with modern transformers that are
far more efficient and often much lighter than previous ones. Their function is to change the
output potential difference either by stepping it up or down, simultaneously changing the
value of the current output inversely.

It was largely the ability of transformers to be able to convert AC voltage to very high
potential to minimise energy losses during transmission that allowed power stations to be
located well away from urban areas. The power lines are connected to urban areas at
substations that easily reduce the potential to safer levels. This has benefited society by
substantially reducing local pollution in urban areas.

The ability of modern transformers to convert small potential differences—for example, from
one or two ‘button cells’ to even smaller voltages—has had an even more profound effect on
society. The transformers themselves have been miniaturised, along with the other components
in calculators, mobile phones, etc., as well as essential components in heart pacemakers and
spacecraft. However, since transformers have allowed society the increased use of electrical
energy, it has come at the cost of pollution in the form of fossil fuel combustion products and
used batteries, so their impact has also been negative. (5 marks)

512 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 512 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Question 27
(a)
Aerial plates

Sparking

Sparking
Detector

Induction
coil

Hertz carried out his experiments with radio waves using an induction coil fitted with
aerial plates as a transmitter, together with a small detector, basically a small coil with
a spark gap. He showed that when sparks are generated by the induction coil, sparks
can also be observed at times in the spark gap of the detector, depending upon the test
(e.g. when he was testing whether the radio waves were polarised, like light).

The spark gap could be widened or narrowed to test the strength of the signal, and
many times it was difficult to see whether or not there was a spark, so frequently it was
necessary to carry out tests in the dark, or with the detector inside a dark box. He found
that the sparking became weaker in both situations. One crucial observation was that if
an ultraviolet lamp was switched on near the detector the sparking there became much
stronger. Since it seemed that light, especially ultraviolet light, produced more electric
sparks he called the phenomenon the photoelectric effect. (3 marks)

(b) A mercury vapour fluorescent light was used as a source, and a diffraction grating dispersed
the light into its component frequencies. These were then shone onto the surface of
a metal plate within a vacuum tube to test whether photoelectrons were released.
A second metal surface (collector) allowed photoelectrons to return to the target through
the circuit. A varying resistive voltage was applied to determine photoelectron energy.
Although no photoelectrons were emitted below a certain frequency, irrespective of the
light intensity, all higher frequencies did release them.

The ‘stopping voltage’ of the emitted photoelectrons in each case was carefully measured,
allowing the (maximum) kinetic energy of the released photoelectrons to be determined.

Photoelectrons were released immediately the metal was irradiated, even if the
intensity of the light was minimal. This was a phenomenon classical physics was unable
to explain.

When plotted on a graph the results produced a straight line, similar to the following
diagram.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 513

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 513 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Graph of light frequency vs K.E. of photoelectrons

K.E. of photoelectrons
X

X
X
Light frequency

Since the discovery could not be explained by current theory, Einstein took the bold
step of utilising Max Planck’s quantum theory, at that time ridiculed by most physicists,
to explain what was otherwise inexplicable. He identified a ‘Work Function’ distinct for
every metal, representing the energy required to remove an electron from its surface.
He assumed the quantum theory to be correct, and elegantly proved it to be true by
explaining that if the photon energy is less than the Work Function no photoelectrons
can be emitted, regardless of how many photons strike the surface. If it equals the
Work Function photoelectrons are emitted, but with zero excess energy, but if it
exceeds the Work Function photoelectrons having excess kinetic energy are emitted.

In this way he managed to verify the quantum theory for energy as well as explain the
photoelectric effect. (4 marks)

Question 28
After a rocket is launched it is affected mainly by three forces: the thrust of its FTH
motors Fth ↑, its weight Fw ↓ and air resistance, Far ↓.

For the launch to be successful Fr ↑= Fth – Fw – Far , > 0. FAR

The physics principle explaining the upward movement of the craft is that of
Conservation of Momentum—fuel is burnt in the engines, the resulting gases
are forced out of the base of the engine at very high speed and as the motor
gives these gases downwards momentum, they apply an equal change in
momentum upward onto the rocket.

According to the question, the resultant upward acceleration of the rocket,

at launch, is 4.6 m s–2. This low value is aimed to minimise the discomfort the
FW
astronauts aboard experience due to the ‘g-force’.

All the time fuel is being burnt the craft’s mass continues to decrease. This is the main reason
the acceleration rises to 10 m s–2 within a minute or so. It is also true that the air resistance
decreases as the craft rises above the denser air nearer the ground. Meanwhile, as it moves
further away from the centre of the Earth, the gravitational attraction downwards also decreases,
though at this stage neither is significant relative to the weight lost by burning fuel.

514 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 514 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

By the time the craft tilts, beginning its manoeuvre to enter a parking orbit, its acceleration is
identified to be 25 m s–2. At this point the reduced air resistance and weaker gravitational
attraction by the Earth have both become more significant, whilst the Stage-1 fuel tanks will be
empty (may even have been dropped to reduce the craft’s weight) to help attain orbital speed.
Since the thrust force of the motor remains fairly constant the reduced mass, decreased g and
diminished air resistance produce greater acceleration on the craft. (5 marks)

Question 29

(I) Fusion
There is a reasonable possibility that just at the right time in its history our Earth may
be saved from the worst consequences of human-induced climate change by something
found on the Moon. It is helium-3, a rare isotope of helium rarely found on Earth
because it has only 75% of the mass of helium-4, and the denser gas of Earth’s
atmosphere allows very little to be found. In addition, being an inert element it forms
no compounds. But it is found on the Moon, evidenced by its presence in the samples
brought back from the four Lunar Missions. Since the Moon has almost no atmosphere,
the tiny helium-3 ‘bullets’ have been arriving daily from the Sun over the past 4.5  109
years since it formed, and there is a lot of it trapped in the rocks.

The point is that fusion of four hydrogen atoms to form helium-4 works well in the
cores of stars, but although temperatures of well over 100 million degrees can now be
produced on Earth, enough to fuse hydrogen into helium [theoretically, 4 1H1 → 4He2]
the pressure of the Sun’s core is not available to us. Instead, practical fusion reactions
on Earth are carried out within a doughnut-shaped tokamak, where the hydrogen we
have to use is hydrogen-2 (deuterium). The hydrogen plasma at extremely high
temperatures is trapped within the tokamak by a powerful superconducting magnet
requiring a temperature of just above 0 K, –273 ºC. When deuterium fuses it does produce
helium-4, but also two neutrons, and since these are uncharged they cannot be trapped
within a magnetic field—and as they escape they take most of the energy produced in
the reaction with them (being the least massive products). Consequently, current fusion
reactions don’t reach ‘break-even point’.

But when two helium-3 nuclei fuse they release two protons instead, which are
charged, hence can be contained. The nuclear equation is 2 3He2 → 4He2 + 2 1H1 .

(II) Superconductivity

In 1908 Heike Onnes managed to liquefy helium and, since he had a bottle of mercury
in his laboratory, examined its resistance when cooled to such an extreme temperature.
He found its electrical resistance suddenly dropped to zero when its temperature
reached 4.15 K—he had discovered the phenomenon of superconductivity.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 515

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 515 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Although for many years practical uses for this were few, now there is an expanding
market for the technology, where its uses include in ultra-fast trains. Superconductors
can be made into extremely powerful electromagnets and, once the current is generated
within them, it continues without losses. In this way, even train carriages loaded with
passengers can be lifted above the surface of a track made of ordinary electromagnets
by locating these superconductors below the carriage floor. The property of repulsion
between like magnetic poles keeps the carriage from touching the track, while a system
of electromagnets with varying poles is able to accelerate the carriage to high speed,
and decelerate it when necessary.

(III) Electric generator

Michael Faraday was able to demonstrate that electric current could be induced in a
circuit by moving a magnet nearby. Following further investigation he explained the
phenomenon with Faraday’s Law, where he showed that changing the magnetic flux
passing into a coil caused electric current to flow—provided there was a path for it.
Subsequently Heinrich Lenz amended the Law to define the direction of current flow.

Nowadays, in every country in the world, electric generators are used to produce
electricity for the populace using this method, but energy cannot be created—it must be
converted from some source. Though the potential energy of water in a dam can
provide that energy, most commonly the source is heat, whether from the Sun, burning
fuel or by nuclear fission. Heat boils water—the steam is passed through a turbine
attached to a huge wire coil causing it to rotate within a powerful magnetic field, and
the AC electricity generated is ready for transmission. (6 marks)

Question 30

(a) The initial gravitational potential energy of the mass would be:
GmM m GmM 2
EP  –
–
d d
6.67  10   6.39  1023  2
–11
∴ EP  – = –25 248 059.66 J
(3 376 204)
After falling 1 metre, its new potential energy would become:
GmM 2 6.67  10–11  6.39  1023  2
E'P  – ∴ E'P  – = –25 248 067.13 J
d' (3 376 203)
The loss in GPE is therefore 7.47 J. The maximum possible energy released by the bulb
is 7.47 J. (3 marks)

(b) If the switch to the lamp is left open, there would be no current flowing through the
light bulb, so it would stay off, and the 2-kg mass would fall as normally on Mars, with
a gravitational acceleration of 3.9 m s–2, its gravitational PE being changed only to KE.

More interesting is what occurs if the switch is closed: the 2-kg mass would have to
fall downwards, otherwise there would be no change in its GPE so the bulb would not
light up. In fact, initially it would fall quickly, but decelerate rapidly to a uniform
speed, after which the light bulb would maintain a uniform brightness until the mass
stopped. (3 marks)

516 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 516 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

Section II—Options
Question 32—Medical Physics
(a) (i) Hard X-rays have higher frequency and shorter wavelength than soft X-rays.
This means that hard X-rays are more penetrating and are more useful for
medical imaging than soft X-rays.
Soft X-rays are less penetrating and hence are likely to cause unnecessary damage
to body tissues, while being of little benefit for imaging. Soft X-rays are typically
filtered from the X-rays leaving the X-ray machine before they reach the body.
(2 marks)
(ii) • Many injuries to the limbs result in fractures and dislocation of bones. Other
deformities, due for example to arthritis, also occur in the limbs. X-ray images
are good for quickly diagnosing such fractures, dislocations and deformities.
• X-ray facilities are readily accessible in a wide range of locations such as
imaging centres, medical centres and hospitals (both small and large).
• X-ray images are cheap and can be processed quickly. (3 marks)

(b) (i) When a voltage is applied across a piezoelectric crystal, the shape of the crystal
changes. When an alternating voltage is applied with a frequency equivalent to
ultrasound that is useful in imaging (3–10 Mz), the shape of the crystal changes
with the same frequency. The ultrasound vibrations produced by the oscillating
crystal(s) can be used to send ultrasound into the body.
When pressure is applied to a piezoelectric crystal, a potential difference is created
between the crystal surfaces. This means that the piezoelectric crystals can also
be used to detect reflected ultrasound. Monitoring the ultrasound reflected from
boundaries between body tissues can provide data that can enable the construction
of computer images that are useful in the identification and diagnosis of medical
conditions such as a torn retina, tears in muscles, soft tissue tumours,
the detection and measurement of foetuses, etc. (3 marks)
(ii) Since the ultrasound acoustic gel has the same acoustic impedance as the soft
tissue, all of the ultrasound produced by the transducer enters the soft tissue
(i.e. none is reflected from the skin surface).
Ir (z2 – z1)2 (1.632 – 1.632)2
 
Io (z2 + z1)2 (1.632 + 1.632)2
0
  0
10.65
When the ultrasound reaches the boundary between the soft tissue and bone,
approximately 37% of the ultrasound is reflected and 63% is transmitted into the
bone tissue.
The proportion of ultrasound reflected from the soft tissue/bone boundary is:
Ir (z2 – z1)2 (6.732 – 1.632)2
 
Io (z2 + z1)2 (6.732 + 1.632)2
26.010
  0.372  37%
69.956
All of the ultrasound reflected from the soft tissue/bone boundary that reaches the
skin/gel boundary at the transducer passes back to the transducer because none of
it is reflected back into the body from the skin/gel boundary because the acoustic
impedance of the gel is the same as the soft tissue. (3 marks)
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 517

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 517 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

(c) Doppler ultrasound and CAT scans are very different. The table below identifies several
differences.
Comparison Doppler ultrasound CAT
Waves used Ultrasound waves Electromagnetic radiation:
X-rays
Potential risk to Non-ionising sound waves do not Ionising radiation can damage
body tissue harm the body tissues. living tissue.
Cost Low More expensive
Uses Can detect speed and direction of Produces high-resolution images
blood flow in blood vessels such as of internal body structure.
veins, arteries and the heart. Can Identifies tumours, blood clots.
identify issues such as leaking heart Also used to provide
valves and competence or supporting images for
incompetence of valves in the veins. PET scans.
Functionality Function images Not usually functional
Administration Ultrasound transducer is placed on Person is moved through a
the skin using a gel for acoustic gantry while X-rays are passed
coupling. Sometimes before, during through the body from various
and after exercise. directions. The data is
processed by a computer to
Data is processed by a computer and
produce a series of images of
poor-quality images show structure
slices of the body.
with colour-enhanced blood-flow
indications.
(4 marks)

(d) The patient is injected with a radiopharmaceutical that contains a positron-emitting

radioisotope. The radioisotope usually has a short half-life to minimise exposure and
reduce the effects of prolonged radiation. The radiopharmaceutical is often designed to
target a specific area of the body, such as the use of radioactive oxygen (oxygen-15) for
investigating the function of lung tissue. Other radioisotopes, for example fluoro deoxy
glucose (FDG), are used because they are readily absorbed from the blood by functioning
cells anywhere in the body and have widespread applications when searching for
abnormally high cell metabolism such as in cancerous tissue or investigating abnormal
brain function (as in the detection of Alzheimer’s disease).
In FDG, the radioactive fluorine18 (F18) atoms emit a positron and become normal oxygen.
When a positron is emitted from the F18, the positron antimatter soon interacts with an
electron and both the positron and electron are consequently annihilated. The mass of
the two particles is converted to high energy electromagnetic radiation in the form of two
gamma photons that easily penetrate through the body’s tissues to the outside of the patient.
The two photons from each annihilation travel approximately in opposite directions and
can be detected outside the patient using collimated photomultiplier tubes.

518 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 518 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

About 30 minutes after injection the patient is placed on a bed-type platform inside a
gantry of photomultiplier tubes. When the computer that is connected to the circular
ring of detectors identifies that two simultaneous gamma photons have been detected at
roughly 180o, the straight line path is logged and used in the production of an image.
Millions of such detections result in an image that identifies the areas of uptake of the
FDG. Typically the PET image is fuzzy and is overlaid on a CAT scan of the same area
of the body to better facilitate the anatomical location of any anomalies. (4 marks)

(e) MRI requires the establishment of a stable and very strong magnetic field. This is
achieved using a set of superconducting solenoids that are cooled using liquid helium
to below the critical temperature. Once a current is established using a small DC supply,
the currents in the coils and the associated magnetic fields continue without any external
DC power supply. Hence, the main magnetic field for the MRI machine is always on.
Gradient magnetic fields coils are used during an MRI scan to vary the value of the
magnetic field inside the MRI machine. This is to allow slices of the patient to be imaged.
Protons and neutrons have a property called magnetic spin. Nuclei that have an odd
number of nucleons (protons and neutrons) have a net magnetic spin. Hydrogen, having
just one proton, is an example. When the body is placed inside the cylindrical chamber
of the MRI machine, the nuclei with net spin align the axis of their magnetic spin either
parallel or anti-parallel with the strong magnetic field. The axes of the magnetic spin
precesses around the strong magnetic field direction with a frequency called the Larmor
frequency. For hydrogen the frequency is 42.58 MHz/T. Since this value is per Tesla,
the frequency of the precession varies across the tube due to the gradient field.
Radio frequency (RF) pulses are applied to the region of the body being imaged using
signal coils. The frequency of these pulses is set to cause particular nuclei to resonate
by absorbing the RF energy. Due to the large amount of water and hence hydrogen in
the body, MRI targets hydrogen nuclei. RF frequencies are used that will cause the axis
of precession of the hydrogen nuclei to ‘flip’. When the radio pulse is turned off, the
hydrogen nuclei ‘relax’ back to their un-flipped state, emitting the absorbed energy at
the same Larmor frequency. Detecting coils pick up the radio signals and this is
analysed by a powerful computer. Variations in the proton density in different body
tissues causes variations in the relaxation times and this allows the computer to produce
detailed images of slices of the body, with soft tissues having particularly good detail
as these contain a greater percentage of water than hard tissue (e.g. bone). (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 519

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 519 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 33—Astrophysics
(a) (i) The resolution of a telescope is its ability to distinguish two objects that are
observed to be close together and is a measure of how fine the details are that the
telescope is capable of observing.
The sensitivity of a telescope is its ability to receive a continuous stream of photons
from a luminous object in sufficient number for an image of it to be identified.
(2 marks)
(ii) The resolution of a telescope is proportional to the diameter of its objective,
whether this is a lens or mirror. One way to increase this diameter is by using two
or more separate objectives spread apart as part of the same telescope, with the
data collected from each combined by computer to produce a far more detailed
image, e.g. the twin parts of the Keck Telescope in Hawaii which are 10 metres
apart. This method is called ‘interferometry’.
For the same reason a telescope having a large single mirror has greater resolution
than one with a small mirror; however, a large mirror’s weight also causes it to
distort, decreasing this advantage. To maximise the resolution of such ground-
based telescopes their objective is made of separate sections on a rubber base.
Depending upon the direction the telescope is pointing, a computer adjusts these
sections every few seconds to counteract the distortion. This process is called
‘active optics’. (3 marks)
(b) (i) Earth now

D
d
1
2
p
Sun 1 Star
2
p

Earth 6 months later

In order to measure the distance of a faraway object D a method called

‘trigonometric parallax’ is commonly used. The object’s direction is measured as
precisely as possible from one point. The observer moves a measured distance 2d
perpendicular to the direction of the target object, prior to precisely measuring its
direction once again. The difference between the two angles is called the
‘parallax angle’ p. The distance away of the object, D,

is now calculated mathematically: tan 12 ∠p = d ∴D =

d
D tan
1
2 ∠p
Since the parallax angle p must be very small, the measured distance d needs to
be as large as possible to maximise precision. Currently, the greatest length
variation available to humankind for measuring stellar distances is the diameter
of Earth’s orbit, as shown, so the radius of Earth’s orbit is used as the distance d
in the above formula. (3 marks)

520 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 520 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • QUESTIONS

1 1
(ii) d= p ∴d = = 18.18 pc
0.055
d

M = m – 5log 10
10
∴ M = 4.2 – 5log10 18.18 = 2.9
10 (3 marks)
(c) Every element displays a unique set of spectral lines when observed through a
spectroscope. When it is strongly heated they are seen as narrow brightly coloured
emission lines on a darker background—an emission spectrum—or, if its vapour is
irradiated by bright light, they are seen as narrow dark lines on a rainbow background—
an absorption spectrum. The spectra of stars comprise a blackbody radiation curve
superimposed by a series of these narrow lines. Since the dark lines are characteristic of
specific elements (or a few stable compounds in cool stars) present in the outer
atmosphere of the star being analysed, not only the elements but even their proportions
can be determined, and hence the chemical composition of the star is found.
Stars resemble ideal blackbodies fairly closely, hence the surface temperature of any star
can be estimated closely by superimposing ideal blackbody curves representing different
temperatures over the star’s measured intensity Vs wavelength spectrum until the closest
fit is found—remembering to allow for possible Doppler shift due to the star’s motion
relative to the Sun, which will displace the star’s apparent spectrum. However, in such
cases the absorption spectral lines are equally displaced, so with care the surface
temperature of individual stars can still be determined. (4 marks)

(d) There is a broad range of variable stars, each of which has increased our understanding
of celestial objects. Eclipsing variables are classified as extrinsic variables because the
variation in the lightcurve observed from Earth is caused by the stars periodically
eclipsing one another, at least partially.
4 π 2r 3
A corollary based on Newton’s Law of Gravitation yields the formula m1 + m2 = ,
GT 2
for which m1 and m2 are the masses of the binary’s two stars (kg),
r is the semi-major axis of the two orbiting stars (metres),
G is the Universal gravitation constant,
T is the orbital period of the binary (s, identical for both
stars).
Major axis

Even in the late 19th century there were sufficient nearby binaries for astronomers to
measure their semi-major axes, thereby determining the combined mass of each binary
and the masses of each component star by comparing their mean orbital radii. Once the
masses of a large number of stars were accurately known, the relationship between the
mass of a star and its colour and luminosity could be inferred, which in turn led to
development of the H-R diagram.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 521

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 521 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Cepheids are also variable stars, but in this case they are
intrinsic variables since the variation in their luminosity
is caused by the stars’ internal instability. They are all

Luminosity
extremely bright stars, visible across vast distances and
in star clusters. Early last century a large number were
observed in a ‘star cluster’ named the Large Magellanic
Cloud, which was known to be very far from Earth but Period (days)
assumed to be part of ‘the Milky Way Galaxy’.
By assuming that all Cepheids in the LMC were effectively equidistant from Earth,
a relationship was discovered relating the period of these stars and their average
luminosity and, since the stars are effectively equidistant, a direct relationship between
their period and their average absolute magnitude, M. Therefore astronomers could
determine average M from their observed period, and compare that with their apparent
average magnitude to estimate their distance. This was a very powerful tool, because it
was soon shown that the LMC stars were far too faint to be part of the Milky Way, and
hence that other galaxies exist in the Universe. Although this theory had been suggested
earlier, there was now convincing evidence that it was true, and suddenly the Universe
had become far larger, and very different. (4 marks)

(e) –10 [It would be essential to sketch a

Supergiants reasonable H-R diagram, labelling
–5 the axes and identifying at least the
Absolute magnitude

X correct locations of the Main

0
Red Giants
Sequence, Red Giants and White
5 Ma Dwarfs to gain maximum marks
in
White Dwarfs
Se
qu for this question.]
10 enc
e

O B A F G K M
Spectral class
The Hertzsprung-Russell Diagram

When stars evolve sufficiently to begin to emit sufficient light to become part of the H-R
diagram, they are located at some point on the Main Sequence, where they will spend
most of their ‘life’ because the rate of fusion in their core is least in this phase. Where
that point will be depends entirely on their mass—the greater their mass the greater the
gravitational pressure acting on their core, hence the greater the radiation pressure the
core must provide to counteract it. Larger stars are hotter, ‘bluer’ and more luminous.
Since a star’s mass decreases only slightly during its life, its location barely changes
throughout this stage, though its absolute magnitude decreases slightly (the star becomes
brighter) so it moves upwards across the Main Sequence. During this phase of its life the
star is fusing hydrogen in its core, converting it into helium.
Once the star exhausts the hydrogen fuel in its core it evolves, initially imploding under
its own gravitational pressure until the heat released this way causes a new hydrogen shell
around the core to fuse, whilst the helium within the core reaches critical temperature
and also starts fusing into carbon. The combined fusion activity produces far greater
radiation pressure than before so the star expands to around 100 times its original

522 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 522 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

diameter—and its surface area increases 10 000 times. The star now releases more energy
than before, but due to the vast increase in surface area the energy released per square
metre is far less, so its surface is far cooler; it is now only red-hot. This explains why it is
now a Red Giant, spectral class K or M, but thousands of times larger and more luminous
than Main Sequence K or M stars. Since the rate of fusion within the core of the star is
much greater, this phase is far shorter, so there are far fewer Red Giants than there are
Main Sequence stars.
Stars far more massive than the Sun continue the sequence of exhausting their fuel,
collapsing, igniting further shells of hydrogen as well as new fusion in their cores,
consequently expanding to become supergiants. When these finally have no further fuel
and collapse, they supernova, becoming neutron stars or black holes too dim to be
included on the H-R diagram any longer.
The extreme rate of fusion of these stars means they exhaust all their fuel yet more
rapidly than the Red Giants do, and ‘die’ more rapidly, so they are comparatively even
rarer.
Those, like the Sun, having more moderate masses exhaust their useful energy supply
at the end of their Red Giant stage. They implode again under the now irresistible
gravitational pressure until their atoms are squeezed so tightly against one another the
contraction ceases. They are now similar in size to the Earth. Their core is dead—in fact,
the star itself is now a corpse. But the gravitational potential energy released as they
collapse is converted to heat, so they are now very hot. They would therefore actually be
blue in colour, but the gravitational force at the surface even affects the light they emit,
so they are only white-hot and tiny—therefore less luminous—White Dwarfs. Now dead,
the heat gradually disperses, and they fade away into obscurity as they become redder.
(6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 523

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 523 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

CHAPTER 15 • 2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER

Question 34—From Quanta to Quarks

(a) (i) Proton and neutrons
Protons are positively charged and neutrons have no net charge. (2 marks)
(ii) The two positive protons experience an electrostatic/electromagnetic force of
repulsion. This repulsive force is overcome by the much stronger nuclear force
that exists between all of the nucleons when they are very close together and hence
the nucleus holds together. The nuclear force is a residual of the strong nuclear force
between the up and down quarks that make up the protons and neutrons. (3 marks)

(b) (i) The spectral lines of the hydrogen spectrum vary in intensity which suggests that
some transitions occur more than others.
The hyperfine structure of the lines in the spectrum are only visible under close
examination.
The spectral lines are split by strong magnetic fields (the Zeeman effect). (3 marks)

(ii)
E  hf
E 4.089  10–19
f    6.17  1014
h 6.626  10–34
c  f 
c 3  108
    4.86  10–7
f 6.17  1014
1 1 1

R 2 – 2
nf ni
1 1 1 1
– 1027  – 2 
1 1
–7
4.86  10
1.097
R 2
nf ni 4 ni
7
ni
2 057 613 1.097
 2 742 500 107 10
– 1.097
n i2
(2 742 500 – 2 057 613)
1.097 107
ni  4
(2 742 500 – 2 057 613)

Hence the initial energy level was n = 4. (3 marks)

(c) Pauli postulated that only two electrons may occupy any one energy level, one with
spin up and the other with spin down. This is called the Pauli exclusion principle. It
improved the Bohr model because the concept of electron spin helped to explain the
hyperfine spectral lines (e.g. via spin orbit coupling).
Heisenberg postulated that the position of electrons in atoms could not be determined
with certainty. This changed the Bohr model idea that electrons could be fixed in stable
orbits of accurately determinable energy levels. (4 marks)

524 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 524 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

2016 HSC EX AMINATION PAPER • ANSWERS

(d) Particle accelerators such as the Large Hadron Collider (LHC), which is fed particles
such as protons that have already been accelerated to energies of 450 GeV by a chain
of accelerators including linear accelerators and synchrotrons, have been used to gather
data about the nature of matter. High energy collisions between these high energy
particles and matter, such as lead, in the targets have yielded evidence for a wide range
of subatomic particles.
The energies, momentum and charges of these subatomic particles and their decay
products have been identified and measured using complex detectors that include
tracking devices with strong magnetic fields which measure paths of charged particles;
calorimeters which absorb particles and photons and measure their energies; and other
special detectors that measure photon energies from Cherenkov radiation. An example
of a complex detector is the huge 7000-tonne ATLAS detector in the LHC.
Specific measurements are possible for some longer lived particles such as the Tau lepton.
The existence of other particles is inferred through the measurement of their decay products.
Although individual quarks have not been isolated, a wide variety of hadrons (collection
of quarks) have been detected and from the properties and decay products of these the
six quarks (up, down, strange, charm, top and bottom) have been inferred.
In addition, six leptons (electron, electron neutrino, muon and muon neutrino, tau and
tau neutrino) have been identified.
The Standard Model of Matter used evidence of the existence of some particles to predict the
existence of many others in a systematic classification. Particle accelerators and detectors have
enabled the discovery of many of these particles thus supporting the SMoM. (4 marks)

(e) Fermi led a huge team of scientists in the Manhattan project to build the first nuclear
reactor. This has had both positive and negative impacts on society.
The controlled nuclear fission reactions led to the production of nuclear fuel used in the
development of atomic bombs. The bombs were used to end the Second World War.
Subsequently the spread of the technology led to significant and still ongoing global
tension related to the proliferation and use of nuclear weapons. Death, illness and
nuclear pollution have resulted from the use and testing of nuclear weapons.
In addition, however, Fermi’s work led to an understanding of the use of radioactive
elements for the generation of heat and subsequent conversion to electricity. Nuclear
power plants in hundreds of locations around the world now provide fossil fuel free
energy that is used by billions of people. Nuclear pollution can be a consequence of
accidents and spent fuel disposal.
There have been many subsequent applications, such as the use of nuclear reactors to:
• produce isotopes used in medical diagnosis and treatment
• convert pure silicon billets into doped semiconductor materials used in computer-
based technology
• sterilise food for long-term storage
• produce neutron beams used for a wide range of scientific experiments and
industrial application.
Fermi’s work led to an array of applications of nuclear technology that have had
significant impact on society. Predominantly those impacts have been positive although
some significant detriments have resulted. (6 marks)

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 525

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 525 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

A
CCH KA N
P TO EWRL E1D5G E• M2E0N1T6S H S C E X A M I N A T I O N P A P E R

Acknowledgements

Scan, Q29(c), 2003 HSC, Creighton University

Spectra, Q30(c), 2003 HSC, Astronomy: From the Earth to the Universe, 4th ed. (1991),
Joy M Pasachaff, Saunders College Publishing
Diagrams Q25, 2008 HSC, University of Physics (2004), Young and Freedman, Pearson Education
Graph Q31(b), 2008 HSC, Thinkquest
Image Q29(c), 2009 HSC, Division of Nuclear Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical
Sciences, Little Rock, Arkansas
Table Q34(f), 2013 HSC, CSIRO Astronomy and Space Science

526 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 526 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

P H Y S I C S DATA S H E E T

2016 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTFICATE EX AMINATIONw

2015 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION

Physics

DATA SHEET

0
k 2

1103 – 41 –
SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 527

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 527 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

PHYSICS FORMULAE SHEET

FORMULAE SHEET

v2
l v l0 1
c2

t0
tv
v2
1
c2

m0
mv
v2
1
c2

528 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS – 42 –

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 528 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

PHYSICS FORMULAE SHEET

FORMULAE SHEET

d
M m 5 log
10

IA mB mA 5
100
IB

1 1 1
R 2 2
n n i
f

2
Ir Z Z

2 1
2
I0 Z Z

2 1

– 43 – SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 529

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 529 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

P H Y S I C S P E R I O D I C TA B L E

– 44 –
530 SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 530 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1

Pascal Press
PO Box 250
Glebe NSW 2037
(02) 8585 4044
www.pascalpress.com.au

Publisher: Vivienne Joannou

Commissioning and project editor: Mark Dixon
Chapters 1–6 edited by Ken Tate
Chapter 7 edited by Lindsay Taaffe
Chapters 8–10 edited by Christine Eslick
Chapter 11 edited by Leanne Poll
Chapters 1–11 answers checked by Neville Warren
Chapters 12–14 edited by Karen Pearce
Chapter 12 answers checked by Colin McAuliffe
Chapter 15 edited by Rosemary Peers
Chapters 13–15 answers checked by Adam Sloan
Cover design by Michael Sherman
Typesetting and page layout by Grizzly Graphics (Leanne Richters), DiZign Pty Ltd and
Monoset Typesetters
Cover photo by Max Mason-Hubers, Fairfax Syndication
Printed by Green Giant Press

®SUCCESS ONE is a registered trademark of Pascal Press.

*HSC is a trademark of the Board of Studies, Teaching and Educational Standards NSW
used under licence.

Reproduction and communication for educational purposes

The Australian Copyright Act 1968 (the Act) allows a maximum of one chapter or 10%
of the pages of this work, whichever is the greater, to be reproduced and/or communicated
by any educational institution for its educational purposes provided that the educational
institution (or the body that administers it) has given a remuneration notice to Copyright
Agency Limited (CAL) under the Act.

For details of the CAL licence for educational institutions contact:

Copyright Agency Limited

Level 15, 233 Castlereagh Street
Sydney NSW 2000
Telephone: (02) 9394 7600
Facsimile: (02) 9394 7601
E-mail: enquiry@copyright.com.au

Reproduction and communication for other purposes

Except as permitted under the Act (for example a fair dealing for the purposes of study,
research, criticism or review) no part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, communicated or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
permission. All inquiries should be made to the publisher at the address above.

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 531

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 531 22/12/2016 2:10 PM

Excel
SUCCESS ONE HSC PHYSICS * Get the Results You Want!
®

SUCCESS ONE HSC

® *

Get the Results You Want!

l To maximize your marks, you need to practise as many actual past HSC papers as

PHYSICS
you can. This way you gain valuable experience in answering HSC-level questions.

®
l This book features 2001–2003 and 2008–2016 past HSC questions.

*
This book includes:

* Medical Physics; Astrophysics; From Quanta to Quarks

NEW
ALSO AVAILABLE IN THE Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC SERIES:

Mathematics Mathematics Modern History PDHPE Physics

General 2
iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

9781741256451 HSC Physics CVR-2017.indd All Pages 15/12/2016 4:15 PM

Glenda Chidrawi - Sarah Bradstock - Margaret Robson - Elizabeth Thrum - Stephanie Hollis - Sarah Jones - Biology in Focus Year 11-Cengage (2017) PDF
88% (8)
Glenda Chidrawi - Sarah Bradstock - Margaret Robson - Elizabeth Thrum - Stephanie Hollis - Sarah Jones - Biology in Focus Year 11-Cengage (2017) PDF
440 pages
Physics in Focus
100% (7)
Physics in Focus
461 pages
Bif 12
100% (2)
Bif 12
636 pages
Maths Quest 12 Mathematical Methods Solutions Manual VCE Units 3 and 4 Worked Solutions PDF
67% (3)
Maths Quest 12 Mathematical Methods Solutions Manual VCE Units 3 and 4 Worked Solutions PDF
263 pages
Paper 2 Answers
100% (1)
Paper 2 Answers
4 pages
Jacaranda Specialist Mathematics VCE U34 (2016 Ed)
100% (10)
Jacaranda Specialist Mathematics VCE U34 (2016 Ed)
749 pages
Celta 5
No ratings yet
Celta 5
33 pages
The Student's Guide To HSC Physics
98% (46)
The Student's Guide To HSC Physics
165 pages
Teachers Book Key To Bachillerato 1
32% (44)
Teachers Book Key To Bachillerato 1
15 pages
James Ruse 2018 Physics Prelim Yearly & Solutions
No ratings yet
James Ruse 2018 Physics Prelim Yearly & Solutions
50 pages
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P2
No ratings yet
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P2
24 pages
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P3
No ratings yet
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P3
25 pages
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P2
No ratings yet
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P2
24 pages
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P3
No ratings yet
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P3
25 pages
PYP Planner For 'Who We Are'
100% (4)
PYP Planner For 'Who We Are'
4 pages
(Neville Warren) - Excel HSC Physics (G.B)
40% (10)
(Neville Warren) - Excel HSC Physics (G.B)
293 pages
Year 11 Jacaranda Physics
50% (2)
Year 11 Jacaranda Physics
336 pages
Talent 100 HSC Study Guide
100% (5)
Talent 100 HSC Study Guide
39 pages
Jacaranda Physics
100% (4)
Jacaranda Physics
335 pages
Websites With More FREE Resources: Ace HSC
No ratings yet
Websites With More FREE Resources: Ace HSC
2 pages
Physics Cover
100% (4)
Physics Cover
1,081 pages
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P1 Markscheme
No ratings yet
Physics H2 9749 Specimen P1 Markscheme
21 pages
HSC Physics in Month
100% (2)
HSC Physics in Month
162 pages
HSC Physics Space Workbook
100% (1)
HSC Physics Space Workbook
32 pages
Phy HSC
No ratings yet
Phy HSC
47 pages
Talent 100 HSC Study Guide
100% (4)
Talent 100 HSC Study Guide
64 pages
HSC PHYSICS NOTES - All Topics + Quanta To Quarks
No ratings yet
HSC PHYSICS NOTES - All Topics + Quanta To Quarks
69 pages
0 - NSW Surfing Physics Modules 5and6 Sample PDF
0% (1)
0 - NSW Surfing Physics Modules 5and6 Sample PDF
19 pages
James Ruse 2021 Physics Trials & Solutions
No ratings yet
James Ruse 2021 Physics Trials & Solutions
78 pages
Jacaranda 2 HSC 3rd Edition
91% (11)
Jacaranda 2 HSC 3rd Edition
560 pages
In 2 Physics
100% (3)
In 2 Physics
495 pages
Excel Success One HSC Biology SAMPLE 2014
0% (1)
Excel Success One HSC Biology SAMPLE 2014
43 pages
4U HSC Questions by Topics 1990 To 2006 and Summary
100% (5)
4U HSC Questions by Topics 1990 To 2006 and Summary
253 pages
HSC Physics Notes KISS
100% (2)
HSC Physics Notes KISS
45 pages
HSC Physics PDF
100% (1)
HSC Physics PDF
202 pages
Biology HSC Complete Notes
100% (4)
Biology HSC Complete Notes
54 pages
Dot Point Physics Preliminary
50% (10)
Dot Point Physics Preliminary
70 pages
Module 5 HSC Physics Notes
No ratings yet
Module 5 HSC Physics Notes
8 pages
Dotpoint Hscchem
67% (3)
Dotpoint Hscchem
84 pages
2021 Physics Year 11
No ratings yet
2021 Physics Year 11
27 pages
Physics 2019 Year 11 Preliminary Task
100% (1)
Physics 2019 Year 11 Preliminary Task
11 pages
Physics Year 11 Prelim Notes
100% (1)
Physics Year 11 Prelim Notes
53 pages
3U HSC Questions by Topic
No ratings yet
3U HSC Questions by Topic
69 pages
2002 HSC Notes From The Marking Centre Physics
No ratings yet
2002 HSC Notes From The Marking Centre Physics
41 pages
Physics 2005 HSC Exam Pack: Download Papers
No ratings yet
Physics 2005 HSC Exam Pack: Download Papers
1 page
Physics HSC MG 2013
No ratings yet
Physics HSC MG 2013
43 pages
How To Answer Physics Questions
No ratings yet
How To Answer Physics Questions
42 pages
Success One HSC Mathematics Online Resource 2019
No ratings yet
Success One HSC Mathematics Online Resource 2019
28 pages
Phy-Model Ans-Msce Ps Full
100% (2)
Phy-Model Ans-Msce Ps Full
179 pages
Books Advert PDF
No ratings yet
Books Advert PDF
2 pages
2006 HSC Notes From The Marking Centre - Physics
No ratings yet
2006 HSC Notes From The Marking Centre - Physics
43 pages
8PH0 - 02 Edexcel AS Physics Nov 2020 MS
No ratings yet
8PH0 - 02 Edexcel AS Physics Nov 2020 MS
18 pages
Testbank and Solutions For College Physics AP Edition 1st Edition
No ratings yet
Testbank and Solutions For College Physics AP Edition 1st Edition
17 pages
Selling Booksasdasd
No ratings yet
Selling Booksasdasd
2 pages
Physics Stage 2 Exam 2013
No ratings yet
Physics Stage 2 Exam 2013
40 pages
Mark Scheme (RESULTS) October 2020: Pearson Edexcel GCE in Physics (8PH0) Paper 2: Core Physics II
No ratings yet
Mark Scheme (RESULTS) October 2020: Pearson Edexcel GCE in Physics (8PH0) Paper 2: Core Physics II
19 pages
The Student S Guide To HSC Physics Fort ST
No ratings yet
The Student S Guide To HSC Physics Fort ST
165 pages
PHT Test FINAL K
No ratings yet
PHT Test FINAL K
7 pages
Mark Scheme (Results) January 2016
No ratings yet
Mark Scheme (Results) January 2016
16 pages
Pearson IGCSE Physics Module 1 Final - 4PH1-20IO1 - v2 - JC 2
100% (1)
Pearson IGCSE Physics Module 1 Final - 4PH1-20IO1 - v2 - JC 2
31 pages
JEE Advanced Sample Paper Part I 1 PDF
No ratings yet
JEE Advanced Sample Paper Part I 1 PDF
14 pages
4ph1 2p Rms 20230302
No ratings yet
4ph1 2p Rms 20230302
11 pages
Testbank For Physics 5th Edition
No ratings yet
Testbank For Physics 5th Edition
18 pages
Physics 1 Examples of Quiz Questions and Past Exam Papers With Solutions 2016
67% (3)
Physics 1 Examples of Quiz Questions and Past Exam Papers With Solutions 2016
233 pages
Physics Stage 3 Exam 2013
No ratings yet
Physics Stage 3 Exam 2013
40 pages
JPT 5 Q
No ratings yet
JPT 5 Q
40 pages
964 2020 STPM QP 2
No ratings yet
964 2020 STPM QP 2
6 pages
9245 w01 QP 3
No ratings yet
9245 w01 QP 3
16 pages
964 2021 STPM QP 3
No ratings yet
964 2021 STPM QP 3
9 pages
964 2020 STPM QP U2
No ratings yet
964 2020 STPM QP U2
7 pages
CAIE 9709 03 ComplexNumber M/J2008/Q5
No ratings yet
CAIE 9709 03 ComplexNumber M/J2008/Q5
1 page
UCSI University 33RD CONVOCATION CEREMONY YEAR 2021 - Convocation Details - 31.12.2020
No ratings yet
UCSI University 33RD CONVOCATION CEREMONY YEAR 2021 - Convocation Details - 31.12.2020
21 pages
964 2021 STPM QP 2
No ratings yet
964 2021 STPM QP 2
8 pages
964 2022 STPM QP 2
No ratings yet
964 2022 STPM QP 2
7 pages
964 2021 STPM QP U2
No ratings yet
964 2021 STPM QP U2
6 pages
6093 - w18 - w21 - QP - 03 - Question 2
No ratings yet
6093 - w18 - w21 - QP - 03 - Question 2
18 pages
Challenge 2021 - Smart Car System
No ratings yet
Challenge 2021 - Smart Car System
8 pages
CH - 4 - Part II
No ratings yet
CH - 4 - Part II
16 pages
2021 Kedah Fizik MPAT Paper 1
No ratings yet
2021 Kedah Fizik MPAT Paper 1
5 pages
964 QP 2 STPM Biology 2012 Section B
No ratings yet
964 QP 2 STPM Biology 2012 Section B
2 pages
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
No ratings yet
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
10 pages
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
No ratings yet
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
6 pages
Tutorial - Lesson 7 Solution PDF
No ratings yet
Tutorial - Lesson 7 Solution PDF
5 pages
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
No ratings yet
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
10 pages
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
No ratings yet
Solution Manual: Static Magnetic Fields
5 pages
Homeostasis: S14.1 Structure of The Liver
No ratings yet
Homeostasis: S14.1 Structure of The Liver
5 pages
Co Co: U-Trac U-Trac
No ratings yet
Co Co: U-Trac U-Trac
18 pages
SPM KSSM Physics Form 4 Chapter 6
75% (4)
SPM KSSM Physics Form 4 Chapter 6
53 pages
Co Co: U-Trac U-Trac
No ratings yet
Co Co: U-Trac U-Trac
25 pages
SPM KSSM Physics Form 4 Chapter 1
71% (7)
SPM KSSM Physics Form 4 Chapter 1
22 pages
B. Tech. VII Semester-Main Exam Form & Exam Fee Notice, 2024 - SEM - 7 - 2024-10-27
No ratings yet
B. Tech. VII Semester-Main Exam Form & Exam Fee Notice, 2024 - SEM - 7 - 2024-10-27
1 page
Entrance Requirements - Alberta School of Business - University of Alberta
No ratings yet
Entrance Requirements - Alberta School of Business - University of Alberta
3 pages
Contoh Check List Evaluasi
No ratings yet
Contoh Check List Evaluasi
11 pages
Statistical Investigation Process Sip Poster
No ratings yet
Statistical Investigation Process Sip Poster
1 page
Final Paper English
No ratings yet
Final Paper English
68 pages
DLP-Propaganda Techniques
No ratings yet
DLP-Propaganda Techniques
2 pages
Assessment of The Ccje Licensure Performance: Basis in Enhancing Instruction and Review Programs
No ratings yet
Assessment of The Ccje Licensure Performance: Basis in Enhancing Instruction and Review Programs
20 pages
TOM 302 Syllabus
No ratings yet
TOM 302 Syllabus
4 pages
Guidelines For TM Demonstration
No ratings yet
Guidelines For TM Demonstration
1 page
Emp 211 E34 Subgroup
No ratings yet
Emp 211 E34 Subgroup
6 pages
Call Up Letter Sce Prayagraj For Ima 159 Course
No ratings yet
Call Up Letter Sce Prayagraj For Ima 159 Course
20 pages
English Compulsory XI Annual Exams 2022 (Paper II) PDF
No ratings yet
English Compulsory XI Annual Exams 2022 (Paper II) PDF
16 pages
Meghalaya Board of School Education Headquarters:: Tura: Name: Puspa Ghosh Roll No. 78917
No ratings yet
Meghalaya Board of School Education Headquarters:: Tura: Name: Puspa Ghosh Roll No. 78917
1 page
Eligibility Clauses To Claim For Government Seats
No ratings yet
Eligibility Clauses To Claim For Government Seats
5 pages
Curriculum. Daniel Jurado 2013
No ratings yet
Curriculum. Daniel Jurado 2013
2 pages
Introduction To Guide To Physical Therapist Practice 3
100% (1)
Introduction To Guide To Physical Therapist Practice 3
110 pages
The Self As Cognitive Construct
100% (3)
The Self As Cognitive Construct
10 pages
2023 Application Form Front Page Merged
No ratings yet
2023 Application Form Front Page Merged
2 pages
LAW2446 Commercial Law Rubrics For Fact-Based Problems in 2016 Final Exam
No ratings yet
LAW2446 Commercial Law Rubrics For Fact-Based Problems in 2016 Final Exam
1 page
Biblical Doctrine A Systematic Summary of Bible Truth Ebook and TestBank Bundle Test Bank Available Instantly
No ratings yet
Biblical Doctrine A Systematic Summary of Bible Truth Ebook and TestBank Bundle Test Bank Available Instantly
402 pages
Clinical Immunology and Serology A Laboratory Perspective 5th Edition Miller Unlocked Test Bank
No ratings yet
Clinical Immunology and Serology A Laboratory Perspective 5th Edition Miller Unlocked Test Bank
318 pages
Membrane Separation Principles and Applications From Material Selection To Mechanisms and Industrial Uses Ebook and TestBank Bundle Full Download
100% (1)
Membrane Separation Principles and Applications From Material Selection To Mechanisms and Industrial Uses Ebook and TestBank Bundle Full Download
405 pages
RRL MATRIX - The Perception of Online Grammar Checkers and Plagiarism Detectors
No ratings yet
RRL MATRIX - The Perception of Online Grammar Checkers and Plagiarism Detectors
5 pages
Diagnosis Treatment Planning Form
100% (1)
Diagnosis Treatment Planning Form
13 pages
Facilitation Workshop
100% (8)
Facilitation Workshop
11 pages
MODFIN2 Calendar PDF
No ratings yet
MODFIN2 Calendar PDF
1 page
Semi DLP in Eng 9 q4 Wk1
No ratings yet
Semi DLP in Eng 9 q4 Wk1
4 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.

Coll. - Success One HSC Physics 2017 (2017, Pascal Press)

Uploaded by

Coll. - Success One HSC Physics 2017 (2017, Pascal Press)

Uploaded by

Excel

SUCCESS ONE HSC PHYSICS * Get the Results You Want!

SUCCESS ONE HSC

SUCCESS ONE HSC

Get the Results You Want!

* Medical Physics; Astrophysics; From Quanta to Quarks

Mathematics Mathematics Modern History PDHPE Physics

9781741256451 HSC Physics CVR-2017.indd All Pages 15/12/2016 4:15 PM

PHYSICS SKILLS (9.1)

MOTORS AND GENERATORS (9.3)

FROM IDEAS TO IMPLEMENTATION (9.4)

*These questions cover material from more than one topic.

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017_IC.indd 2 22/12/2016 2:17 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 1 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 2 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS iii

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 3 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

The Mark Maximizer Guide was prepared by Diane Alford.

HSC EXAMINATION PAPERS

iv SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 4 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Chapter 4 Medical Physics................. 67 Chapter 15 2016 HSC Examination

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS v

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 5 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Mark Maximizer Guide

The structure of the HSC Examination paper

Section Part Compulsory/ Marks Question type Answers Recommended

I B All questions 55 Short-answer questions Answer the About 1 hour

II Attempt only 25 The question is divided Answer the About

vi SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 6 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Question value Suggested time

Analysing the questions

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS vii

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 7 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

• Learn the lingo.

• Remember that questions are planned to vary in their level of difficulty.

Question type Key words that indicate level of difficulty

viii SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 8 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

• Answer all parts.

Glossary of key words

Key word Definition

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS ix

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 9 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Key word Definition

Answering the question

x SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 10 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS xi

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 11 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

• correct interpretation of questions, eg. listing instead of describing, or giving a description

xii SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 12 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Past HSC Questions

2 The graph5 shows

© Pascal Press ISBN 978 1 74125 645 1 What is the

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 1

Which velocity vs time graph best represents the ball’s motion?

(A) Replacing the magnet with a stronger one

1 The diagram shows the trajectory of a golf ball.

2 A spaceship is travelling at a very high speed. What effects would be noted by a

Planets Mass Orbital Radius of Length of Orbital

Ba 1.50 × 1024 8.00 × 1011 4.0 × 106 4.7 × 104 ____

What is the orbital period of the planet Ba?

(A) 3.10 × 107 s

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 4 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

Which diagram shows the direction of F and v at the position indicated?

(A) Satellite (B) Satellite F

12 Excel SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS

Black process 45.0° 150.0 LPI

(C) Satellite (D) Satellite

–3– SUCCESS ONE HSC • PHYSICS 5

9781741256451 Success One_Physics_2017.indd 5 22/12/2016 2:09 PM

The mass of Earth is ME .

(A) –18 revolution

• Learn the lingo.

• Remember that questions are planned to vary in their level of difficulty.